KEYENCE Safty Controller GC Series
Uploaded by
koles.cosiekKEYENCE Safty Controller GC Series
Uploaded by
koles.cosiekA47GB
1 Before Use
Safety Controller
2 Basic Usage Procedure
GC Series 3 Specifications
Calculating Response
4 Time
Operating Main
5 Controller
Installation and
6 Wiring
Before Using the
7 GC Configurator
Basic Operations of
8 GC Configurator
Creating New Project
9 with GC Configurator
GC Configurator [Settings] -
10
User’s Manual [Configuration]
GC Configurator [Settings] -
11 Programming
GC Configurator [Settings] -
12 Transfer
GC Configurator
13 [Monitoring]
GC Configurator
14 [History]
Ethernet Communication
15 Function
EtherNet/IP™ Communication
16 Function
PROFINET Communication
17 Function
UDP Communication
18 Function
Modbus/TCP Communication
19 Function
MC Protocol Communication
20 Function
21 Inspection and
Maintenance
Appendix
Introduction
This user's manual describes handling, operation, and
precautionary information for the GC Series Safety Symbols
Controller ("GC"). Read this manual carefully and
thoroughly to understand the proper usage of the GC The following symbols alert you to important messages.
Series and the full extent of its capabilities. Indicates a hazardous situation which,
Always keep this manual in a safe place for future DANGER if not avoided, will result in death or
reference. serious injury.
Also, ensure that the end user of this product receives this
Indicates a hazardous situation which,
user's manual.
WARNING if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Related manuals Indicates a hazardous situation which,
CAUTION if not avoided, could result in minor or
Read the following related manuals when using the GC
moderate injury.
Series.
The PDF versions of all the following manuals can be Indicates a situation which, if not
opened via the Help section of the GC Configurator. NOTICE avoided, could result in product
Also, the latest manuals can be downloaded from the damage as well as property damage.
KEYENCE web site.
Name Details Important Indicates cautions and limitations that
must be followed during operation.
GC Series User’s Describes the system configuration,
Manual (This specifications, steps for startup, etc. for the
Manual) GC Series and the GC Configurator operation
methods. Point Indicates additional information on
proper operation.
GC Series Describes the function blocks which can be
Function used when programming.
Block
Reference Reference Indicates tips for better understanding or
Manual useful information.
Indicates a reference page or section in this
manual.
Safety Precautions
General Precautions Person Responsible for Safety
Management and User
• This product is not intended for use as an
explosion-proof device. Do not use this • The person responsible for safety
product in a hazardous location and/or management must train the assigned
potentially explosive atmosphere. personnel for the correct use, installation,
• If this product is not used in the manner maintenance, and operation of the safety
specified by KEYENCE, or if this product is control system and the GC Series.
DANGER modified, we cannot guarantee the function • The person responsible for safety
and performance of the product. management must have a sufficient
understanding of the target utility, safety
• Do not use the GC Series to control (stop
device, related laws and regulations, and
forward motion, etc.) trains, cars and other
safety standards. He/She must also have
transportation vehicles, aircraft, equipment the necessary qualifications, authority, and
for use in space, medical devices, or responsibility to ensure safety in each
nuclear power generation systems. stage: design, installation, operation,
maintenance and disposal of the machine.
• A failure in the output circuit or internal
• Depending on the type of machine on which
circuit may prevent the normal control the GC Series is installed, there may be
operation. Be sure to install additional special safety regulations related to the
safeguards on any controls or systems that use, installation, maintenance, and
may result in serious accidents or fires. operation. The person responsible for
• This product may become very hot while an safety management must introduce the GC
WARNING electric current is applied and may still be Series in strict compliance with such safety
hot immediately after stopping the unit. Do regulations.
not touch it. • The person responsible for safety
management must check that the risks have
• When you use network communications
been reduced sufficiently following the
with the GC Series, it must be performed in steps below, in accordance with the ISO
an environment ensuring security against 13849-1/-2 requirements. The person
threats. responsible for safety management is
responsible for checking/approving that
• When you dispose of the GC Series, always risks have been reduced sufficiently.
DANGER
follow the applicable requirements of the • Perform a risk assessment.
Important laws, rules, regulations, and standards for • Define the safety functions executed by
disposing of industrial waste in the country the control system and the safety levels to
or region where the GC Series is used. achieve when implementing protective
measures by the control system as a result
• When using network communication with of risk assessment.
the GC Series, use it in an environment that • Check that a program created by the PC
is secure against network threats. software satisfies all of the safety
• When this product is used in combination functions and safety levels.
NOTICE
with other instruments, functions and • Check that the implementation of
performance may be degraded, depending protective measures does not generate
on the operating conditions and new hazards.
surrounding environment. • Check that all of the risks have been
reduced appropriately. If there are some
risks which have not been reduced
sufficiently, repeat the above steps until all
of the risks are reduced appropriately.
• The person responsible for safety
management must approve and confirm that
a program created by the GC Configurator
matches the program displayed on the
approval screen when transferring the
program to the GC Series.
• The person responsible for safety
management must perform a safety
confirmation test (user test) before operating
the system and check that all of the GC Series
configuration data and the operations are
correct.
A47GB 1
Safety Precautions
• The user of the machine must receive • Connect a dry contact or PNP output device
specialized training related to the GC to the devices that can connect to GC
Series, and must then understand and Series. A NPN output device cannot be
adhere to the safety restrictions, laws, and connected.
regulations in the country or area where the
• If a safety level of SIL2, PLd or higher needs
GC Series is used.
to be achieved when connecting a PNP
• The machine operators must verify that the GC
DANGER
output device, use a device that provides
Series is operating correctly in terms of
functionality and performance before the start the inter-system short-circuit detection
of machine and the operation of the GC Series. function of two OSSD outputs on the PNP
If any abnormality is detected in startup, while output device side, such as Type 3 safety
starting the operation, or while running the laser scanner and Type 4 safety light
machine, the user must stop the machine curtain.
immediately and report the situation to the • The safety output has a built-in diode to
person responsible for safety management.
protect from surges caused by inductive
loads. When using a surge absorber
separately, connect it in parallel to the load.
Note that a capacitive surge absorber with a
built-in capacitor may cause a malfunction.
Connection Device and Wiring It must be used within the range of
DANGER
specification.
• The safety output uses a PNP output.
• Connect the appropriate input and output
Therefore, be sure to connect a load
devices in order to achieve the required safety
between the safety output and 0 V. If the
functions as determined by the risk
load is incorrectly connected between the
assessment. When using an external device
that has not met the appropriate safety level, safety output and +24 V, the safety output
the system will not meet the required safety operation will be reversed, meaning the
level as determined by the risk assessment. output will switch to the ON-state when it
should be OFF, causing a very dangerous
• For the input/output device settings, select
an appropriate input device and set it with situation.
the GC Configurator according to the • To achieve a safety level of SIL3, PLe with a
required safety requirement specifications single safety output, apply protection to
and safety level. The achieved safety level avoid short circuit between the safety
varies with the settings of the device. output of the GC Series and the power line,
• For the output device setting, select an according to ISO 13849-2.
appropriate output device and set it with the GC • To prevent malfunctions caused by ground
Configurator according to the required safety faults, perform wiring in a manner such that
requirement specifications and safety level. The the requirements specified in IEC 60204-1
achieved safety level varies with the settings of are met.
the device.
• The GC Series assumes that all of the safety
DANGER inputs are OFF when an internal error occurs.
Therefore, only the devices such as a safety
light curtain, which forces the output OFF when Safety Control
an operator enters a hazardous area, and an
emergency stop switch, which turns OFF in an
emergency situation and forces the output OFF • When operating the safety output with a
in a safe state, can be connected as input non-safety rated signal from a general-
devices. purpose PLC, etc. without using the muting
• The GC Series forces the safety output OFF function, only the following case is
when an internal error occurs. Therefore, accepted.
only the devices which eliminate a
DANGER Safety Application Safety Control
hazardous situation when the input turns Safety
Output (Control
OFF can be connected to the safety output Input &
of hazards)
as control devices.
• Use certified products for the devices/parts
Standard
related to the safety functions which Standard Standard
Functional
conform to the safety standards, etc. Input Control Output
Application
applicable to the purpose of use, in
accordance with the safety restrictions,
laws, and regulations in the country or area
where the GC Series is used.
2 GC Series User’s Manual
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
• For the unit equipped with FE terminal, be sure to ground
CE Marking the FE terminal.
KEYENCE Corporation has confirmed that this product
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the
complies with the essential requirements of the applicable
end-product with this product incorporated complies with
EU Directive(s), based on the following specifications. Be
the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The
sure to consider the following specifications when using
manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for
this product in the Member States of European Union.
the compliance on the end-product itself according to
EMC Directives.
Machinery directive
The GC Series is a safety component defined in the EU North American Regulations
Machinery Directive Annex V.
The GC Series complies with the following EN Standards and The GC Series complies with the following North American
has been certified by TÜV SÜD Product Service GmbH. regulations.
• EN 61508 SIL 3 • FCC Part15 Subpart B, Class A Digital Device
• EN 62061 SIL CL3 • ICES-003, Class A Digital Apparatus
• EN ISO 13849-1 Category 4, PLe
• EN 61131-2 Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• EN 61131-6
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
• EN 61010-1
including interference that may cause undesired
• EN 61010-2-201 operation.
Be sure to consider the following specifications when
using this product as a product certified by TÜV SÜD. FCC CAUTION
• Use this product under pollution degree 2. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
• Install this product at the altitude of 2000 m or less. party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
• Indoor use only. authority to operate the equipment.
• When using this product, use the following power supply.
CSA or UL certified power supply that provides Class 2
UL and CSA Certificate
output as defined in the CEC (Canadian Electrical Code)
and NEC (National Electrical Code) The GC Series complies with the following UL and CSA
• Install this product in an enclosure rated IP54 or better standards and has been certified by UL and CSA.
(e.g. control panel) (remote I/O module excluded). • UL61010-1
• Ensure that the circuits to be connected to the input/output • UL61010-2-201
terminals (except for the relay output terminals of GC-1000R • CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1
and GC-S1R) of this product are SELV circuits. • CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-2-201
• Perform wiring of the GC-1000R and GC-S1R relay Additionally, the GC Series complies with the following
output terminals using an electric wire of AWG12 to 26 standards and has been certified by UL.
having temperature rating of 80 °C or higher. • IEC61508 SIL3
• IEC62061 SIL3 CL3
EMC directive
• ISO13849-1 Category 4, PLe
• EN61131-2 Class A Zone B • IEC61131-6
• Install the main controller or expansion unit of the GC • UL1998
Series in an enclosure rated IP54 or better (e.g. control UL and C-UL certification:
panel). • UL File No. E207185
• Use the specified cable for the cable between the main • Category NRAQ, NRAQ7, FSPC, FSPC7
controller and remote I/O module and also bus extension Be sure to consider the following specifications when
unit cable among the signal wires that come out of the using this product as a product certified by UL and CSA.
enclosure (e.g. control panel). • Use this product under pollution degree 2.
• Be sure to use a shielded cable for the Ethernet cable. • Install this product at the altitude of 2000 m or less.
GC Series User’s Manual 3
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
• Indoor use only.
• Use a UL or CSA certified power supply with Class 2
output defined in NEC (National Electrical Code) and
CEC (Canadian Electrical Code).
• Install this product in an enclosure rated IP54 or better
(e.g. control panel) (remote I/O module excluded).
• Ensure that the circuits to be connected to the input/
output terminals (except for the relay output terminals of
GC-1000R and GC-S1R) of this product are SELV
circuits.
• Perform wiring of GC-1000R and GC-S1R relay output
terminal block using an electric wire of AWG#12 to 26
having temperature rating of 80°C or higher. The
marking “ ” beside the terminal block intends to
indicate this instruction.
Radio Law in South Korea
Class A device
Note that this device is an industrial electromagnetic wave
generator (Class A), and it is not intended for the home
use.
4 GC Series User’s Manual
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions Precautions for Using Input Block
The person responsible for safety management must
(Input Device)
perform a risk assessment according to ISO 12100,
determine the points of risk reduction based on the control Mode selecting switch
system, understand each paragraph of "4. Design
To use the mode selecting switch, the following points need to
Considerations" of ISO 13849-1:2015 and requirements of be considered.
other related standards, and perform the following: Excerpt from IEC 60204-1(2016)/JIS B9960-1(2019) Paragraph
• Create the safety requirement specifications that specify 9.2.3.5 "Operating modes"
• Where machinery has been designed and constructed to
the required safety functions and safety levels to
allow its use in several control or operating modes requiring
achieve. different protective measures and having a different impact
• Create a program meeting the safety requirement on safety, it must be fitted with a mode selector which can be
specifications. locked in each position (for example key operated switch).
Each position of the selector must be clearly identifiable and
• Perform validation according to ISO 13849-2. must correspond to a single operating or control mode.
When creating a program that includes both a safety • Mode selection by itself must not initiate machine operation.
A separate actuation of the start control is required.
related part of the control system and a part other than
• For each specific operating mode, the relevant safety
that, separate the safety related part from the non-safety functions and/or protective measures must be implemented.
related part as much as possible as shown in the following • Indication of the selected operating mode must be provided
figure. To use a signal from the non-safety related part for (for example the position of a mode selector, the provision of
an indicating light, a visual display indication).
the safety related part, programming must be performed
so that turning the safety output ON by the non-safety
related part is allowed only when the signal from the safety Two hand control device
related part is TRUE (state where the output can be turned To use the two hand control, the following points need to be
ON). considered. As requested in ISO 13851/JIS B9712,
arrangement of two switches needs to be considered to
Safety Application Safety Control prevent machine startup by the following:
Safety
Output (Control
Input & Example
of hazards)
Operation with only one hand
Possible combinations of one hand and other parts of the
Standard human body or just other parts of the human body
Standard Standard
Functional
Input Control Output Combinations of one hand or another part of the human
Application
body and simple auxiliary tool (plate/bar/bridge, cord/
string, tape, etc.)
The safe state of the GC Series is defined as follows: Startup caused by accidental operation
• S-OUT is in the OFF state.
The measures against the listed startup examples are specified in
• The output of the function block is in the OFF state.
ISO 13851/JIS B9712. The requirements above, as well as the
• The input of the GC Series is in the OFF state. requirements of ISO 13851/JIS B9712, must be met when
Therefore, connect a device which turns the output OFF designing an actual machine.
To comply with ISO 13851, [Discrepancy time] in the two hand
when a hazard is detected (e.g. safety light curtain that
control device setting must be set within the range of 0.3 to 0.5
turns the OSSD OFF when a person is detected or an
seconds.
emergency stop switch that forces the output OFF when it
is activated) to the input of the GC Series.
GS closed state input (when connecting GS Series
Likewise, select a device which enters into a safe state
to GC-Link port)
when the input is OFF (motor or robot stops) as the device
that connects the safety output of the GC Series. GS locked state input (when connecting GS Series
to GC-Link port)
If the safety output state changes by the rising or falling Signal from industrial Ethernet communication
edge of a signal, an unexpected startup due to a The output from this function block uses a non-safety rated
disturbance such as noise or unexpected switching of the signal. This output cannot be used as a safety output of the
operation mode may occur. The person responsible for safety-related control system.
safety management must check that all of the operation When transmitting a reset signal via industrial Ethernet
communications, the use of an enabling code is recommended
modes provide the intended operations and reduce risks
to prevent unexpected startup.
using a function such as an enable input, as needed.
GC Series User’s Manual 5
Safety Precautions
• Do not allow access to the hazardous areas during the
Precautions for Using Function override sequence.
Block • Install an emergency stop switch in the immediate vicinity
of the start switch.
• The muting function must be started by signals from two or
OR four independent sensors that detect an object. The use of a
signal created only by software, such as a sequence control
When using the OR function block, do not create a program signal, as a muting signal is not accepted for safety reasons.
that causes a safety signal to turn ON with a non-safety rated
signal. Parallel muting
Cross-muting
NOT
In addition to the precautions for sequential muting, the
For the case where the NOT function block is used for a signal following points need to be considered for the parallel muting
from a safety device such as an emergency stop switch or and cross-muting.
• Implement any of the following measures to avoid a
safety light curtain, if the cable connecting the safety device
dangerous situation caused by short-circuit of signal cables
with the GC Series is disconnected, the output of the NOT
from M1 and M2 and also from M3 and M4 muting sensors
block turns ON. Create a program so that the unexpected for the parallel muting, or from M1 and M2 muting sensors for
startup of machine does not occur in a failure situation like this. the cross-muting when allowing simultaneous turn-ON of the
muting inputs.
• Use a combination of N.O. output and N.C. output types
Sequential muting
for the two muting sensors.
Muting for exit • Protect the two cables with different cable ducts or
protection tubes.
• The positions of the safety light curtain and the muting • Use different multicore cables.
sensor(s) must be in accordance with the requirements of • Use independent, grounded shielded cables.
IEC 61496-1/JIS B9704-1 and IEC 62046. • IEC 62046 recommends the use of sequential muting instead
• The peripheral devices used to enable the muting function of cross-muting when the time period between muting inputs
(muting sensors) and the installation must comply with the needs to be set to four seconds or more.
instructions in this manual and all of the requirements of the
laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or
region where the GC Series is used and also those specific Position detection muting
to the machine to be installed.
• The installation of a muting lamp may be required by the • The position of the muting sensors must be in accordance
laws, rules, and standards in the country or region where the with the requirements of the muting sensors in IEC 61496-1
GC Series is used and also those specific to the machine to and IEC 62046.
be installed, or the need of a muting lamp may be • When [Permit to start muting upon start-up] is enabled, this
determined by the result of the risk assessment. function does not comply with the requirements of the muting
• Each muting function block must be set appropriately after function in IEC 61496-1. The person responsible for safety
performing a risk assessment. management must ensure that risks has been adequately
• When the maximum muting period is set to one hour or not reduced through conducting a risk assessment.
specified, the setting must be performed so that muting ends • This function block allows a human body or a part of human
when the state of safety light curtain is changed from body to access hazardous areas under the following
blocked to unblocked state during muting, or the muting conditions: in a non-hazardous state in the machine cycle
enabling function must be used. An appropriate guard to (e.g. upstroke of a press), or when safety is maintained by
prevent human access to the hazardous areas through the other means.
gaps between the safety light curtain and the object during • The installation of a muting indicator may be required by the
muting must be used. Check if new risks, such as the risk of laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or
being caught in the gaps between the safety light curtain region where the GC Series is used.
and the object have the possibility of occurring. • An appropriate guard to prevent human access to the
• When using the override function, the target safety light hazardous areas must be provided if the maximum time of
curtain and the hazardous areas must be set so that they are this function is not specified.
visually recognizable, and a hold-to-run device must be used • When using the override function, the target safety light
for startup so that the hazardous areas cannot be entered curtain and the hazardous areas must be set so that they are
while the hold-to-run device is activated. visually recognizable, and a hold-to-run device must be used
• The following conditions must be met when installing the for startup so that the hazardous areas cannot be entered
override function start device in a location where the while the hold-to-run device is activated.
hazardous areas cannot be checked visually. • The following conditions must be met when installing the
• Install a spring return key operated switch (or momentary override function start device in a location where the
action pushbutton) in a location where the target safety hazardous areas cannot be checked visually.
light curtain can be checked visually. • Install a spring return key operated switch (or momentary
• Check that no one remains in the hazardous areas before action pushbutton) in a location where the target safety
starting the override. light curtain can be checked visually.
6 GC Series User’s Manual
Safety Precautions
• Check that no one remains in the hazardous areas before Dual reset
starting the override.
• Do not allow access to the hazardous areas during the In addition to the precautions for reset function block, the
override sequence. following points need to be considered for the dual reset
• Install an emergency stop switch in the immediate vicinity function block.
of the start switch. • The manually operated device for reset 2 (actuator or switch)
• The muting must be started by signals from two independent must be situated outside of the hazardous areas.
sensors that detect a non-hazardous state in the machine • An operator who exits from the hazardous area last must
cycle. The use of a signal created only by software, such as operate the manually operated device for reset 1 (actuator or
a sequence control signal, as a muting signal is not
switch).
accepted for safety reasons.
• It is recommended that the manually operated device for
• Take any of the following measures for signal cables from
reset 2 (actuator or switch) be installed in a position where
muting sensors.
the operator is able to check that no one is within the
• Use a combination of N.O. output and N.C. output types
hazardous area if it is possible that more than one operator
for the two sensors.
• Protect the two cables with different cable ducts or may enter the hazardous areas.
protection tubes. • This function block should not be used in applications where
• Use different multicore cables. a person may enter a hazardous area before the operator
• Use independent, grounded shielded cables. operates the reset 2 manually operated device after
• Use safety sensors like the KEYENCE GS Series. operating reset 1.
• To enable [Permit to start muting upon start-up], use safety
sensors having appropriate safety parameters (SIL and/or
Existence detection reset
PL), such as the KEYENCE GS Series, for the sensors that
start muting at start-up. In addition to the precautions for reset function block, the
following points need to be considered for the existence
Reset detection reset function block.
Reset (with AND) • For the "Reset Enable" input, apply a signal from a presence
sensing device such as safety laser scanner or safety light
Master ON
curtain.
• Use this function block in accordance with paragraph 5.2.2 of
ISO 13849-1:2015.
Mode changing control
• In the case where the input cable from the reset switch is
short-circuited with +24 V power or another signal cable, In addition to the precautions for mode selecting switch, the
unexpected reset clearing may occur. If there is such a risk, following points need to be considered for the mode switching
include one or more of the following measures for protection. control function block.
• Introduce an appropriate measure to protect the cable Unintentional mode change might occur due to the
from short-circuit with other signal cables.
disconnection of a cable from an input device, depending on
• Use the test output and activate the monitoring function to
the setting of this function block. Unintentional mode change
detect a short-circuit failure.
can be prevented by setting "Mode 4". This mode, which is not
• Select the pulse input in the reset input setting.
• When an edge input is selected for the reset input setting, commonly used (as shown below), can be used to prevent
this function does not comply with the requirements of unintentional mode changes that may occur through
paragraph 5.2.2 of ISO13849-1:2015. Unexpected reset disconnected cables.
clearing may occur due to noise or other such momentary
pulse signals. Therefore, it is recommended to use the pulse IN1 IN2 IN3 Description
input setting except in cases where not doing so is Mode
Output 1
Output with Mode 1 selected
permissible based on the results of a risk assessment. If the
use of an edge input is unavoidable, it is recommended to Mode
Output 2
Output with Mode 2 selected
use the reset enable input function to avoid the previously
Mode
mentioned risks. Output 3
Output with Mode 3 selected
• The reset input of this function block must be performed with When this mode is selected and a program
a manually operated device. causing all the safety outputs of the GC
Mode
Series to turn OFF is used, unintentional
• The manually operated device for reset clearing (actuator or Output 4
mode change at cable disconnection, etc.
switch) must be situated outside the hazardous areas and in can be prevented.
a position where the operator is able to check that no one is
within the hazardous area.
• The installation of an interlock state indicator may be
required by the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the
country or region where the GC Series is used.
GC Series User’s Manual 7
Safety Precautions
Manual mode Bypass
• The person responsible for safety management must confirm • To cause a suspension of a safety function using this function
the compliance with the requirements of "Suspension of block, programming must be performed in compliance with
safety functions and/or protective measures" specified in IEC the relevant standards such as "Suspension of safety
60204-1 and also the requirements of "Operational modes" functions and/or protective measures" specified in IEC
specified in ISO 10218-1 for robot application using an 60204-1 and "Operational modes" specified in ISO 10218-1.
actual program. The person responsible for safety management must ensure
• Unexpected startup of the machine may occur in mode that the requirements of applicable standards are met and
switching from the manual to auto mode when the restart risks has been reduced sufficiently through conducting a risk
input is set to [Not used]. If it is impermissible in the risk
assessment.
assessment of the machine, include another measure to
• This function block does not provide the setting items to
prevent unexpected startup.
comply with the requirements of applicable standards. It is
• Setting a suspension of the safety function for an emergency
recommended to use the manual mode control function block.
stop device is prohibited. The person responsible for safety
• Connect a signal from a device having appropriate safety
management must confirm that all of the emergency stop
parameters based on SIL, PLr, etc. required in the risk
devices can operate, even if in the manual mode. Create a
program so that a hazard is not started by the operation other assessment to the "Bypass" signal of this function block.
than that of a hold-to-run device in the manual mode. Startup of Note that when performing bypassing with a signal other
the machine in the manual mode is permitted through the than the appropriate safety signal, the safety level of entire
operation of a hold-to-run device or similar device. A three- machine is decreased to the safety level held by this signal.
position enabling switch, momentary switch, two hand control • Be sure that the maximum bypass period is the minimum
or an equivalent can be used as a hold-to-run device. amount of time required for the application. When the
• It is strongly recommended to avoid using more than one duration time needs to be set to one hour or more, use the
manual mode control (MMC) function block for one machine. If bypass enabling function or a signal from a safety device.
more than one manual mode control function block needs to • To allow bypassing at startup, input a signal from a safety
be used for an unavoidable reason, create a program so that device having the appropriate safety level for the "Bypass"
an unexpected startup is not caused by another manual mode signal.
control (MMC) function block while in the manual mode. • This function block is not for muting function. Use muting
• To prevent unintended suspension of safety device, it is function block for the muting function.
recommended to use a mode selecting switch with a key for
selecting the manual mode.
• Install an emergency stop switch where the operator can Control guard
easily reach it in the case where the operator may come
• To use this function, the following requirements related to
close to a hazard in the manual mode.
• The installation of a manual mode state indicator may be ISO12100 for an interlocking guard with a start function
required by the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the (control guards) must be met.
country or region where the GC Series is used. • The requirements of ISO 14119 for the interlocking guard
• To comply with ANSI B11.19, a display or indicator which must be met.
indicates the state of suspension of a safety device is • The cycle time of the machine is short.
required. It must be located where the operator can • The auto start tolerance time must be set as short as
recognize that he/she is near the safety device of the possible (e.g. not greater than the cycle time).
suspension target. Periodic inspection is required for the • While the guard is closed, a human body or a part of a
indicator. human body must not be allowed to enter the area
between the guard and hazardous area.
• Guards that can access the same hazard (fixed
Unlock control
(removable type) or movable guard) must be interlocking
• The output of this function block must be used in combination guards equipped with an interlock switch or the
with the unlock output of the guard locking switch. equivalent.
• This function block can be used for both "Power-to-release" • The guard must be securely held open using a spring or
and "Power-to-lock". These are selected in the unlock output counterweight such that it cannot initiate a startup when it
setting for guard locking switch. is closed unintentionally.
• When using the lock function of the guard locking switch for • The interlock switch used to detect opening/closing of the
a safety related part of the control system, input an unlock guard must satisfy the appropriate safety level (SIL, PLr)
control signal that turns ON when no hazard exists in a according to the risk assessment result.
protection area. The following lists the details of the state.
• The speed of the movable part of the hazard drops below
the speed with sufficiently low risk.
• The torque of the movable part of the hazard drops below
the torque with sufficiently low risk.
• The drive source of the hazard turns OFF.
• Unlock permission delay time must be specified in
consideration of machine-to-machine variations and
deterioration of the machine.
8 GC Series User’s Manual
Safety Precautions
PSDI
Precautions for Using Other
• IEC 61496-1 Type 4 safety light curtain must be used. Safety
light curtain with appropriate detection capability must be used.
Function Block
• No greater than ø30 mm for hand detection or ø50 mm for
leg/whole body detection (IEC 62046) No greater than ø32
mm (ANSI B11.19) SZ/SZ-V Series bank output
• Use this function only with machines which can be stopped
• When using the bank switching function, someone may be
immediately anywhere in their cycle.
• Install the safety light curtain with an appropriate safety able to approach a hazardous area/hazard without passing
distance maintained from a hazard. through the protection area if bank switching is performed at
• A hazard must not be accessed by a route outside the area an unintended timing. Therefore, the responsible personnel
protected by the safety light curtain. must confirm that the appropriate protection area is set/
• Guards that protect a hazard (fixed (removable type) or selected for the safety laser scanner in all operation modes
movable guard) must be an interlocking guards equipped of the machine including the bank switching time.
with interlock switch or the equivalent. • This function is available only on KEYENCE SZ-V Series.
• Use a signal with an appropriate safety level for the top dead
center, bottom dead center, upstroke signal, etc.
• The GC Series has not been verified as a device specified in Input filter (OFF-ON)
Chapter 4-2 Presence Sensing Device Initiation in
Announcement No. 5 Safety device standards for press • When applying OFF-ON filter of 0.5 ms or 1 ms to an input
machines and shearing machines issued by the Ministry of device, attach a resistor of 2.2 kΩ or less between the safety
Health, Labour and Welfare of Japan on January 12, 2011. input terminal to which the input device is assigned and 0 V.
Therefore, the PSDI function cannot be used on a power
press machine in Japan.
Edge detection
• Create a program so that an unexpected startup is not
caused by noise or other such momentary pulse signals.
Precautions for Using Output
Block (Output Device)
S-OUT safety output x 1
• To achieve a safety level of SIL3, PLe with a single safety
output, apply protection to avoid short circuit between the
safety output of the GC Series and the power line, according
to ISO 13849-2.
• If the output self-diagnosis is disabled, the achievable safety
level becomes PLd, SIL2.
S-OUT safety output x 2
• If the output self-diagnosis is disabled, the achievable safety
level becomes PLd, SIL2.
Unlock output
• The achievable safety level of the guard locking function
varies by the selected output.
PLe/SIL3
• When connecting the KEYENCE GS Series power-to-
release type sensor via GC-Link.
• When connecting via a terminal block (safety output x 2)
(with the output self-diagnosis enabled).
PLd/SIL2
• When connecting via a terminal block (safety output x 1)
(with the output self-diagnosis enabled).
GC Series User’s Manual 9
Software License Agreement
The use of the GC Configurator (hereinafter referred to as Article 7 (Termination of Agreement)
"this software") is subject to the terms outlined in this 1. Should the customer destroy this software and any
software license agreement (hereinafter referred to as "this backup copies, this agreement will automatically
agreement") and to the customers consent to this expire with the customer's cessation of use of this
agreement. The customer's use or duplication of this software.
software, in whole or in part, constitutes the customer's 2. KEYENCE reserves the right to unilaterally terminate
consent to enter into this agreement. this agreement should the customer violate any of the
terms of this agreement. In this instance, this software
Article 1 (Usage Rights) and all copies should be immediately returned to
1. Contingent of the customer's compliance with the KEYENCE for destruction.
terms of this agreement, KEYENCE Corporation 3. Should KEYENCE be caused damages by the
(hereinafter referred to as "KEYENCE") extends to the customer's violation of this agreement, the customer
customer non-exclusive usage rights. will compensate KEYENCE for those damages.
2. The customer may install this software without the limit Article 8 (Base Law)
of the number of the licenses, provided that this This agreement is to be adjudicated according to
software is used only in the same business place Japanese law.
(factory/office) in order to use our product you have
purchased.
Article 2 (Limitations on Duplication)
The customer may make no more than 1 copy of this
software for backup purposes only.
Article 3 (Prohibitions)
The customer is prohibited from doing the following with
this software.
a. Additions or changes to any or all of the functions of
this software. However, installation of updates or new
features provided by KEYENCE is expressly allowed.
b. Reverse compiling or reverse assembling of this
software for the purposes of reverse engineering.
c. Sale, transfer, redistribution, license, rental or lease to
the third party. This does not include instances where
permission has been obtained from KEYENCE in
advance.
Article 4 (Copyright)
The copyrights of this software and all associated
documentation are the property of KEYENCE.
Article 5 (Exemption of Liability)
KEYENCE shall not be held liable by the user or third party
for any damages arising from the use of the software.
Article 6 (Support)
Based on this agreement, KEYENCE agrees to provide the
customer with technical support in response to customer
questions regarding this software. However, KEYENCE
makes no guarantee that the technical support offered will
meet the customer's needs.
10 GC Series User’s Manual
Manual Configuration
Chapter 1 Before Use
Provides the information for checking the package contents, product list and
the overview of the GC Series. 1
Chapter 2 Basic Usage Procedure Describes the basic use procedure of the GC Series.
2
Chapter 3
Describes the specifications and dimensions of the main controller, expansion
Specifications
unit and remote I/O module. 3
Chapter 4 Calculating Response Time Describes how to calculate the response time in using the GC Series. 4
Chapter 5 Operating Main Controller Describes the main controller operation method and LCD display. 5
6
Chapter 6
Describes installation, basic wiring, and the settings and wiring in using
Installation and Wiring
KEYENCE safety sensors.
Before Using the 7
Chapter 7
Describes the GC Configurator operating environment, installation method and
GC Configurator program creation procedure.
Basic Operations of 8
Chapter 8 GC Configurator
Describes the basic operations of the GC Configurator.
Creating New Project with
9
Chapter 9 GC Configurator
Describes how to create a new project in the GC Configurator.
10
GC Configurator [Settings] -
Chapter 10 [Configuration]
Describes how to register or set input/output devices in the GC Configurator.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] -
Chapter 11 Programming
Describes how to create a program in the GC Configurator.
12
GC Configurator [Settings] -
Chapter 12
Describes the procedure for transferring a project and the log-in authentication
Transfer in the GC Configurator. 13
GC Configurator
Chapter 13 [Monitoring]
Describes how to monitor in the GC Configurator. 14
Chapter 14 GC Configurator [History] Describes how to check a history in the GC Configurator. 15
Chapter 15
Ethernet Communication Describes the settings and functions when using the Ethernet communication 16
Function function.
EtherNet/IP™ 17
Chapter 16
Describes the settings and functions when using the EtherNet/IP
Communication Function communication function.
PROFINET 18
Chapter 17
Describes the settings and functions when using the PROFINET
Communication Function communication function.
UDP Communication 19
Chapter 18
Describes the settings and functions when using the UDP communication
Function function.
Modbus/TCP
20
Chapter 19
Describes the settings and functions when using the Modbus/TCP
Communication Function
21
communication function.
MC Protocol
Chapter 20
Describes the settings and functions when using the MC protocol
Communication Function communication function.
A
Chapter 21 Inspection and Maintenance Describes the inspection and maintenance procedures for the GC Series.
Appendix Appendix Describes the troubleshooting and input/output device settings.
GC Series User’s Manual 11
Table of Contents
Safety Precautions........................................................................................................ page 1
General Precautions........................................................................................... page 1
Person Responsible for Safety Management and User ..................................... page 1
Connection Device and Wiring .......................................................................... page 2
Safety Control..................................................................................................... page 2
Precautions on Regulations and Standards................................................................. page 3
CE Marking......................................................................................................... page 3
North American Regulations .............................................................................. page 3
UL and CSA Certificate ...................................................................................... page 3
Radio Law in South Korea.................................................................................. page 4
Safety Precautions........................................................................................................ page 5
Safety Precautions ............................................................................................. page 5
Precautions for Using Input Block (Input Device).............................................. page 5
Precautions for Using Function Block ................................................................ page 6
Precautions for Using Output Block (Output Device) ........................................ page 9
Precautions for Using Other Function Block ...................................................... page 9
Software License Agreement ..................................................................................... page 10
Manual Configuration ................................................................................................. page 11
Table of Contents ....................................................................................................... page 12
Chapter 1 Before Use
1-1 Checking the Package Contents ........................................................................page 1-2
1-2 Product List .........................................................................................................page 1-3
1-3 Overview of GC Series ........................................................................................page 1-6
Chapter 2 Basic Usage Procedure
2-1 Basic Usage Procedure ......................................................................................page 2-2
Chapter 3 Specifications
3-1 Main Controllers ..................................................................................................page 3-2
GC-1000..........................................................................................................page 3-2
GC-1000R .......................................................................................................page 3-6
3-2 Expansion Units ..................................................................................................page 3-9
GC-S84............................................................................................................page 3-9
GC-S16..........................................................................................................page 3-12
GC-S1R .........................................................................................................page 3-14
GC-A16 .........................................................................................................page 3-16
GC-B30 .........................................................................................................page 3-18
3-3 Remote I/O Modules .........................................................................................page 3-20
GC-R45 .........................................................................................................page 3-20
GC-R48 .........................................................................................................page 3-22
3-4 Dimensions........................................................................................................page 3-24
Main Controllers ............................................................................................page 3-24
Expansion Units ............................................................................................page 3-25
Remote I/O Modules .....................................................................................page 3-27
12 GC Series User’s Manual
Table of Contents
Others............................................................................................................page 3-28
Chapter 4 Calculating Response Time
4-1 Calculating Response Time ................................................................................page 4-2
Response Time ...............................................................................................page 4-2
Chapter 5 Operating Main Controller
5-1 Screen Configuration ..........................................................................................page 5-2
Basic Operations.............................................................................................page 5-3
5-2 Screen Details .....................................................................................................page 5-4
TOP Screen .....................................................................................................page 5-4
S-OUT Monitor.................................................................................................page 5-7
Unit Monitor ...................................................................................................page 5-11
Menu .............................................................................................................page 5-15
Error History ..................................................................................................page 5-16
System Information........................................................................................page 5-17
Settings .........................................................................................................page 5-19
Chapter 6 Installation and Wiring
6-1 Installing Units.....................................................................................................page 6-2
Cautions for Installing Units ............................................................................page 6-2
Arranging Units ...............................................................................................page 6-3
Installing Main Controller and Expansion Units ..............................................page 6-3
Installing Remote I/O Modules ........................................................................page 6-5
Installing Bus Extension Units .........................................................................page 6-9
6-2 Wiring Units .......................................................................................................page 6-10
Connecting to Terminal Blocks .....................................................................page 6-10
Assigning Input/Output Terminals.................................................................page 6-11
Connecting Power Supplies..........................................................................page 6-13
Precautions for Wiring Input/Output Devices................................................page 6-13
Safety Input Functions...................................................................................page 6-15
Safety Output Functions................................................................................page 6-18
Maximum SIL/PL/Category Achieved by GC Series .....................................page 6-21
6-3 Connecting Input Devices.................................................................................page 6-23
Input Device Types .......................................................................................page 6-23
Connection Types .........................................................................................page 6-24
Connection destinations................................................................................page 6-27
Connection Method.......................................................................................page 6-30
6-4 Connecting Output Devices..............................................................................page 6-39
Output Types.................................................................................................page 6-39
Connection Destinations ...............................................................................page 6-40
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors .............................................................page 6-47
KEYENCE Safety Sensors .............................................................................page 6-47
Connection Destinations ...............................................................................page 6-48
Destinations and Compatible KEYENCE Safety Sensors .............................page 6-49
Connecting to GC-Link..................................................................................page 6-64
Connecting to Terminal Blocks ...................................................................page 6-110
Connecting to Remote I/O Modules............................................................page 6-157
GC Series User’s Manual 13
Table of Contents
Chapter 7 Before Using the GC Configurator
7-1 GC Configurator Functions .................................................................................page 7-2
GC Configurator Functions .............................................................................page 7-2
7-2 Operating Environment .......................................................................................page 7-4
Operating Environment ...................................................................................page 7-4
7-3 Installing GC Configurator...................................................................................page 7-5
Preparation for Installation ..............................................................................page 7-5
Downloading GC Configurator........................................................................page 7-5
Executing Installation ......................................................................................page 7-5
Uninstalling GC Configurator ..........................................................................page 7-5
Precautions for Uninstallation..........................................................................page 7-5
7-4 Program Creation Procedure ..............................................................................page 7-6
GC Configurator Operations and Screens......................................................page 7-6
Program Creation Procedure ..........................................................................page 7-7
Chapter 8 Basic Operations of GC Configurator
8-1 Starting GC Configurator.....................................................................................page 8-2
Starting GC Configurator.................................................................................page 8-2
Initial Screen....................................................................................................page 8-2
8-2 Screen Configuration ..........................................................................................page 8-5
Settings ...........................................................................................................page 8-5
Monitoring .......................................................................................................page 8-5
History .............................................................................................................page 8-5
8-3 Menu ...................................................................................................................page 8-6
File...................................................................................................................page 8-6
Edit ..................................................................................................................page 8-7
View.................................................................................................................page 8-8
Communication .............................................................................................page 8-12
Log-in Authentication ....................................................................................page 8-13
Language ......................................................................................................page 8-13
Help...............................................................................................................page 8-13
Chapter 9 Creating New Project with GC Configurator
9-1 Create a new configuration file ...........................................................................page 9-2
Programming Mode ........................................................................................page 9-3
Unit Settings ....................................................................................................page 9-6
Chapter 10 GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
10-1 Overview of [Configuration] Screen ................................................................page 10-2
10-2 Name and Function of Each Part ....................................................................page 10-3
10-3 Device Configuration Registration and Setting Procedure .............................page 10-4
14 GC Series User’s Manual
Table of Contents
10-4 Registering Input Devices...............................................................................page 10-5
Registering Input Devices.............................................................................page 10-5
Name and Function of Each Part in Device Setting Area (Input Device)......page 10-6
Input Device Basic Settings ..........................................................................page 10-6
Input Device Detailed Settings......................................................................page 10-8
10-5 Registering Output Devices ..........................................................................page 10-12
Registering Output Devices ........................................................................page 10-12
Name and Function of Each Part in Device Setting Area (Output Device).page 10-13
Output Device Basic Settings .....................................................................page 10-13
Output Device Detailed Settings.................................................................page 10-15
10-6 Assigning Terminals......................................................................................page 10-17
Individual Assignment.................................................................................page 10-17
Reviewing Terminal Assignment .................................................................page 10-19
10-7 Setting Options..............................................................................................page 10-20
Ethernet .......................................................................................................page 10-20
Communication Inputs/Outputs ..................................................................page 10-24
System.........................................................................................................page 10-25
Chapter 11 GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
11-1 EASY Mode .....................................................................................................page 11-2
Overview of EASY Mode ...............................................................................page 11-2
Names and Functions on the Program Screen (EASY Mode) ......................page 11-2
Selecting an Application ...............................................................................page 11-4
Registering Input Devices.............................................................................page 11-9
Maintenance Function.................................................................................page 11-10
How to Set the Maintenance Function ........................................................page 11-11
Other Functions...........................................................................................page 11-18
Simulation Function .....................................................................................page 11-23
Restrictions on EASY Mode ........................................................................page 11-24
11-2 Standard Mode .............................................................................................page 11-25
Overview of Standard Mode .......................................................................page 11-25
Names and Functions on the Program Screen (Standard Mode)...............page 11-25
Standard Mode Programming Flow ............................................................page 11-29
Placing Input/Output Blocks .......................................................................page 11-30
Placing Function Blocks..............................................................................page 11-31
Wiring Blocks ..............................................................................................page 11-34
Recipe Function ..........................................................................................page 11-35
Other Functions...........................................................................................page 11-42
11-3 Simulation......................................................................................................page 11-45
Overview of the Simulation Function ...........................................................page 11-45
Area and Function Names of the Simulation Function ................................page 11-45
Starting and Stopping the Simulation..........................................................page 11-46
How to Operate the Simulation ...................................................................page 11-47
Chapter 12 GC Configurator [Settings] - Transfer
12-1 Log-in Authentication ......................................................................................page 12-2
Log-in privileges............................................................................................page 12-2
Management of the log-in privileges and passwords...................................page 12-3
Log-in ............................................................................................................page 12-4
Log out ..........................................................................................................page 12-4
GC Series User’s Manual 15
Table of Contents
12-2 Transfer ...........................................................................................................page 12-5
Connecting the PC to the GC Series.............................................................page 12-5
Transfer .........................................................................................................page 12-6
Chapter 13 GC Configurator [Monitoring]
13-1 Monitoring Function.........................................................................................page 13-2
Overview of the Monitoring Function.............................................................page 13-2
Functions Available in the Monitoring Function ............................................page 13-2
13-2 Names and Functions on the Monitoring Screen............................................page 13-3
[Monitoring] - Program ..................................................................................page 13-3
[Monitoring] - Configuration ..........................................................................page 13-4
13-3 How to Check the Monitor...............................................................................page 13-5
Program Monitor............................................................................................page 13-5
Timing Chart..................................................................................................page 13-6
Block Status ..................................................................................................page 13-8
Unit Monitor ...................................................................................................page 13-9
Status Panel ................................................................................................page 13-12
Error History ................................................................................................page 13-13
13-4 Responsible Function (Forced Input)............................................................page 13-14
Responsible Function (Forced Input)..........................................................page 13-14
Chapter 14 GC Configurator [History]
14-1 History Function ..............................................................................................page 14-2
Overview of the History Function ..................................................................page 14-2
14-2 Area and Function Names on the History Screen...........................................page 14-4
[History] - Program........................................................................................page 14-4
[History] - Configuration ................................................................................page 14-5
14-3 How to Check the History................................................................................page 14-6
Reading Out the History Data .......................................................................page 14-6
How to Check the History..............................................................................page 14-7
Chapter 15 Ethernet Communication Function
15-1 Overview of the Ethernet Communication Function ........................................page 15-2
What You Can Do with the Ethernet Communication Function .....................page 15-2
Supported Protocols .....................................................................................page 15-2
15-2 GC Configurator Settings ................................................................................page 15-3
GC Configurator - Configuration Screen Settings.........................................page 15-3
How to Use a Communication Block.............................................................page 15-9
Chapter 16 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
16-1 Overview of the EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function................................page 16-2
Overview of the EtherNet/IP™ communication function ...............................page 16-2
16-2 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Specifications .................................................page 16-3
16 GC Series User’s Manual
Table of Contents
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Specifications for the GC Series ..................page 16-3
16-3 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Settings...........................................................page 16-4
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Settings.........................................................page 16-4
16-4 Cyclic Communication ....................................................................................page 16-6
IN Area Data Map .........................................................................................page 16-8
OUT Area Data Map....................................................................................page 16-15
16-5 Message Communication .............................................................................page 16-16
Chapter 17 PROFINET Communication Function
17-1 Overview of the PROFINET Communication Function ....................................page 17-2
Overview of the PROFINET Communication Function ..................................page 17-2
17-2 PROFINET Communication Specifications .....................................................page 17-3
PROFINET Communication Specifications for the GC Series.......................page 17-3
17-3 PROFINET Communication Settings ...............................................................page 17-4
PROFINET Communication Settings .............................................................page 17-4
17-4 Cyclic Communication ....................................................................................page 17-6
Communication Module List..........................................................................page 17-6
Communication Module: Communication Input/Output................................page 17-6
Communication Module: GC-1000 Operating State .....................................page 17-8
Communication Module: GL-R (GC-Link Port A) ........................................page 17-10
Communication Module: GS (GC-Link Port A)............................................page 17-13
Communication Module: GL-R (GC-Link Port B) ........................................page 17-15
Communication Module: GS (GC-Link Port B)............................................page 17-18
17-5 Acyclic Communication ................................................................................page 17-20
Parameter List .............................................................................................page 17-20
17-6 Diagnostic Function ......................................................................................page 17-38
Chapter 18 UDP Communication Function
18-1 Overview of the UDP Communication Function ..............................................page 18-2
Overview of the UDP Communication Function ............................................page 18-2
18-2 UDP Communication Settings.........................................................................page 18-3
UDP Communication Settings.......................................................................page 18-3
18-3 UDP Communication Commands ...................................................................page 18-4
UDP Communication Command List ............................................................page 18-4
UDP Command Details .................................................................................page 18-5
Parameter List .............................................................................................page 18-13
Chapter 19 Modbus/TCP Communication Function
19-1 Overview of the Modbus/TCP Communication Function ................................page 19-2
Overview of the Modbus/TCP Communication Function ..............................page 19-2
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications...................................page 19-3
Modbus/TCP Communication Specifications................................................page 19-3
Command and Response Formats ...............................................................page 19-3
Modbus/TCP Function Codes .......................................................................page 19-4
Function Code Details...................................................................................page 19-5
GC Series User’s Manual 17
Table of Contents
19-3 Modbus/TCP Communication Settings .........................................................page 19-12
Modbus/TCP Communication Settings .......................................................page 19-12
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List ............................................................................page 19-13
Input Registers and Holding Registers .......................................................page 19-13
Inputs and Coils ..........................................................................................page 19-22
Chapter 20 MC Protocol Communication Function
20-1 Overview of the MC Protocol Communication Function..................................page 20-2
Overview of the MC protocol Communication Function................................page 20-2
20-2 MC Protocol Communication Settings ............................................................page 20-3
MC Protocol Communication Settings ..........................................................page 20-3
20-3 MC Protocol Communication Specifications...................................................page 20-4
MC Protocol Communication Specifications.................................................page 20-4
MC Protocol Data Format..............................................................................page 20-5
20-4 MC Protocol Communication Commands.......................................................page 20-9
Command List ...............................................................................................page 20-9
Command Details........................................................................................page 20-10
End Codes for Communication Errors ........................................................page 20-16
20-5 Address List ..................................................................................................page 20-17
Word address..............................................................................................page 20-17
Bit address ..................................................................................................page 20-25
Chapter 21 Inspection and Maintenance
21-1 Inspection and Maintenance...........................................................................page 21-2
Inspection and Maintenance.........................................................................page 21-2
Appendix
Appendix-1 Troubleshooting.................................................................................... page A-2
Alert and Error categories in the GC main controller ..................................... page A-2
How to check an alert or error........................................................................ page A-3
Alert/Error list.................................................................................................. page A-7
Appendix-2 List of input devices............................................................................ page A-10
KEYENCE safety sensors............................................................................. page A-10
Safety input devices..................................................................................... page A-10
Other input devices...................................................................................... page A-12
Appendix-3 Output Device List .............................................................................. page A-87
Appendix-4 Open License ..................................................................................... page A-95
SYS/BIOS License........................................................................................ page A-95
NDK License ................................................................................................ page A-95
Appendix-5 Trademarks......................................................................................... page A-96
Appendix-6 Revision history................................................................................... page A-97
Appendix-7 Warranty ............................................................................................. page A-98
18 GC Series User’s Manual
1
Before Use 1
Before Use
This chapter describes the information which you should know before using this product, such as package
contents and overview of the GC Series.
1-1 Checking the Package Contents.........................................................................page 1-2
1-2 Product List...........................................................................................................page 1-3
1-3 Overview of GC Series .........................................................................................page 1-6
GC Series User’s Manual 1-1
1-1 Checking the Package Contents
Main controller
1 GC-1000
Before Use
Instruction manual
GC-1000 x 1
GC-1000R
Instruction manual
GC-1000R x 1
Expansion unit and remote I/O module
GC-S84/S16/S1R/A16/B30
Instruction manual
Expansion units
GC-R45/R48
Waterproof caps Instruction manual
Remote I/O modules
1-2 GC Series User’s Manual
1-2 Product List
Main controllers
Category Product name Model Additional details
1
Before Use
GC Series Main controller GC-1000 Safety input x 16 points / Safety output x 6 points
Main controller (safety relay output) GC-1000R Safety input x 14 points / Safety output x 4 points
/ Safety relay output x 1 point (3a)
Expansion units
Category Product name Model Additional details
Input/output Expansion units (8 safety inputs / 4 safety outputs) GC-S84 Safety input x 8 points / Safety output x 4 points
Expansion units (16 safety inputs) GC-S16 Safety input x 16 points
Expansion units (safety relay output) GC-S1R Safety relay output x 1 point (3a)
Expansion units (16 general-purpose outputs) GC-A16 AUX output x 16 points
Bus extension Bus extension unit GC-B30 For bus extension, Max. 30 m
Remote I/O Remote I/O modules (M12 5 pins) GC-R45 M12 5 pins, 4 ports
Remote I/O modules (M12 8 pins) GC-R48 M12 8 pins, 4 ports
Cables
GC-Link connection cables
Safety sensor Product name Model Quantity Length (m)
GL-R Series GC-Link cable for GL-R (8 pins), 0.3 m GL-RCG03S 1 0.3
Extension cable (8 pins), 7 m GL-RCC7S 1 set (transmitter/receiver) 7
GL-R main unit connection cable GL-RPC03PS 1 0.3
GL-S Series GC-Link cable for GL-S (8 pins), 0.3 m GL-SCG03S 1 0.3
Extension cable (8 pins), 7 m GL-RCC7S 1 set (transmitter/receiver) 7
GL-S main unit connection cable (8 pins), 0.3 m GL-SPC03PS 1 set (transmitter/receiver) 0.3
GC Series GC-Link cable for GS (5 pins), 0.3 m GS-P5CG03 1 0.3
(GS (Non-contact),
M12 connector type extension cable GS-P5CC1 1 1
GS (Lock), GS-M)
Simple function type (5 pins)
GS-P5CC3 1 3
GS-P5CC5 1 5
GS-P5CC10 1 10
Y-shaped connector GS-Y11 1 --
End connector GS-Y12 1 --
SZ-V04(X) GC-Link cable for SZ-V04 (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VCG03 1 0.3
Simple connection
Extension cable (5 pins), 7 m SZ-VCC7 1 7
SZ-V04 power cable (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VPC03S 1 0.3
SZ-V04(X) GC-Link cable for SZ-V04/V32 (12 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VCG03M 1 0.3
Advanced function
Extension cable (12 pins), 7m SZ-VCC7M 1 7
connection
SZ-V04 power cable (12 pins), 0.3m SZ-VPC03M 1 0.3
GC Series User’s Manual 1-3
1-2 Product List
Safety sensor Product name Model Quantity Length (m)
1 SZ-V32(X)/32N(X)
Advanced function
GC-Link cable for SZ-V04/V32 (12 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VCG03M 1 0.3
Extension cable (12 pins), 7 m SZ-VCC7M 1 7
Before Use
connection
SZ-V32 power cable (12 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VPC03S 1 0.3
SZ-01S GC-Link cable for SZ-V04/V32 (12 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VCG03 1 0.3
Extension cable (5 pins), 7 m SZ-CC7PS 1 7
SZ-01S power cable (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-PC03PS 1 0.3
Remote I/O module connection cables
<Connection cable between GC-1000 and remote I/O module>
Product name Model Quantity Length (m)
Remote I/O module power cable GC-RP10 1 10
GC-RP30 1 30
Remote I/O module extension cable GC-RS10 1 10
GC-RS30 1 30
Remote I/O module external power cable GC-RE10 1 10
<Connection cable between remote I/O module (GC-R45) and safety sensor>
Safety sensor Product name Model Quantity Length
(m)
GL-R Series M12 5-pin cable GS-P5CC1 1 1
GS-P5CC3 1 3
GS-P5CC5 1 5
GS-P5CC10 1 10
GL-R main unit connection cable OP-88300 1 0.3
GL-S Series M12 4-pin cable OP-85503 1 2
OP-85504 1 5
GL-S main unit connection cable GL-SPC03P 1 0.3
GS-10PC Extension cable GS-P5CC1 1 1
GS-P5CC3 1 3
GS-P5CC5 1 5
GS-P5CC10 1 10
SZ-V Series Extension cable (5 pins), 7 m SZ-VCC7 1 7
SZ-V04 power cable (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VPC03S 1 0.3
GC Series Extension cable (5 pins), 7 m SZ-CC7PS 1 7
(SZ-01S)
SZ-01S output cable (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-PC03PS 1 0.3
1-4 GC Series User’s Manual
1-2 Product List
<Connection cable between remote I/O module (GC-R48) and safety sensor>
Safety sensor Product name Model Quantity Length
(m)
1
Before Use
GS-11PC Extension cable GS-P8LC1 1 1
GS-51PC GS-P8CC1 1 1
GS-71PC
GS-P8CC3 1 3
GS-M51P
GS-M91P GS-P8CC5 1 5
GS-ML51P GS-P8CC10 1 10
GC Series User’s Manual 1-5
1-3 Overview of GC Series
The GC Series Safety Controller is a highly reliable, user-friendly programmable controller which is suitable for the safety
control of small-scale and middle-scale equipment/machinery.
1
The GC Series allows users to construct safety control systems that fulfill the following requirements:
Before Use
• Requirements of SIL (Safety Integrity Level) 3 of IEC 61508 and IEC/EN 62061 (Functional safety of electrical/electronic/
programmable electronic safety-related systems)
• Requirements of EN ISO 13849-1 safety category 4, PL (Performance Level) e
The GC Series offers two main controllers: the GC-1000 which can be extended using the expansion units and remote I/O
modules and also features Ethernet communication functionality, and the GC-1000R which is equipped with a built-in
safety relay output. Since the GC-1000 allows for extension of up to 212 safety input points and 46 safety output points with
a single main controller, you are able to flexibly construct the system configuration according to the scale of the machine.
Also, the use of the dedicated GC Configurator software makes setting up and programming simple or complicated safety
system controls a breeze.
Base System and Components
The following shows the base system configuration using the GC Series.
KEYENCE safety sensors
GC-Link Expansion units
GL-R/GL-S SZ/SZ-V GC-S84
Series GS/GS-M Series Series GC-S16
Bus extension unit GC-S1R
Main controller
Expansion units GC-B30 GC-A16
GC-1000
GC-1000R*
System memory
GC Configurator Max. 30 m
Max. 10 units
USB
Max. 30 m
Ethernet
Max. 120m
Max. 30 m Max. 30 m Max. 30 m
General-purpose PLC Power Power Power Power
supply supply supply supply
EtherNet/IP MC protocol Remote I/O module GC-R45/R48
Modbus/TCP UDP
Max. 4 units
GC Series
* The GC-1000R cannot connect expansion units or remote I/O modules and cannot use the Ethernet communication function.
1-6 GC Series User’s Manual
2
Basic Usage Procedure
2
Basic Usage Procedure
This chapter describes the basic usage procedure for the GC Series.
2-1 Basic Usage Procedure .......................................................................................page 2-2
GC Series User’s Manual 2-1
2-1 Basic Usage Procedure
The following describes the basic usage procedure for the GC Series.
- System design -
2 Perform a risk assessment to determine necessary safety measures
Before using the GC Series, be sure to perform a risk assessment on the target
Basic Usage Procedure
machine and determine the risks involved with machine operation and the
corresponding safety measures that must be appropriately taken.
Select necessary safety devices and consider the system configuration
Select appropriate devices to be connected to the GC Series to fulfill the safety Chapter 3 Specifications
requirements. Using an inappropriate external device may degrade the overall Appendix: List of Input/Output
machine safety. Make a selection while checking compatibility with the GC Series Devices
specifications.
Communication with PLC on the control side
The GC-1000 is equipped with an Ethernet port and can communicate with a Chapter 15 Ethernet
general-purpose PLC that performs machine control via Ethernet. This allows you Communication
to monitor the operation status of the GC Series and any potential error Function
information on the general-purpose PLC side. Also, you can use data transmitted Chapter 16 EtherNet/IPTM
from the general-purpose PLC to the GC Series in the control system program. Communication
Function
Chapter 17 UDP Communication
Function
Chapter 18 Modbus/TCP
Communication
Function
Chapter 19 MC Protocol
Communication
Function
- Hardware design -
Calculate and verify the response time.
The response time is the maximum time required for the GC Series to execute a Chapter 4 Calculating Response
program based on a signal from a safety input device and shut off the output sent Time
to the safety output device. Safety distances are calculated using the response
time.
When calculating the response time for the whole machine, add the response
times of the input devices such as safety sensors (e.g. safety light curtain) and
switches, and the time required for the machine to stop after the output from the
GC Series turns OFF.
Install the GC Series.
Connect and install the GC Series main controller, expansion units, and remote I/ 6-1 Installing Units
O modules. 6-2 Wiring Units
Perform wiring of the input/output devices.
Install and wire the input/output devices to be connected to the GC Series. 6-3 Connecting Input Devices
6-4 Connecting Output Devices
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety
Sensors
2-2 GC Series User’s Manual
2-1 Basic Usage Procedure
- Software design - GC Configurator
Preparation and startup
Check the operating environment of the PC on which the GC Configurator will be Chapter 7 Before Use of GC
used and then install the software. Review the flow of programming and the basic
operations of the GC Configurator before use.
Configurator
Chapter 8 Basic Operations of GC
2
Basic Usage Procedure
Configurator
Set the system configuration.
Create a new project and select the appropriate unit configuration. Chapter 9 Creating New Program
Register the input/output devices.
Register the input/output devices to be connected to the GC Series and assign Chapter 10 [Settings] -
them to the terminals. Configuration
Create a program.
Create a program for the GC Series. Chapter 11 [Settings] - Programming
There are two types of programming methods: "EASY mode" enables quick and 11-1 EASY Mode
easy programming by simply selecting an application and registering the input 11-2 Standard Mode
devices, and "Standard mode" enables unique customization opportunities to fit
any application using function blocks.
Verify the program.
Verify the created program works properly using the simulation function. In 11-3 Simulation
simulation mode, debugging can be performed without the need for the physical
signals from the input devices.
- Startup and debugging -
Transfer the program and manage the access privileges.
Transfer the created program to the GC Series main controller. Passwords can be Chapter 12 [Settings] - Transfer
placed on the GC Series program to prevent unauthorized access to the GC 12-1 Log-in Authentication
Series main controller. 12-2 Transfer
Perform debugging.
Using the GC Configurator monitoring function, check the wiring status of the Chapter 13 [Monitoring]
input/output devices and the overall program operation. When an abnormality Chapter 14 [History]
occurs, investigate the cause using the GC Configurator monitoring and history Appendix: Troubleshooting
functions and the LCD display of the GC Series main controller.
Perform a safety confirmation test.
After debugging, confirm that all the safety functions operate properly. Make a
backup of the project so as to be ready for potential future replacement of the GC
Series. Using the report function, you can output and store a project report.
Maintenance and inspection
Troubleshooting
When an abnormality occurs, investigate the cause using the GC Configurator Appendix: Troubleshooting
monitoring and history functions and the LCD display of the GC Series main
controller.
Inspection, maintenance, and replacement
Perform daily and periodic inspections appropriately to ensure the GC Series Chapter 20 Inspection and
functions are in top condition. Maintenance
GC Series User’s Manual 2-3
MEMO
2
Basic Usage Procedure
2-4 GC Series User’s Manual
3
Specifications
Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications for the GC Series main controllers, expansion units, and remote I/
O modules.
3-1 Main Controllers ...................................................................................................page 3-2
3-2 Expansion Units ...................................................................................................page 3-9
3-3 Remote I/O Modules ...........................................................................................page 3-20
3-4 Dimensions .........................................................................................................page 3-24
GC Series User’s Manual 3-1
3-1 Main Controllers
GC-1000
GC-1000 specifications
3 Item GC-1000
Input/output points Safety inputs 16
Specifications
Safety outputs 6
Safety relay output --
AUX outputs 4
Test outputs 4
Maximum number of connectable expansion units 10 *1
Maximum number of connectable remote I/O modules 4
GC-Link ports 2 ports
Safety input Input device Contact output device or PNP output device
specifications Input type Type3
ON level (voltage/current) Min. 11 V/2 mA
OFF level (voltage/current) Max. 5 V/1.5 mA
Short-circuit current Si 0 to 3: Approx. 5 mA
Si 4 to 15: Approx. 3 mA
Protection circuit Surge protection circuit, wrong wiring protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
Safety output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications (DC-13, Type 0.5, Protected outputs)*2
Maximum load current 500mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5mA
Maximum capacitive load 0.5 μF
Load wiring resistance Max. 2.5 Ω
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
Test output Output type PNP transistor output*3
specifications
Maximum load current 100 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m*4
AUX output Output type Transistor output (PNP/NPN selectable by wiring)
specifications PNP output (DC-13, Type 0.1, Protected outputs)*2 *3
Maximum load current PNP: 100 mA, NPN: 20 mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
3-2 GC Series User’s Manual
3-1 Main Controllers
Item GC-1000
Communication USB USB2.0
interface
Ethernet 100BASE-TX
STP (shielded twisted pair) cable of Category 5 or higher
Network functionality EtherNet/IPTM, PROFINET, Modbus/TCP, MC protocol, UDP
Others LCD display 1.77-inch color LCD 3
Display buttons 4 points (3 operation keys + 1 BACK key)
Specifications
Usage environment Operating ambient temperature -10 to +55 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity 5 to 85% (No condensation)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 °C (No freezing)
Vibration resistance Frequency: 5 to 9 Hz, Half amplitude: 3.5 mm
Frequency: 9 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 10 m/s2
10 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance Acceleration: 150 m/s2, Operating time: 11 ms,
3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Overvoltage category II
III (relay output part of GC-1000R and GC-S1R)
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude Max. 2000 m
Applicable standards EMC EMS: IEC 61131-2/-6, EN61131-2/-6
EMI: IEC 61131-2, FCC Part15B Class A,
ICES-003, Class A
Safety IEC 61508,EN61508 SIL3
IEC 62061,EN62061 SIL CL3
ISO/EN13849-1:2015 Cat. 4, PL e, UL1998
Power supply Power voltage 24 VDC (-30 to +20%) *5 Class 2
Current consumption Max. 200 mA*6
Dimensions (W x D x H) 60 x 95 x 90 mm
Materials Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 260 g
*1 The bus extension unit "GC-B30" is not included in this number, and only one set of "GC-B30" can be used.
*2 Paragraph 6.4.6 Temporary overload of IEC 61131-2 supports up to 1.2 times the maximum load current.
*3 AUX outputs (NPN output) and test outputs do not comply with paragraph 6.4.6 of IEC 61131-2.
*4 When the test output is branched and connected to multiple safety input devices, the total branched cable length must not exceed
400 m.
*5 When using GC-S1R, GC-A16, GC-B30, GC-R45 or GC-R48, it is "-20 to +20%".
*6 Except for load current and sensors connected to GC-Link.
GC Series User’s Manual 3-3
3-1 Main Controllers
Part names
(Front)
(6) POWER LED
(7) ERROR LED
(1) LCD display
3 (2) Operation keys
(8) Input/output terminals
Specifications
(3) BACK key (9) LINK LED
(4) Ethernet port
(5) USB port
(Left side) (Right side)
(11)
Expansion unit
connector
(10)
System memory
(Top) (Bottom)
(12) GC-Link port A
(14)
(13) GC-Link port B
Remote I/O module
connection port
Number Name Function
(1) LCD display Used to monitor the GC Series operation status.
(2) Operation keys Used to operate the LCD display.
(3) BACK key Used to return to the previous screen.
(4) Ethernet port Used to connect a network cable (RJ-45).
(5) USB port Used to connect a USB cable (mini-B).
(6) POWER LED Turns ON (green) while power is supplied.
(7) ERROR LED Blinks (red) when an error occurs.
(8) Input/output terminals Terminals for inputs/outputs.
(9) LINK LED Shows the link status with the control device.
Turns ON in green: Link established, Blinks in green: Transmitting data, OFF:
Link not established
(10) System memory A slot for the system memory.
(11) Expansion unit connector Terminals for expansion units. A cover is attached prior to shipment.
Remove the cover when connecting an expansion unit.
(12) GC-Link port A
Ports dedicated for connecting KEYENCE safety sensors.
(13) GC-Link port B
(14) Remote I/O module connection port A port for connecting a remote I/O module.
3-4 GC Series User’s Manual
3-1 Main Controllers
Terminal arrangement
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6
8
Si6
Si8
Si7
Si9
7
9
Safety inputs
Si
3
Specifications
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1 Safety
2 So2 So3 3 outputs
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
+24V 0V
GC Series User’s Manual 3-5
3-1 Main Controllers
GC-1000R
GC-1000R specifications
3 Item GC-1000R
Input/output points Safety inputs 14
Specifications
Safety outputs 4
Safety relay output 1 (3a)
AUX outputs 4
Test outputs 4
GC-Link port 2 ports
Safety input Input device Contact output device or PNP output device
specifications
Input type Type3
ON level (voltage/current) Min. 11 V/2 mA
OFF level (voltage/current) Max. 5 V/1.5 mA
Short-circuit current Si 0 to 3: Approx. 5 mA
Si 4 to 13: Approx. 3 mA
Protection circuit Surge protection circuit, wrong wiring protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
Safety output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications (DC-13, Type 0.5, Protected outputs)*1
Maximum load current 500 mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5 mA
Maximum capacitive load 0.5 μF
Load wiring resistance Max. 2.5 Ω
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
Safety relay output Output type Relay (3a) (Externally-protected outputs, R300, B300)*2
specifications
Rated load (resistance load) 250 VAC 6A / 30 VDC 6A*3 *4
Rated load (inductive load) 240 VAC 2A (AC-15) / 24 VDC 1A (DC-13) (TÜV SÜD, CSA Certified)
R300, B300 (UL Certified)
Relay output mechanical life Resistance load (250 VAC 6A/30 VDC 6A): Min. 100,000 times
Resistance load (250 VAC 1A/30 VDC 1 A): Min. 500,000 times
Inductive load (AC-15: 240 VAC 2 A): Min. 100,000 times (cosø = 0.3)
Inductive load (DC-13: 24 VDC 1 A): Min. 100,000 times (L/R = 48 ms)
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
B10d With rated load: 400,000 times
With low load: 2,000,000 times
Test output Output type PNP transistor output*5
specifications
Maximum load current 100 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m*6
3-6 GC Series User’s Manual
3-1 Main Controllers
Item GC-1000R
AUX output Output type Transistor output (PNP/NPN selectable by wiring)
specifications PNP output (DC-13, Type 0.1, Protected outputs)*1 *5
Maximum load current PNP: 100 mA, NPN: 20 mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5 mA 3
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Specifications
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
Communication interface USB USB2.0
Others LCD display 1.77-inch color LCD
Display buttons 4 points (3 operation keys + 1 BACK key)
Usage environment Operating ambient temperature -10 to +55 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity 5 to 85% (No condensation)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 °C (No freezing)
Vibration resistance Frequency: 5 to 9 Hz, Half amplitude: 3.5 mm
Frequency: 9 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 10 m/s2
10 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance Acceleration: 150 m/s2, Operating time: 11 ms,
3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Overvoltage category II
III (relay output part of GC-1000R and GC-S1R)
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude Max. 2000 m
Applicable standards EMC EMS: IEC 61131-2/-6, EN61131-2/-6
EMI: IEC 61131-2, FCC Part15B Class A,
ICES-003, Class A
Safety IEC 61508,EN61508 SIL3
IEC 62061,EN62061 SIL CL3
ISO/EN13849-1:2015 Cat. 4, PL e, UL1998
Power supply Power voltage 24 VDC (-20 to +20%) Class 2
Current consumption Max. 200 mA*7
Dimensions (W x D x H) 85 x 95 x 90 mm
Materials Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 360 g
*1 Paragraph 6.4.6 Temporary overload of IEC 61131-2 supports up to 1.2 times the maximum load current.
*2 To comply with the requirements of IEC61131-2, connect 10A fast blow fuse (IEC 60127) in series to each contact.
*3 Check the derating characteristics described later.
*4 Use this product with load current of max. 5 A at temperature of 40 C° or lower when using this product as a product certified by UL.
*5 AUX outputs (NPN output) and test outputs do not comply with paragraph 6.4.6 of IEC 61131-2.
*6 When the test output is branched and connected to multiple safety input devices, the total branched cable length must not exceed 400 m.
*7 Except for load current and sensors connected to GC-Link.
Derating characteristics
6A
2A
35 °C 55 °C
GC Series User’s Manual 3-7
3-1 Main Controllers
Part names
(Front) (Top)
(5) POWER LED
(6) ERROR LED
(1) LCD display (9)
(7) Input/output terminals
3 GC-Link
port A
(2) Operation keys (8) Relay output terminals
Specifications
(10)
(3) BACK key GC-Link
(4) USB port port B
Number Name Function
(1) LCD display Used to monitor the GC Series operation status.
(2) Operation keys Used to operate the LCD display.
(3) BACK key Used to return to the previous screen.
(4) USB port A port for USB connection (mini-B).
(5) POWER LED Turns ON (green) while power is supplied.
(6) ERROR LED Blinks (red) when an error occurs.
(7) Input/output terminals Terminals for input/output.
(8) Relay output terminals Terminals for relay output.
(9) GC-Link port A
Ports dedicated for connecting KEYENCE safety sensors.
(10) GC-Link port B
Terminal arrangement
Inputs/outputs Relay output terminals
0 Si0 Si1 1 13 SRo
2 Si2 Si3 3 23 SRo
4 Si4 Si5 5 33 SRo Relay output
Safety inputs SRo
6 Si6 Si7 7 14 SRo
Si
8 Si8 Si9 9 24 SRo
10 Si10 Si11 11 34 SRo
12 Si12 Si13 13
14 N.C. N.C. 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
13
23
33
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1 Safety
outputs
2 So2 So3 3 So
4 N.C. N.C. 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
14
24
34
+24V 0V
3-8 GC Series User’s Manual
3-2 Expansion Units
GC-S84
GC-S84 specifications
Item Specification
3
Input/output points Safety inputs 8
Specifications
Safety outputs (transistor output) 4
Test outputs 2
Safety input Input device Contact output device or PNP output device
specifications
Input type Type3
ON level (voltage/current) Min. 11 V/2 mA
OFF level (voltage/current) Max. 5 V/1.5 mA
Short-circuit current Approx. 3 mA
Protection circuit Surge protection circuit, wrong wiring protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
Safety output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications (DC-13, Type 0.5, Protected outputs)*1
Maximum load current 500 mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5 mA
Maximum capacitive load 0.5 μF
Load wiring resistance Max. 2.5 Ω
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Test output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications*2
Maximum load current 100 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m*3
Usage environment Operating ambient temperature -10 to +55 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity 5 to 85% (No condensation)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 °C (No freezing)
Vibration resistance Frequency: 5 to 9 Hz, Half amplitude: 3.5 mm
Frequency: 9 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 10 m/s2
10 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance Acceleration: 150 m/s2, Operating time: 11 ms,
3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude Max. 2000 m
Applicable standards EMC EMS: IEC 61131-2/-6, EN61131-2/-6,EMI: IEC 61131-2,
FCC Part15B Class A, ICES-003, Class A
Safety IEC 61508, EN 61508 SIL3, IEC 62061, EN 62061 SIL CL3,
ISO/EN 13849-1:2015 Cat. 4, PL e, UL1998
GC Series User’s Manual 3-9
3-2 Expansion Units
Item Specification
Power supply Power voltage 24 VDC (-20 to +20%) Class 2
Current consumption Max. 60 mA*4
Dimensions (W x D x H) 22.2 x 95 x 90 mm
Materials Polycarbonate
3 Weight Approx. 130 g
Specifications
*1 Paragraph 6.4.6 Temporary overload of IEC 61131-2 supports up to 1.2 times the maximum load current.
*2 Test outputs do not comply with paragraph 6.4 of IEC 61131-2.
*3 When the test output is branched and connected to multiple safety input devices, the total branched cable length must not exceed
400 m.
*4 Except for load current.
Part names
(Front)
(4) POWER LED
(1) Input indicators (5) ERROR LED
(2) Output indicators
(3) Input/output terminals
(Left side) (6) Locking lever (Right side)
(7) (7)
Expansion units Expansion unit
connector connector
(6) Locking lever
Number Name Function
(1) Input indicators Individual input indicators for Si0 to Si7.
Input ON: Turns ON in green.
Input OFF: Turns OFF.
(2) Output indicators Individual output indicators for So0 to So3.
Output ON: Turns ON in green.
Output OFF/Not used: Turns OFF.
(3) Input/output terminals Terminals for input/output.
(4) POWER LED Turns ON (green) while power is supplied.
(5) ERROR LED Blinks (red) when an error occurs.
(6) Locking lever Used to lock the connection between units.
(7) Expansion unit connector Terminals for expansion units. A cover is attached to the connector on the right
side prior to shipment. Remove the cover when connecting an expansion unit.
3-10 GC Series User’s Manual
3-2 Expansion Units
Terminal arrangement
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
Safety inputs
Si
3
4 Si4 Si5 5
Specifications
6 Si6 Si7 7
Test outputs
0 To0 To1 1 To
0 So0 So1 1 Safety
outputs
So
2 So2 So3 3
+24V 0V
GC Series User’s Manual 3-11
3-2 Expansion Units
GC-S16
GC-S16 specifications
3 Item GC-S16
Input/output points Safety inputs 16
Specifications
Test outputs 4
Safety input Input device Contact output device or PNP output device
specifications Input type Type3
ON level (voltage/current) Min. 11 V/2 mA
OFF level (voltage/current) Max. 5 V/1.5 mA
Short-circuit current Approx. 5 mA
Protection circuit Surge protection circuit, wrong wiring protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
Test output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications*1
Maximum load current 100 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m*2
Usage environment Operating ambient temperature -10 to +55 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity 5 to 85% (No condensation)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 °C (No freezing)
Vibration resistance Frequency: 5 to 9 Hz, Half amplitude: 3.5 mm
Frequency: 9 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 10 m/s2
10 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance Acceleration: 150 m/s2, Operating time: 11 ms,
3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude Max. 2000 m
Applicable standards EMC EMS: IEC 61131-2/-6, EN61131-2/-6,EMI: IEC 61131-2,
FCC Part15B Class A,ICES-003, Class A
Safety IEC 61508, EN 61508 SIL3, IEC 62061, EN 62061 SIL CL3,
ISO/EN 13849-1:2015 Cat. 4, PL e, UL1998
Current consumption Max. 50 mA
Dimensions (W x D x H) 22.2 x 95 x 90 mm
Materials Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 130 g
*1 Test outputs do not comply with paragraph 6.4 of IEC 61131-2.
*2 When the test output is branched and connected to multiple safety input devices, the total branched cable length must not exceed
400 m.
3-12 GC Series User’s Manual
3-2 Expansion Units
Part names
(Front)
(3) POWER LED
(1) Input indicators (4) ERROR LED
Specifications
(2) Input/output terminals
(5) Locking lever
(Left side) (Right side)
(6) (6)
Expansion units Expansion unit
connector connector
(5) Locking lever
Number Name Function
(1) Input indicators Individual input indicators for Si0 to Si15.
Input ON: Turns ON in green.
Input OFF: Turns OFF.
(2) Input/output terminals Terminals for input/output.
(3) POWER LED Turns ON (green) while power is supplied.
(4) ERROR LED Blinks (red) when an error occurs.
(5) Locking lever Used to lock the connection between units.
(6) Expansion unit connector Terminals for expansion units. A cover is attached to the connector on the right
side prior to shipment. Remove the cover when connecting an expansion unit.
Terminal arrangement
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
To
2 To2 To3 3
GC Series User’s Manual 3-13
3-2 Expansion Units
GC-S1R
GC-S1R specifications
3 Item GC-S1R
Output points Safety relay output 1 (3a)
Specifications
Safety relay output Output type Relay (3a) (Externally-protected outputs, R300, B300)*1
specifications
Rated load (resistance load) 250 VAC 6A / 30 VDC 6A*2 *3
Rated load (inductive load) 240 VAC 2A (AC-15) / 24 VDC 1A (DC-13) (TÜV SÜD, CSA Certified)
R300, B300 (UL Certified)
Relay output mechanical life Resistance load (250 VAC 6A/30 VDC 6A): Min. 100,000 times
Resistance load (250 VAC 1A/30 VDC 1 A): Min. 500,000 times
Inductive load (AC-15: 240 VAC 2 A): Min. 100,000 times (cosø = 0.3)
Inductive load (DC-13: 24 VDC 1 A): Min. 100,000 times (L/R = 48 ms)
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
B10d With rated load: 400,000
With low load: 2,000,000
Usage environment Operating ambient temperature -10 to +55 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity 5 to 85% (No condensation)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 °C (No freezing)
Vibration resistance Frequency: 5 to 9 Hz, Half amplitude: 3.5 mm
Frequency: 9 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 10 m/s2
10 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance Acceleration: 150 m/s2, Operating time: 11 ms,
3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Overvoltage category II (III for relay output part)
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude Max. 2000 m
Applicable standards EMC EMS: IEC 61131-2/-6, EN61131-2/-6,EMI: IEC 61131-2,
FCC Part15B Class A, ICES-003, Class A
Safety IEC 61508, EN 61508 SIL3, IEC 62061, EN 62061 SIL CL3,
ISO/EN 13849-1:2015 Cat. 4, PL e, UL1998
Current consumption Max. 80 mA
Dimensions (W x D x H) 39.6 x 95 x 90 mm
Materials Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 180 g
*1 To comply with the requirements of IEC61131-2, connect 10A fast blow fuse (IEC 60127) in series to each contact.
*2 Check the derating characteristics described later.
*3 Use this product with load current of max. 5 A at temperature of 40 °C or lower when using this product as a product certified by UL.
Derating characteristics
6A
2A
35 °C 55 °C
3-14 GC Series User’s Manual
3-2 Expansion Units
Part names
(Front)
(1) POWER LED
(2) ERROR LED
(3) Output indicators
3
Specifications
(4) Relay output terminals
(Left side) (5) Locking lever (Right side)
(6) (6)
Expansion units Expansion unit
connector connector
(5) Locking lever
Number Name Function
(1) POWER LED Turns ON (green) while power is supplied.
(2) ERROR LED Blinks (red) when an error occurs.
(3) Output indicators An indicator for the relay output.
Relay ON: Turns ON in green.
Relay OFF/Not used: Turns OFF.
(4) Relay output terminals Terminals for relay output.
(5) Locking lever Used to lock the connection between units.
(6) Expansion unit connector Terminals for expansion units. A cover is attached to the connector on the right
side prior to shipment. Remove the cover when connecting an expansion unit.
Terminal arrangement
13 SRo
13
23
33
23 SRo
33 SRo Relay output
14 SRo SRo
24 SRo
34 SRo
14
24
34
GC Series User’s Manual 3-15
3-2 Expansion Units
GC-A16
GC-A16 specifications
3 Item GC-A16
Output points AUX outputs 16
Specifications
AUX output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications (DC-13, Type 0.1, Protected outputs)*1
Maximum load current 100 mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
Usage environment Operating ambient temperature -10 to +55 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity 5 to 85% (No condensation)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 °C (No freezing)
Vibration resistance Frequency: 5 to 9 Hz, Half amplitude: 3.5 mm
Frequency: 9 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 10 m/s2
10 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance Acceleration: 150 m/s2, Operating time: 11 ms,
3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude Max. 2000 m
Applicable standards EMC EMS: IEC 61131-2/-6, EN61131-2/-6, EMI: IEC 61131-2,
FCC Part15B Class A, ICES-003, Class A
Safety IEC 61508, EN 61508 SIL3, IEC 62061, EN 62061 SIL CL3,
ISO/EN 13849-1:2015 Cat. 4, PL e, UL1998
Current consumption Max. 70 mA*2
Dimensions (W x D x H) 22.2 x 95 x 90 mm
Materials Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 130 g
*1 Paragraph 6.4.6 Temporary overload of IEC 61131-2 supports up to 1.2 times the maximum load current.
*2 Except for load current.
3-16 GC Series User’s Manual
3-2 Expansion Units
Part names
(Front)
(3) POWER LED
(1) Output indicators (4) ERROR LED
3
Specifications
(2) Output terminals
(5) Locking lever
(Left side) (Right side)
(6) (6)
Expansion units Expansion unit
connector connector
(5) Locking lever
Number Name Function
(1) Output indicators Individual output indicators for Ao0 to Ao15.
Output ON: Turns ON in green.
Output OFF/Not used: Turns OFF.
(2) Output terminals Terminals for the outputs.
(3) POWER LED Turns ON (green) while power is supplied.
(4) ERROR LED Blinks (red) when an error occurs.
(5) Locking lever Used to lock the connection between units.
(6) Expansion unit connector Terminals for expansion units. A cover is attached to the connector on the right
side prior to shipment. Remove the cover when connecting an expansion unit.
Terminal arrangement
0 Ao0 Ao1 1
2 Ao2 Ao3 3
4 Ao4 Ao5 5
6 Ao6 Ao7 7 AUX outputs
8 Ao8 Ao9 9 Ao
10 Ao10 Ao11 11
12 Ao12 Ao13 13
14 Ao14 Ao15 15
GC Series User’s Manual 3-17
3-2 Expansion Units
GC-B30
GC-B30 specifications
3 Item
GC-B30
GC-B30A GC-B30B
Specifications
Cable length between GC-B30A and GC-B30B Max. 30 m
Usage environment Operating ambient -10 to +55 °C (No freezing)
temperature
Relative humidity 5 to 85% (No condensation)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 °C (No freezing)
Vibration resistance Frequency: 5 to 9 Hz, Half amplitude: 3.5 mm
Frequency: 9 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 10 m/s2
10 times each in X, Y, Z directions
2,
Shock resistance Acceleration: 150 m/s Operating time: 11 ms, 3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude Max. 2000 m
Applicable standards EMC EMS: IEC 61131-2/-6, EN61131-2/-6, EMI: IEC 61131-2,
FCC Part15B Class A, ICES-003, Class A
Safety IEC 61508, EN61508 SIL3, IEC 62061, EN62061 SIL CL3,
ISO/EN13849-1:2015 Cat. 4, PL e, UL1998
Power supply Power voltage -- 24 VDC (-20 to +20%) Class 2
Current consumption Max. 35 mA Max. 35 mA
Dimensions (W x D x H) 22.2 x 95 x 90 mm 22.2 x 95 x 90 mm
Materials Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 110 g Approx. 110 g
Point Only one set of the GC-B30 can be used for a single system (unit configuration).
3-18 GC Series User’s Manual
3-2 Expansion Units
Part names
(GC-B30A) (GC-B30B)
(1) POWER LED
Specifications
(2) Power supply 24V
connector 0V
(3) Bus extension
terminals
Number Name Function
(1) POWER LED Turns ON (green) while power is supplied.
(2) Power supply connector A connector for power.
(3) Bus extension terminals Used to connect bus extension units.
Terminal arrangement
Signal Signal Signal Cable (twisted pair 5P + shield) Signal
DA+ DA- DA+ DA+
DB+ DB- DA- DA-
DC+ DC- DB+ DB+
DD+ DD- DB- DB-
N.C. 0V DC+ DC+
Shield N.C. DC- DC-
DD+ DD+
DD- DD-
N.C. N.C.
0V 0V
Shield Shield
N.C. N.C.
Usable cables
When connecting GC-B30A with GC-B30B, use a cable meeting the Specifications 1 or 2 below.
Item Specification
UL Style No. 2464
Shape Shielded multicore cable
1 Rating 80 °C/300 V
Core thickness AWG 16 to 26
Number of cores Twisted pair 5P + shield
UL Style No. 20276
Shape Shielded multicore cable
2 Rating 80 °C/30 V
Core thickness AWG 16 to 24
Number of cores Twisted pair 5P + shield
GC Series User’s Manual 3-19
3-3 Remote I/O Modules
GC-R45
GC-R45 specifications
3 Item GC-R45
Maximum number of connected units 4 *1
Specifications
(GC-R45 and GC-R48 can be connected together)
Safety input Input device Contact output device or PNP output device
specifications
Input type Type3
ON level (voltage/current) Min. 11 V/2 mA
OFF level (voltage/current) Max. 5 V/1.5 mA
Short-circuit current Approx. 3 mA
Protection circuit Surge protection circuit, wrong wiring protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
Test output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications*2 Maximum load current 100 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m*3
AUX output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications (DC-13, Type 0.1, protected outputs)*4
Maximum load current 100 mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
*2
Power supply output Supported pin Pin 1
Power supply capability Max. 0.5 A
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit
Usage environment Operating ambient temperature -10 to +55 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity 5 to 85 % (No condensation)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 °C (No freezing)
Vibration resistance Frequency: 5 to 9 Hz, Half amplitude: 3.5 mm
Frequency: 9 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 10 m/s2
10 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance Acceleration: 150 m/s2, Operating time: 11 ms,
3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude Max. 2000 m
Applicable standards EMC EMS: IEC 61131-2/-6, EN61131-2/-6, EMI: IEC 61131-2,
FCC Part15B Class A, ICES-003, Class A
Safety IEC 61508, EN61508 SIL3, IEC 62061, EN62061 SIL CL3,
ISO/EN13849-1:2015 Cat. 4, PL e, UL1998
3-20 GC Series User’s Manual
3-3 Remote I/O Modules
Item GC-R45
Power supply Power voltage 24 VDC (-20 to +20 %) Class 2
Current consumption Max. 90 mA*5
Enclosure ratings IP65/67 (IEC 60529) (TÜV SÜD certified)
Dimensions (W x D x H) 64.8 x 141.5 x 34.5 mm
Materials PBT (GF 30 %), SUS304 3
Specifications
Weight Approx. 420 g
*1 When connecting multiple remote I/O modules, power needs to be supplied to each remote I/O module.
"Installing Remote I/O Modules" (page 6-5)
*2 Power supply outputs and test outputs do not comply with paragraph 6.4.6 of IEC 61131-2.
*3 When the test output is branched and connected to multiple safety input devices, the total branched cable length must not exceed 400 m.
*4 Paragraph 6.4.6 Temporary overload of IEC 61131-2 supports up to 1.2 times the maximum load current.
*5 Except for input devices.
Part names
(1) CN5
(2) CN6 (5) POWER LED
(3) CN7 (6) ERROR LED
(7) Input indicator 1
(8) Input indicator 2
Pin arrangement (M12 5 pins)
(4) CN1 to CN4
1 2
5
4 3
Number Name Function
(1) CN5* A connector used for communication between the main controller and the remote I/
O module, or connection to an external power supply.
(2) CN6* A connector used for communication between the main controller and the remote I/
O module, or between remote I/O modules.
(3) CN7 A connector used to cascade with another remote I/O module.
(4) CN1 to CN4 Terminals for input/output device.
(5) POWER LED Turns ON (green) while power is supplied.
(6) ERROR LED Blinks (red) when an error occurs.
(7) Input indicator 1 An input indicator for M12 connector Pin 4.
Input ON: Turns ON in green.
Input OFF: Turns OFF.
(8) Input indicator 2 An input indicator for M12 connector Pin 2.
Input ON: Turns ON in green.
Input OFF: Turns OFF.
* The necessary connector, cable, and wiring method varies depending on the number of remote I/O modules to be connected.
For connection with the main controller, refer to the following page.
"Installing Remote I/O Modules" (page 6-5)
GC Series User’s Manual 3-21
3-3 Remote I/O Modules
GC-R48
GC-R48 specifications
3 Item
*1
GC-R48
Maximum number of connected units 4
Specifications
(GC-R45 and GC-R48 can be connected together)
Safety input Input device Contact output device or PNP output device
specifications
Input type Type3
ON level (voltage/current) Min. 11 V/2 mA
OFF level (voltage/current) Max. 5 V/1.5 mA
Short-circuit current Approx. 3 mA
Protection circuit Surge protection circuit, wrong wiring protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
Safety output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications (DC-13, Type 0.5, Protected outputs)*2
(GC-R48 Pin 3: Lock Maximum load current 500 mA
control output)
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5 mA
Maximum capacitive load 0.5 μF
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
Test output Output type PNP transistor output
specifications*3
Maximum load current 100 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m*4
Power supply Supported pin Pin 2
output*3
Power supply capability Max. 0.5 A
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit
Usage environment Operating ambient temperature -10 to +55 °C (No freezing)
Relative humidity 5 to 85 % (No condensation)
Storage temperature -25 to +70 °C (No freezing)
Vibration resistance Frequency: 5 to 9 Hz, Half amplitude: 3.5 mm
Frequency: 9 to 150 Hz, Acceleration: 10 m/s2
10 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Shock resistance Acceleration: 150 m/s2, Operating time: 11 ms,
3 times each in X, Y, Z directions
Overvoltage category II
Pollution degree 2
Operating altitude Max. 2000 m
Applicable standards EMC EMS: IEC 61131-2/-6, EN61131-2/-6, EMI: IEC 61131-2,
FCC Part15B Class A, ICES-003, Class A
Safety IEC 61508, EN61508 SIL3, IEC 62061, EN62061 SIL CL3,
ISO/EN13849-1:2015 Cat. 4, PL e, UL1998
3-22 GC Series User’s Manual
3-3 Remote I/O Modules
Item GC-R48
Power supply Power voltage 24 VDC (-20 to +20 %) Class 2
Current consumption Max. 90 mA*5
Enclosure ratings IP65/67 (IEC 60529) (TÜV SÜD certified)
Dimensions 64.8 x 141.5 x 34.5 mm
(W x D x H) 3
Materials PBT (GF 30 %), SUS304
Specifications
Weight Approx. 420 g
*1 When connecting multiple remote I/O modules, power needs to be supplied to each remote I/O module.
"Installing Remote I/O Modules" (page 6-5)
*2 Paragraph 6.4.6 Temporary overload of IEC 61131-2 supports up to 1.2 times the maximum load current.
*3 Power supply outputs and test outputs do not comply with paragraph 6.4.6 of IEC 61131-2.
*4 When the test output is branched and connected to multiple safety input devices, the total branched cable length must not exceed 400 m.
*5 Except for load current and input devices.
Part names
(1) CN5
(2) CN6 (5) POWER LED
(3) CN7 (6) ERROR LED
(7) Input indicators
(8) Output indicators
Pin arrangement (M12 8 pins)
(4) CN1 to CN4
1 2
7 8 3
6 4
5
Number Name Function
(1) CN5* A connector used for communication between the main controller and the remote I/
O module, or connection to an external power supply.
(2) CN6* A connector used for communication between the main controller and the remote I/
O module, or between remote I/O modules.
(3) CN7 A connector used to cascade with another remote I/O module.
(4) CN1 to CN4 Terminals for input/output device.
(5) POWER LED Turns ON (green) while power is supplied.
(6) ERROR LED Blinks (red) when an error occurs.
(7) Input indicators An input indicator for M12 connector Pin 5.
Input ON: Turns ON in green.
Input OFF: Turns OFF.
(8) Output indicators An output indicator for M12 connector Pin 3.
Output ON: Turns ON in green.
Output OFF/Not used: Turns OFF.
* The necessary connector, cable and wiring method varies depending on the number of remote I/O modules to be connected.
For connection with the main controller, refer to the following page.
"Installing Remote I/O Modules" (page 6-5)
GC Series User’s Manual 3-23
3-4 Dimensions Unit: mm
Main Controllers
GC-1000
3 16.4 95
1
Specifications
27.3
35.9
90
4
60 (46.2)
(64.8)
GC-1000R
18.2 95
1
27.3
35.9
90
4
85 (46.2)
3-24 GC Series User’s Manual
3-4 Dimensions
Expansion Units
GC-S84
3.6
16.4 95
3
Specifications
27.3
35.9
90
4
5.5 22.2
GC-S16
16.4 95
3.6
27.3
35.9
90
4
5.5 22.2
GC-S1R
18.2 95
3.6
27.3
35.9
90
5.5 39.6
4
GC Series User’s Manual 3-25
3-4 Dimensions
GC-A16
16.4 95
3.6
27.3
3
Specifications
35.9
90
4
5.5 22.2
GC-B30
16.4 95
3.6
27.3
35.9
90
5.5 22.2
4
16.4 95
27.3
35.9
90
22.2
4
3-26 GC Series User’s Manual
3-4 Dimensions
Remote I/O Modules
GC-R45
2.2
(15)
Specifications
141.5
128
4.5
6.75
2×ø 64.8 34.5
40.7
GC-R48
2.2
(15)
141.5
128
6.75
4.5
2×ø 64.8 34.5
40.7
GC Series User’s Manual 3-27
3-4 Dimensions
Others
GS-Y11 (Y-shaped connector for GC-Link)
3 M12 female
5-pin
ø14.6
8.9
ø14.6
8.9
M12 male
5-pin
Pin arrangement
Specifications
M12 5-pin male M12 5-pin female
2 2
3 5 1 1 5 3
4 4
13.9
25
54.3
M12 8-pin female
2 x ø4.5 Mounting holes
24.9
2 3
ø8 Spot-facing d=4.2 1
8 4
7 5
6
ø14.6 19
M12 female
8-pin 25.4
38
GS-Y12 (end connector for GC-Link)
M12, male
24
ø14.5
GS-Y12
3-28 GC Series User’s Manual
4
Calculating
Response Time
Calculating Response Time
This chapter describes how to calculate the response time.
4-1 Calculating Response Time.................................................................................page 4-2
GC Series User’s Manual 4-1
4-1 Calculating Response Time
The following describes how to calculate the response time.
Response Time
The GC response time is the maximum time required for the GC Series to execute a program based on a signal from a
safety input device and shut off the output sent to the safety output device. Safety distances (minimum distances) are
calculated using the response time.
4 Response time of
Calculating Response Time
overall system
Safety input devices Safety output device
Response time of input device Actuator response time
GC Series
GC Series response time (ms) = Base response time 4.8 ms
+ Added time for input device connection point (1)
+ Added time for input blocks (2)
+ Added time for program (3)
+ Added time for output device connection point (4)
+ Added time for output blocks (5)
4-2 GC Series User’s Manual
4-1 Calculating Response Time
Calculating the GC Series response time
Base response time 4.8ms
+
(1) Added time for input device connection point ON -> OFF OFF -> ON
*1
When connecting to the main controller (GC-Link , terminal block) 0 (No addition)
When connecting to an expansion unit or remote I/O module +1.7ms 4
+
Calculating Response Time
(2) Added time for input blocks ON -> OFF OFF -> ON
Filtering time setting: 0.5 ms +0.7ms +1.2ms
Filtering time setting: 1 ms or more +Filtering time*2 +Filtering time*2
+0.5ms
When using the test output +4.5ms +34ms
+
(3) Added time for program
When using a timer function, such as OFF-delay and ON-delay Add delay time by timer*3
When using a register +2.0 ms *4
+
(4) Added time for output device connection point ON -> OFF OFF -> ON
When connecting to the main controller 0 (No addition)
When connecting to an expansion unit or remote I/O module +2.4ms
+
(5) Added time for output blocks*5 ON -> OFF OFF -> ON
S-OUT (transistor output) 0 (No addition)
S-OUT (Relay output) +10ms +32 ms *6
*1 Add the response time of the input device itself, if any.
*2 For details on filtering time, "Safety Input Functions" (page 6-15).
*3 OFF-delay and ON-delay timers are set by the function blocks.
For details, refer to "Function Block Reference Manual".
*4 When arranging multiple registers in series, add 2 ms per register pair (store and load).
For example, when two register pairs are arranged in series, add 4 ms.
*5 For AUX outputs, add 0.5 ms.
*6 The minimum OFF time of relay output is 300 ms.
Reference For the response times of KEYENCE safety sensors, refer to the manual for each sensor.
"GL-R Series User's Manual"
"GL-S Series User's Manual"
"GS Series (Non-contact) User's Manual"
"GS Series (Lock) User's Manual"
"GS-M Series User's Manual"
"SZ-V Series User's Manual"
"SZ Series User's Manual"
GC Series User’s Manual 4-3
4-1 Calculating Response Time
Response time calculation example 1
GC-1000
Safety light curtains
GL-R20H (wire synchronization)
4 OSSD signal
Calculating Response Time
Connected to GC-1000 terminal block
Robot
S-OUT signal
Connected to GC-1000
terminal block
Input device Safety light curtain GL-R20H Response time: 6.6 ms*1
Wiring system: Wire synchronization used
GC Series Input device connection point GC-1000 terminal block
Input filtering time 0.5ms
Output device connection point GC-1000 terminal block
Output block S-OUT (transistor output)
Output device Robot Response time: 40 ms
*1 The response time of the GL-R Series varies based on the wiring system and model.
For details, refer to "GL-R Series User's Manual".
<Calculation example>
Input device Sensor response time 6.6ms
Base response time 4.8ms
+ Added time for input device connection point 0ms
GC Series + Added time for input blocks 0.7ms 5.5ms
+ Added time for output device connection point 0ms
+ Added time for output blocks 0ms
Output device Robot response time 40ms
Response time of overall system 52.1ms
4-4 GC Series User’s Manual
4-1 Calculating Response Time
Response time calculation example 2
Safety interlock switches
GC-S84 GS-11PC
GC-1000 GC-S84
OSSD signal
4
Calculating Response Time
Connected to GC-S84
terminal block
S-OUT signal Robot
Connected to GC-S84
terminal block
Input device Safety Interlock Switches GS-11PC Response time: 26ms*1
4 units cascaded
GC Series Input device connection point GC-S84 terminal block
Input filtering time 2.0ms
Output device connection point GC-S84 terminal block
Output block S-OUT (transistor output)
Output device Robot Response time: 40 ms
*1 When cascading the GS Series, use the following formula to calculate the response time.
Response time = 20 ms + 2 ms × (number of cascaded units - 1)
<Calculation example>
Input device Sensor response time 26ms
Base response time 4.8ms
+ Added time for input device connection point 1.7ms
GC Series + Added time for input blocks 2.0ms 10.9ms
+ Added time for output device connection point 2.4ms
+ Added time for output blocks 0ms
Output device Robot response time 40ms
Response time of overall system 76.9ms
GC Series User’s Manual 4-5
MEMO
4
Calculating Response Time
4-6 GC Series User’s Manual
5
Operating
Main Controller
Operating Main Controller
This chapter describes how to operate the GC Series main controller.
5-1 Screen Configuration ...........................................................................................page 5-2
5-2 Screen Details.......................................................................................................page 5-4
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-1
5-1 Screen Configuration
The GC Series displays five types of screens in addition to the TOP screen.
TOP 1. S-OUT Monitor S-OUT Analyzer
[S-OUT]
Displays the S-OUT status. The time at which
the S-OUT signal last turned OFF is also
displayed. The S-OUT related input block
status is also displayed, which helps you to
promptly identify the cause of the S-OUT OFF.
"S-OUT Monitor" (page 5-7)
2. Unit Monitor
You can monitor the GC
The display varies
Series operation status and
5 main controller input/output
status.
[Unit] depending on the
connected unit. You can
monitor the KEYENCE
Operating Main Controller
When an alert or error occurs,
safety sensors
the screen changes to display
connected to an
the error description.
expansion unit or GC-
"TOP Screen" (page 5-4)
Link port.
"Unit Monitor" (page
Menu 1. S-OUT Monitor 5-11)
[Menu]
Alert/Error Occurrence
[Enter]
This screen can also be
displayed by pressing [S-
OUT] on the TOP screen.
2. Unit Monitor
This screen can also be
displayed by pressing
[Unit] on the TOP screen.
3. Error History
You can review the error
history.
"Error History" (page 5-
16)
4. System Info
You can review the project or
unit information and network
settings.
"System Information"
(page 5-17)
5. Settings
You can adjust the
brightness of the LCD
display, configure the
automatic screen off
function, or restart the main
controller.
"Settings" (page 5-19)
5-2 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
5-1 Screen Configuration
Basic Operations
Use the operation keys and BACK key to switch to each screen. The functions of the operation keys vary depending on the
screen. For details, refer to the operation method for each screen.
LCD display
Key function display 5
Operating Main Controller
Operation keys
BACK key
Relationship between the functions on the display and the operation buttons/keys
The functions shown at the bottom of the LCD display correspond with the
associated display buttons/keys.
(Example)
Left key: Pressing this button transitions the display to the [S-OUT Monitor]
screen.
Center key: Pressing this button transitions the display to the [Unit
Monitor] screen.
Right key: Pressing this button transitions the display to the [Menu]
screen.
BACK key: Returns to the previous screen.
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-3
5-2 Screen Details
TOP Screen
The TOP screen shows the S-OUT (safety output) status, the GC Series operation status, the main controller input/output
status, etc.
Display item
Normal operation
(2) (3) (4)
5
Operating Main Controller
(5)
(1)
(6)
(11)
(7)
(10) (9) (8)
Item Details
(1) S-OUT status Displays the S-OUT status.
All S-OUTs are ON: [S-OUT ON] (green)
Any S-OUT is OFF: [S-OUT OFF] (red)
For the case of [S-OUT OFF], the S-OUT list appears as a sub display.
Sub display
Shows a list of S-OUTs in the OFF state.
(2) Program execution status Program execution in progress: [RUN] (green)
Program execution stopped: [STOP] (red)
(3) Log in status The icon appears when connecting to the GC Configurator and logging in.
(4) Configuration code (CRC) Displays an eight digit code to identify the settings information.
(5) Input terminal status Displays the input terminal "Si" statuses of the main controller.
ON: (green), OFF: (red), Not used: (off)
(6) S-OUT terminal status Displays the output terminal "So" statuses of the main controller.
ON: (green), OFF: (red), Not used: (off)
(7) AUX output terminal status Displays the output terminal "Ao" statuses of the main controller.
ON: (green), OFF: (red), Not used: (off)
(8) Key function display: [Menu] Pressing the operation key (right) transitions the display to the [Menu] screen.
(9) Key function display: [Unit] Pressing the operation key (center) transitions the display to the [Unit Monitor] screen.
(10) Key function display: [S-OUT] Pressing the operation key (left) transitions the display to the [S-OUT Monitor] screen.
(11) GC-Link status Displays the series name connected to the GC-Link port and the safety input status.
ON: (green), OFF: (red), Not used: (off)
5-4 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
5-2 Screen Details
Alert/Error Occurrence
When an alert or error occurs, the alert or error information is displayed on the TOP screen.
Press the operation key (left) to display the detail screen.
[Error] [Alert] [Information]
Operating Main Controller
[Detail screen] (1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Item Details
(1) Error type Displays the error type. (Alert, Error, Info)
(2) Page number Displays the selected page number and the total page number when multiple alerts/errors have
occurred.
(3) Error title Displays the error title (two lines).
(4) Error detail Displays the error detail. The displayed content varies by the error type.
(5) Error code Displays the error code.
(6) Error message Displays the detailed message for the error.
(7) Page change Used to change the page when multiple alerts/errors have occurred.
Reference The screen that appears at the occurrence of an alert or error is cleared by pressing the [BACK] key. Pressing the left
operation key [Alert], [Error] or [Info] displays the detail screen.
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-5
5-2 Screen Details
When using PROFINET
The PROFINET communication information is displayed on the top of the TOP screen only when configuring the
PROFINET settings and the main controller is the GC-1000.
(1) (2) (3) (4)
5
Operating Main Controller
Item Details
(1) SF Displays the GC Error status.
Error status: (red), Normal operation: (off)
(2) BF Displays the Ethernet communication status.
Ethernet communication error status: (red), Normal operation: (off)
(3) LNK Displays the Ethernet communication status.
Connected: (green), Received the FLASH signal: (blinks in green), Not connected: (off)
(4) ACT Displays the communication status of the Ethernet port.
Communicating: (blinks in orange), Not communicating: (off)
5-6 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
5-2 Screen Details
S-OUT Monitor
The [S-OUT Monitor] screen allows you to monitor the status of each S-OUT (safety output). You are able to review the
input/output status at the time of the S-OUT OFF on the [S-OUT Analyzer] screen.
Screen transition
TOP screen TOP screen
(S-OUT ON) (S-OUT OFF)
5
Operating Main Controller
[S-OUT Monitor] screen [S-OUT Analyzer] screen
[S-OUT] [Enter]
[Back] [Back]
Reference When only one S-OUT is used by a program, the [S-OUT Monitor] screen is not displayed.
Instead, the [S-OUT Analyzer] screen is displayed.
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-7
5-2 Screen Details
When [S-OUT Monitor] is displayed
Display item
(1) (2)
5
Operating Main Controller
(4) (3)
Item Details
(1) List of safety outputs Displays a list of the safety outputs used by a program.
For details of the display, refer to the following items.
(2) Safety output status Displays the safety output status. ON: (green), OFF: (red)
(3) Key function display: [Enter] Press the operation key (right) to transition to the [S-OUT Analyzer] screen for the
active safety output.
(4) Key function display: [], [] Press the operation key (left or center) to select an active safety output.
List of safety outputs
(1) (2) (3)
Item Details
(1) Safety output [S-OUT]
type
(2) Unit number • Main: Main controller GC-1000 or GC-1000R
• Ex*: Expansion units (* indicates a unit number)
(3) Terminal The terminal number assigned to S OUT on each unit.
number
Reference When the reset block related to the selected safety output block or the reset
function is requesting a reset, the character string [Reset Required] is displayed.
5-8 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
5-2 Screen Details
When [S-OUT Analyzer] is displayed
The [S-OUT Analyzer] screen displays the most recent S-OUT OFF event with the status change of the related input blocks.
You can easily review the cause of the S-OUT OFF by checking the input block status at the time of the S-OUT OFF.
Select the S-OUT you want to review on the [S-OUT Monitor] screen and press the [Enter] button. The events of the
selected S-OUT are read from the GC main controller and displayed.
Display item
(1) (4)
(2) 5
Operating Main Controller
(5)
(3)
(7) (6)
Item Details
(1) S-OUT OFF event occurrence time Displays the relative time for the occurrence of the S-OUT OFF event.
The relative time indicates the time difference between the current time and the time at
which an S-OUT OFF event occurred.
(2) Safety output information Displays the type, unit number and terminal number of the selected safety output.
(3) Input block information Displays the type, unit number and terminal number of the input block related to the
selected safety output.
(4) Status change information Displays the icon that indicates the status change of the related input block at the
occurrence of the S-OUT OFF event. For details of the display, refer to "Status change"
(page 5-10).
(5) Current value monitor Displays the current values of safety output and input block.
ON: (green), OFF: (red)
(6) Key function display: [Update] Displayed when a new S-OUT OFF event occurred and the displayed information was
no longer the most recent event.
Press the operation key (right) to update the event information.
Key function display: [Adv.] When the GS/GS-M Series or GL-R Series is connected to the GC-Link port, you can
review the interlock switch open/close state at the occurrence of the S-OUT OFF event
or blocked optical axis of safety light curtain. For details of the display, refer to "GC-
Link operation log" (page 5-10).
(7) Key function display: [], [] When there are multiple related input blocks and they cannot be displayed on a single
screen, press the operation key (left or center) to change the screen to display the
input blocks.
Reference When you enter the [S-OUT Analyzer] screen when a S-OUT OFF event does not
exist, [No OFF Event] will be displayed.
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-9
5-2 Screen Details
Status change
Input status: ON -> OFF
Input status: OFF -> ON
Input status: ON -> ON, no change
Input status: OFF -> OFF, no change
Mode selecting switch status: M1 -> M2 (M2 -> M1)
5 Mode selecting switch status: M1 (M2) -> Undefined state
Operating Main Controller
GC-Link operation log
When the GS/GS-M Series or GL-R Series is connected to the GC-Link port, you can press the [Adv.] key to check the
door sensor open/close state or blocked optical axis of safety light curtain at the occurrence of the event.
[Adv.]
[Port A] or [Port B]
GL-R Series GS/GS-M Series
Displays the optical axis blocked Displays the open/close state and lock
by the GL-R Series. "GL-R Error" state of the GS/GS-M Series.
is displayed when the GL-R
Series is in the error state.
5-10 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
5-2 Screen Details
Unit Monitor
The [Unit Monitor] screen allows you to monitor the input/output status of the main controller, expansion unit and remote I/O
module. You can also monitor the status of the KEYENCE safety sensor connected to the GC-Link port.
Screen transition
TOP screen
Operating Main Controller
[Unit Monitor] screen
[Unit] [Main controller] [Vary by unit] [Vary by unit]
[]
[]
[]
[Back] []
Displays a list of the units connected to the GC Series.
Main: Main controller
P.A/P.B: GC-Link port A/B
Ex*: Expansion units (* indicates a unit number)
Rm*: Remote I/O module (* indicates a unit number)
Ext.: Bus extension unit
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-11
5-2 Screen Details
When selecting Main (main controller), Ex (expansion unit) or Rm (remote I/O module)
Display item
(1)
(2)
5
Operating Main Controller
(3)
Item Details
(1) Unit name and model Displays the selected unit name and model.
(2) Input/output status Displays the input/output status. ON: (green), OFF: (red)
Si: Safety input
So: Safety output
SRo: Safety output (relay)
Ao: AUX outputs
Ai: AUX input
(3) Key function display: [], [] Press the operation key (left or center) to change the selected unit.
When selecting P.A/P.B (GC-Link device)
The status of the KEYENCE safety sensor connected via GC-Link is displayed. The displayed content varies by the
connected safety sensor.
GL-R Series
[Unit Monitor] [GL-R Monitor]
[Detail]
[Back]
Reference For [Unit Monitor] and [GL-R Monitor] dedicated for the GL-R Series,
refer to "GL-R received-light-amount monitoring function" (page 6-68)
5-12 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
5-2 Screen Details
GS/GS-M Series
[Unit Monitor] [GS Monitor]
[Detail]
[Back]
5
Operating Main Controller
Reference For [Unit Monitor] and [GS Monitor] dedicated for the GS/GS-M Series,
refer to "GS monitoring function" (page 6-90)
GL-S Series
[Unit Monitor]
(1)
(2)
Item Details
(1) Safety input status Displays the safety input status. ON: (green), OFF: (red)
(2) Indicator control output status Displayed when the GL-S indicator control output is used.
Shows the display color of the indicator control output block (green/red/orange/off).
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-13
5-2 Screen Details
SZ-V Series, SZ Series
[Unit Monitor]
(1)
(2)
(3)
5
Operating Main Controller
Item Details
(1) Safety input status Displays the safety input status. ON: (green), OFF: (red)
(2) AUX input status Displays the AUX input status. ON: (green), OFF: (red)
(3) Bank switching output status Displayed when the bank switching function is used.
Shows the bank number specified by the bank output block.
5-14 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
5-2 Screen Details
Menu
Screen transition
TOP screen
Operating Main Controller
[Menu] screen [S-OUT Monitor]
[Menu]
[Enter]
[Back] [Back]
[Unit Monitor]
[Enter]
[Back]
[Error History]
[Enter]
[Back]
[System Info]
[Enter]
[Back]
[Settings]
[Enter]
[Back]
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-15
5-2 Screen Details
Error History
The [Error History] screen allows you to review the error history.
Screen transition
TOP screen
5
Operating Main Controller
[Error History] screen
[Menu]
[]
[Enter]
[Back]
[Back]
Display item
(2)
(1) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Item Details
(1) Error sequence number Displays the error sequence number in order from the most recent error.
(2) Operation time Displays the time at which the error occurred. This value is specified as the amount of
time that has expired since the GC series was powered on.
(3) Error code Displays the error code.
(4) Error title Displays the error title using two lines.
(5) Error detail Displays detailed information such as a port name or terminal generating an error.
(6) Key function display: [], [] Press the operation key (left or center) to select an error.
Reference The error history will display up to 100 errors, beginning from the most recent occurrence.
5-16 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
5-2 Screen Details
System Information
The [System Info] screen displays the information related to a project, unit and network communication function.
Screen transition
TOP screen
Operating Main Controller
[System Info] screen
[Menu]
[]
[Enter]
[Back]
[Back]
Display item
(1)
(3) (2)
Item Details
(1) System information list Displays the available items to select.
(2) Key function display: [Enter] Press the operation key (right) to transition the display to the selected item.
(3) Key function display: [], [] Press the operation key (left or center) to select an item.
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-17
5-2 Screen Details
Program Info
Project Name Displays the project name transferred to the GC main controller.
Transfer Date Time Displays the date and time on which the project was transferred to the GC
main controller.
Config. Code(CRC) Displays the configuration code (CRC) of the project transferred to the GC
main controller.
Unit Info
5 Main Controller Type
Main Controller S/N
Displays the model of the main controller.
Displays the serial number of the main controller.
Operating Main Controller
Main Controller Ver. Displays the software version of the main controller.
* When an expansion unit or remote I/O module is connected, the information of each unit is displayed.
Network Info
IP Setting Displays the IP address setting method ([Static IP Address] or [BOOTP/DHCP]).
MAC Address Displays the MAC address.
IP Address Displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask.
Default Gateway Displays the default gateway.
PROFINET Info
Device Name Displays the device name.
IM0 MANUFACTURER ID Displays the manufacturer number. The manufacturer number of
KEYENCE is 0509.
IM0 SERIAL NUMBER Displays the serial number of the main controller.
IM0 HARDWARE REV. Displays the hardware version of the main controller.
IM0 SOFTWARE REV. Displays the firmware version of the main controller.
IM1 TAG FUNCTION*1 Displays the tag information of the functions.
IM1 TAG LOCATION*1 Displays the tag information of the locations.
IM2 INSTALL. DATE*1 Displays the tag information of the installation date.
IM3 DESCRIPTOR*1 Displays the comments.
IM4 SIGNATURE Displays the configuration code (CRC) of the project transferred to the GC
main controller.
*1 These information can be set by the user. These information can be set by GC Configurator or the
configuration software of the PROFINET IO controller.
"Communication" (page 8-12)
Point • The network information is displayed only when the main controller is the GC-1000.
• The network information items cannot be changed on the GC-1000 main controller. Configure them
using the GC Configurator, etc. "10-7 Setting Options" (page 10-20)
• The PROFINET information is displayed only when configuring the PROFINET settings and the main
controller is the GC-1000. " PROFINET Communication Settings" (page 17-4)
5-18 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
5-2 Screen Details
Settings
The [Settings] screen allows you to adjust the brightness of the LCD display, configure the automatic screen turn-off
function, or restart the GC main controller.
Screen transition
TOP screen
Operating Main Controller
[Settings] screen
[Menu]
[]
[Enter]
[Back]
[Back]
Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the main controller LCD display.
Item Details
Key function display: [], [] Press the operation key (left or center) to adjust the screen brightness.
Key function display: [Save] Press the operation key (right) to save the brightness setting.
GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual) 5-19
5-2 Screen Details
Auto Screen Off
With [Enable] set, the screen will automatically turn OFF when the buttons on the GC main controller are not engaged for
five minutes or longer. (Default: Disable)
The screen will turn ON again when either of the following conditions is met.
• An error/alert occurs.
• A button is engaged.
5
Operating Main Controller
Item Details
Automatic screen turn-off function Select [Enable]/[Disable] for the automatic screen turn-off function.
Key function display: [], [] Press the operation key (left or center) to select [Enable] or [Disable].
Key function display: [Save] Press the operation key (right) to save the setting.
Restart Request
You can restart the GC main controller.
Item Details
Key function display: [Yes] Press the operation key (center) to restart the GC main controller.
Key function display: [No] Press the operation key (left) to cancel and return to the [Settings] screen.
5-20 GC Series User’s Manual (This Manual)
6
Installation and Wiring
This chapter describes how to install and wire the GC Series. 6
Installation and Wiring
6-1 Installing Units......................................................................................................page 6-2
6-2 Wiring Units ........................................................................................................page 6-10
6-3 Connecting Input Devices .................................................................................page 6-23
6-4 Connecting Output Devices ..............................................................................page 6-39
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors ............................................................page 6-47
GC Series User’s Manual 6-1
6-1 Installing Units
Cautions for Installing Units
Be sure to connect each unit while the power is OFF.
Point The GC-1000R cannot be connected to expansion units or remote I/O modules.
6
Installation and Wiring
Main controller Expansion units
Maximum number of units
Up to ten expansion units and four remote I/O modules can be connected to a single main controller "GC-1000". (The bus
extension unit "GC-B30" is not included in this number, and only one set of "GC-B30" can be used.)
Expansion units Expansion units
GC-S84 GC-S84
GC-S16 GC-S16
Main controller GC-S1R Bus extension unit GC-S1R
GC-1000 GC-A16 GC-B30 GC-A16
Max. 30 m
Max. 10 units
Max. 30 m
Max. 120 m
Max. 30 m Max. 30 m Max. 30 m
Power Power Power Power
supply supply supply supply
Remote I/O modules GC-R45/R48
Max. 4 units
Point Only the GC-S1R or GC-B30 can be installed on the right side of the GC-S1R.
6-2 GC Series User’s Manual
6-1 Installing Units
Arranging Units Installing Main Controller and
Expansion Units
1 Slide the upper and lower lock levers of the right
unit to release the lock. Remove the expansion
connector cover on the right side of the left unit.
Installation orientation
When installing inside a panel, be sure to arrange the
display side of the GC Series main controller so that it
faces forward.
Installation and Wiring
Clearance from surroundings
Ensure that there is a clearance of at least 30 mm from the
surrounding wall or device.
2 Insert the lock levers of the right unit into the lock
lever slots of the left unit.
Check that no gap is produced between the units. 30 mm Top, left, bottom
Ensure that there is a
30 mm
clearance of 30 mm for
heat radiation.
30 mm
Point If the temperature inside the panel
(temperature at the center of the bottom
of the unit) exceeds the ambient
temperature for use, it is necessary to
either introduce forced air cooling, or to
increase the GC unit's clearance from its
surroundings in order to decrease the
ambient temperature.
3 Slide the upper and lower lock levers of the right
unit to apply the lock.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-3
6-1 Installing Units
Attaching DIN rail Removing DIN rail
1 Hook the upper groove of the DIN rail on the upper 1 Pull out the lower DIN rail mounting tab.
DIN rail mounting tab of each unit.
Pulled out
2 Remove the DIN rail from the unit by following the
attachment procedure in the opposite manner.
6
Installation and Wiring
Upper limit tab
DIN rail
2 Fit the bottom side of the DIN rail into the lower DIN
rail mounting tab of each unit.
• The lower black tab is moved by a spring. Push
against the black tab until a clicking sound is heard.
• If it is difficult to secure the unit to the DIN rail, it is
recommended to pull out all the DIN rail mounting
tabs and then attach the DIN rail. Once the DIN rail
is attached, push in the DIN rail mounting tabs to
lock.
Lower black tab
Pushed in Pulled out
3 Check that the lower DIN rail mounting tab is
pushed in (locked).
6-4 GC Series User’s Manual
6-1 Installing Units
Installing Remote I/O Modules
Installation orientation
There is not a specific restriction.
Clearance from surroundings
There is not a specific restriction.
Securing method
6
Secure the unit using the two mounting holes (upper and lower sides) and M4 screws.
Installation and Wiring
Tightening torque: 1.5 N·m
Point • Install a remote I/O module on a flat surface. If the mounting surface has an irregular shape, any
excessive force applied to the remote I/O module may cause damage to the unit.
• If the two parts are not secured properly, vibration may interfere with the device's operation.
Connecting to the main controller
Connection cables
A remote I/O module and the main controller "GC-1000" are connected by the dedicated cable.
The cable used and connection method vary by the number of remote I/O modules to be connected.
Point The main controller "GC-1000R" cannot be connected to remote I/O modules.
The remote I/O modules "GC-R45" and "GC-R48" can coexist.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-5
6-1 Installing Units
Connecting between the Remote I/O Modules
When using two or more remote I/O modules, connecting between the remote I/O modules is required.
Connection cables
The remote I/O modules are connected with a remote I/O module extension cable.
6
Installation and Wiring
Point • The remote I/O module extension cable has a direction to connect.
Use the model label of the remote I/O module extension cable as a mark and connect the connectors as
follows:
- Connect the connector which is further from the model label to the CN7 of the first remote I/O module
- Connect the connector which is closer to the model label to the CN6 of the second remote I/O module
• When using three or more remote I/O modules, connect them in the same way as the second and third
modules and third and fourth modules.
• If the remote I/O module extension cable is connected in the wrong direction, the “Remote I/O Module
Config. Mismatch” error occurs.
[Using a single remote I/O module] [Using two or more remote I/O modules]
(1)
(2) (3)
CN5 Communication
only CN6 CN7 CN6 CN7
Communication +
power supply (4) CN5 CN5 CN5
Power Power Power
supply supply supply
6-6 GC Series User’s Manual
6-1 Installing Units
Number Product name Model Length
(1), (2) Remote I/O module power cable GC-RP10 10 m
GC-RP30 30 m
(3) Remote I/O module extension cable GC-RS10 10 m
GC-RS30 30 m
(4) Remote I/O module external power cable GC-RE10 10 m
Important When using a single remote I/O module, if the current consumption of the connected input device exceeds
2.0 A, use the remote I/O module external power cable.
6
Maximum cable lengths
Installation and Wiring
Main controller
GC-1000 Expansion units
Max. 30 m
Max. 120 m
Max. 30 m Max. 30 m Max. 30 m
Power Power Power Power
supply supply supply supply
Remote I/O modules GC-R45/R48
Max. 4 units
GC Series User’s Manual 6-7
6-1 Installing Units
Reducing Cable Lengths
When you cut the remote I/O module power cable "GC-RP10/RP30" to shorten the length, it is necessary to re-connect
the shortened cable to the connector on the main controller by connecting the individual wires to the appropriate pin
numbers as shown below.
[GC-1000]
[GC-R45/R48]
6
Installation and Wiring
GC-RP10/RP30
[Main controller side]
[Remote I/O module side]
Pin number Wiring color Wiring color Pin number
1 2
1 -- -- 2
3 4 3 -- Brown 4
5 6 5 Shield 6
Short wire
7 Blue 8
7 8
9 Black White 10
9 10 11 Red Yellow 12
11 12
Item Details
Cable sheath stripping length 10 mm
Usable bar terminal wire diameter Bar terminal: 0.25 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
Ferrule terminal: 0.25 mm2 to 0.75 mm2
Point • For the wiring treatment in using the bar/ferrule terminal, comply with the specifications of the terminal
used.
• Do not perform preliminary soldering at the end of the cable.
• To prevent unintended short failure between the cables next to each other, using bar terminals or
Ferrule terminals is recommended.
• The pitch between terminals is 3.5 mm. Pay attention to the insulation sleeve outer diameter of the bar
terminal, etc.
6-8 GC Series User’s Manual
6-1 Installing Units
Installing Bus Extension Units
Maximum cable length
Installation and Wiring
30 m
Terminal arrangement and wiring
GC-B30A GC-B30B
Wiring diagram
Signal Cable (twisted pair 5P + shield) Signal
DA+ DA+
DA- DA-
DB+ DB+
Terminal arrangement
DB- DB-
Signal Signal
DC+ DC+
DA+ DA- DC- DC-
DB+ DB- DD+ DD+
DC+ DC-
DD- DD-
DD+ DD-
N.C. N.C.
N.C. 0V
0V 0V
Shield N.C.
Shield Shield
N.C. N.C.
Cable connected between the bus extension units
When connecting the GC-B30A with the GC-B30B, use a cable that meets one of the specifications listed below.
Item Specification
1 UL Style No. 2464
Shape Shielded multicore cable
Rating 80 °C/300 V
Core thickness AWG 16 to 26
Number of cores Twisted pair 5P + shield
2 UL Style No. 20276
Shape Shielded multicore cable
Rating 80 °C/30 V
Core thickness AWG 16 to 26
Number of cores Twisted pair 5P + shield
GC Series User’s Manual 6-9
6-2 Wiring Units
This section describes the power supply connection method and wiring for the GC Series.
NOTICE Be sure to perform wiring while the power is OFF.
Connecting to Terminal Blocks
The main controller, GC1000/1000R, and expansion unit, GC-S84/S16/A16, are equipped with an European style terminal
block.
Compatible cable/bar terminal
6
Use the cable and bar terminal meeting the following specifications.
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Compatible cable size AWG16 to 26 (copper wire, stranded wire)
(Nominal cross-section area: 0.2 mm2 to 1.5 mm2)
Cable sheath stripping length 10.0 mm
10 mm
Usable bar terminal wire diameter Bar terminal: 0.25 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
Ferrule terminal: 0.25 mm2 to 0.75 mm2
Point • For the wiring treatment in using the bar/ferrule terminal, comply with the specifications of the terminal
used.
• Do not perform preliminary soldering at the end of the cable.
• To prevent unintended short failure between the cables next to each other, using bar terminals or
Ferrule terminals is recommended.
• The pitch between terminals is 3.5 mm. Pay attention to the insulation sleeve outer diameter of the bar
terminal, etc.
Connection method
Insert the cable while pushing in the orange protrusion with a flat-head screwdriver or similar tool.
Flat-head screwdriver
6-10 GC Series User’s Manual
6-2 Wiring Units
Assigning Input/Output Terminals
The following describes the assignment of the inputs/outputs for each unit. For details of each signal, refer to the following
page.
"Connecting Power Supplies" (page 6-13)
"6-3 Connecting Input Devices" (page 6-23)
"6-4 Connecting Output Devices" (page 6-39)
"GC-Link" (page 6-30)
Main controller
GC-1000 GC-1000R 6
Installation and Wiring
GC-Link port A GC-Link port A
GC-Link port B GC-Link port B
Relay
Terminal blocks Terminal blocks terminal block
0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Si0 Si1 1 13 SRo
2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Si2 Si3 3
23 SRo
4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs 33 SRo
Safety inputs Si
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si 8 Si8 Si9 9 14 SRo
10 Si10 Si11 11 10 Si10 Si11 11
24 SRo
12 Si12 Si13 13 12 Si12 Si13 13
14 Si14 Si15 15 14 N.C. N.C. 15 34 SRo
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs 0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To 2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1 0 So0 So1 1 Safety outputs
Safety outputs So
2 So2 So3 3 2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5 4 N.C. N.C. 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs 0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao 2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply Power supply
+24V 0V terminal +24V 0V terminal
Remote I/O Modules
Connector
Yellow Red
White Black
Blue
Short wire
Shield
Brown N.C.
N.C. N.C.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-11
6-2 Wiring Units
Expansion units
GC-S84 GC-S16 GC-S1R GC-A16
6
Installation and Wiring
Signal Signal Signal
13
23
33
0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Ao0 Ao1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Ao2 Ao3 3
Safety inputs
4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Ao4 Ao5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 6 Si6 Si7 7 6 Ao6 Ao7 7
Safety inputs AUX outputs
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs 8 Si8 Si9 9 8 Ao8 Ao9 9
0 So0 So1 1 10 Si10 Si11 11 10 Ao10 Ao11 11
Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3 12 Si12 Si13 13 12 Ao12 Ao13 13
+24V 0V 14 Si14 Si15 15 14 Ao14 Ao15 15
0 To0 To1 1
Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3
14
24
34
Remote I/O modules
GC-R45 GC-R48
CN6 CN6
CN5 CN7 CN5 CN7
CN1 CN3 CN1 CN3
CN2 CN4 CN2 CN4
1 2
Pin number Function 1 2
Pin number Function
5 Pin 1 +24 V/To1 7 8 3 Pin 1 Ai
4 3 6 4
Pin 2 Si1/Ao 5 Pin 2 +24 V
Pin 3 0V Pin 3 So (lock control output)
Pin 4 Si0 Pin 4 +24 V/To0
Pin 5 +24 V/Ai/To0 Pin 5 Si0
Pin 6 Si1
Pin 7 0V
Pin 8 +24 V/To1
6-12 GC Series User’s Manual
6-2 Wiring Units
Connecting Power Supplies
Connect the power supply for the GC Series to the terminal block of the main controller (GC-1000/1000R).
The power supplied to the expansion units and remote I/O modules originates from the main controller.
Point • Provide power separately to power supply terminal of GC-S84 and GC-B30B. Power is not provided from
the GC-1000 main controller.
• When using two or more remote I/O modules, connect the dedicated power cable to each remote I/O
module. For details, refer to "Connecting to the main controller" (page 6-5).
Installation and Wiring
Signal Signal
0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Si4 Si5 5
Safety inputs
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
6 Si6 Si7 7 Si
Si
8 Si8 Si9 9 8 Si8 Si9 9
10 Si10 Si11 11 10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13 12 Si12 Si13 13
14 Si14 Si15 15 14 N.C. N.C. 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
To To
2 To2 To3 3 2 To2 To3 3
0 So0 So1 1 0 So0 So1 1 Safety outputs
Safety outputs So
2 So2 So3 3 So
2 So2 So3 3
4 So4 So5 5 4 N.C. N.C. 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
Ao Ao
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 2 Ao2 Ao3 3
Power supply Power supply
+24V 0V terminal +24V 0V terminal
Precautions for Wiring Input/Output Devices
Observe the following points when wiring input/output devices.
• Connect the input/output signal cable separately from the 100/200 VAC cable.
• When using a tube for wiring, check that the tube is properly grounded.
• Be sure to turn OFF all of the power supplies before wiring to avoid any potential risk of electrical shock or product
damage.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-13
6-2 Wiring Units
Precautions for installation
• Be sure to perform functional grounding for the DIN rail.
• The grounding resistance must be 100 Ω or less.
Contact protection
When using an inductive load, a rush current may flow at the input of the load's power supply, or a counter-electromotive
voltage may be generated at the shut-off of the load's power supply. A rush current or counter-electromotive voltage can be
particularly damaging to the contacts and may shorten their lifespan. To prevent the occurrence of this phenomenon,
include a contact protection circuit.
Examples of a contact protection circuit
6
With AC load (1) With DC load (1)
Installation and Wiring
Contact Contact
Load Load Diode
CR circuit
With AC load (2) With DC load (2)
Contact Contact
Zener diode
Varistor
• Use the load coil rating that does not exceed the contact capacity.
• Use the diode with a peak inverse voltage that is at least ten times the circuit voltage and with a forward current that is
equal to or larger than the load current.
• Attach the diode, varistor and CR circuit directly to the relay coil terminal.
6-14 GC Series User’s Manual
6-2 Wiring Units
Safety Input Functions
The safety inputs of the main controller "GC-1000/1000R", expansion unit "GC-S84/S16" and remote I/O module "GC-R45/
R48" provide the following functions.
Test output function
This function produces a 24 V output with a test pulse from the test output terminal to detect a failure or wiring error of the
connected safety input device.
[Wiring example]
Connection type: 2 inputs 2 test outputs
Installation and Wiring
Si0 Si1
Si2 Si3
Si4 Si5
Si6 Si7
Si8 Si9
Si10 Si11
Si12 Si13
Si14 Si15
To0 To1
To2 To3
So0 So1
So2 So3
So4 So5
Ao0 Ao1
Ao2 Ao3
+24V 0V
Test output specifications
Item Specification
Output type PNP transistor output
Maximum load current 100 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
Select the "connection type" of each input device to set the test output function. "Connection Types" (page 6-24)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-15
6-2 Wiring Units
Discrepancy detection
A duplicate signal can be connected to the GC Series. This function detects a discrepancy between the two input signals.
It monitors the time that has elapsed from a change in the value of one input signal to a change in the value of the other
input signal. If the value of the other input signal does not change within the predetermined time, it will be judged as an
error.
The discrepancy detection time can be changed via "detailed settings" of each input device. "Input Device Detailed
Settings" (page 10-8)
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Details/Setting range Default
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. Enabled:
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 0.5 seconds
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Operation with discrepancy detection enabled (normal situation)
Si0 terminal
Si1 terminal
Discrepancy time Discrepancy time
Input block
Operation with discrepancy detection enabled (abnormal situation)
OFF to ON ON to OFF
Si 0 terminal
Si 1 terminal
Discrepancy time Discrepancy time
Input block
OFF
Status Normal Alert Normal Alert
6-16 GC Series User’s Manual
6-2 Wiring Units
ON-OFF filter and OFF-ON filter
You can set the filters to prevent chattering of the input device to the safety input terminal or any malfunctions caused by
electromagnetic noise.
The filtering time can be changed via detailed settings of each input device. "Input Device Detailed Settings" (page 10-
8)
Installation and Wiring
Item Details/Setting range Default
ON-OFF A filter used to apply an OFF-delay. Select either seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms) as the unit of 2 ms
filter filtering time and check the corresponding radio button.
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
OFF-ON A filter used to apply an ON-delay. Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10 ms
filter • Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Point • A larger filtering time value increases the resistance to chattering or electromagnetic noise, but a
response to an input signal becomes slower. A slower response increases the required safety distance.
When calculating the response time, add the ON-OFF filtering time. "4 Calculating Response Time"
(page 4-1)
• When the ON-OFF filter and OFF-ON filter are set to "0.5 ms" or "1 ms", connect a resistor of 2.2 kΩ
between the input terminal and 0 V.
Reference When you select "NCNO" or "NONC" in the input logic setting, the ON-OFF filter and OFF-ON filter become the same
value, and as a result, it is only necessary to configure the ON-OFF filter.
Operation with filter setting
Si0 terminal
Filter (OFF to ON) Filter (ON to OFF) Filter (ON to OFF)
Input block
GC Series User’s Manual 6-17
6-2 Wiring Units
Safety Output Functions
The safety outputs of the main controller "GC-1000/1000R", expansion units "GC-S84/S1R" and remote I/O module "GC-/
R48" provide the following functions.
EDM function
When the safety output of the GC Series is connected to an external device such as force guided relay or contactor, the GC
Series can detect a failure of the external device (contact welding, etc.). This monitoring function is called EDM (External
Device Monitoring) function.
Timing chart
6 Error state
S-OUT
Installation and Wiring
EDM
Within detection time Detection time
exceeded
(1) (2)
(1) The GC Series continues normal operation because it detects the operation of an external device in tandem with
the S-OUT operation within the detection time.
(2) The GC Series detects a failure of the external device as an "EDM error" and enters the error state because it does
not detect the operation of the external device within the detection time.
The EDM function can be enabled/disabled via the detailed settings of the output block "S-OUT" or "S-OUT (Relay
output)".
"Output Device Detailed Settings" (page 10-15)
[S-OUT detailed settings]
Item Details
Use EDM input Check this check box to enable the EDM function.
Number Set the signal cable used for the EDM input. (Setting range: 1 or 2)
6-18 GC Series User’s Manual
6-2 Wiring Units
Item Details
Detect EDM error even when output is Check this check box to detect an EDM error even when the S-OUT output is ON.
ON
EDM error detection time Set the EDM error detection time. (Default: 0.30 seconds)
(Setting range: 0.15 to 3.00 seconds, in increments of 0.05 seconds)
Point To use the EDM function of each "S-OUT", the "EDM input" block needs to be configured as well. For
details, refer to "10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5) and "EDM input" (page A-76).
Installation and Wiring
GC Series User’s Manual 6-19
6-2 Wiring Units
Self-diagnostic function
The safety output of the GC Series generates self-diagnostic signals to check the output circuit operation. These signals
periodically force the safety output into a temporary OFF state when the safety output is in the ON state.
When the internal control circuit receives feedback from the self-diagnostic signal (OFF signal), the GC Series determines
that the output circuit is operating normally. If the OFF signal is not returned to the internal control circuit, the GC Series
determines that there is a problem in the output circuit or wiring and then enters the error state.
The safety output self-diagnostic function can be enabled/disabled via the detailed settings of the output block "S-OUT" or
"S-OUT EDM enabled". "Output Device Detailed Settings" (page 10-15) (Default: ON)
[S-OUT detailed settings]
6
Installation and Wiring
<Timing chart>
A: Test pulse width 50 to 250 μs
A
B: Test pulse interval: 53 ms
B C: Test pulse diagnostic interval: Approx. 850 ms
A
ON
So0
OFF
B
ON
So1
OFF
ON
So2
OFF
ON
So3
OFF
ON
So4
OFF
ON
So5
OFF
ON
So6
OFF
C
6-20 GC Series User’s Manual
6-2 Wiring Units
Maximum SIL/PL/Category Achieved by GC Series
Safety input
1 input +
Connection PNP1 2 inputs + 2 inputs +
PNP 2 inputs 1 input 1 test 2 inputs
type input 1 test output 2 test outputs
Input device output
Input NCNO/ NCNO/ NCNO/
NC/NO 2NC/2NO NC/NO NC/NO NC/NO 2NC/2NO 2NC/2NO 2NC/2NO
logic NONC NONC NONC
GL-R Series SIL3/PLe
GL-S Series SIL3/PLe
6
Installation and Wiring
GS/GS-M Series SIL3/PLe
SZ-V Series SIL2/PLd
SZ Series SIL2/PLd
Emergency stop
Cat.2*2 Cat.2*2 Cat.3 Cat.3 Cat.4
switch
Limit switch Cat.2*2 SIL3/PLe*3 SIL3/PLe Cat.2*2 Cat.2*2 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.4 Cat.4
Interlock switch Cat.2*2 SIL3/PLe*3 SIL3/PLe Cat.2*2 Cat.2*2 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.4 Cat.4
Guard locking
Cat.2*2 SIL3/PLe*3 SIL3/PLe Cat.2*2 Cat.2*2 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.4 Cat.4
switch
Light curtain Cat.2*2 SIL3/PLe*3 SIL3/PLe
Laser scanner Cat.2*2 SIL2/PLd*3 SIL2/PLd
Rope pull switch Cat.2*2 Cat.4*3 Cat.4 Cat.2*2 Cat.2*2 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.4 Cat.4
Safety mat Cat.2*2 Cat.3*3 Cat.3 Cat.2*2 Cat.2*2 Cat.3 Cat.3 Cat.3 Cat.3 Cat.3 Cat.3
Two hand control Type III c Type III c Type III c Type III c
device Cat.4 Cat.4 Cat.4 Cat.4
Enabling device Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.4 Cat.4
Other safety
Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.4 Cat.4
switches
Other safety inputs Cat.4*3 Cat.4 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.3 Cat.4 Cat.4 Cat.4
*1 To achieve the above levels, you need to use the appropriate input device that complies with the requirements of SIL (IEC 61508) and
PL/Cat. (ISO 13849-1:2015).
GC Series User’s Manual 6-21
6-2 Wiring Units
*2 Exclusion of failure needs to be applied according to the required standards such as Table D.4 of ISO 13849-2:2012.
*3 When a cable short-circuit between two safety inputs or a short-circuit between a safety input and power line occurs, the input device
is required to detect the trouble and turn OFF the two safety inputs.
*4 A switch that complies with ISO 13851 needs to be used.
• The above table shows the maximum safety levels which can be achieved by the GC Series. However,
the safety performance of a control system needs to be determined by overall system including input
devices and the wiring methods as well as the GC Series. Since the above safety levels may not be
achieved by the actual system combining multiple devices, carefully select the devices to use and the
wiring methods.
• A mechanical interlock switch which is defined as Type1/2 Interlocking Device in ISO 14119 may not
WARNING be able to detect the state that the guard is not at the close position due to an actuator trouble.
Therefore, for the system requiring SIL3/PLe/Cat.4, use two interlock switches (Type1/2) for one
movable guard or use a Type3/4 device that satisfies SIL3/PLe/Cat.4 alone like the GS Series.
6 • When the test output is branched and connected to multiple input devices (e.g. 2 inputs 1 test output),
Installation and Wiring
a short-circuit between the cables connecting the same test output cannot be detected. When
compliance with Cat.4/PLe/SIL3 is necessary, apply exclusion of failure according to Table D4 of ISO
13849-2:2012 to prevent a short-circuit between multiple cables.
Safety output
When the safety output of the GC Series is connected to an external device such as force guided relay or contactor, the GC
Series can detect a failure of the external device (contact welding, etc.). This monitoring function is called EDM (External
Device Monitoring) function.
Safety output type Connection type EDM function Self-diagnostic function Achievable safety level
Enabled SIL3/PLe/Cat.4 *1
Enabled
Disabled SIL2/PLd/Cat.3 *1
Safety output x 1
Enabled SIL3/PLe/Cat.4 *1*2
Disabled
Disabled SIL2/PLd/Cat.3 *1*2
PNP
Enabled SIL3/PLe/Cat.4
Enabled
Disabled SIL2/PLd/Cat.3
Safety output x 2
Enabled SIL3/PLe/Cat.4 *2
Disabled
Disabled SIL2/PLd/Cat.3 *2
Enabled - SIL3/PLe/Cat.4 *1
Relay -
Disabled - SIL3/PLe/Cat.4 *1*2
*1 Exclusion of failure of cable between the safety output and external device (output device) needs to be applied according to Table
D.4 of ISO 13849-2:2012.
Example: Install the GC and external device in the enclosure (e.g. control panel) that complies with IEC 60204-1 and use the cable
complying with the standard.
*2 An external device (output device) alone needs to achieve the above safety level.
The above table shows the maximum safety levels which can be achieved by the GC Series. However,
the safety performance of a control system needs to be determined by overall system including external
WARNING devices (output devices) and the wiring methods as well as the GC Series. Since the above safety levels
may not be achieved by the actual system combining multiple devices, carefully select the devices to
use and the wiring methods.
Reference The safety output is duplicated internally, and the self-diagnostic function is used to detect a failure. Depending on the
operating condition, the requirements of SIL3/PLe/Cat.4 can be satisfied with a single safety output.
6-22 GC Series User’s Manual
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
This section describes how to connect an input device to the GC Series. The connection method of the input device is
determined by a combination of the following items.
1. Input device type(page 6-23)
Example: Safety light curtain, emergency stop switch, etc.
2. Connection type(page 6-24)
• Output type of the input device (contact output device or PNP output device)
• Output form of the input device (single or dual output)
• Use of the test output (contact output device only)
3. Connection destinations(page 6-27)
• GC-Link 6
Installation and Wiring
• Terminal blocks
• Remote I/O modules (M12 5 pins)
• Remote I/O modules (M12 8 pins)
Input Device Types
The following shows the devices that can be connected to the GC Series.
KEYENCE safety sensors
Product name Series
GL-R Series
Safety light curtains
GL-S Series
Safety interlock switches GS/GS-M Series
SZ-V Series
Safety laser scanners
SZ Series
Safety input devices
Emergency stop switch Rope pull switch
Limit switch Safety mat
Interlock switch Two hand control device
Guard locking switch Enabling device
Light curtain Other safety switches
Laser scanner Other safety inputs
GC Series User’s Manual 6-23
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Other input devices
Reset switch Safety plug
Mode selecting switch Hold-to-run switch
EDM input Other switches
Muting input* Other inputs
* This cannot be used in the EASY mode. "11-1 EASY Mode" (page 11-2)
6 Connection Types
Installation and Wiring
When connecting an input device to the GC Series, select a connection type from the following options. The connection
type is determined by a combination of the following items.
• Output type of the input device (contact output device or PNP output device)
• Output form of the input device (single or dual output)
• Use of the test output (contact output device only)
Note that the selectable connection type varies by the input device type and connection destination (e.g. terminal block,
remote I/O module). For details, refer to "A-2 List of input devices" (page A-10).
Short-
Input Test Discrepancy
Connection type Details Wiring diagram circuit Remarks
logic output detection
detection
+24V
Input device
Used when
connecting a
Connect a PNP 1NC OSSD1
PNP 1 input GC Series - None - non-safety
output sensor 1NO
Si0 sensor such as
muting sensor.
0V
PNP
output +24V
A short-circuit
Input device
device detection
2NC OSSD1
Connect a cannot be
2NO
PNP 2 inputs duplicate PNP Si0 - None Available performed on
NC/NO OSSD2
output devices GC Series the GC Series. It
NO/NC
Si1 is performed on
the sensor side.
0V
6-24 GC Series User’s Manual
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Short-
Input Test Discrepancy
Connection type Details Wiring diagram circuit Remarks
logic output detection
detection
+24V
Connect a
1NC Not
1 input single contact None -
1NO used
output device
GC Series
Si0
GC Series
Connect a
single contact
To0 6
1 input + 1NC
Installation and Wiring
output device Used Available -
1 test output 1NO
Use 1 test
output
GC Series
Si0
+24V
Connect a
duplicate 2NC Not
None Available
contact output 2NO used
device Si0
GC Series
Si1
Contact
2 inputs The NO/NC
output
+24V (NC/NO)
device
Connect a
connection
single channel
enables
NC contact and NC/NO Not
None Available shortcircuit
a single channel NO/NC used
Si0
detection
NO contact
GC Series equivalent of
output device
Si1 Cat4 without a
test signal.
GC Series
Connect a To0
duplicate
contact output 2NC
Used Available Available
device 2NO
Use 1 test Si0
output GC Series
Si1
Only To0 or To2
2 inputs + can be selected
1 test output for the test
Connect a
GC Series output.
single channel To0
NC contact and
a single channel NC/NO
Used Available Available
NO contact NO/NC
output device Si0
Use 1 test GC Series
output Si1
GC Series User’s Manual 6-25
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Short-
Input Test Discrepancy
Connection type Details Wiring diagram circuit Remarks
logic output detection
detection
To0
Connect a GC Series
duplicate To1
contact output 2NC The test output
Used Available Available
device 2NO enables
Use 2 test detection of an
Si1
outputs inter-system
GC Series
Con- short-circuit
Si0
tact 2 inputs + between inputs.
6 output 2 test outputs Test outputs and
device Connect a To0 safety inputs
Installation and Wiring
single channel GC Series can only be
NC contact and To1 selected in even
a single channel NC/NO or odd
Used Available Available
NO contact NO/NC combinations.
output device
Si1
Use 2 test
GC Series
outputs
Si0
Reference Select a connection type or input terminal when registering an input device with the GC Configurator.
For details, refer to "10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5).
6-26 GC Series User’s Manual
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Connection destinations
Select a connection destination from the following options.
- GC-Link
The GC-Link is a connection destination dedicated for KEYENCE safety sensors. Connect to the GC-Link port located
on the top of the main controller "GC-1000" or "GC-1000R". The use of the dedicated cable enables connection of a
KEYENCE safety sensor with less wiring work required.
- Terminal blocks
Connection to the connector terminal block of the main controller "GC-1000"/"GC-1000R" and expansion unit "GC-S84"/
"GC-S16".
- Remote I/O modules (M12 5 pins) 6
- Remote I/O modules (M12 8 pins)
Installation and Wiring
The remote I/O module is an IP65/IP67 rated unit which can be installed outside of the panel. There are two models: the
"GCR45" which can be connected using a M12 5-pin connector and the "GC-R48" which can be connected using the
M12 8-pin connector. The "GC-R48" is used to perform the lock control for the KEYENCE Safety Interlock Switches, "GS
Series" (lock type), or safety guard locking switch.
Note that there are restrictions on the input device or connection type used when connecting to a remote I/O module. Refer
to the following table for the devices that can be connected to a remote I/O module.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-27
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Input devices compatible with the GC-R45 (M12 5 pins)
2 inputs
1 input +
+ PNP 2 PNP 1
Input device Connection type 2 inputs 1 test 1 input
2 test inputs input
output
outputs
Safety input KEYENCE safety sensors -- -- -- -- -- --
devices
- GL-R Series -- -- -- -- --
- GL-S Series -- -- -- -- --
*1 *2
- GS Series -- -- -- -- --
*2
- SZ-V Series -- -- -- -- --
- SZ Series -- -- -- -- *2 --
6 Emergency stop switch -- --
Installation and Wiring
Limit switch
Interlock switch
Guard locking switch -- -- -- -- -- --
Light curtain -- -- -- --
Laser scanner -- -- -- --
Rope pull switch
Safety mat
*3
Two hand control device -- -- --
Enabling device -- -- -- --
Other safety switches -- -- -- --
*2
Other safety inputs -- -- --
*4 *4
Other input Reset switch -- -- -- --
devices *4 *4
Mode selecting switch -- -- -- --
EDM input -- -- -- --
Muting input -- -- --
Safety plug -- -- -- --
Hold-to-run switch -- -- -- --
*4 *4
Other switches -- -- -- --
*2 *2
Other inputs -- -- -- *2
Power supply only -- -- -- -- -- --
*1 Only the GS Series non-contact type (GS-10PC) can be connected. Cascade connection using a Y-shaped connector is not
supported.
*2 The advanced input can be used depending on the setting.
*3 Two M12 5-pin connectors are used.
*4 The advanced output can be used depending on the setting.
6-28 GC Series User’s Manual
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Input devices compatible with the GC-R48 (M12 8 pins)
2 inputs
1 input +
+ PNP 2 PNP 1
Input device Connection type 2 inputs 1 test 1 input
2 test inputs input
output
outputs
Safety input KEYENCE safety sensors -- -- -- -- -- --
devices
- GL-R Series -- -- -- -- -- --
- GL-S Series -- -- -- -- -- --
*1 *2
- GS/GS-M Series -- -- -- -- --
- SZ-V Series -- -- -- -- -- --
- SZ Series -- -- -- -- -- --
Emergency stop switch -- -- -- -- -- --
6
Installation and Wiring
Limit switch -- -- -- -- -- --
Interlock switch -- -- -- -- -- --
*2 *2 *3 *3 *2 *3
Guard locking switch
Light curtain -- -- -- -- -- --
Laser scanner -- -- -- -- -- --
Rope pull switch -- -- -- -- -- --
Safety mat -- -- -- -- -- --
*3
Two hand control device -- -- -- -- -- --
Enabling device -- -- -- -- -- --
*4 *4
Other safety switches -- -- -- --
Other safety inputs *4 *4 -- -- *4 --
Other input Reset switch -- -- -- -- -- --
devices
Mode selecting switch -- -- -- -- -- --
EDM input -- -- -- -- -- --
Muting input -- -- -- -- -- --
Safety plug -- -- -- -- -- --
Hold-to-run switch -- -- -- -- -- --
*5 *5
Other switches -- -- -- --
*5 *5
Other inputs -- -- -- *5
Power supply only -- -- -- -- -- --
*1 Cascade connection using a Y-shaped connector is not supported.
*2 Pin 3 is used for the lock control output. Additionally, Pin 1 can be used for the advanced input depending on the setting.
*3 Pin 3 is used for the lock control output. Additionally, Pin 1 and Pin 6 can be used for the advanced input depending on the setting.
*4 Pin 3 is used for the non-safety output. Additionally, Pin 1 can be used for the advanced input depending on the setting.
*5 Pin 3 is used for the non-safety output. Additionally, Pin 1 and Pin 6 can be used for the advanced input depending on the setting.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-29
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Connection Method
GC-Link
Connect a safety sensor to the GC-Link port located on the top of the main controller "GC-1000/GC-1000R" using the
dedicated cables.
<Connection example>
Other safety sensors
connectable via GC-Link
GL-R Series
GC-Link port
6 Port A
Port B
GL-S Series
Installation and Wiring
GS Series GS Series
SZ-V Series SZ Series
Reference Detailed information for connecting KEYENCE safety sensors to the GC-Link port is provided in the following pages.
"GL-R Series"(page 6-65)
"GL-S Series"(page 6-74)
"GS Series (Non-contact Type)"(page 6-79)
"GS Series (Lock Type)"(page 6-79)
"GS-M Series"(page 6-79)
"SZ-V Series"(page 6-93)
"SZ Series"(page 6-106)
6-30 GC Series User’s Manual
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Terminal blocks
Connection to the connector terminal block of the main controller "GC-1000"/"GC-1000R" and expansion unit "GC-S84"/"GC-
S16".
Model Output points
GC-1000 Safety input 16 points*
GC-1000R Safety input 14 points*
GC-S84 Safety input 8 points*
GC-S16 Safety input 16 points*
* These can also be used as inputs of a non-safety device.
GC-1000 GC-1000R GC-S84 GC-S16
6
Installation and Wiring
Signal Signal Signal Signal
0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Si2 Si3 3 Safety inputs 2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Si4 Si5 5 Si 4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs 6 Si6 Si7 7 6 Si6 Si7 7
Safety inputs Safety inputs
Si Test outputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si 8 Si8 Si9 9 0 To0 To1 1 To 8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11 10 Si10 Si11 11 0 So0 So1 1 Safety outputs 10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13 12 Si12 Si13 13 2 So2 So3 3 So 12 Si12 Si13 13
14 Si14 Si15 15 14 N.C. N.C. 15 +24V 0V 14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 0 To0 To1 1 0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
Test outputs Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
2 To2 To3 3 To 2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1 0 So0 So1 1 Safety outputs
Safety outputs So
2 So2 So3 3 2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5 4 N.C. N.C. 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs 0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao 2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
+24V 0V +24V 0V
Safety input specifications
Item GC-1000 GC-1000R GC-S84 GC-S16
Input device Contact output device or PNP output device
Input type Type3
ON level (voltage/current) Min. 11 V/2 mA
OFF level (voltage/current) Max. 2 V/1.5 mA
Short-circuit current Si 0 to 3: Approx. 5 mA Si 0 to 3: Approx. 5 mA Approx. 3 mA Approx. 5 mA
Si 4 to 15: Approx. 3 mA Si 4 to 13: Approx. 3 mA
Protection circuit Surge protection circuit, wrong wiring protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
GC Series User’s Manual 6-31
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Connection example for connecting an input device to the terminal block
Reference Detailed information for connecting KEYENCE safety sensors to the terminal block is provided in the following pages.
"GL-R Series"(page 6-111)
"GL-S Series"(page 6-117)
"GS Series (Non-contact Type)"(page 6-122)
"GS Series (Lock Type)"(page 6-127)
"GS-M Series"(page 6-133)
"SZ-V Series"(page 6-138)
"SZ Series"(page 6-149)
When connecting a safety input device of contact type
(Wiring examples)
6 When using an emergency stop switch in a duplicate manner, combine the connection with the test output terminal.
Installation and Wiring
Connection type: 2 inputs + 2 test outputs Connection type: 2 inputs + 1 test output
To0 To1 To0
GC Series GC Series
Si0 Si1 Si0 Si1
GC Configurator setting example GC Configurator setting example
Reference For the wiring diagram by connection type, refer to "Connection Types" (page 6-24).
For the GC Configurator settings, refer to "10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5).
When connecting a safety input device of PNP output type
(Wiring examples)
The following shows a wiring example for connecting the PNP output type such as safety light curtain.
Connection type: PNP 2 inputs
Transmitter
Receiver
GC Configurator setting example
DC24V GC Series
0V
Control output 1 (OSSD1) Si0 Si1
Control output 2 (OSSD2)
6-32 GC Series User’s Manual
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Reference For the wiring diagram by connection type, refer to "Connection Types" (page 6-24).
For the GC Configurator settings, refer to "10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5).
Remote I/O modules
GC-R45 (M12 5 pins) GC-R48 (M12 8 pins)
CN6 CN6
CN5 CN7 CN5 CN7
6
Power LED Power LED
Installation and Wiring
Input indicator Si1 Error LED Output indicator So Error LED
Input indicator Si0 Input indicator Si
CN1 CN3 CN1 CN3
CN2 CN4 CN2 CN4
Pin number Function 1
Pin number Function
1 2 2
5 Pin 1 +24 V/To1 7 8 3 Pin 1 Ai
4 3 6 4
Pin 2 Si1/Ao 5 Pin 2 +24 V
Pin 3 0V Pin 3 So (lock control output)
Pin 4 Si0 Pin 4 +24 V/To0
Pin 5 +24 V/Ai/To0 Pin 5 Si0
Pin 6 Si1
Pin 7 0V
Pin 8 +24 V/To1
Item Details
CN1 to CN4 Ports used to connect external devices. (GC-R45: M12 5 pins, GC-R48: M12 8 pins)
CN5 Power supply + communication with the main controller
CN6 Communication with the main controller
CN7 Cascade connection (connection with downstream remote I/O module)
Input indicators Turns ON in green at H input or turns off at L input for CN1 to CN4 inputs.
Output indicators Turns ON in green at output (GC-R48 only).
Power LED Turns ON in green while power is supplied.
Error LED Blinks in red when a remote I/O module error occurs.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-33
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Connection method
1 Connect the main controller and remote I/O modules.
Attach the connector cable (tightening torque: 0.24 N·m).
6
Installation and Wiring
2 Connect an input device to a remote I/O module.
Use an M12 connector (tightening torque: 0.4 N·m).
Important • Perform tightening at the specified torque to prevent poor connection or accidental release. Note that
IP65/67 cannot be fulfilled with a loose connector. If it is difficult to manage the torque, tighten by hand
and then re-tighten with a tool such as pliers by 5 to 10 °.
• Attach the supplied connector cap to an unused port and then tighten it at the specified torque.
GC-R45 (M12 5 pins) pin functions
The pin function (signal) varies depending on the "connection type". Set the "connection type" for each connector
terminal with the GC Configurator. For the setting method, refer to "Input Device Basic Settings" (page 10-6).
Connection type
Power
Pin 1 input + 2 inputs + AUX
PNP 1 PNP 2 1 input supply
number 1 test 2 inputs 2 test outputs
*2
input inputs only
output*2 outputs *3
*4
Pin 1 +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V To1 (+24 V) +24 V
*1 (IN)*1 (IN)*1
Pin 2 (IN1) Si1 Si1 Si1 Ao0
Pin 3 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
Pin 4 Si0 Si0 Si0 Si0 Si0 Si0
Pin 5 (IN2)*1 (IN)*1 +24 V To0 +24 V To0
*1 The advanced input can be used depending on the setting.
*2 When selecting "reset switch" or "other switch" for an input device, Pin 2 can be used for the AUX output.
*3 When selecting "AUX output" for an output device, Pin 2 becomes "Ao0".
*4 When selecting "power supply" for an input device, Pins 1 and 3 can be used as an external power supply.
6-34 GC Series User’s Manual
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Name Function
Si0/Si1 Connects a safety input (OSSD, etc.) from a safety input device.
To0/To1 Test output terminal.
1 2
(IN) Connects a AUX-IN (non-safety input) when the advanced input is set.
5
Ao Connects an AUX output (non-safety output) when "AUX-OUT" is selected by 4 3
an output device.
+24 V 24 V supply terminal.
0V 0 V terminal.
Advanced input
The advanced input can be added in the detailed settings of the input device.
6
Installation and Wiring
Connection example for connecting an input device to GC-R45 (M12 5 pins)
Reference Detailed information for connecting KEYENCE safety sensors to the GC-R45 (M12 5 pins) is provided in the following
pages.
"GL-R Series"(page 6-158)
"GL-S Series"(page 6-162)
"GS Series (Non-contact Type)"(page 6-166)
"SZ-V Series"(page 6-179)
"SZ Series"(page 6-183)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-35
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
When connecting an emergency stop switch of contact type
(Wiring examples)
Connection type: 2 inputs + 2 test outputs Connection type: 2 inputs
Si1 To0 0V Si1 24V 0V
2 3 2 3
5 5
1 4 1 4
To1 Si0 24V Si0
6
Installation and Wiring
GC Configurator setting example GC Configurator setting example
Reference For the wiring diagram by connection type, refer to "Connection Types" (page 6-24).
For the GC Configurator settings, refer to "10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5).
When connecting a safety input device of PNP output type
(Wiring examples)
The following shows a wiring example for connecting the PNP output type such as safety light curtain.
Connection type: PNP 2 inputs
Transmitter
Receiver
Si1 0V GC Configurator setting example
2 3
5
DC24V 1 4
0V
Control output 2 (OSSD2) 24V Si0
Control output 1 (OSSD1)
Reference For the wiring diagram by connection type, refer to "Connection Types" (page 6-24).
For the GC Configurator settings, refer to "10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5).
6-36 GC Series User’s Manual
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
GC-R48 (M12 8 pins) pin functions
The pin function (signal) varies depending on the "connection type". Set the "connection type" for each connector
terminal with the GC Configurator. For the setting method, refer to "Input Device Basic Settings" (page 10-6).
Connection type
Pin
1 input + 2 inputs +
number PNP 1 input PNP 2 inputs 1 input 2 inputs
1 test output 2 test outputs
Pin 1 (IN2)*1 (IN)*1 (IN2)*1 (IN2)*1 (IN)*1 (IN)*1
Pin 2 +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V
*2
Pin 3 So So So So So So
(lock control output) (lock control output) (lock control output) (lock control output) (lock control output) (lock control output)
Pin 4 +24 V +24 V +24 V To0 +24 V To0
Pin 5 Si0 Si0 Si0 Si0 Si0 Si0
6
Installation and Wiring
Pin 6 (IN1)*1 Si1 (IN1)*1 (IN1)*1 Si1 Si1
Pin 7 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
Pin 8 +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V +24 V To1
*1 The advanced input can be used depending on the setting.
*2 When selecting "other safety switch", "other safety input", "other switch" or "other input" for an input device, Pin 3 can be used for the
nonsafety output.
Name Function
Si0/Si1 Connects a safety input (OSSD, etc.) from a safety input device.
To0/To1 Test output terminal.
1 2
(IN) Connects a AUX-IN (non-safety input) when the advanced input is set.
7 8 3
6 4 So (lock control output) Lock control output for the GS Series (lock type) and guard locking switch.
5
+24 V 24 V supply terminal.
0V 0 V terminal.
Advanced input
The advanced input can be added in the detailed settings of the input device.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-37
6-3 Connecting Input Devices
Connection example for connecting an input device to GC-R48 (M12 8 pins)
Reference Detailed information for connecting KEYENCE safety sensors to the GC-R48 (M12 8 pins) is provided in the following
pages.
"GS Series (Non-contact Type)"(page 6-166)
"GS Series (Lock Type)"(page 6-170)
"GS-M Series"(page 6-175)
When connecting a guard locking switch of contact type
Connection type: 2 inputs + 2 test outputs
6 GC Configurator setting example
Installation and Wiring
IN +24V
To1
Door open/close monitor 1 2
Lock control
0V 7 8 3 So
6 4
5
Si1 Si0 To0
Door open/close + lock
Door open/close + lock
When connecting a guard locking switch of PNP output type
Connection type: PNP 2 inputs
GC Configurator setting example
IN
IN +24V
Lock control
Interlock switch
(PNP output)
1 2
0V 7 8 3 So
0V +24V
6 4
5
Monitor output
Safety output 2
Si1 Si0
Safety output 1
Reference For the wiring diagram by connection type, refer to "Connection Types" (page 6-24).
For the GC Configurator settings, refer to "10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5).
6-38 GC Series User’s Manual
6-4 Connecting Output Devices
This section describes how to connect an output device to the GC Series.
Output Types
The GC Series provides the following outputs. Select an output in consideration of the input specifications and supporting
safety standards of the device to be connected.
Number Number of outputs of each unit
Corresponding Connection
Output type of
output block type GC-
outputs GC-1000 GC-S84 GC-S1R GC-A16 GC-R45
1000R
Safety output
x1
1 6
S-OUT
Installation and Wiring
Safety output
2
PNP x2
6 4 4
output Safety output
1
S-OUT x1
Safety
EDM enabled Safety output
output 2
x2
S-OUT
Relay output 1 (3a)
(relay output)
Relay
S-OUT 1 (3a) 1 (3a)
output
(relay output) Relay output 1 (3a)
EDM enabled
Non-
PNP
safety AUX-OUT AUX outputs 1 4 4 16 4
output
output
Output blocks such as "S-OUT" arranged in a program are assigned to these outputs. When an output block is either "S-
OUT" or "S-OUT EDM enabled", select a connection type from "Safety output x 1" and "Safety output x 2".
Point The connection type for the output block "S-OUT (relay output)" or "S-OUT (relay output) EDM enabled"
is a 3a relay output. This cannot be changed.
Reference Select a connection destination or connection type in registering an output device with the GC Configurator.
For details, refer to "10-5 Registering Output Devices" (page 10-12).
GC Series User’s Manual 6-39
6-4 Connecting Output Devices
Connection Destinations
Safety outputs (S-OUT)
Connection to the connector terminal block of the main controller "GC-1000"/"GC-1000R" and expansion unit "GC-S84".
Model Output points
GC-1000 Safety output 6 points*
GC-1000R Safety output 4 points*
GC-S84 Safety output 4 points*
* These can also be used as outputs to non-safety devices.
6
GC-1000 GC-1000R GC-S84
Installation and Wiring
Signal Signal Signal
0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Si2 Si3 3 Safety inputs
4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Si4 Si5 5 Si
6 Si6 Si7 7 6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs 6 Si6 Si7 7
Safety inputs Si Test outputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si 8 Si8 Si9 9 0 To0 To1 1 To
10 Si10 Si11 11 10 Si10 Si11 11 0 So0 So1 1 Safety outputs
12 Si12 Si13 13 12 Si12 Si13 13 2 So2 So3 3 So
14 Si14 Si15 15 14 N.C. N.C. 15 +24V 0V
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs 0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To 2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1 0 So0 So1 1 Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3 Safety outputs 2 So2 So3 3 So
So
4 So4 So5 5 4 N.C. N.C. 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs 0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao 2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
+24V 0V +24V 0V
Safety output specifications
Item Specification
Output type PNP transistor output (DC-13, Type 0.5, protected outputs)
Maximum load current 500 mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5 mA
Maximum capacitive load 0.5 μF (with load resistance of 100 Ω)
Load wiring resistance Max. 2.5 Ω
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
6-40 GC Series User’s Manual
6-4 Connecting Output Devices
Connection example for connecting a safety device to the terminal block
(Wiring examples)
So0 So1
R1 R2
GC Series
0V
R1, R2: External devices 6
Installation and Wiring
Reference Wiring example for using the EDM input (1 input)
+24V
R1 GC Series
R2
Si0
R1, R2: External devices
GC Series User’s Manual 6-41
6-4 Connecting Output Devices
Safety outputs S-OUT (relay output)
Connection to the relay terminal block of the main controller "GC-1000R" and expansion unit "GC-S1R".
Model Output points
GC-1000R Safety output 1 point (3a)
GC-S1R Safety output 1 point (3a)
GC-1000R GC-S1R
6
Installation and Wiring
13 SRo
13
23
33
23 SRo
33 SRo
14 SRo
24 SRo
34 SRo
14
24
34
Safety output specifications (relay output)
Output type Relay (3a) (Externally-protected outputs)*1
Rated load (resistance load) 250 VAC 6 A / 30 VDC 6 A*2
Rated load (inductive load) 240 VAC 2 A (AC-15) / 24 VDC 1 A (DC-13)
Relay output mechanical life Resistance load (250 VAC 6 A/30 VDC 6 A): Min. 100,000 times
Resistance load (250 VAC 1 A/30 VDC 1 A): Min. 500,000 times
Inductive load (AC-15: 240 VAC 2 A): Min. 100,000 times (cosø = 0.3)
Inductive load (DC-13: 24 VDC 1 A): Min. 100,000 times (L/R = 48 ms)
Maximum cable length Max. 100 m
B10d With rated load: 400,000
With low load: 2,000,000
*1 To comply with the requirements of IEC61131-2, connect 10A fast blow fuse (IEC 60127) in series to each contact.
*2 Check the derating characteristics described later.
6-42 GC Series User’s Manual
6-4 Connecting Output Devices
Derating characteristics
GC-1000R GC-S1R
6A 6A
2A 2A
35 °C 55 °C 35 °C 55 °C 6
Installation and Wiring
Connection example for connecting a safety device to the relay output terminal block
(Wiring examples)
F1 F2 F3
13 23 33
GC Series R1 R2 R3
14 24 34
R1, R2, R3: External devices
F1, F2, F3: Fuses 10A Fast blow fuse (IEC 60217)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-43
6-4 Connecting Output Devices
AUX outputs (non-safety output)
For the AUX output, either "terminal block" or "remote I/O module (M12 5 pins)" can be selected as a connection destination.
Terminal blocks
Connection to the connector terminal block of the main controller "GC-1000"/"GC-1000R" and expansion unit "GC-A16".
Model Output points
GC-1000 AUX output 4 points
GC-1000R AUX output 4 points
GC-A16 AUX output 16 points
6 Reference The safety output terminals of "GC-1000", "GC-1000R" and "GC-S84" can be used as outputs to non-safety devices, as
well as for the purpose of safety.
Installation and Wiring
GC-1000 GC-1000R GC-A16
Signal Signal Signal
0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Si0 Si1 1 0 Ao0 Ao1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Si2 Si3 3 2 Ao2 Ao3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Si4 Si5 5 4 Ao4 Ao5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs 6 Ao6 Ao7 7
Safety inputs AUX outputs
Si
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si 8 Si8 Si9 9 8 Ao8 Ao9 9 Ao
10 Si10 Si11 11 10 Si10 Si11 11 10 Ao10 Ao11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13 12 Si12 Si13 13 12 Ao12 Ao13 13
14 Si14 Si15 15 14 N.C. N.C. 15 14 Ao14 Ao15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs 0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To 2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1 0 So0 So1 1 Safety outputs
Safety outputs So
2 So2 So3 3 2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5 4 N.C. N.C. 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs 0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao 2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
+24V 0V +24V 0V
AUX output specifications
Specification
Item
GC-1000/1000R GC-A16
Output type Transistor output (PNP/NPN selectable by wiring) PNP transistor output
PNP output (DC-13, Type 0.1, protected outputs)*1 *2 (DC-13, Type 0.1, protected outputs)*1
Maximum load current PNP: 100 mA, NPN: 20 mA 100 mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit, reverse connection protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
*1 Paragraph 6.4.6 Temporary overload of IEC 61131-2 supports up to 1.2 times the maximum load current.
*2 The AUX outputs (NPN output) and test outputs do not comply with paragraph 6.4.6 of IEC 61131-2.
6-44 GC Series User’s Manual
6-4 Connecting Output Devices
Connection example for connecting an external device to the AUX output terminal block
(Wiring examples)
GC-1000
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7
8 Si8 Si9 9
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13 General-purpose PLC (PNP input)
14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1
IN
Internal circuit
2 To2 To3 3
0 So0 So1 1
2 So2 So3 3
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 COM
2 Ao2
+24V
Ao3
0V
3
Photocoupler insulation
6
Installation and Wiring
Remote I/O modules (M12 5 pins)
Connection to the remote I/O module "GC-R45" (M12 5 pins).
Pin number Function
1 2
Pin 1 (+24 V) 5
4 3
Pin 2 Ao
Pin 3 0V
Pin 4
Pin 5
AUX output specifications
Item Specification
Output type PNP transistor output (DC-13, Type 0.1, protected outputs)*1
Maximum load current 100 mA
Residual voltage (during ON) Max. 2.0 V
Leakage current (during OFF) Max. 0.5 mA
Protection circuit Overcurrent protection circuit
Maximum cable length Max. 30 m
*1 Paragraph 6.4.6 Temporary overload of IEC 61131-2 supports up to 1.2 times the maximum load current.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-45
6-4 Connecting Output Devices
Connection example for connecting an external device to the AUX output terminal block
(Wiring examples)
General-purpose PLC (PNP input)
IN
Ao
Internal circuit
1 2
5
4 3 COM
0V
Photocoupler insulation
6
Installation and Wiring
6-46 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
This section describes the settings and wiring for the case of connecting KEYENCE safety sensors.
KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Light Curtains GL-R Series
GL-S Series
Installation and Wiring
Safety Interlock Switches GS Series (Non-contact)
GS Series (Lock)
GS-M Series
Safety Laser Scanners SZ-V Series
SZ Series
Point When using KEYENCE safety sensors, the usable functions may vary by the connection destination of
the GC Series. Review the function(s) you will use before selecting a connection destination.
"Destinations and Compatible KEYENCE Safety Sensors" (page 6-49)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-47
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Connection Destinations
When connecting a KEYENCE safety sensor to the GC Series, select a connection destination from the following options.
• GC-Link
• Terminal blocks
• Remote I/O modules GC-R45 (M12 5 pins)
• Remote I/O modules GC-R48 (M12 8 pins)
GC-Link GC-Link
6
Installation and Wiring
GC-1000R GC-1000 GC-S84 GC-S16
Terminal blocks Terminal blocks
GC-R45 GC-R48
Remote I/O modules Remote I/O modules
(M12 5 pins) (M12 8 pins)
Point The GC-1000R cannot be connected to expansion units or remote I/O modules.
6-48 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Destinations and Compatible KEYENCE Safety Sensors
The compatible destinations vary by the KEYENCE safety sensor series.
Terminal Remote I/O modules
Series GC-Link
blocks M12 5 pins M12 8 pins
Safety GL-R Series *1 --
Light Curtains GL-S Series --
Safety GS Series (Non-contact)
Interlock Switches
GS Series (Lock) / GS-M Series --
Safety SZ-V Series --
Laser Scanners
SZ Series -- 6
*1 The following models cannot be connected. GL-R143F/GL-R159F/GL-R175F/GL-R191F/GL-R207F
Installation and Wiring
The available safety sensor functions vary by the connection destination.
Review the function(s) you will use before selecting a connection destination.
Step 1. Review the available connection destinations for
the function you will use.
Step 2. Determine the connection destination.
For the functions that can be used by KEYENCE safety sensors, refer to the following pages.
"GL-R Series"(page 6-50)
"GL-S Series"(page 6-52)
"GS Series (Non-contact Type)"(page 6-54)
"GS Series (Lock Type)"(page 6-56)
"GS-M Series"(page 6-58)
"SZ-V Series"(page 6-60)
"SZ Series"(page 6-63)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-49
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series
Step 1. Review the available connection destinations for the function you will use.
Connection destination
<Function details by connection destination> Remote I/O modules
GC-Link Terminal blocks
M12 5 pins
GC Series functions
GL-R received-light-amount monitoring with the GC main controller LCD -- --
GL-R received-light-amount monitoring with the GC Configurator -- --
Received-light-amount decrease alert acquisition (threshold setting available) -- --
GL-R OSSD OFF history acquisition -- --
6 GL-R error history acquisition -- --
Installation and Wiring
GL-R Series functions
Wire Optical synchronization/ Optical synchronization/
GL-R wiring system
synchronization One-line/Wire synchronization One-line
OSSD output
AUX outputs *1 *1
Error output *2 --
*1 Available functions vary
Muting *1
by
Partial muting function*3 -- --
wiring system.
Muting bank function*3 -- --
*3 *1
Muted condition output Refer to <GL-R function *1
details by wiring
Muting lamp output -- --
*1
system>(page 6-51)
Override function *1
Interlock function*3 *1 *1
*3
Interlock-reset-ready output *1 *1
EDM function *1 *1 *1
Wait input -- --
Alert output*3 *4 --
Usable functions vary by
*3
Clear/Block output -- --
wiring system.
Reset input (error clear) -- --
*3 Refer to <GL-R function
Reduced resolution function PC PC
details by wiring
Fixed blanking function*3 PC PC
system>(page 6-51)
Channel configuration (light interference prevention function) *5
Center indicator configuration -- --
Monitoring function PC PC
"PC" indicates that the function can be configured with the GL-R configuration software; "Safety Device Configurator".
*1 These functions can be supported with the GC Series program using function blocks.
*2 An error number can be reviewed via an industrial network.
*3 These functions cannot be used on the GL-RHG/GL-RFG. Additionally, you cannot change the settings using the configuration software
on the GL-RHG/GL-RFG.
*4 A threshold for received-light-amount can be set on the GC Series main controller to perform the alert output.
*5 The light interference prevention function is enabled automatically, and thus channel configuration is not necessary.
Reference The available functions of the GL-R Series vary by the wiring system and cable used.
When connecting the GL-R Series to the "terminal block", refer to the following <GL-R function details by wiring
system>(page 6-51).
6-50 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
<GL-R function details by wiring system>
Wiring system Optical synchronization system One-line system Wire synchronization system
Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver
Wiring image
Transmitter 5-core cable Connection cable 7-core cable
Applicable 5-core cable 5-core cable 7-core cable
Receiver
cables 11-core cable 11-core cable 11-core cable 6
Installation and Wiring
Wiring system Optical synchronization One-line system Wire synchronization
Cable Transmitter cable 5-core Connected 7-core 11-core
combination Receiver cable 5-core 11-core 5-core 11-core 7-core 11-core 7-core 11-core
OSSD output
AUX outputs -- -- PC PC
Error output -- PC -- PC
Muting -- PC -- PC -- PC
Partial muting function*1 -- PC -- PC -- PC PC PC
*1
Muting bank function -- -- -- -- -- -- -- PC
*1
Muted condition output -- PC -- PC -- PC PC PC
Muting lamp output -- -- -- -- -- --
Override function -- -- -- -- -- --
*1
Interlock function -- -- -- --
*1
Interlock-reset-ready output -- PC -- PC -- PC -- PC
EDM function -- -- -- --
Wait input -- -- -- --
*1
Alert output -- PC -- PC PC PC PC PC
*1
Clear/Block output -- PC -- PC PC PC PC PC
Reset input (error clear) -- -- -- --
Reduced resolution function*1
*1
Fixed blanking function PC PC PC PC PC PC PC PC
Channel configuration (light
interference prevention function)
Center indicator configuration
*1 These functions cannot be used on the GL-RHG. Additionally, you cannot change the settings using the configuration software on the
GL-RHG.
Step 2. Determine the connection destination.
After you determine the connection destination, perform the wiring and configure the settings with the GC Configurator.
For the wiring of each connection destination and the configuration of the settings with the GC Configurator, refer to the
following pages.
Connecting to GC-Link(page 6-65)
Connecting to Terminal Blocks(page 6-111)
Connecting to Remote I/O Modules(page 6-158)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-51
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series
Step 1. Review the available connection destinations for the function you will use.
Connection destination
Remote I/O modules
GC-Link Terminal blocks
M12 5 pins
GC Series functions
GL-S center indicator control -- --
GL-S Series functions
GL-S wiring system Wire Optical synchronization/ Optical synchronization/
6 synchronization One-line/Wire synchronization One-line
Installation and Wiring
OSSD output
*1
Muting *2 *1
Interlock function *1 *1
EDM function *1 *1 *1
Channel configuration (light interference prevention function)
Center indicator control Fixed mode *2 *3
External control mode *4 --
*1 These functions can be supported with the GC Series program using function blocks.
*2 The available functions vary by the wiring system. Refer to <GL-S function details by wiring system>(page 6-52).
*3 Receivers only. Transmitters turn OFF.
*4 The center indicator control function can be enabled by using the indicator control output block.
Reference The available functions of the GL-S Series vary by the wiring system and cable used.
When connecting the GL-S Series to the "terminal block", refer to the following <GL-S function details by wiring
system>(page 6-52).
<GL-S function details by wiring system>
Optical synchronization One-line system Wire synchronization
Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver
Transmitter Receiver
Connection cable
Wiring system
Main controller
connection
cable
Main controller
connection
cable Main controller connection cable
OSSD output
Muting -- -- *1
Interlock function -- --
EDM function -- --
Channel configuration (light interference prevention function)
Center indicator control Fixed mode --*3
External control -- *2
mode
*1 While using the muting function, the interlock and EDM functions cannot be used.
*2 When using the center indicator in the external control mode, the muting, interlock and EDM functions cannot be used.
*3 Only receivers turn ON in the "fixed mode".
6-52 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Step 2. Determine the connection destination.
After you determine the connection destination, perform the wiring and settings configuration with the GC Configurator.
For the wiring of each connection destination and the configuration of the settings with the GC Configurator, refer to the
following pages.
Connecting to GC-Link(page 6-74)
Connecting to Terminal Blocks(page 6-117)
Connecting to Remote I/O Modules(page 6-162)
Installation and Wiring
GC Series User’s Manual 6-53
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact)
Compatible destinations by model
Remote I/O modules
Type Model Cable shape GC-Link Terminal blocks M12 5 pins M12 8 pins
Simple function type GS-10PC M12 connector -- *2 --
*1
Standard types GS-11PC M12 connector -- *2
GS-11P5/11P10 Cable draw-out -- -- --
Advanced function GS-13PC M12 connector -- -- --
6 types
GS-13P5 Cable draw-out -- -- --
Installation and Wiring
*1 GS-Y11 and GS-Y12 are required.
*2 Cascade connection using a Y-shaped connector is not supported.
Step 1. Review the available connection destinations for the function you will use.
Remote I/O modules
GC-Link Terminal blocks M12 5 pins M12 8 pins
Cascade connection
Using Y-shaped connector*1 (16 units*2) -- --
*3
*1
Not using Y-shaped connector -- -- --
GC Series functions
GS indicator mode setting -- -- --
Coding level high operation check -- -- --
Open/close state check in cascade connection -- -- --
GS indicator control -- -- --
GS Series functions
OSSD
AUX outputs
*3
*4 *4
Interlock *4
EDM *4 *4 *4
Coding level switching *5 *5 *5
*1 The available Y-shaped connector and end connector vary by the connection method.
Connection destination Compatible model Y-shaped connector End connector
GC-Link GS-11PC GS-Y11 GS-Y12
Terminal blocks GS-11PC GS-Y01 GS-Y02
*2 Up to 16 units can be cascade-connected with the coexistence of non-contact and lock types (Max. four units for the lock type).
*3 Depends on the GS Series type/model. Refer to <Function details by type>(page 6-55)(page 6-57).
*4 These functions can be supported with the GC Series program using function blocks.
*5 Coding level switching cannot be executed while the GC Series is connected. Execute coding level switching on the GS alone and
then connect to the GC Series.
Reference The available functions of the GS Series vary by the type used.
When connecting the GS Series to the "terminal block", refer to the following <Function details by type>(page 6-55).
6-54 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
<Function details by type>
Simple function type Standard types Advanced function types
OSSD
AUX outputs 1 1 1
*1 *2)
Cascade connection (Using Y-shaped connector) -- (4 units --
Cascade connection (Not using Y-shaped connector) -- --
*3 *3 *3
Open/close state check in cascade connection
Interlock -- --
EDM -- --
Coding level switching
*1
*2
Only the M12 connector type can be cascade-connected.
When the AUX outputs are not acquired separately, up to ten units can be connected.
6
Installation and Wiring
*3 The check can be performed using the AUX output.
Step 2. Determine the connection destination.
After you determine the connection destination, perform the wiring and settings configuration with the GC Configurator.
For the wiring of each connection destination and the configuration of the settings with the GC Configurator, refer to the
following pages.
Connecting to GC-Link(page 6-79)
Connecting to Terminal Blocks(page 6-122)
Connecting to Remote I/O Modules(page 6-166)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-55
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock)
Compatible destinations by model
Remote I/O modules
Type Model Cable shape GC-Link Terminal blocks M12 5 pins M12 8 pins
GS-51PC M12 connector --
Power-to- Standard types
GS-51P5/P10 Cable draw-out -- -- --
release
Advanced function type GS-53PC M12 connector -- -- --
GS-71PC M12 connector --
6 Power-to-lock
Standard types
GS-71P5/P10 Cable draw-out -- -- --
Installation and Wiring
Advanced function type GS-73PC M12 connector -- -- --
Step 1. Review the available connection destinations for the function you will use.
Remote I/O modules
GC-Link Terminal blocks M12 8 pins
Cascade connection
Using Y-shaped connector (4 units*1 *2) -- --
Not using Y-shaped connector -- *3 --
GC Series functions
GS indicator mode setting -- --
OSSD operation switching (set via the GC Configurator) -- --
Coding level high operation check -- --
Open/close state check in cascade connection -- --
Lock state check in cascade connection -- --
GS indicator control -- --
GS Series functions
OSSD
OSSD operation switching --
AUX outputs *3
*4 *4
Interlock
EDM *4 *4 *4
Coding level switching *5 *5
Lock control input *6
Auxiliary release *3
*7 *9
Escape release *9
Dedicated handle*8
*1 When establishing a cascade connection with the GC-Link, use the GS-Y11 (Y-shaped connector) and the GS-Y12 (end connector).
*2 Up to 16 units can be cascade-connected with the coexistence of non-contact and lock types (Max. four units for the lock type).
*3 Depends on the GS Series type/model. Refer to <Function details by type>(page 6-55)(page 6-57).
*4 These functions can be supported with the GC Series program using function blocks.
6-56 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
*5 Coding level switching cannot be executed while the GC Series is connected. Execute coding level switching on the GS alone and
then connect to the GC Series.
*6 Only the power-to-release type has the guard locking function supporting Category 4/PLe.
*7 When using the optional escape release attachment (GS-H02)
*8 When using the optional dedicated handle (GS-H01)
*9 The M12 connector type (GS-51PC/71PC) only.
<Function details by type>
Power-to-release Power-to-lock
Standard types Advanced Standard types Advanced
function types function types
OSSD
OSSD operation switching -- -- -- 6
2*1
Installation and Wiring
AUX outputs 1 2 1
Cascade connection (Using Y-shaped connector) -- -- -- --
Cascade connection (Not using Y-shaped connector)
Open/close state check in cascade connection *2 *2 *2 *2
lock state check in cascade connection *2 *2 *2 *2
Interlock -- --
EDM -- --
Coding level switching
Lock control input 1 2 1 1
Auxiliary release
Escape release*3 *5 *5
Dedicated handle*4
*1 The number of AUX outputs is 1 when the OSSD operation is in open/close link mode.
*2 The checks can be performed using the AUX output.
*3 When using the optional escape release attachment (GS-H02)
*4 When using the optional dedicated handle (GS-H01)
*5 The M12 connector type only.
Step 2. Determine the connection destination.
After you determine the connection destination, perform the wiring and settings configuration with the GC Configurator.
For the wiring of each connection destination and the configuration of the settings with the GC Configurator, refer to the
following pages.
Connecting to GC-Link(page 6-79)
Connecting to Terminal Blocks(page 6-127)
Connecting to Remote I/O Modules(page 6-170)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-57
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series
Compatible destinations by model
Remote I/O modules
Type Model GC-Link Terminal blocks M12 5 pins M12 8 pins
Terminal GS-M50P -- -- --
M12 Standard types GS-M51P/M91P/ ML51P --
connector Advanced function type GS-M53P/M93P/ ML53P -- -- --
6 Step 1. Review the available connection destinations for the function you will use.
Installation and Wiring
Remote I/O modules
GC-Link Terminal blocks M12 8 pins
Cascade connection
Using Y-shaped connector (4 units*1 *2) -- --
Not using Y-shaped connector -- --
GC Series functions
GS indicator mode setting -- --
OSSD operation switching (set via the GC Configurator) -- --
Coding level high operation check -- --
Open/close state check in cascade connection -- --
Lock state check in cascade connection -- --
GS indicator control -- --
Set higher holding force when unlocked -- --
GS-M Series functions
OSSD
OSSD operation switching --
AUX outputs
*3
*4 *4
Interlock
EDM *4 *4 *4
Coding level switching to “High”
Lock control input
*1 When establishing a cascade connection with the GC-Link, use the GS-Y11 (Y-shaped connector) and the GS-Y12 (end connector).
*2 Up to 16 units can be cascade-connected with the coexistence of GS(Non-contact) and GS(Lock) (Max. four units for the total of
GS(Lock) and GS-M).
*3 Depends on the GS-M Series type. Refer to <Function details by type>(page 6-59).
*4 These functions can be supported with the GC Series program using function blocks.
6-58 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
<Function details by type>
M12 connector
Terminal Standard types Advanced function
types
OSSD
OSSD operation switching
*1 1*1
AUX outputs 1 2
Cascade connection (Not using Y-shaped connector)
Open/close state check in cascade connection
Lock state check in cascade connection x x
Interlock x x
6
EDM x x
Installation and Wiring
Coding level switching to “High”
Lock control input
*1 When the OSSD operation is in open/close link mode, the AUX cannot be used.
Step 2. Determine the connection destination.
After you determine the connection destination, perform the wiring and settings configuration with the GC Configurator.
For the wiring of each connection destination and the configuration of the settings with the GC Configurator, refer to the
following pages.
Connecting to GC-Link(page 6-79)
Connecting to Terminal Blocks(page 6-133)
Connecting to Remote I/O Modules(page 6-175)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-59
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series
Compatible destinations by model
GC-Link* Remote I/O modules
Use 1 port Use 2 ports Terminal
Type Model (simple (advanced blocks M12 5 pins M12 8 pins
connection) connection)
Multi-function type SZ-V04(X) --
Multi-bank type SZ-V32(X) -- -- --
6 Network type SZ-V32N(X) --
* The available functions vary by the connection method.
--
Installation and Wiring
Step 1. Review the available connection destinations for the function you will use.
<SZ-V04(X)>
GC-Link
Remote I/O
Use 1 port Use 2 ports
Terminal blocks module
(simple (advanced
M12 5 pins
connection) connection)
SZ-V04 functions
Protection zone 1 2 2 1
*1
Warning zone 1 2 2 1*1
Minimum detectable object size setting ø20 to 150 mm
Camera *2
Interlock function *3 *3 *3
EDM function *3 *3 *3 *3
Bank switching Maximum number of banks 1 4*4 *5 4 1
function Switching through wiring input -- *3 --
Switching through encoder input -- -- -- --
Multi-OSSD -- --
*3 *3
Muting Muting for all zones *3
Muting for specified zone -- -- --
Reference points monitoring
AUX outputs 1 2 6 1
State information output -- --
Detection history
Ethernet communications --
Scanner head series connection Up to 3 units --
*1 Imported to the GC Series using the AUX output of SZ-V.
Two warning zones can be set with the SZ-V, however, the GC Series can only acquire either the warning zone (A) or warning zone (B)
detection output.
*2 Only when using the camera type head
*3 These functions can be supported with the GC Series program using function blocks.
*4 The maximum number of banks is two when the multi-OSSD function is not used.
*5 The bank switching method of the SZ-V is set to "Binary" (excluding the case of using the "independent bank switching" function).
6-60 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
<SZ-V32(X)>
GC-Link
Remote I/O
Use 2 ports Terminal blocks module
(advanced M12 5 pins
connection)
SZ-V32 functions
Protection zone 1 1 1
Warning zone 2 2 1*1
Minimum detectable object size setting ø20 to 150 mm
Camera *2
Interlock function *3 *3
6
EDM function *3 *3 *3
Installation and Wiring
Bank switching Maximum number of banks 4*4 32 1
function *3
Switching through wiring input --
Switching through encoder input -- -- --
Multi-OSSD -- -- --
*3 *3
Muting Muting for all zones
Muting for specified zone -- -- --
Reference points monitoring
AUX outputs 2 4*5 1
State information output --
Detection history
Ethernet communications --
Scanner head series connection Up to 3 units --
*1 Imported to the GC Series using the AUX output of SZ-V.
Two warning zones can be set with the SZ-V, however, the GC Series can only acquire either the warning zone (A) or warning zone (B)
detection output.
*2 Only when using the camera type head
*3 These functions can be supported with the GC Series program using function blocks.
*4 The bank switching method of the SZ-V is set to "Binary" (excluding the case of using the "independent bank switching" function).
*5 The number of AUX outputs that you can use varies by the setting.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-61
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
<SZ-V32N(X)>
GC-Link
Remote I/O
Use 2 ports Terminal blocks module
(advanced
M12 5 pins
connection)
SZ-V32N functions
Protection zone 1 1 1
Warning zone 2 2 1*1
Minimum detectable object size setting ø20 to 150 mm
Camera *2
*3 *3
6 Interlock function
EDM function *3
*3 *3
Installation and Wiring
Bank switching Maximum number of banks 4*4 32 1
function Switching through wiring input *3 --
Switching through encoder input -- --
Multi-OSSD -- -- --
*3
Muting Muting for all zones *3
Muting for specified zone -- --
Reference points monitoring
AUX outputs 2 4*5 1
State information output --
Detection history
Ethernet communications *6
Scanner head series connection Up to 3 units --
*1 Imported to the GC Series using the AUX output of SZ-V.
Two warning zones can be set with the SZ-V, however, the GC Series can only acquire either the warning zone (A) or warning zone (B)
detection output.
*2 Only when using the camera type head
*3 These functions can be supported with the GC Series program using function blocks.
*4 The bank switching method of the SZ-V is set to "Binary" (excluding the case of using the "independent bank switching" function).
*5 The number of AUX outputs that you can use varies by the setting.
*6 "PROFIsafe" cannot be selected as a communication protocol.
Step 2. Determine the connection destination.
After you determine the connection destination, perform the wiring and settings configuration with the GC Configurator.
For the wiring of each connection destination and the configuration of the settings with the GC Configurator, refer to the
following pages.
Connecting to GC-Link(page 6-93)
Connecting to Terminal Blocks(page 6-138)
Connecting to Remote I/O Modules(page 6-179)
6-62 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series
Compatible destinations by model
Remote I/O modules
Type Model GC-Link Terminal blocks
M12 5 pins M12 8 pins
Simple function type SZ-01S --
Multi-function type SZ-04M -- -- --
Multi-bank type SZ-16V -- -- --
Network type SZ-16D -- -- --
6
Installation and Wiring
Step 1. Review the available connection destinations for the function you will use.
<SZ-01S>
Remote I/O modules
GC-Link Terminal blocks
M12 5 pins
Protection zone 1
Warning zone 1
Minimum detectable object size ø30 to 150 mm
setting
Interlock function *1 *1 *1
EDM function *1 *1 *1
Reference points monitoring
AUX outputs 1 2 1
*1 These functions can be supported with the GC Series program using function blocks.
Step 2. Determine the connection destination.
After you determine the connection destination, perform the wiring and settings configuration with the GC Configurator.
For the wiring of each connection destination and the configuration of the settings with the GC Configurator, refer to the
following pages.
Connecting to GC-Link(page 6-106)
Connecting to Terminal Blocks(page 6-149)
Connecting to Remote I/O Modules(page 6-183)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-63
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Connecting to GC-Link
GC-Link connection port
The main controllers "GC-1000" and "GC-1000R" are equipped with two GC-Link connection ports on the top of the main
controller.
You can connect KEYENCE safety sensors to the GC-Link Port A and Port B.
<Connection example>
Other safety sensors connectable via
GC-Link
*1
GL-R Series
6 GC-Link port
Port A
Installation and Wiring
GL-S Series
Port B
GS Series GS-M Series
SZ-V Series SZ Series
*1 The following models cannot be connected. GL-R143F/GL-R159F/GL-R175F/GL-R191F/GL-R207F
Port A
Point • A single GC-Link port can connect the units of the same series.
Port B
• The number of units connected to a single port varies by the
series.
For the wiring and settings of each series of KEYENCE safety sensors, refer to the following pages.
"GL-R Series"(page 6-65)
"GL-S Series"(page 6-74)
"GS Series (Non-contact Type)"(page 6-79)
"GS Series (Lock Type)"(page 6-79)
"GS-M Series"(page 6-79)
"SZ-V Series"(page 6-93)
"SZ Series"(page 6-106)
6-64 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series via the GC-Link and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GL-R Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series User's Manual"
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the GL-R Series via the GC-Link.
GC-Link port
Transmitter side: Gray inner connector
6
Installation and Wiring
(1) (2) (3)
Transmitter
side
Receiver side: Black inner connector
Receiver
side
Cable length: Max. 30 m
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) GC-Link cable for GL-R (8 pins), 0.3 m GL-RCG03S 1 set (transmitter/ 0.3
receiver)
(2) Extension cable (8 pins), 7 m GL-RCC7S 1 7
(3) Main controller connection cable (for extension), GL-RPC03PS 1 0.3
0.3 m
Cable length
Prevent the cable length between the GC Series and the GL-R Series from exceeding 30 m on both the transmitter and
receiver sides.
All of the cables must be used within the specified length range. Otherwise, the safety functions may
DANGER
not work properly, allowing for a dangerous situation to exist.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-65
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GL-R series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen
and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
6
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection port
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [GC-Link port].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection port Select either [Port A] or [Port B].
6-66 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 GL-R Series detailed settings
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
Filter (ON to OFF)
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Operation Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
setting(s) • Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
Filter (OFF to ON)
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
With the check box checked, discrepancy detection for two inputs is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
Discrepancy time
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Enter into error state when
With the check box checked, confirmation with the GL-R main unit configuration is
the configuration is different
performed, and the error state is entered if the configuration is different from the settings.
from the settings
Read out unit configuration Click this button to read the unit configuration from the GL-R Series connected to the GC-
from GL-R Link port.
- Main controller/ When confirming with the GL-R main unit configuration, set the type and number of optical
Advanced Sub unit 1/2 axes of the GL-R Series used. When using the GL-R Series units connected in series, set
function the type and number of optical axes for the sub units 1 and 2.
setting(s)
Verification of the setting With the check box checked, confirmation with the GL-R main unit setting switch settings
switch*1 is performed.
*1
- Center indicator Performs a confirmation with the center indicator lighting method of the GL-R main unit
setting switch.
*1
- Reduced resolution Performs a confirmation with the reduced resolution setting of the GL-R main unit setting
switch.
Advanced With the check box checked, the input block of "GL-R received-light-amount decrease
Use received-light-amount
input alert" is added. The signal generated at the occurrence of the GL-R Series received-light-
decrease alert input
setting(s) amount decrease alert can be used by the input block.
*1 For more information about the GL-R Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series User's Manual".
GC Series User’s Manual 6-67
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Useful functions in using GC-Link connection
GL-R received-light-amount monitoring function
You can monitor the received-light-amount of the GL-R Series connected via the GC-Link through the GC-1000/1000R main
controller LCD display and GC Configurator.
Main controller LCD display - [GL-R Monitor] GC Configurator [GL-R monitor]
6
Installation and Wiring
Main controller LCD display - [Unit Monitor]
Input status
Unit/Port list
Received-light-amount decrease alert status
Model
Unit icon Margin of received-light-amount
Item Details
Unit/Port list Displays the connected unit configuration. Use the [] and [] buttons to change the unit.
Main: Displays the connector terminal status of the main controller.
P.A/P.B: Displays the status of the safety sensor connected to the GC-Link port.
Ex 1/2/3... : Displays the terminal status of the connected expansion unit.
If an error occurs in the unit, GC-Link port or remote I/O module, the error icon is displayed.
Unit icon Displays the GL-R Series unit configuration. When the units are connected in series, the main controller, sub
unit 1 and sub unit 2 are displayed.
Input status Displays the OSSD input status. (Green: ON, Red: OFF)
Received-light-amount Displays the received-light-amount decrease alert status. (Yellow: Alert detected, Gray: Alert not detected)
decrease alert status * This is not displayed when the received-light-amount decrease alert is disabled.
Model Displays the model of the connected GL-R Series.
Margin of received-light- Displays the margin of received-light-amount of the GL-R Series with a bar graph.
amount The bar of the unit having blocked optical axis is displayed in red.
[], [] Use the [] and [] buttons to change the unit.
[Detail] Enters the [GL-R Monitor] screen.
Reference For the operation method of the main controller LCD display and screen transition, refer to "5 Operating Main
Controller" (page 5-1).
6-68 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Main controller LCD display - [GL-R Monitor]
Number of optical axes
Unit information
Received-light-amount bar graph
Unit list
Item Details
Number of optical Displays the number of optical axes of the GL-R Series. 6
axes
Installation and Wiring
Unit information Displays the GL-R Series unit configuration. Use the [] and [] buttons to change the unit.
Unit list Displays the number of optical axes and type of the GL-R Series currently selected.
Received-light- Displays the received-light-amount of the currently selected unit with a bar graph. (Green: Cleared, Red:
amount bar graph Blocked, Yellow: Below received-light-amount decrease alert detection threshold)
[Adv.] Enters the detailed settings screen.
Reference For the operation method of the main controller LCD display and screen transition, refer to "5 Operating Main
Controller" (page 5-1).
GC Configurator - [GL-R monitor]
Received-light-amount monitor
Reference For details, refer to "GL-R monitor" (page 13-11).
GC Series User’s Manual 6-69
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GL-R received-light-amount decrease alert
The input of the received-light-amount decrease alert turns ON when the unstable state of received-light-amount of the GL-
R Series persists for the specified time or longer.
The received-light-amount decrease alert input can be used in a program as an input block, and can be transmitted to an
external device such as a general-purpose PLC via the AUX output or industrial Ethernet communication.
Set the detection time and threshold of received-light-amount alert on the GC Series main controller. They can not be set
with the GC Configurator.
Received-light-amount decreased
6
Installation and Wiring
Timing chart
Received-light-
amount Unstable cleared state Stable cleared state Blocked state
(cleared state)
ON
OSSD
OFF
ON
Received-light-
amount OFF
decrease alert
Received-light-amount decrease 5 seconds (fixed)
alert detection time
Reference When the GL-R Series main controller concludes that the received-light-amount is unstable, the input of the received-
light-amount decrease alert will turn ON.
6-70 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
[GL-R series detailed settings]
To use the received-light-amount decrease alert input, check the check box of [Use received-light-amount decrease alert
input] on the [GL-R series detailed settings] screen of the GC Configurator to enable the received-light-amount decrease
alert input.
Installation and Wiring
Setting the received-light-amount decrease alert (Main controller LCD display)
Set the threshold and detection time of received-light-amount decrease alert on the main controller. Before setting them,
connect the GL-R to the GC Series and adjust the optical axis correctly.
Setting the threshold of received-light-amount decrease alert
1 Press the [Adv.] button on the [GL-R Monitor] screen to enter the detailed settings screen.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-71
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
2 When you press the [Dsbl.] button, a message asking for the confirmation of disabling the registered received-
light-amount decrease alert setting will appear.
Press the [Yes] button to clear the setting. Pressing the [Adv.] button on the next screen moves to the teaching screen.
6
Installation and Wiring
Threshold of received-
light-amount decrease
alert is displayed as a
white line.
Teaching executed.
Point • The threshold of received-light-amount decrease alert is set based on the received-light-amount when
teaching was executed.
Therefore, confirm that all of the optical axes of the GL-R are adjusted before executing teaching.
• Teaching fails if the received-light-amount is too small.
Changing the threshold of received-light-amount decrease alert
Press the [Adjust] button to change the threshold. (Setting range: 0 to 80%, in increments of 10%)
After setting, press the [Save] button to save the setting.
6-72 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Setting the detection time of received-light-amount decrease alert
Press the [Delay] button to change the detection time. (Options: 5 sec, 30 sec, 5 min Default: 30 sec)
After adjusting, press the [Save] button to save the setting.
Installation and Wiring
GL-R OSSD OFF history
The GC Series can store the OSSD OFF history of the GL-R Series. The "GL-R OSSD OFF history" can be read from the GC
Series main controller using the history function of the GC Configurator.
GL-R error history
The GC Series can store the error history of the GL-R Series. The "GL-R error history" can be read from the GC Series main
controller using the history function of the GC Configurator.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-73
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series via the GC-Link and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GL-S Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series User's Manual"
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the GL-S Series via the GC-Link.
6 GC-Link port
Transmitter side: Gray inner connector
Installation and Wiring
(1) (2) (3)
Transmitter
side
Receiver side: Black inner connector
Receiver
side
Cable length: Max. 20 m
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) GC-Link cable for GL-S (8 pins), 0.3 m GL-SCG03S 1 0.3
(2) Extension cable (8 pins), 7 m GL-RCC7S 1 7
(3) Main controller connection cable (8 pins), 0.3 m GL-SPC03PS 1 set (transmitter/receiver) 0.3
Cable length
Prevent the cable length between the GC Series and the GL-S Series from exceeding 20 m on both the transmitter and
receiver sides.
All of the cables must be used within the specified length range. Otherwise, the safety functions may
DANGER
not work properly, allowing for a dangerous situation to exist.
6-74 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GL-S series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen
and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection port
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [GC-Link port].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection port Select either [Port A] or [Port B].
GC Series User’s Manual 6-75
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 GL-S Series detailed settings
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
Filter (ON to OFF)
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Operation Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
setting(s) • Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
Filter (OFF to ON)
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
Discrepancy time
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Advanced output Use indicator control With the check box checked, the output block of "indicator control output" is added. It can
setting(s)* output be used to control the center indicator of the GL-S Series.
With the check box checked, the blink control (slow) of the center indicator can be used.
Use blink control (slow)
Indicator control The "BS (Blink Slow)" port is added to the output block of "indicator control output".
output* With the check box checked, the blink control (fast) of the center indicator can be used.
Use blink control (fast)
The "BF (Blink Fast)" port is added to the output block of "indicator control output".
For the GL-S Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series User's Manual".
* Indicator control output cannot be used in the EASY mode.
6-76 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Useful functions in using GC-Link connection
GL-S indicator control output
Controls the center indicator of the GL-S Series connected via the GC-Link.
Green Red Orange
Alert
Normal Emergency stop (muting, etc.)
Installation and Wiring
[GL-S series detailed settings]
To use the indicator control output, check the check box of [Use indicator control output] on the [GL-S series detailed
settings] screen to enable the indicator control output.
Indicator control output block
[Initial setting] [Setting blink control]
GC Series User’s Manual 6-77
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Truth table
R G Center indicator display color BS BF Blinking operation
1 0 Red 1 0 Blinks slowly
0 1 Green 0 1 Blinks fast
1 1 Orange 1 1 Blinks fast
0 0 OFF 0 0 No blinking operation
6
Installation and Wiring
6-78 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact)
Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock)
Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact)/GS Series (Lock)/GS-M Series
via the GC-Link and the settings.
Reference • The Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact), GS Series (Lock), and the GS-M Series can be connected to
the GC-Link port in a cascaded manner.
• For the installation method and usage of the GS/GS-M Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact) User's Manual"
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock) User's Manual"
"Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series User's Manual"
6
Installation and Wiring
GC Link compatible GS/GS-M Series models
The following models of the GS/GS-M Series can be connected to the GC-Link connection port.
Product name Cable type Output type Model
GS Series non-contact, standard type M12 connector type PNP GS-11PC
GS Series power-to-release, standard type M12 connector type PNP GS-51PC
GS Series power-to-lock type, standard type M12 connector type PNP GS-71PC
GS-M Series, standard type M12 connector type PNP GS-M51P
GS-M91P
GS-ML51P
GC Series User’s Manual 6-79
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the GS/GS-M Series via the GC-Link.
GS-71PC
GS-11PC GS-51PC
GS-M51P
GS-M91P GS-ML51P
6
Installation and Wiring
(5)
(3) GS-Y11
GC-Link port
(4)
GS-Y12
(1) (2)
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) GC-LinkGS port cable GS-P5CG03 1 0.3
(2) M12 connector type 5-pin extension cable GS-P5CC1 1 1
GS-P5CC3 1 3
GS-P5CC5 1 5
GS-P5CC10 1 10
(3) Y-shaped connector GS-Y11 1 -
(4) End connector GS-Y12 1 -
(5) M12 connector type 8-pin extension cable GS-P8LC1 1 1
GS-P8CC1 1 1
GS-P8CC3 1 3
GS-P8CC5 1 5
Point • When connecting via the GC-Link, the Y-shaped connector "GS-Y11" and end connector "GS-Y12" are
required.
• The Y-shaped connector GS-Y01 and end connector GS-Y02 cannot be used for the GC-Link
connection.
6-80 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Cable lengths and number of connected units
Up to 16 units (Up to a total of 4 units of GS(Lock) and GS-M)
Unit number: 3 Unit number: 4
Unit number: 1 Unit number: 2
6
D
Installation and Wiring
GS-Y11
A B GS-Y12
Cable lengths
GS GS-M
Series Series
A Limitation of the distance between the main controller and the first GS/GS-M Series unit Max. 30.6 m Max. 31.3 m
B Limitation of the distance between the GS/GS-M Series units Max. 30.6 m Max. 31.3 m
C Limitation of the maximum cable length Max. 60.6 m Max. 61.3 m
D Limitation of the distance between the Y-shaped connector and the GS Series Max. 5.3 m Max. 5 m
All of the cables must be used within the specified length range. Otherwise, the safety functions may
DANGER
not work properly, allowing for a dangerous situation to exist.
Number of cascaded units
When using the GC-Link, up to 16 units of the GS Series (Non-contact and Lock), GS-M Series can be connected in a
cascaded manner (Up to a total of 4 units of GS(Lock) and GS-M).
GC Series User’s Manual 6-81
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
End connector
Be sure to connect the end connector "GS-Y12" to the Y-shaped connector "GS-Y11" which is installed to the end unit.
Point The Y-shaped connector "GS-Y01" and end connector "GS-Y02" cannot be used for the GC-Link
connection.
GC Configurator settings
6 1 Registering input devices
Select [GS/GS-M series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration]
Installation and Wiring
screen and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection port
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [GC-Link port].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection port Select either [Port A] or [Port B].
6-82 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 GS/GS-M Series detailed settings
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Read out unit Click this button to read the unit configuration from the GS/GS-M Series connected to the
configuration from GS GC-Link port.
(Connection models) When setting the configuration of the GS/GS-M Series unit to be connected, register the
target model by the drag-and-drop operation.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-83
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
Advanced Indicator control mode Set the indicator display mode of the GS/GS-M Series main controller.
function setting(s) [Normal operation]: Follows the GS/GS-M Series main controller setting.
[OFF]: Turns OFF the indicator except for an error state.
[OFF when door is closed (locked)]: The GS-10 Series turns off the indicator when the
door is closed. The GS-M5/9, ML5, 50 and 70 Series turn OFF the indicator when the door
is locked.
Enable OSSD operation Check this check box to enable the OSSD operation switching function.
switching This can be used when selecting the GS-M5/9, ML5, 50 or 70 Series as the connection
model.
OSSD operation Set the OSSD operation when [Enable OSSD operation switching] is enabled.
[Lock link mode]: Links the OSSD with the lock operation.
6 [Open / close link mode]: Links the OSSD with the open/close operation (actuator
detected) of the door or similar objects.
Installation and Wiring
(Default: Lock link mode)
Select high coded units Used to confirm if the coding level of the unit specified as check target is "high" at start-
for checking up. If the coding level is not "high", the GC will result in the GS configuration mismatch
error.
Set higher holding force With the check box checked, the GS-M set higher holding force when unlocked.
when unlocked This can be used when selecting the GS-M5/9 Series or the GS-ML5 Series as the
connection model.
Advanced input Use closed state With the check box checked, the expansion block of "GS closed state" is added. The GS/
setting(s) information GS-M Series closed state can be used in a program.
Use locked state With the check box checked, the expansion block of "GS locked state" is added. The GS
information (Lock)/GS-M locked state can be used in a program.
This can be used when selecting the GS-M5/9, ML5, 50 or 70 Series as the connection
model.
Advanced output Use unlock output With the check box checked, the output block of "unlock output" is added. This is used for
setting(s) the unlock output of the GS (Lock)/GS-M.
This can be used when selecting the GS-M5/9, ML5, 50 or 70 Series as the connection
device.
Use indicator control With the check box checked, the expansion block of "GS indicator control output" is
output * added. This can be used to control the GS/GS-M Series indicator.
For the GS/GS-M Series functions and settings, refer to the following manuals.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact) User's Manual"
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock) User's Manual"
"Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series User's Manual"
* Indicator control output cannot be used in the EASY mode.
[Select model]
Register the GC-Link connection target, the GS/GS-M Series, by the drag-and-drop operation.
Drag and drop
6-84 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Useful functions in using GC-Link connection
GS indicator control output
You can set the lighting mode of the GS/GS-M Series connected via the GC-Link.
Installation and Wiring
Settings Details
Normal operation Turns ON according to the default setting of the GS/GS-M Series.
OFF Turns OFF except for an error state.* 1
OFF when door is closed (locked) The GS-10 Series: Turns OFF the indicator when the door is closed.
The GS-50 Series, GS-70 Series, GS-M5/9 Series and the GS-ML5 Series: Turns OFF the
indicator when the door is locked.
*1 At this time, the OSSD, INPUT READY, LOCK and MODE indicators will not turn OFF.
OSSD operation switching
You can set the OSSD operation of the GS/GS-M Series connected via the GC-Link.
Reference OSSD operation switching can be set when selecting the GS-50 Series, GS-70 Series, GS-M5/9 Series and the GS-ML5
Series as the connection model.
Settings Details
Lock link mode Links the OSSD with the lock operation.
Open / close link mode Links the OSSD with the open/close operation (actuator detected) of the door or similar objects.
With [Open / close link mode] set, the lock function does not link with the OSSD. Therefore, you cannot
confirm the locked state only with the OSSD (GS Series ON/OFF state).
DANGER
It is possible to use the lock function of the GS-50 Series as a guard locking function for safety, but it
cannot be used as an interlocking function for safety control.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-85
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Select high coded units for checking
Used to confirm if the coding level of the unit specified as check target is "high" at start-up. If the coding level is not "high",
the GC will result in the GS configuration mismatch error.
6
Installation and Wiring
Closed state input
You can use the closed state of each GS/GS-M Series unit connected via the GC-Link in a program.
Using the GS closed state in a program as an expansion block enables transmission of the GS/GS-M Series door open/
close state to an external device such as a general-purpose PLC via the AUX output or industrial Ethernet communication.
DANGER The closed state input cannot be used for safety-related control.
GS closed state expansion block
6-86 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GS closed state detailed settings
Item Details 6
Operation GS Select the label of the GS/GS-M Series assigned to the GC-Link port from the pull-down menu.
Installation and Wiring
setting(s) Target Select the GS/GS-M Series you want to check the door closed state from the pull-down menu.
Locked state input
You can use the door locked state of each GS Series (Lock) or GS-M Series unit connected via the GC-Link in a program.
Using the GS locked state in a program as an expansion block enables an output to an external device via the AUX output
or transmission of the GS/GS-M Series locked state to a general-purpose PLC using the industrial Ethernet communication
function.
Reference The locked state input can be set when selecting the GS-50 Series, GS-70 or the GS-M Series as the connection model.
DANGER The locked state input cannot be used for safety-related control.
GS locked state expansion block
GC Series User’s Manual 6-87
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GS locked state detailed settings
6 Item Details
Operation GS Select the label of the GS/GS-M Series assigned to the GC-Link port from the pull-down menu.
Installation and Wiring
setting(s) Target Select the GS Series you want to check the door locked state from the pull-down menu. Only the GS-50, GS-70,
GS-M5/9 Series or the GS-ML5 Series unit can be selected as the target.
Unlock output
Controls the unlocking of each GS Series (Lock) or the GS-M Series unit connected via the GC-Link.
Reference The unlock output can be set when selecting the GS-50 Series, GS-70 Series, GS-M5/9 Series or the GS-ML5 Series as
the connection model.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
To use the unlock output, check the check box of [Use unlock output] on the [GS/GS-M series detailed settings] screen
to enable the unlock output.
6-88 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GS unlock output block
Operation
• Turning the GS unlock output block ON forces the GS unit to unlock.
• Turning the GS unlock output block OFF forces the GS unit to lock.
Point The GS unlock output block controls all of the GS Series (Lock) or the GS-M Series units connected via
the GC-Link in a batch.
Installation and Wiring
GS indicator control output
Controls the GS/GS-M Series connected via the GC-Link.
* Indicator control output cannot be used in the EASY mode.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
To use the indicator control output, check the check box of [Use indicator control output] on the [GS/GS-M series
detailed settings] screen to enable the indicator control output.
GS indicator control output block
[Initial setting] [Setting blink control]
GC Series User’s Manual 6-89
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GS indicator control output detailed settings
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation GS Select the label of the GS/GS-M Series assigned to the GC-Link port from the pull-down
setting(s) menu.
Target Select the unit number targeted for indicator control from the pull-down menu.
Use blink control (slow) With the check box checked, the blink control (slow) of the indicator can be used. The "BS
(Blink Slow)" port is added to the output block of "indicator control output".
Use blink control (fast) With the check box checked, the blink control (fast) of the indicator can be used. The "BF
(Blink Fast)" port is added to the output block of "indicator control output".
Truth table
R G Highly visible indicator display color BS BF Blinking operation
1 0 Red 1 0 Blinks slowly
0 1 Green 0 1 Blinks fast
1 1 Orange 1 1 Blinks fast
0 0 OFF 0 0 No blinking operation
GS monitoring function
You can monitor the open/close and lock states of the GS/GS-M Series connected via the GC-Link on the main controller
LCD display.
[Unit Monitor] [GS Monitor]
[Detail]
[Back]
Reference For the operation method of the main controller LCD display and screen transition, refer to "5 Operating Main
Controller" (page 5-1).
6-90 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Main controller LCD display - [Unit Monitor]
Input status
Lock control status
Unit/Port list
Unit status
Item Details
Unit/Port list Displays the connected unit configuration. Use the [] and [] buttons to change the unit.
Main: Displays the connector terminal status of the main controller.
6
Installation and Wiring
P.A/P.B: Displays the status of the safety sensor connected to the GC-Link port.
Ex 1/2/3... : Displays the terminal status of the connected expansion unit.
Input status Displays the OSSD input status. (Green: ON, Red: OFF)
Lock control status Displays the lock control status when the GS (Lock)/GS-M is used.
Locked state: Lock, Unlocked state: Unlock
Unit status Displays icons indicating the open/close and lock states of the GS/GS-M Series.
[], [] Use the [] and [] buttons to change the unit.
[Detail] Enters the detailed settings screen.
Unit status icon
Shows the door open/close and lock states using the background and underline colors of icons.
<Non-contact type> <Lock type>
Unit number
Background color Locked state
Underline
<GS(Non-contact)>
Door status Background color Underline color
OPEN ON in red Red
CLOSE ON in green Green
GC Series User’s Manual 6-91
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
<GS(Lock) / GS-M>
Underline color
Door status Lock status Background color
Lock link* Open/close link*
OPEN UNLOCK ON in red Red Red
OPEN LOCK ON in red Red Red
CLOSE UNLOCK Blinks in green Red Green
CLOSE LOCK ON in green Green Green
* These functions can be switched when the OSSD operation switching is set.
Main controller LCD display - [GS Monitor]
6
Series name
Installation and Wiring
Coding level
Unit number
Type
Door status
Lock status
Item Details
Unit number Displays the number of GS/GS-M Series units connected via the GC-Link.
Series name Displays the model (GS-10/50/70/M5/9/ML5 Series).
Coding level Displays [H] when the coding level is set to "high".
Type Displays the non-contact or lock type.
Door status Displays the open/close state. Door opened: Open (red), Door closed: Closed (green)
Lock status Displays the lock status for the lock type. Locked state: [Locked] (green), Unlocked state:
[Unlocked] (red)
6-92 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series via the GC-Link and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the SZ-V Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual"
Point To use the SZ-V Series, you need to set the SZ-V Series main controller using the SZ-V Configurator.
• Use the following settings for [Safety configuration].
Item Settings
PNP/NPN selection
Interlock (Start/Restart)
PNP
Automatic / Automatic
6
Installation and Wiring
EDM Not used
• Perform other settings according to the functions you will use.
GC-Link connection methods and functions
The following shows the method for connecting the SZ-V Series via the GC-Link and the settable functions.
Connection method Target model Used GC-Link port Settable function
SZ-V04 simple SZ-V04(X) Use 1 port • AUX-IN
connection
SZ-V04 advanced SZ-V04(X) Use 2 ports • Multi-OSSD
connection • Bank switching*
• Independent bank switching*
• AUX-IN1
• AUX-IN2
SZ-V32 advanced SZ-V32(X)/ Use 2 ports • Bank switching (Max. 4 banks)
connection SZ-V32N(X) • AUX-IN1
• AUX-IN2
* - A maximum of four banks when using multi-OSSD (independent bank not used).
- Fixed to two banks when using independent bank.
- Fixed to two banks when not using multi-OSSD.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-93
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Connection cables
SZ-V04 simple connection
Connection method Target model Used GC-Link port
SZ-V04 simple connection SZ-V04(X) Use 1 port
GC-Link port: Use 1 port
(3)
(1) (2)
6
Installation and Wiring
Cable length: Max. 30 m
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) GC-Link cable for SZ-V04 (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VCG03 1 0.3
(2) Extension cable (5 pins), 7 m SZ-VCC7 1 7
(3) SZ-V04 power cable (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VPC03S 1 0.3
SZ-V04 advanced connection
Connection method Target model Used GC-Link port
SZ-V04 advanced connection SZ-V04(X) Use 2 ports
GC-Link port: Use 2 ports
Port A side: black tube (3)
(1) (2)
Port B side: blue tube
Cable length: Max. 30 m
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) GC-Link cable for SZ-V04/V32 (12 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VCG03M 1 0.3
(2) Extension cable (12 pins), 7 m SZ-VCC7M 1 7
(3) SZ-V04 power cable (12 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VPC03M 1 0.3
6-94 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
SZ-V32 advanced connection
Connection method Target model Used GC-Link port
SZ-V32 advanced connection SZ-V32(X)/SZ-V32N(X) Use 2 ports
GC-Link port: Use 2 ports
Port A side: black tube (3)
(1) (2)
Port B side: blue tube
Cable length: Max. 30 m
6
Installation and Wiring
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) GC-Link cable for SZ-V04/V32 (12 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VCG03M 1 0.3
(2) Extension cable (12 pins), 7 m SZ-VCC7M 1 7
(3) SZ-V32 power cable (12 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VPC03B 1 0.3
Cable length
Prevent the cable length between the GC Series and the SZ-V Series from exceeding 30 m.
All of the cables must be used within the specified length range. Otherwise, the safety functions may
DANGER
not work properly, allowing for a dangerous situation to exist.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-95
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [SZ-V series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen
and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
6
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection port
Item Settings
Connection destinations SZ-V04 simple connection: Select [GC-Link port].
SZ-V04 or SZ-V32 advanced connection: Select [GC-Link x 2].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection port SZ-V04 simple connection: Select either [Port A] or [Port B].
SZ-V04 or SZ-V32 advanced connection: Use two ports [Port A] and [Port B].
6-96 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 SZ-V Series detailed settings
SZ-V04 simple connection
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
*1 For the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
GC Series User’s Manual 6-97
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
SZ-V04 advanced connection
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [SZ-V04 (X)].
6-98 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
Advanced input Use multi-OSSD With the check box checked, the input block of "OSSD 3/4" is added. This is used when
setting(s) the multi-OSSD function is enabled by the SZ-V04 (X).
Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Use AUX-IN2 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN2" is added. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Advanced output Use bank switching* With the check box checked, the output block of "BANK" is added. Bank switching can be
setting(s) performed from the GC Series.
Independent bank Select [Enable] or [Disable].
switching * Independent bank switching is enabled only when using multi-OSSD. 6
Installation and Wiring
OSSD 3/4 Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
Discrepancy time Same as the above [Discrepancy time].
AUX-IN1/ Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
AUX-IN2
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
* Select [Single] or [Binary] when [Independent bank switching] is set to [Disable].
Bank output Input method
Number of banks Set the number of switching banks when [Independent bank switching] is set to [Disable]
(Max. four banks).
This is fixed to "2" when [Independent bank switching] is set to [Enable].
Use bank enablement With the check box checked, the bank enablement input can be used. The "EN (Enable)"
input port is added to the output block of "BANK".
For the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
* The bank switching function cannot be used in the EASY mode.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-99
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
SZ-V32 advanced connection
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s) Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [SZ-V32(X)/SZ-V32N(X)].
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Use AUX-IN2 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN2" is added. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Advanced output Use bank switching*2 With the check box checked, the "bank switching output" block is added. Bank switching
setting(s) can be performed from the GC Series.
6-100 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
AUX-IN1/ Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
AUX-IN2
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
Bank output Input method Select [Single] or [Binary].
Number of banks Set the number of switching banks (Max. four banks).
Use bank enablement With the check box checked, the bank enablement input can be used. The "EN (Enable)"
input port is added to the "bank switching output" block.
*1 For the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
*2 The bank switching function cannot be used in the EASY mode.
Installation and Wiring
GC Series User’s Manual 6-101
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Useful functions in using GC-Link connection
Bank switching
The bank switching function is used to switch the SZ-V Series protection zone, warning zone, etc.
Switch the bank of the SZ-V Series connected via the GC-Link using the "bank switching output" block.
* The bank switching function cannot be used in the EASY mode.
Reference For the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
Settable bank switching method and number of banks
6 SZ-V04 advanced connection
Installation and Wiring
Item Settings
Multi-OSSD Not used Used Used
Independent bank switching - Disabled Enabled
(Operation settings)
Input method Single/Binary Single/Binary -
Number of banks 2 (Fixed) 2 to 4 2 (Fixed)
SZ-V32 advanced connection
Item Settings
(Operation settings)
Input method Single/Binary
Number of banks 2 to 4
Point Set the bank switching method to [Binary] on the SZ-V Series side regardless of the bank switching input
method setting [Single]/[Binary] of the GC Configurator.
SZ-V Configurator setting (SZ-V04)
6-102 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
[SZ-V series detailed settings]
Installation and Wiring
Input method - Single
[Number of banks: 2] [Number of banks: 4] [Bank enablement input]
Input Bank 0 Input Bank 0
Input Bank 1
Input Bank 2
Input Bank 1 Input Bank 3 Input Enable
Bank number
0 1 2 3 Point • An error occurs if a bank is not
specified or multiple banks are
Bank input 0 ON OFF OFF OFF
specified.
Bank input 1 OFF ON OFF OFF • Select "Binary" as the bank switching
Bank input 2 OFF OFF ON OFF method for SZ-V, regardless of the
setting of the input method.
Bank input 3 OFF OFF OFF ON
Input method - Binary
[Number of banks: 2 to 4] [Bank enablement input]
Input Bit 0
Input Bit 1 Input Enable
Bank number
0 1 2 3 Point If a bank number larger than the set
number of banks is specified, the GC
Input bit 0 OFF ON OFF ON
Series main controller displays the [Bank
Input bit 1 OFF OFF ON ON Input Mismatch] information.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-103
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Independent bank switching
[Protection zone A] [Protection zone B] [Bank enablement input]
Input Bank 0 Input Bank 0
Input Bank 1 Input Bank 1 Input Enable
Bank number
0 1
Point An error occurs if the bank input signal
Bank input 0 ON OFF state differs from the specified state.
6 Bank input 1 OFF ON
Installation and Wiring
Reference The independent bank switching function is used to perform switching of two zones independently when using the
multi-OSSD function by the SZ-V04(X). Normally, when using the bank switching function, the protection zone of
OSSD1/2 (protection zone A) and the protection zone of OSSD3/4 (protection zone B) are switched at the same time.
When the independent bank switching function used, you can switch protection zone A and protection zone B at
different times.
AUX-IN
You can use the AUX output of the SZ-V Series connected via the GC-Link in a program.
Set the function assigned to the AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.
[SZ-V series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
6-104 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
<Functions assigned to AUX>
SZ-V04 SZ-V32 SZ-V32N
Type Type Type
Error output
Alert output
Alert or error output
Muted or override state output --
Muting lamp output --
OSSD status output
Protection zone detection output
Warning zone detection output
6
Interlock-reset-ready output
Installation and Wiring
Encoder error output --
Normal operation transition output
Reference For the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
GC-Link port A (B) power reset
You can restart the SZ-V Series connected via the GC-Link.
When the expansion block of "GC-Link port A (B) power reset" is turned on in a program, the SZ-V Series power supply will
be reset for restart.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-105
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series via the GC-Link and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the SZ Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual"
GC Link compatible SZ Series models
Only the SZ-01S can be connected to the GC-Link connection port. The SZ-04M/16V/16D cannot be connected.
6
Point • To use the SZ Series, you need to set the SZ Series main controller using the SZ Configurator.
Installation and Wiring
•Use the following settings for [Safety 1].
Item Settings
Start/Restart mode (Interlock) Automatic / Automatic
EDM enabled Unchecked
•Perform other settings according to the functions you will use.
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the SZ Series via the GC-Link.
GC-Link port
(1) (2) (3)
Cable length: Max. 30 m
6-106 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) GC-Link cable for SZ-V04 (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VCG03 1 0.3
(2) Extension cable (5 pins), 7 m SZ-CC7PS 1 7
(3) Main controller connection cable (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-PC03PS 1 0.3
Cable length
Prevent the cable length between the GC Series and the SZ Series from exceeding 30 m.
All of the cables must be used within the specified length range. Otherwise, the safety functions may
DANGER
not work properly, allowing for a dangerous situation to exist.
Installation and Wiring
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [SZ series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen and
register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection port
GC Series User’s Manual 6-107
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [GC-Link port].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection port Select either [Port A] or [Port B].
3 SZ Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Advanced input Use AUX-IN With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ Configurator.* 1
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
For the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual".
6-108 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
AUX-IN
You can use the AUX output of the SZ Series connected to the GC-Link port in a program.
Set the function assigned to the AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.
[SZ series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
Installation and Wiring
<Functions assigned to AUX>
SZ-01S SZ-16V/16D
Error output
Alert output
Alert or error output
OSSD status output
Protection zone detection output
Warning zone detection output
Interlock-reset-ready output
State information output --
Reference For the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual".
GC-Link port A (B) power reset
You can restart the SZ Series connected via the GC-Link.
When the expansion block of "GC-Link port A (B) power reset" is turned on in a program, the SZ Series power supply will be
reset for restart.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-109
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Connecting to Terminal Blocks
Connecting to terminal blocks
KEYENCE safety sensors can be connected to the terminal blocks of the main controller "GC-1000"/"GC-1000R" and
expansion unit "GC-S84"/"GC-S16" connectors.
Model Output points
GC-1000 Safety input 16 points
GC-1000R Safety input 14 points
GC-S84 Safety input 8 points
6 GC-S16 Safety input 16 points
Installation and Wiring
GC-1000R GC-1000 GC-S84 GC-S16
Terminal blocks Terminal blocks
For the wiring and settings of each series of KEYENCE safety sensors, refer to the following pages.
"GL-R Series"(page 6-111)
"GL-S Series"(page 6-117)
"GS Series (Non-contact Type)"(page 6-122)
"GS Series (Lock Type)"(page 6-127)
"GS-M Series"(page 6-133)
"SZ-V Series"(page 6-138)
"SZ Series"(page 6-149)
6-110 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series to the terminal block and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GL-R Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series User's Manual"
Wiring systems and applicable cables
Wiring system Optical synchronization system One-line system Wire synchronization system
Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver
6
Installation and Wiring
Wiring image
Transmitter 5-core cable Connection cable 7-core cable
Applicable 5-core cable 5-core cable 7-core cable
Receiver
cables 11-core cable 11-core cable 11-core cable
Reference The available functions vary by the combination of wiring system and cable used.
For details, refer to <GL-R function details by wiring system>(page 6-51).
Outline drawing for installation
•Connection cable [One-line system]
[Optical/Wire synchronization system]
•Main controller connection
cable
•Main controller connection
cable (for extension) +
extension cable
* The main controller connection cable
cannot be attached to the top of the
GL-R.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-111
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Cables
Point Only the PNP output type cable can be used.
Shape Number of cores Length (m) Model
Main controller connection cable 5 cores 5 GL-RP5P
10 GL-RP10P
7 cores 5 GL-RP5PS
10 GL-RP10PS
6 11 cores 5 GL-RP5PM
10 GL-RP10PM
Installation and Wiring
Main controller connection cable for extension 5 cores 0.3 GL-RPC03P
7 cores 0.3 GL-RPC03PS
11 cores 0.3 GL-RPC03PM
Connection cable Connection cable 0.08 GL-RS008
0.15 GL-RS015
0.5 GL-RS05
1 GL-RS1
3 GL-RS3
5 GL-RS5
10 GL-RS10
Extension cable* 5-core 5 GL-RC5
M12 connector
10 GL-RC10
(5 pins, female)
20 GL-RC20
7-core 5 GL-RC5S
M12 connector
10 GL-RC10S
(8 pins, female)
20 GL-RC20S
11-core 5 GL-RC5M
M14 connector
10 GL-RC10M
(12 pins, female)
20 GL-RC20M
* For the combined use of the main controller connection cable for extension and extension cable, the cables must have the same
number of cores.
6-112 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Wiring examples
Reference For the wiring method of the GL-R Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series User's Manual"
Optical synchronization system (Transmitter: 5-core cable, Receiver: 5-core cable)
Transmitter side Receiver side <Wiring example>
GC-1000
0 Si0 Si1 1
2
4
6
Si2
Si4
Si6
Si3
Si5
Si7
3
5
7 Safety inputs
6
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
Installation and Wiring
10 Si10 Si11 11
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
White (Not used)
Black (Not used)
12 Si12 Si13 13
Brown (24V)
Brown (24V)
14 Si14 Si15 15
Gray (FE)
Gray (FE)
Blue (0V)
Blue (0V)
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
2 So2 So3 3 Safety outputs
So4 So5
So
4 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
+24V 0V Power supply
terminal
One-line system (Transmitter: Connection cable, Receiver: 5-core cable)
Transmitter side Receiver side <Wiring example>
GC-1000
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
12 Si12 Si13 13
Brown (24V)
14 Si14 Si15 15
Gray (FE)
Blue (0V)
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
2 So2 So3 3 Safety outputs
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
+24V 0V Power supply
terminal
GC Series User’s Manual 6-113
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Wire synchronization system (Transmitter: 7-core cable, Receiver: 7-core cable)
Transmitter side Receiver side <Wiring example>
GC-1000
0 Si0 Si1 1
Orange/Black 2 Si2 Si3 3
(synchronized line 2) 4 5
Si4 Si5
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
Orange (synchronized line 1)
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
Black (error output)
12 Si12 Si13 13
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
White (wait input)
Brown (24V)
Brown (24V)
14 Si14 Si15 15
Gray (FE)
Gray (FE)
Blue (0V)
Blue (0V)
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
Safety outputs
6 2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Installation and Wiring
+24V 0V Power supply
terminal
PLC
6-114 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GL-R series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen
and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [Terminal block].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Assign the unit to be connected and the terminal.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-115
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 GL-R Series detailed settings
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
6-116 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series to the terminal block and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GL-S Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series User's Manual"
Wiring systems and applicable cables
Wiring system One-line system Optical synchronization system Wire synchronization system
Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Receiver
6
Connection cable
Installation and Wiring
Wiring image
Main controller
connection
cable
Main controller
Main controller connection
connection cable cable
Reference The available functions vary by the combination of wiring system and cable used.
For details, refer to <GL-S function details by wiring system>(page 6-52).
Cables
Point Only the PNP output type cable can be used.
One-line system
Length (m) Model
<Connection cable>
Connection cable 0.07 GL-SS007
(Quantity: 1, for series connection) 0.15 GL-SS015
0.5 GL-SS05
1 GL-SS1
2 GL-SS2
3 GL-SS3
5 GL-SS5
<Main controller connection cable>
Not extended One-line system dedicated 2 GL-SP2P1
(Max. 10 m) cable (Quantity: 1) 5 GL-SP5P1
10 GL-SP10P1
GC Series User’s Manual 6-117
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Length (m) Model
Extended Main controller connection 0.3 GL-SPC03P
cable
(Quantity: 1)
M12 Standard cable 2 OP-75721
(Quantity: 1)
5 OP-87272
10 OP-85502
Extension cable 2 OP-85503
(Quantity: 1) 5 OP-85504
6
Installation and Wiring
Optical synchronization system
Length (m) Model
<Main controller connection cable>
Not extended Standard cable 2 GL-SP2P
(Max. 10 m) (Quantity: 1 set (transmitter/
5 GL-SP5P
receiver))
10 GL-SP10P
Extended Main controller connection 0.3 GL-SPC03P
cable
(Quantity: 1)
* 2 pieces required
M12 Standard cable 2 OP-75721
(Quantity: 1)
5 OP-87272
* 2 pieces required
10 OP-85502
Extension cable 2 OP-85503
(Quantity: 1)
5 OP-85504
* 2 pieces required
Wire synchronization system
Length (m) Model
<Main controller connection cable>
Standard cable 2 GL-SP2P
(Quantity: 1 set (transmitter/receiver))
5 GL-SP5P
10 GL-SP10P
6-118 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Wiring examples
Reference For the wiring method of the GL-S Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series User's Manual"
One-line system (one-line system dedicated cable)
<Wiring example>
Connection
cable
Transmitter Receiver
side side
GC-1000 6
Installation and Wiring
Main unit
connection cable
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
Green/White (green light ON input)
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7
Red/White (red light ON input)
Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
Black (error output)
White (wait input)
12 Si12 Si13 13
14 Si14 Si15 15
Brown (24V)
Blue (0V)
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
*1 *1 0 So0 So1 1
2 So2 So3 3 Safety outputs
S1 S2 So4 So5
So
4 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
+24V 0V Power supply
terminal
*1 When using the center indicator in the fixed mode, connect the green/white wire and red/white wire to 0 V.
Wire/Optical synchronization system (standard cable)
<Wiring example>
Transmitter Receiver
side side
Main unit GC-1000
connection
cable
Orange/Black (synchronized line 2)
Orange 0 Si0 Si1 1
(synchronized line 1)
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
Green/White (green light ON input)
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
Red/White (red light ON input)
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
14 Si14 Si15 15
Brown (24V)
Brown (24V)
0 To0 To1 1
Blue (0V)
Blue (0V)
Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
*1 *1 0 So0 So1 1
2 So2 So3 3 Safety outputs
S1 S2 4 So4 So5 5
So
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
+24V 0V Power supply
terminal
*1 When using the center indicator in the fixed mode, connect the green/white wire and red/white wire to 0 V.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-119
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GL-S series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen
and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
6
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [Terminal block].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Assign the unit to be connected and the terminal.
3 GL-S Series detailed settings
6-120 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s 6
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Installation and Wiring
GC Series User’s Manual 6-121
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact)
The following describes how to connect the Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact) to the terminal block and the
settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GS Series (Non-contact), refer to the following manual.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact) User's Manual"
Compatible models and applicable cables
Point Only the GS Series (Non-contact) PNP output types can be used.
6
Installation and Wiring
Cable type Simple function type Standard types Advanced function types
Cable draw-out type (5 m) - GS-11P5 GS-13P5
Cable draw-out type (10 m) - GS-11P10 -
M12 connector type GS-10PC GS-11PC GS-13PC
Cables for M12 connector type
Type Length (m) Model
Standard cable: Simple function type (5 pins) 5 GS-P5C5
10 GS-P5C10
Standard cable: Standard type (8 pins) 5 GS-P8C5
10 GS-P8C10
Standard cable: Advanced function type (12 5 GS-P12C5
pins)
10 GS-P12C10
20 GS-P12C20
Extension cable: Simple function type (5 pins) 1 GS-P5CC1
5 GS-P5CC5
10 GS-P5CC10
Extension cable: Standard type (8 pins) 1 GS-P8CC1
5 GS-P8CC5
10 GS-P8CC10
6-122 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Wiring examples
Reference For the wiring method of the GS Series (Non-contact), refer to the following manual.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact) User's Manual"
Simple function
<Wiring example> GC-1000
type
Simple function type
0 Si0 Si1 1
GS-10PC 2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7
PNP output
6
Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
Gray (AUX output 1)
Installation and Wiring
14 Si14 Si15 15
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
0 To0 To1 1
Brown (24V)
Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
Blue (0V)
0 So0 So1 1
Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply
+24V 0V terminal
Standard types
<Wiring example> GC-1000
Standard type
GS-11P5
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
PNP output
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7
Cascade connection: None 8 9
Safety inputs
Si8 Si9 Si
Red/Black (safety input 1)
Red/White (safety input 2)
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
Gray (AUX output 1)
14 Si14 Si15 15
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
0 To0 To1 1
Brown (24V)
Test outputs
Blue (0V)
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
So2 So3 Safety outputs
2 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply
+24V 0V terminal
GC Series User’s Manual 6-123
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Advanced function
<Wiring example> GC-1000
types
Standard type
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
GS-13P5
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7
PNP output Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
Cascade connection: None
Red/Black (safety input 1)
Red/White (safety input 2)
Pink (interlock/EDM selection input)
12 Si12 Si13 13
Gray (AUX output 1)
14 Si14 Si15 15
Interlock: Auto
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
0 To0 To1 1
Brown (24V)
Yellow (reset/EDM input)
Test outputs
EDM: Not used
Blue (0V)
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
So2 So3 Safety outputs
2 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
6 +24V 0V Power supply
terminal
Installation and Wiring
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GS/GS-M series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration]
screen and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
6-124 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [Terminal block].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Assign the unit to be connected and the terminal.
3 GS/GS-M Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-10 series].
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) GS Series can be used in a program.
Use AUX-IN2 This cannot be selected by the GS-10 Series.
Advanced output Use unlock output This cannot be selected by the GS-10 Series.
setting(s)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-125
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
AUX-IN
The AUX output of the GS Series can be used in a program.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
6
Installation and Wiring
AUX-IN input block
6-126 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock)
The following describes how to connect the Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock) to the terminal block and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GS Series (Lock), refer to the following manual.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock) User's Manual"
Compatible models and applicable cables
Point Only the GS Series (Lock) PNP output types can be used.
6
Installation and Wiring
Power-to-release Power-to-lock
Cable type Standard types Advanced Standard types Advanced
function types function types
Cable draw-out type (5 m) GS-51P5 - GS-71P5 -
Cable draw-out type (10 m) GS-51P10 - GS-71P10 -
M12 connector type GS-51PC GS-53PC GS-71PC GS-73PC
Cables for M12 connector type
Type Length (m) Model
Standard cable: Simple function type (5 pins) 5 GS-P5C5
10 GS-P5C10
Standard cable: Standard type (8 pins) 5 GS-P8C5
10 GS-P8C10
Standard cable: Advanced function type (12 5 GS-P12C5
pins)
10 GS-P12C10
20 GS-P12C20
Extension cable: Simple function type (5 pins) 1 GS-P5CC1
5 GS-P5CC5
10 GS-P5CC10
Extension cable: Standard type (8 pins) 1 GS-P8CC1
5 GS-P8CC5
10 GS-P8CC10
GC Series User’s Manual 6-127
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Wiring examples
Reference For the wiring method of the GS Series (Lock), refer to the following manual.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock) User's Manual"
Power-to-release
<Wiring example> GC-1000
standard type
Power-to-release type
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
Standard type
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7
GS-51P5
6
Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
PNP output
Gray (AUX output 1)
Light blue (lock control input 1)
12 Si12 Si13 13
Installation and Wiring
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
Red/Black (safety input 1)
Red/White (safety input 2)
14 Si14 Si15 15
Cascade connection: None
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
Brown (24V)
0 So0 So1 1
Blue (0V)
Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply
+24V 0V terminal
Power-to-release
<Wiring example> GC-1000
advanced function
type
0 Si0 Si1 1
Power-to-release type 2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
Advanced function type 6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
GS-53PC 10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
Yellow (reset/EDM input)
Pink (interlock/EDM selection input)
Blue (0V)
Brown (24V)
Red/Black (safety input 1)
Red/White (safety input 2)
Light blue (lock control input 1)
Light blue/Black (lock control input 2)
Gray (AUX output 1)
Gray/Black (AUX output 2)
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
PNP output 14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
Cascade connection: None 2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
Safety outputs
Interlock: Auto 2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
EDM: Not used 0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply
+24V 0V terminal
6-128 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Power-to-lock
<Wiring example> GC-1000
advanced function
type
0 Si0 Si1 1
Power-to-lock type 2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
Advanced function type 6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
GS-73PC 10 Si10 Si11 11
Light blue/Black (OSSD operation switching input 1)
12 Si12 Si13 13
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
Gray/Black (AUX output 2)
Light blue (lock control input 1)
Gray (OSSD operation switching input 2)
Pink (interlock/EDM selection input)
PNP output 14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
Cascade connection: None To
Yellow (reset/EDM input)
2 To2 To3 3
Red/Black (safety input 1)
Red/White (safety input 2)
0 So0 So1 1
Safety outputs
Interlock: Auto Brown (24V) 2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
Blue (0V)
EDM: Not used 0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
OSSD operation:
Open/close link
+24V 0V Power supply
terminal
6
Installation and Wiring
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GS/GS-M series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration]
screen and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
GC Series User’s Manual 6-129
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Settings
GS Series Connection destinations Select [Terminal block].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Assign the unit to be connected and the terminal.
Unlock output Connection type Select [Safety output x 1], [Safety output x 2] or [AUX output].
3 GS/GS-M Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-50 series] or [GS-70 series].
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) GS Series can be used in a program.
Use AUX-IN2 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN2" is added. The AUX output of the
GS Series can be used in a program.
6-130 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
Advanced output Use unlock output With the check box checked, the "unlock output" block is added.
setting(s)
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
Unlock output Enable self-diagnosis of Check this check box to enable the self-diagnosis function for the unlock output.
output*1
*1 This is available only when [Safety output x 1] or [Safety output x 2] is selected for the connection type.
AUX-IN
The AUX output of the GS Series can be used in a program.
6
Installation and Wiring
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
GC Series User’s Manual 6-131
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Unlock output
You can unlock the GS Series through a program.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
Unlock output block
6
Installation and Wiring
Unlock output operation: Power-to-release (GS-50 Series)
"Safety output x 1" "Safety output x 2"
IN ON IN ON
OFF OFF
OUT ON OUT1 ON
OFF OFF
OUT2 ON
OFF
Unlock output operation: Power-to-lock (GS-70 Series)
"Safety output x 1"
IN ON
OFF
OUT ON
OFF
6-132 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series to the terminal block and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GS-M Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series User's Manual"
Compatible models and applicable cables
Point Only the GS-M Series PNP output types can be used.
6
Installation and Wiring
Type Model
Terminal GS-M50P
M12 connector Standard GS-M51P/M91P/ ML51P
Advanced function GS-M53P/M93P/ ML53P
Cables for M12 connector type
Standard (8-pin)
Model Shape Length (m)
GS-P8L3 3
(Female)
GS-P8C3 3
GS-P8C5 5
(Female)
GS-P8C10 10
GS-P8LC1 1
(Female) (Male)
GS-P8CC1 1
GS-P8CC3 3
GS-P8CC5 (Female) (Male) 5
GS-P8CC10 10
Advanced function (12-pin)
Model Shape Length (m)
GS-P12L3 3
(Female)
GS-P12C3 3
GS-P12C5 5
GS-P12C10 (Female) 10
GS-P12C20 20
GS-P12LC1 1
(Female) (Male)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-133
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Wiring examples
Standard type
<Wiring example> GC-1000
PNP output
Cascade connection: None GS-M
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
Gray (AUX output 1)
Light blue (lock control input 1)
12 Si12 Si13 13
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
Red/Black (safety input 1)
Red/White (safety input 2)
14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
6
Brown (24V)
0 So0 So1 1
Blue (0V)
Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
Installation and Wiring
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply
+24V 0V terminal
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GS/GS-M series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration]
screen and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
6-134 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Settings
GS-M Series Connection destinations Select [Terminal block].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Assign the unit to be connected and the terminal.
Unlock output Connection type Select [Safety output x 1] or [AUX output].
3 GS/GS-M Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-M5/9 series] or [GS-ML5 series]
GC Series User’s Manual 6-135
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) GS Series can be used in a program.
Use AUX-IN2 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN2" is added. The AUX output of the
GS Series can be used in a program.
Advanced output Use unlock output With the check box checked, the "unlock output" block is added.
setting(s)
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
Unlock output Enable self-diagnosis of Check this check box to enable the self-diagnosis function for the unlock output.
6 output*1
*1 This is available only when [Safety output x 1] is selected for the connection type.
Installation and Wiring
AUX-IN
The AUX output of the GS-M Series can be used in a program.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
6-136 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Unlock output
You can unlock the GS-M Series through a program.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
Unlock output block
Installation and Wiring
GC Series User’s Manual 6-137
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series to the terminal block and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the SZ-V Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual"
Point To use the SZ-V Series, you need to set the SZ-V Series main controller using the SZ-V Configurator.
Configure the settings according to the functions you will use.
6 Applicable cables
Installation and Wiring
Type Shape Length (m) Model
Power cable (18-core, loose wires) 5 SZ-VP5
10 SZ-VP10
20 SZ-VP20
30 SZ-VP30
Wiring examples
Reference For the installation method and usage of the SZ-V Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual"
SZ-V04 wiring examples
Multi-OSSD Used
Point When using multi-OSSD, register two items
Bank switching Used
of [SZ-V series [KEYENCE]] as part of the
Bank switching Single/Binary, 2-bank switching input device registration on the
method [Configuration] screen and assign the
Interlock Not used respective OSSDs.
EDM Not used
6-138 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
<Wiring example>
GC-1000
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
Yellow (reset input 1/2)
Yellow/Black (reset input 3/4)
Red (EDM input 1/2)
Red/Black (EDM input 3/4)
Blue (0V)
Brown (24V)
Light blue (bank input A)
Light blue/Black (bank input a)
Orange (AUX output 1)
Orange/Black (AUX output 2)
Pink (AUX output 3)
Pink/Black (AUX output 4)
Green (AUX output 5)
Green/Black (AUX output 6)
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
Gray (OSSD3)
Gray/black (OSSD4)
14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2
+24V
Ao3
0V
3 Ao
Power supply
terminal
6
Installation and Wiring
* Perform wiring of each AUX output as needed.
SZ-V32 wiring examples
Bank switching Used
Bank switching Single/Binary, 4-bank switching
method
Interlock Not used
EDM Not used
<Wiring example>
GC-1000
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
Yellow (reset input)
Red (EDM input 1/2)
Pink (bank output C)
Pink/Black (bank input c)
Yellow/Black (bank input D)
Red/Black (bank input d)
Green (AUX output 3)
Green/Black (AUX output 4)
Blue (0V)
Brown (24V)
Light blue (bank input A)
Light blue/Black (bank input a)
Orange (bank input B)
Orange/Black (bank input b)
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
Gray (AUX output 1)
Gray/Black (AUX output 2)
14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply
+24V 0V terminal
* Perform wiring of each AUX output as needed.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-139
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [SZ-V series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen
and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
6
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [Terminal block].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Assign the unit to be connected and the terminal.
6-140 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 SZ-V Series detailed settings
SZ-V04(X)
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select [SZ-V04 (X)].
GC Series User’s Manual 6-141
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
Advanced input Use multi-OSSD With the check box checked, the input block of "OSSD 3/4" is added. This is used when
setting(s) the multi-OSSD function is enabled by the SZ-V04 (X).
Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Use AUX-IN2 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN2" is added. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Advanced output Use bank switching*1 With the check box checked, the "bank switching output" block is added. Bank switching
setting(s) can be performed from the GC Series.
Independent bank Select [Enable] or [Disable].
6 switching
Installation and Wiring
OSSD 3/4 Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
Discrepancy time Same as the above [Discrepancy time].
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
*1 Select [Single] or [Binary] when [Independent bank switching] is set to [Disable].
Bank output Input method
Number of banks Set the number of switching banks when [Independent bank switching] is set to [Disable]
(Max. four banks).
This is fixed to "2" when [Independent bank switching] is set to [Enable].
Use bank enablement With the check box checked, the bank enablement input can be used. The "EN (Enable)"
input port is added to the output block of "BANK".
*1 For the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
6-142 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
SZ-V32(X)/SZ-V32N(X)
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s) Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [SZ-V32(X)/SZ-V32N(X)].
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.*1
Use AUX-IN2 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN2" is added. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.*1
Advanced output Use bank switching*1 With the check box checked, the output block of "BANK" is added. Bank switching can be
setting(s) performed from the GC Series.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-143
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
*1
Bank output Input method Select [Single] or [Binary].
Number of banks Set the number of switching banks (Max. 32 banks).
Use bank enablement With the check box checked, the bank enablement input can be used. The "EN (Enable)"
input port is added to the output block of "BANK".
*1 For the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
Bank switching
6
The bank switching function is used to switch a combination of protection zones, warning zones and reference points of the
Installation and Wiring
SZ-V Series.
You can switch the bank of the SZ-V Series connected to the terminal using the "bank switching output" block.
Reference For more information about the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series
User's Manual".
Settable bank switching method and number of banks
SZ-V04(X)
Item Settings
Multi-OSSD Not used Used Used
Independent bank switching - Disabled Enabled
(Operation settings)
Input method Single/Binary Single/Binary -
Number of banks 2 to 4 2 to 4 2 (Fixed)
SZ-V32(X)/SZ-V32N(X)
Item Settings
(Operation settings)
Input method Single/Binary
Number of banks 2 to 32
6-144 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Connection type
Select the bank output point according to the number of banks used.
<Number of bank switching outputs and maximum number of banks>
Model Connection type
Number of Number of banks
6
outputs Single Binary
Installation and Wiring
SZ-V04(X) Bank switching output x 2 2 Fixed to 2 Fixed to 2
Bank switching output x 4 4 Max. 4 Max. 4
Independent bank switching: Bank switching output x 2 2 Fixed to 2
Enabled
SZ-V32(X)/SZ-V32N(X) Bank switching output x 2 2 Fixed to 2 Fixed to 2
Bank switching output x 4 4 Max. 4 Max. 4
Bank switching output x 6 6 Max. 8 Max. 8
Bank switching output x 8 8 -- Max. 16
Bank switching output x 10 10 -- Max. 32
[SZ-V series detailed settings]
GC Series User’s Manual 6-145
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Input method - Single
[Number of banks: 2] [Number of banks: 8] [Bank enablement input]
Input Bank 0 Input Bank 0
Input Bank 1
Input Bank 2
Input Bank 3
Input Bank 1 Input Bank 4 Input Enable
Input Bank 5
Input Bank 6
Input Bank 7
6
Installation and Wiring
Bank number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input Bank 0 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Input Bank 1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Input Bank 2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Input Bank 3 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Input Bank 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Point An error occurs if a bank is not
Input Bank 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF specified or multiple banks are
specified.
Input Bank 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Input Bank 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
Input method - Binary
[Number of banks: 2 to 4] [Number of banks: 2 to 32] [Bank enablement input]
Input Bit 0 Input Bit 0
Input Bit 1
Input Bit 2
Input Bit 3
Input Bit 1 Input Bit 4 Input Enable
Input Bit 5
Input Bit 6
Input Bit 7
Bank number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Input bit 0 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Input bit 1 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
Input bit 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
Input bit 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Input bit 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
6-146 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Bank number
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Input bit 0 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Input bit 1 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
Input bit 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
Input bit 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Input bit 4 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Point An error occurs if the bank input signal state differs from the specified state.
Independent bank switching
6
Installation and Wiring
[Protection zone A] [Protection zone B] [Bank enablement input]
Input Bank 0 Input Bank 0
Input Bank 1 Input Bank 1 Input Enable
Bank number
0 1
Point An error occurs if the bank input signal state differs from the
Input Bank 0 ON OFF
specified state.
Input Bank 1 OFF ON
Reference The independent bank switching function is used to perform switching of two zones independently when using the
multi-OSSD function by the SZ-V04(X). Normally, when using the bank switching function, the protection zone of
OSSD1/2 (protection zone A) and the protection zone of OSSD3/4 (protection zone B) are switched at the same timie.
When the independent bank switching function is used, you can switch protection zone A and protection zone B at
different times.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-147
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
AUX-IN
You can use the AUX output of the SZ-V Series connected to the terminal in a program.
Set the function assigned to the AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.
[SZ-V series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
6
Installation and Wiring
<Functions assigned to AUX>
SZ-V04 type SZ-V32 type SZ-V32N type
Error output
Alert output
Alert or error output
Muted or override state output --
Muting lamp output --
OSSD status output
Protection zone detection output
Warning zone detection output
Interlock-reset-ready output
Encoder error output --
Normal operation transition output
Reference • For more information about the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series
User's Manual".
• When using three or more AUX output points, place the "Other input" block separately.
6-148 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series to the terminal block and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the SZ Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual"
Point To use the SZ Series, you need to set the SZ Series main controller using the SZ Configurator.
Configure the settings according to the functions you will use.
Applicable cables 6
Installation and Wiring
Point Only the PNP output type cable can be used.
Type Shape Length (m) Model
SZ-01S 5 SZ-P5PS
10 SZ-P10PS
20 SZ-P20PS
30 SZ-P30PS
SZ-04M/SZ-16V/SZ-16D 5 SZ-P5PM
10 SZ-P10PM
20 SZ-P20PM
30 SZ-P30PM
GC Series User’s Manual 6-149
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Wiring examples
Reference For the wiring method of the SZ Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual"
SZ-01S (simple function type)
Start/Restart mode Auto/Auto
EDM function Not used
<Wiring example>
GC-1000
6 0 Si0 Si1 1
Installation and Wiring
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
Red (EDM input)
Orange/Black (AUX output 2)
Blue (0V)
Brown (24V)
Yellow (reset input)
Orange (AUX output 1)
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
Shield
14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply
+24V 0V terminal
* Perform wiring of each AUX output as needed.
SZ-04M (multi-function type)
Multi-OSSD function Mode D
Point When using multi-OSSD, register two items of
Bank switching Used [SZ series [KEYENCE]] as part of input device
Number of banks 2-bank switching registration on the [Configuration] screen and
Start/Restart mode Auto/Auto assign respective OSSDs.
EDM function Not used
<Wiring example>
GC-1000
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 Si6 Si7 7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
Red (EDM input 1/2)
Red/Black (EDM input 3/4)
Orange/Black (AUX output 2)
Pink (AUX output 3)
Pink/Black (AUX output 4)
Green (AUX output 5)
Green/Black (AUX output 6)
Blue (0V)
Brown (24V)
Yellow (reset input 1/2)
Yellow/Black (reset input 3/4)
Light blue (bank input 1)
Light blue/Black (bank input 2)
Orange (AUX output 1)
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
Gray (OSSD3)
Gray/black (OSSD4)
Shield
14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply
+24V 0V terminal
* Perform wiring of each AUX output as needed.
6-150 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
SZ-16V (multi-bank type)/SZ-16D (communication type)
Bank switching Used
Number of banks 4-bank switching
Start/Restart mode Auto/Auto
EDM function Not used
<Wiring example>
GC-1000
0 Si0 Si1 1
2 Si2 Si3 3
4 Si4 Si5 5
6 7
6
Si6 Si7 Safety inputs
8 Si8 Si9 9 Si
10 Si10 Si11 11
12 Si12 Si13 13
Red (EDM input)
Orange/Black (AUX 2)
Yellow/Black (AUX 3)
Red/black (AUX 4)
Pink (bank input C)
Pink/Black (bank input c)
Green (bank input D)
Green/Black (bank input d)
Blue (0V)
Brown (24V)
Yellow (reset input)
Light blue (bank input A)
Light blue/Black (bank input a)
Gray (bank input B)
Gray/Black (bank input b)
Orange (AUX 1)
Black (OSSD1)
White (OSSD2)
Installation and Wiring
Shield
14 Si14 Si15 15
0 To0 To1 1 Test outputs
2 To2 To3 3 To
0 So0 So1 1
Safety outputs
2 So2 So3 3
So
4 So4 So5 5
0 Ao0 Ao1 1 AUX outputs
2 Ao2 Ao3 3 Ao
Power supply
+24V 0V terminal
* Perform wiring of each AUX output as needed.
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [SZ series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen and
register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Drag and drop
GC Series User’s Manual 6-151
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [Terminal block].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
6 Connection unit/terminal Assign the unit to be connected and the terminal.
3
Installation and Wiring
SZ Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Advanced input Use AUX-IN With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ Configurator.* 1
6-152 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Details
Advanced output Use bank switching*1 With the check box checked, the output block of "BANK" is added. Bank switching can be
setting(s) performed from the GC Series.
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
*1
Bank output Input method Select [Single] or [Binary].
Number of banks Set the number of switching banks (Max. 16 banks).
Use bank enablement With the check box checked, the bank enablement input can be used. The "EN (Enable)"
input port is added to the output block of "BANK".
*1 For the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual".
6
Installation and Wiring
Bank switching
The bank switching function is used to switch a combination of protection zones, warning zones, and reference points of
the SZ Series.
You can switch the bank of the SZ Series connected to the terminal using the output block of BANK.
Reference For more information about the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's
Manual".
Point The bank switching function is not available for SZ-01S (simple function type).
Settable bank switching method and number of banks
Model Number of banks
SZ-04M (multi-function type) Max. 4 banks
SZ-16V (multi-bank type)/SZ-16V (communication type) Max. 16 banks
Connection type
Select the bank output point according to the number of banks used.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-153
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
<Number of bank outputs and maximum number of banks>
Number of Input method
Connection type
outputs Single Binary
Bank output x 2 2 Fixed to 2 Fixed to 2
Bank output x 4 4 Max. 4 Max. 4
Bank output x 6 6 Max. 8 Max. 8
Bank output x 8 8 -- Max. 16
[SZ series detailed settings]
6
Installation and Wiring
Input method - Single
[Number of banks: 2] [Number of banks: 8] [Bank enablement input]
Input Bank 0 Input Bank 0
Input Bank 1
Input Bank 2
Input Bank 3
Input Bank 1 Input Bank 4 Input Enable
Input Bank 5
Input Bank 6
Input Bank 7
6-154 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Bank number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Input Bank 0 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Input Bank 1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Input Bank 2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Input Bank 3 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Input Bank 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Point An error occurs if a bank is not
Input Bank 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF specified or multiple banks are
specified.
Input Bank 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
Input Bank 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
6
Installation and Wiring
Input method - Binary
[Number of banks: 2] [Number of banks: 8] [Bank enablement input]
Input Bit 0
Input Bit 1
Input Bit 0
Input Bit 2
Input Bit 3 Input Enable
Bank number
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Input bit 0 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Input bit 1 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
Input bit 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
Input bit 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Point An error occurs if the bank input signal state differs from the specified state.
GC Series User’s Manual 6-155
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
AUX-IN
You can use the AUX output of the SZ Series connected to the terminal in a program.
Set the function assigned to the AUX output using the SZ Configurator.
[SZ series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
6
Installation and Wiring
<Functions assigned to AUX>
SZ-01S SZ-04M SZ-16V/16D
Error output
Alert output
Alert or error output
OSSD status output
Protection zone detection output
Warning zone detection output
Interlock-reset-ready output
Muted or override state output -- --
Muting lamp output -- --
Reference • For more information about the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series
User's Manual".
• When using three or more AUX output points, place the "Other input" block separately.
6-156 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Connecting to Remote I/O Modules
Connecting to remote I/O modules
KEYENCE safety sensors can be connected to the remote I/O modules "GC-R45" and "GC-R48".
GC-R45 (M12 5 pins) GC-R48 (M12 8 pins)
Installation and Wiring
Pin arrangement Pin arrangement
1 2 1 2
5 7 8 3
4 3 6 4
5
<Compatible destinations>
GC-R45 (M12 5 pins) GC-R48 (M12 8 pins)
Safety Light Curtains GL-R Series --
GL-S Series --
Safety Interlock Switches GS Series (Non-contact)
GS Series (Lock) --
GS-M Series --
Safety Laser Scanners SZ-V Series --
SZ Series --
For the wiring and settings of each series of KEYENCE safety sensors, refer to the following pages.
"GL-R Series"(page 6-158)
"GL-S Series"(page 6-162)
"GS Series (Non-contact Type)"(page 6-166)
"GS Series (Lock Type)"(page 6-170)
"GS-M Series"(page 6-175)
"SZ-V Series"(page 6-179)
"SZ Series"(page 6-183)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-157
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series to the remote I/O module and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GL-R Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series User's Manual"
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the GL-R Series to the GC-R45.
6 Point When the GL-R Series is used with the "wire synchronization system" (wiring system), it cannot be
connected to the GC-R45.
Installation and Wiring
Optical synchronization system
<Connection example>
GC-R45 GL-R Series
(optical synchronization
system)
Transmitter Receiver
(1) (2)
Transmitter
CN1 side
CN2 Receiver
side
Cable length: Max. 30 m
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) Extension cable: M12 5-pin cable GS-P5CC1 1 1
GS-P5CC3 1 3
GS-P5CC5 1 5
GS-P5CC10 1 10
(2) Main controller connection cable OP-88300 1 0.3
6-158 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
One-line system
<Connection example>
GL-R Series
GC-R45 (one-line system)
Transmitter Receiver
(1) (2)
Receiver
CN1
side
Cable length: Max. 30 m
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
6
Installation and Wiring
(1) Extension cable: M12 5-pin cable GS-P5CC1 1 1
GS-P5CC3 1 3
GS-P5CC5 1 5
GS-P5CC10 1 10
(2) Main controller connection cable OP-88300 1 0.3
Cable length
For the case of the optical synchronization system, prevent the cable length between the GC-R45 and the GL-R Series
from exceeding 30 m on both the transmitter and receiver sides. For the case of the one-line system, prevent the total
length of M12 5-pin cable, main controller connection cable, extension cable and connection cable from exceeding 30
m.
All of the cables must be used within the specified length range. Otherwise, the safety functions may
DANGER
not work properly, allowing a dangerous situation to exist.
Pin arrangement
The following shows the GC-R45 pins and the assignment of the GL-R Series signals.
Pin number Transmitter side Receiver side
Pin 1 +24 V +24 V
1 2
Pin 2 Not used OSSD2
5
Pin 3 0V 0V
4 3
Pin 4 Not used OSSD1
Pin 5 Not used Not used
GC Series User’s Manual 6-159
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GL-R series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen
and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
6
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
Reference When using the optical synchronization system, select [Power supply only] from the input device list on the transmitter
side. Only power supply can be performed for the GL-R.
6-160 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [Remote I/O M12 5-pin].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Select the remote I/O module and port (CN1 to CN4) to be connected.
6
Installation and Wiring
3 GL-R Series detailed settings
Item Details
Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-161
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series to the remote I/O module and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GL-S Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Light Curtain GL-S Series User's Manual"
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the GL-S Series to the GC-R45.
6
Point When the GL-S Series is used with the "wire synchronization system" (wiring system), it cannot be
Installation and Wiring
connected to the GC-R45.
Optical synchronization system
<Connection example> GL-S Series
GC-R45 (optical synchronization
system)
Transmitter Receiver
(1) (2)
Transmitter
CN1 side
Receiver
CN2
side
Main controller
Cable length: Max. 20 m connection cable
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) M12 5-pin cable OP-85503 1 2
OP-85504 1 5
(2) Main controller connection cable GL-SPC03PS 1 0.3
6-162 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
One-line system
<Connection example>
GL-S Series
GC-R45 (one-line system)
Transmitter Receiver
(1) (2)
Receiver
CN1
side
Cable length: Max. 30 m*
* Keep the total length of main controller connection cable, extension cable and connection cable from exceeding 30 m.
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
6
Installation and Wiring
(1) M12 5-pin cable OP-85503 1 2
OP-85504 1 5
(2) Main controller connection cable GL-SPC03PS 1 0.3
Cable length
For the case of the optical synchronization system, prevent the cable length between the GC-R45 and the GL-S Series from
exceeding 30 m on both the transmitter and receiver sides. For the case of the one-line system, prevent the total length of
M12 5-pin cable, main controller connection cable, extension cable and connection cable from exceeding 30 m.
Pin arrangement
The following shows the GC-R45 pins and the assignment of the GL-S Series signals.
Pin number Transmitter side Receiver side
Pin 1 +24 V +24 V
1 2
Pin 2 Not used OSSD2
5
Pin 3 0V 0V
4 3
Pin 4 Not used OSSD1
Pin 5 Not used Not used
GC Series User’s Manual 6-163
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GL-S series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen
and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
6
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
Reference When using the optical synchronization system, select [Power supply only] from the input device list on the transmitter
side. Only power supply can be performed for the GL-S.
6-164 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [Remote I/O M12 5-pin].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Select the remote I/O module and port (CN1 to CN4) to be connected.
6
Installation and Wiring
3 GL-S Series detailed settings
Item Details
Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User’s Manual 6-165
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact)
The following describes how to connect the Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact) to the remote I/O module and
the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GS Series (Non-contact), refer to the following manual.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Non-contact) User’s Manual"
Point • Only the GS-10PC (simple function type) can be connected to the GC-R45 (M12 5 pins).
• Only the GS-11PC (standard type) can be connected to the GC-R48 (M12 8 pins).
6
Installation and Wiring
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the GS Series (Non-contact) to the GC-R45.
[GC-R45 - GS-10PC] [GC-R48 - GS-11PC]
<Connection example> <Connection example>
GC-R45 GS-10PC GC-R48 GS-11PC
(simple function (standard type)
type)
(1) (1)
CN1 CN1
Cable length: Max. 30.3 m Cable length: Max. 30.3 m
Name Supported Model Quantity Length (m)
model
(1) Extension cables Simple function type (5 GS-10PC GS-P5CC1 1 1
pins) GS-P5CC3 1 3
GS-P5CC5 1 5
GS-P5CC10 1 10
Standard type (8 pins) GS-11PC GS-P8CC1 1 1
GS-P8CC3 1 3
GS-P8CC5 1 5
GS-P8CC10 1 10
6-166 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Pin arrangement
The following shows the GC-R45/R48 pins and the assignment of the GS Series (Non-contact) signals.
Pin number GC-R45 Pin number GC-R48
Pin 1 +24 V Pin 1 AUX
Pin 2 OSSD2 Pin 2 +24 V
1 2 1 2
Pin 3 0V Pin 3 Not used
5 7 8 3
Pin 4 OSSD1 Pin 4 Safety input 2
4 3 6 4
Pin 5 AUX1 5 Pin 5 OSSD1
Pin 6 OSSD2
Pin 7 0V
Pin 8 Safety input 1 6
Installation and Wiring
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GS/GS-M series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration]
screen and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
GC Series User’s Manual 6-167
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Item Settings
Connection destinations GS-10PC: Select [Remote I/O M12 5-pin].
GS-11PC: Select [Remote I/O M12 8-pin].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Select the remote I/O module and port (CN1 to CN4) to be connected.
3 GS Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-10 series].
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) GS Series can be used in a program.
Advanced output Use unlock output This cannot be selected by the GS-10 Series.
setting(s)
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
6-168 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
AUX-IN
The AUX output of the GS Series can be used in a program.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
Installation and Wiring
GC Series User’s Manual 6-169
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock)
The following describes how to connect the Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock) to the remote I/O module and the
settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GS Series (Lock), refer to the following manual.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS Series (Lock) User's Manual"
Point • The GS Series (Lock) cannot be connected to the GC-R45 (M12 5 pins).
• Only the following models can be connected to the GC-R48 (M12 8 pins).
• GS-51PC (power-to-release)
• GS-71PC (power-to-lock)
6
Installation and Wiring
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the GS Series (Lock) to the GC-R48.
[GC-R48 - GS-51PC/GS-71PC]
<Connection example>
GS-51PC/71PC
GC-R48 (standard type)
(1)
CN1
Cable length: Max. 30.3 m
Name Supported Model Quantity Length (m)
model
(1) Extension cables Standard type (8 pins) GS-51PC GS-P8CC1 1 1
GS-71PC GS-P8CC3 1 3
GS-P8CC5 1 5
GS-P8CC10 1 10
Pin arrangement
The following shows the GC-R48 pins and the assignment of the GS Series (Lock) signals.
Pin number GS Series
Pin 1 AUX output
1 2
Pin 2 +24 V
7 8 3
Pin 3 Lock control input
6 4
5 Pin 4 Safety input 2
Pin 5 OSSD1
Pin 6 OSSD2
Pin 7 0V
Pin 8 Safety input 1
6-170 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GS/GS-M series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration]
screen and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
GS Series Connection destinations Select [Remote I/O M12 8-pin].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Select the remote I/O module and port (CN1 to CN4) to be connected.
Unlock output Connection type Fixed to [Safety output x 1].
GC Series User’s Manual 6-171
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 GS/GS-M Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
6
Installation and Wiring
Item Settings
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-50 series] or [GS-70 series].
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) GS Series can be used in a program.
Advanced output Use unlock output With the check box checked, the "unlock output" block is added.
setting(s)
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
Unlock output Enable self-diagnosis of Check this check box to enable the self-diagnosis function for the unlock output.
output
6-172 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
AUX-IN
The AUX output of the GS Series can be used in a program.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
Installation and Wiring
GC Series User’s Manual 6-173
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Unlock output
You can unlock the GS Series through a program.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
Unlock output block
6
Installation and Wiring
Unlock output operation
Power-to-release (GS-51PC) Power-to-lock (GS-71PC)
Unlock output Unlock output
ON ON
OFF OFF
S-OUT S-OUT
ON ON
OFF OFF
Point Unlocking occurs when the unlock output block is ON in both cases of power-to-release and power-to-
lock.
6-174 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series to the remote I/O module and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the GS-M Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Interlock Switch GS-M Series User's Manual"
Point • The GS-M Series cannot be connected to the GC-R45 (M12 5 pins).
• Only the following models can be connected to the GC-R48 (M12 8 pins).
• GS-M51P
• GS-M91P
• GS-ML51P
6
Installation and Wiring
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the GS-M to the GC-R48.
<Connection example>
GC-R48 GS-M Series
(1)
CN1
Cable length: Max. 31 m
Name Supported Model Quantity Length (m)
model
(1) Extension cables Standard type (8 pins) GS-M51P GS-P8LC1 1 1
GS-M91P
GS-P8CC1 1 1
GS-ML51P
GS-P8CC3 1 3
GS-P8CC5 1 5
GS-P8CC10 1 10
Pin arrangement
The following shows the GC-R48 pins and the assignment of the GS-M Series signals.
Pin number GS/GS-M Series
Pin 1 AUX output
1 2
Pin 2 +24 V
7 8 3
Pin 3 Lock control input
6 4
5 Pin 4 Safety input 2
Pin 5 OSSD1
Pin 6 OSSD2
Pin 7 0V
Pin 8 Safety input 1
GC Series User’s Manual 6-175
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [GS/GS-M series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration]
screen and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
6
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
GS-M Series Connection destinations Select [Remote I/O M12 8-pin].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Select the remote I/O module and port (CN1 to CN4) to be connected.
Unlock output Connection type Fixed to [Safety output x 1].
6-176 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 GS/GS-M Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
Installation and Wiring
Item Settings
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-M5/9 series] or [GS-ML5 series]
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) GS Series can be used in a program.
Advanced output Use unlock output With the check box checked, the "unlock output" block is added.
setting(s)
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
Unlock output Enable self-diagnosis of Check this check box to enable the self-diagnosis function for the unlock output.
output
GC Series User’s Manual 6-177
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
AUX-IN
The AUX output of the GS-M Series can be used in a program.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
6
Installation and Wiring
Unlock output
You can unlock the GS-M Series through a program.
[GS/GS-M series detailed settings]
Unlock output block
6-178 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series to the remote I/O module and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the SZ-V Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual"
Point To use the SZ-V Series, you need to set the SZ-V Series main controller using the SZ-V Configurator.
Configure the settings according to the functions you will use.
Connection cables 6
Installation and Wiring
Use the following cables to connect the SZ-V Series to the GC-R45.
<Connection example>
GC-R45 SZ-V Series
(2)
(1)
CN1
Cable length: Max. 30 m
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) Extension cable (5 pins), 7 m SZ-VCC7 1 7
(2) SZ-V04 power cable (5 pins), 0.3 m SZ-VPC03S 1 0.3
Pin arrangement
The following shows the GC-R45 pins and the assignment of the SZ-V Series signals.
Pin number SZ-V Series
Pin 1 +24 V
1 2
Pin 2 OSSD2
5
Pin 3 0V
4 3
Pin 4 OSSD1
Pin 5 AUX outputs
GC Series User’s Manual 6-179
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [SZ-V series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen
and register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
6
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [Remote I/O M12 5-pin].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Select the remote I/O module and port (CN1 to CN4) to be connected.
6-180 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 SZ-V Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s) Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
*1
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ-V Configurator.* 2
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
*1 This is available only when connecting the SZ-V04(X).
*2 For the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
GC Series User’s Manual 6-181
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
AUX-IN
You can use the AUX output of the SZ-V Series connected to the terminal in a program.
Set the function assigned to the AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.
[SZ-V series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
6
Installation and Wiring
<Functions assigned to AUX>
SZ-V04 type
Error output
Alert output
Alert or error output
Muted or override state output
Muting lamp output
OSSD status output
Protection zone detection output
Warning zone detection output
Interlock-reset-ready output
Normal operation transition output
Reference For more information about the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series
User's Manual".
6-182 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series
The following describes how to connect the Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series to the remote I/O module and the settings.
Reference For the installation method and usage of the SZ Series, refer to the following manual.
"Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual"
Point • Only the SZ-01S (simple function type) can be connected to the GC-R45.
• To use the SZ Series, you need to set the SZ Series main controller using the SZ Configurator. Configure
the settings according to the functions you will use.
Installation and Wiring
Connection cables
Use the following cables to connect the SZ Series to the GC-R45.
<Connection example>
GC-R45
SZ-01S
(1) (2)
CN1
Cable length: Max. 30 m
Name Model Quantity Length (m)
(1) Extension cable (5 pins) SZ-CC7PS 1 7
(2) SZ-01S output cable (5 pins) SZ-PC03PS 1 0.3
Pin arrangement
The following shows the GC-R45 pins and the assignment of the SZ Series signals.
Pin number SZ Series
Pin 1 +24 V
1 2
Pin 2 OSSD2
5
Pin 3 0V
4 3
Pin 4 OSSD1
Pin 5 AUX outputs
GC Series User’s Manual 6-183
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
GC Configurator settings
1 Registering input devices
Select [SZ series [KEYENCE]] from the input device list on the GC Configurator [Settings] > [Configuration] screen and
register it by the drag-and-drop operation.
6
Installation and Wiring
Drag and drop
2 Input device basic settings
Connection destinations Connection type Connection unit/terminal
Item Settings
Connection destinations Select [Remote I/O M12 5-pin].
Connection type Fixed to [PNP 2 inputs].
Connection unit/terminal Select the remote I/O module and port (CN1 to CN4) to be connected.
6-184 GC Series User’s Manual
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
3 SZ Series detailed settings
[Initial setting] [Setting advanced input/output]
Installation and Wiring
Item Details
Operation Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
setting(s)
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using
the SZ Configurator.* 1
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)].
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)].
*1 For the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual".
GC Series User’s Manual 6-185
6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors
AUX-IN
You can use the AUX output of the SZ Series connected to the GC-Link port in a program.
Set the function assigned to the AUX output using the SZ Configurator.
[SZ series detailed settings]
AUX-IN input block
6
Installation and Wiring
<Functions assigned to AUX>
SZ-01S
Error output
Alert output
Alert or error output
OSSD status output
Protection zone detection output
Warning zone detection output
Interlock-reset-ready output
Reference For the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual".
6-186 GC Series User’s Manual
7
Before Using the GC
Configurator
This chapter provides the information you should know before using the GC Configurator.
Before Using the GC Configurator
7-1 GC Configurator Functions .................................................................................page 7-2
7-2 Operating Environment........................................................................................page 7-4
7-3 Installing GC Configurator...................................................................................page 7-5
7-4 Program Creation Procedure ..............................................................................page 7-6
GC Series User’s Manual 7-1
7-1 GC Configurator Functions
Simulation function
GC Configurator Functions
• The operation of a created program can be simulated
The GC Configurator is the software used to configure
without connecting to the GC Series, which allows you to
settings and perform programming of the GC Series.
preliminarily debug a created program.
• You can select continuous scanning, one-step
Configuration setting execution, etc. as the execution mode. This feature
helps to easily identify a defective component.
• Set the GC Series unit configuration.
• Register the input and output devices.
• Set functions such as Ethernet communications.
7
Before Using the GC Configurator
Monitoring function
• Real-time monitoring of the GC Series program
Programming function
execution and input/output device ON/OFF states can
• You can create a program using function blocks. be performed.
• There are two types of programming modes: "EASY • A timing chart can be displayed.
mode" that enables easy programming by just selecting • You can monitor the function block and input/output
an application and registering input device(s), and block statuses.
"Standard mode" that supports various types of • The unit monitor allows you to monitor the expansion unit
applications. and remote I/O module statuses. Additionally, you can
monitor the received light amount of the GL-R Series and
the door open/close state of the GS Series.
7-2 GC Series User’s Manual
7-1 GC Configurator Functions
History function
• The GC Series stores a history of the input/output block
statuses each time a change occurs. This helps you
confirm the status and investigate the cause promptly
after an incident occurs.
• There are two types of history data: "Full-time history"
that stores changes of all the blocks in a volatile memory
without the need of configuration, and "Event history" that
stores changes in a non-volatile memory at an arbitrary
timing using the event history function block.
Before Using the GC Configurator
GC Series User’s Manual 7-3
7-2 Operating Environment
Operating Environment
Item Operating environment
Supported OS*1 Windows 11*2
Windows 10
Windows 8.1
Windows 7 SP1 or later version
CPU OS system requirements must be satisfied.
Free space on hard disk Min. 5 GB
Required memory size 1 GB (32-bit OS)/2 GB (64-bit OS)
Display Min. 1024 x 768
Interface Ethernet port*3, USB 2.0
7 Others
*1 Both 32-bit and 64-bit supported.
.NET Framework 4.6*4
Before Using the GC Configurator
*2 Only GC configurator version 1.1.6.0 or later is supported.
*3 GC-1000 only. Not available on GC-1000R.
*4 When not installed, .NET Framework 4.6 will be installed automatically when installing the GC Configurator.
7-4 GC Series User’s Manual
7-3 Installing GC Configurator
Preparation for Installation Executing Installation
Execute the downloaded file "setup.exe".
Free space on hard disk After that, follow the instructions given by the installation
program.
The GC Configurator is installed on the system drive on Note that the driver required to connect the PC on which
which the OS has been installed. The following free space is the GC Configurator is installed with the GC Series main
required in the drive of the installation destination (hard disk, controller via USB is installed automatically when installing
etc.). the GC Configurator.
• GC Configurator: Min. 5 GB In a situation where it needs to be installed manually,
use the driver stored in "C:\Program Files
Windows environment and installation (x86)\KEYENCE\GC Configurator\driver".
destination
Point To install, log on to the PC as a user with
The GC Configurator is the software that runs on Windows.
The installation is also executed on Windows.
administrator privileges. 7
Before Using the GC Configurator
Check that Windows 7 SP1/8.1/10/11 has been installed
and is operating properly on the PC you use.
Uninstalling GC Configurator
Communication interface Uninstall the GC Configurator when it becomes no longer
needed.
The PC on which the GC Configurator is installed Uninstall the GC Configurator via [Programs and Features]
communicates with the GC Series main controller via USB from [Control Panel] of Windows.
or Ethernet.
Confirm that the communication via USB or Ethernet Point To uninstall, log on to the PC as a user
adapter of the PC on which the GC Configurator is installed with administrator privileges.
is available. For the configuration method, refer to the
manual of the PC.
Precautions for Uninstallation
Help file
When uninstalling the GC Configurator, a dialog box
The help file in the GC Configurator is publish in a PDF prompting you to select whether or not to delete the files
format. To view a PDF file, you need to install the PDF (*dll) used by the GC Configurator may be displayed.
browsing software provided by Adobe Systems on the PC. Check [Do not show this again.] and click the [Yes] button.
The PDF browsing software is distributed free of charge on Deleting these files does not affect the Windows
the Adobe Systems website (http://www.adobe.co.jp/). operations.
Downloading GC Configurator
You can download the GC Configurator from the KEYENCE
website.
www.keyence.com/glb
In a situation where the software cannot be downloaded
via Internet, contact the nearest KEYENCE office.
GC Series User’s Manual 7-5
7-4 Program Creation Procedure
The following describes the procedure for programming with the GC Configurator and the information which you should
know before performing programming.
GC Configurator Operations and Screens
Mode Screen Overview
Settings Configuration Set the GC Series unit configuration, register input/output devices and set options such
as Ethernet communication function.
Program Perform the programming. "EASY mode" enabling easy programming and "Standard
mode" supporting various types of applications are available.
Transfer Transfer a program to the GC Series. After log in authentication, a program is transferred
to the GC Series main controller.
Monitoring Configuration Monitor the GC Series main controller operation status. The operation status by input/
7 Program output device and the program execution status can be monitored on the [Configuration]
screen and the [Program] screen, respectively. These screens are used to check the
Before Using the GC Configurator
debugging operation at the start-up of the unit or the status
History Configuration These screens allow you to review information such as the safety output OFF history
stored in the GC Series main controller. You can check the input device status when the
Program
safety output turns OFF or the program execution status. These screens are used to
check the debugging operation at the start-up of the unit or the status when an incident
occurs.
Settings mode
Configuration Program Transfer
Monitoring mode
Configuration Program
History mode
Configuration Program
7-6 GC Series User’s Manual
7-4 Program Creation Procedure
Program Creation Procedure
The following describes the steps for programming using the GC Configurator and the mode used in each step.
1. Create the system configuration. Operation Screen
Create the GC Series system configuration (main controller,
Settings Configuration Program Transfer
expansion unit and remote I/O module).
2. Register input/output devices. Operation Screen
Register input/output devices, set the connection
destinations and types, and allocate the terminals. Settings Configuration Program Transfer
Configure detailed settings related to the input/output
device operations as needed.
7
Before Using the GC Configurator
3. Create a program. Operation Screen
Create a program according to the processing contents Settings Configuration Program Transfer
controlled by the GC Series.
Two programming modes (EASY and Standard) are
available.
4. Transfer the program. Operation Screen
Transfer the created program to the GC Series main Settings Configuration Program Transfer
controller.
You need to log in to the GC Series before transferring the
program.
Operation Screen
5. Debug the program. Settings Configuration Program Transfer
Check the operation status such as changes in the input/
output devices. Monitoring Configuration Program
• Use [Simulation] when debugging the program off-line.
History Configuration Program
• Use [Monitoring] when debugging the program on-line.
• Use [History] when actively operating the GC Series to
check the history data.
GC Series User’s Manual 7-7
GC Series User’s Manual
MEMO
7-8
Before Using the GC Configurator
7
8
Basic Operations of
GC Configurator
This chapter describes the basic operations of the GC Configurator.
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
8-1 Starting GC Configurator.....................................................................................page 8-2
8-2 Screen Configuration ...........................................................................................page 8-5
8-3 Menu ......................................................................................................................page 8-6
GC Series User’s Manual 8-1
8-1 Starting GC Configurator
Starting GC Configurator
Start the GC Configurator by any of the following methods.
• From the start button of Windows, select [All Apps] (or [All programs]) > [KEYENCE Applications] > [GC Configurator].
• Double-click the GC Configurator icon on the desktop.
• Double-click the GC Configurator configuration file.
Initial Screen
8
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
Item Details
Read out settings from GC* Used to read the settings of the GC main controller connected to a PC via USB or Ethernet. After
reading the settings, the configuration screen in the settings mode will be displayed.
Create a new configuration file Used to create a new file and edit new settings. Clicking this button
displays the [Create a new configuration file] dialog box.
Open configuration file Used to open an already created file.
Click the [] button and select a file type to open from the following options.
• Configuration file
• Sample file
• Preset recipe
• Registered recipe
*
Start monitoring Used to monitor the GC main controller status. The monitoring screen will be displayed.
*
Read out history from GC Used to read the GC main controller history. After reading the history, the history screen will be
displayed.
Click the [] button to display the [Open] window and then select a history file stored in the PC
to display.
Connection Select a connection method from [USB] and [Ethernet].
Communication settings Clicking this button displays the [Communication settings] dialog box.
Language Clicking this button displays the [Language Selection] dialog box.
* Before operating, connect the GC Series with a PC and put them in a communication enabled state.
8-2 GC Series User’s Manual
8-1 Starting GC Configurator
Communication settings
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
Item Details
Connection method Select a connection method from [USB] and [Ethernet].
Ethernet connection method Select either [Direct input] or [Select from list].
IP address Enter an IP address when selecting [Direct input] for [Ethernet connection method].
Port number Enter a port number when selecting [Direct input] for [Ethernet connection method]. Clicking the
[Settings] button displays the port number setting dialog box.
Setting range: 0 to 65535
Check connection Click the [Check connection] button to check if connection can be established with the specified
IP address and port number.
Network adapter The network card used for the PC is displayed.
When the PC is equipped with two or more network cards, select one to use.
Search Click the [Search] button to search the network for the device.
When the device was found after searching, the IP address, MAC address, device name and
port number are displayed in the search result area.
Start IP Setting Tool Displayed when the "IP Setting Tool" has been installed on the PC.
Click this button to start the IP Setting Tool.
Install IP Setting Tool* Displayed when the "IP Setting Tool" has not been installed on the PC.
Click this button to start installation.
* The IP Setting Tool is stored in the GC Configurator installation folder.
Reference The IP address of the GC-1000 is not assigned in the default state. Set the IP address by any of the following methods.
Connecting via Ethernet
• Set using the IP Setting Tool.
• Set using the BOOTP server. (This needs to be prepared by the customer.)
Connecting via USB
• Write the communication settings when transferring a program.
GC Series User’s Manual 8-3
8-1 Starting GC Configurator
Select [Option] on the [Configuration] screen, select [Basic setting] for Ethernet and then check [Transfer
communication settings (applied at the next start-up)]. "Ethernet basic setting" (page 10-20)
* When the communication settings are transferred, the settings will be reflected at the next start-up.
Language selection
8
Clicking the [Language] button displays the language selection dialog box.
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
Select a language and click the [OK] button to change the language used for the GC Configurator.
Reference The language can also be changed via [Language] on the menu bar.
"Language" (page 8-13)
8-4 GC Series User’s Manual
8-2 Screen Configuration
The GC Configurator provides three modes: "Settings", "Monitoring" and "History". Each mode has the [Configuration]
screen that allows you to edit/confirm the input/output devices and the [Program] screen that allows you to edit/confirm the
programs.
Settings
The settings mode is used to create new settings or edit/check settings, etc. off-line.
<Configuration> <Program>
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
Monitoring
The monitoring mode is used to check the status at start-up, etc. on-line.
<Configuration> <Program>
History
The history mode is used to review the past data such as the status at safety output OFF, which is useful when a incident
occurs.
<Configuration> <Program>
GC Series User’s Manual 8-5
8-3 Menu
Save image
File Save the state currently displayed as an image. It can be
saved as an image file (.png/.bmp/.jpg) or copied to the
clipboard.
Clicking this item displays the [Save image] window.
[Copy to clipboard]: Copied to the clipboard.
[Save in file]: Saved as an image file in ".png", ".bmp", ".jpg"
format.
Create a new configuration file
Create a new file and edit new settings.
8 Clicking this item displays the [Create a new configuration
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
file] screen.
"9 Creating New Project with GC Configurator" (page 9-
1)
Open configuration file
Read an edit target file when editing an already created
file.
Clicking this item displays the [Open] window.
Open history file
Read a saved history file.
Clicking this item displays the [Open] window.
Save
Save an edited configuration file as the current file name in
Point Images can be saved in units of the GC
an overwriting manner.
Configurator windows. Select a window
If you want to keep the original file, select [Save as]
and then save the image.
described next.
Recipe
Point • With [Save] selected, the previous data Using the recipe function, a program can be saved as a
will be lost. recipe file in units of pages and it can be reused for
• A newly created file is named as another project.
"Untitled_****.**" by default.
There are two types of recipes: "Preset recipe" registered
• Even if [Save] is executed for a newly
preliminarily in the GC Configurator, and "Registered
created file, [Save as] will be selected
recipe" that registers a program created by the customer.
automatically.
For details, refer to "Recipe Function" (page 11-35).
• Open
Save as Read "Preset recipe" registered preliminarily in the GC
Save the file as a different name from the current file name. Configurator or "Registered recipe".
[Save as] is always selected for a newly created file. Enter
a file name at [File name] in the [Save as] window. • Lift restrictions on edit
LLift the edit restriction on a recipe to enter it into the
editable state.
• Registration/management
Register a newly created recipe or delete a registered
recipe.
8-6 GC Series User’s Manual
8-3 Menu
Print Exit
Print the contents of the currently edited configuration file. Save the currently edited configuration file and exit the GC
The following setting contents are printed. Configurator.
• Setting properties
Project name
Comment
Edit
Transfer date time
Configuration code (CRC)
Setting software version
Serial number
• Unit configuration
Unit number
Label
Unit name
Unit configuration diagram
Undo
• Terminal table
• Option Cancel the last operation and restore the previous state.
8
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
Ethernet basic setting
Redo
Register Execute the operation canceled by [Undo] again.
System restart
Copy/Paste/Delete
Event history setting
Copy, paste or delete the selected item.
Setting for start-up delay
Detailed settings
• Program chart
Display the detailed settings screen for the selected
Program
item.
Page information
• Settings of blocks
• Response time
• Precautions
Report
Display the contents of the currently edited configuration
file.
They can also be printed from the [Settings report] window.
The displayed setting contents are the same as those for
[Print].
Recent files
Display up to five recently used files.
Open sample file
In the sample file, configuration files including programs
which can be used for reference are saved.
The programs, which can be used as they are, when using
KEYENCE safety sensors are pre-installed.
GC Series User’s Manual 8-7
8-3 Menu
View
Setting properties
Display the project information of the currently edited configuration file.
8
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
Item Details
*1
Settings Project name Set a project name. (Up to 64 half-width alphanumeric characters)
information Comment *2
Set a comment for the project. (Up to 100 characters)
Information Transfer date time The date and time on which the transfer to the GC main controller is performed are
on transfer displayed.
Configuration code (CRC) An eight digit code to identify the settings information is displayed.
Setting software version The GC Configurator version with which the settings were performed is displayed.
Approval state Whether this project was approved by the responsible personnel is displayed.
The maintenance personnel as well as the responsible personnel can transfer the
settings in the approved state to the GC Series.
Serial number The serial number of the main controller is displayed.
*1 Named as "Untitled_0101" by default. The numeric part indicates a month and day values.
*2 Up to five lines are printed. The sixth and subsequent lines will not be printed.
8-8 GC Series User’s Manual
8-3 Menu
Unit monitor
Display the [I/O monitor] screen on which the input/output terminal status of each unit is displayed.
For details, refer to "Unit Monitor" (page 13-9).
Checklist
Display the checklist dialog box when it is not displayed. 8
Hide the checklist dialog box when it is displayed.
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
What is the checklist?
The checklist window shows information about the currently edited configuration file which needs to be reviewed.
If the checklist contains items, there may be a problem with the settings. Review the contents and make a correction.
Depending on the contents, transfer to the GC Series main controller or execution of the simulation function may become
unavailable.
Item Details
Notification icon Three types of icons are displayed according to the warning level.
The following table shows the corresponding levels and the availability of transferto the GC main controller and the
simulation function.
Icon Level Transfer to main controller Simulation
Caution Available Available
Error (Transfer unavailable) Unavailable Available
Error (Transfer/simulation
Unavailable Unavailable
unavailable)
Description Displays the description of a caution or error.
Location Displays the location generating a caution or error.
Item Displays the item generating a caution or error. Click an item to jump to the corresponding location.
GC Series User’s Manual 8-9
8-3 Menu
• Checklist update timing
The checklist is updated at the following timing:
• When the [Refresh] button in the checklist dialog box is clicked.
• When the checklist dialog box is displayed (changed from the hidden to shown state).
• When the [Transfer] button is clicked.
• When [Communication] > [Transfer settings to GC] is selected from the menu.
• When the simulation mode is entered.
• When the report screen is displayed.
• When printing is executed.
• Notification contents
Level Content Cause
Not used in the program. • The input/output device registered in the configuration is not used in
the program.
• Registration has been completed, but both of the load and store
8 Caution
Not used.
blocks are not used in the program window.
An expansion unit or remote I/O module has been registered, but no
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
device is assigned to the terminal.
Output port is unconnected. Some block output port is unconnected.
Corresponding register (load) is not used. The register (load) that corresponds to the register (store) is not used in
the program.
Terminal is not assigned. No terminal is assigned to the registered input/output device.
Not configured. There is a page where the application has not been set in the EASY
Error mode.
Offset: bit is not assigned. Communication input/output offset: Bit is not assigned.
Dummy input cannot be transferred. A dummy input block exists in the program.
Dummy output cannot be transferred. A dummy output block exists in the program.
Device has not been inserted. There is a block where the input device has not been registered in the
EASY mode.
Block is not connected. The block port is unconnected.
Create a program. A program has not been created.
Program size is too large. The program capacity is exceeded.
Cannot add additional blocks. The program capacity is exceeded.
Select the model(s) in detailed settings. The GS Series model with the GC-Link setting is not selected for the
Error connection destination.
Disablement target is not selected. The maintenance function is enabled in the EASY mode, but the
disabling target device is not selected.
Reference is not configured. The reference destination for block information, GS closed state, GS
locked state, etc. is not assigned.
Reference device is not used. The reference destination of block information is not used in the program.
Corresponding jump (load) is not used. Not used by the jump - store block (load).
Corresponding register (store) is not used. The register (store) that corresponds to the register (load) is not used in
the program.
8-10 GC Series User’s Manual
8-3 Menu
Setting guide
Clicking this item displays the setting guide dialog box when it is not displayed.
Hide the setting guide dialog box when it is displayed.
What is the setting guide?
The setting guide window shows information such as the usage of the GC Configurator, selected devices, block setting
contents, assigned terminals and
locations used in the program.
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
GC Series User’s Manual 8-11
8-3 Menu
Communication
Clear
Clear history data
Clear the history data of the GC Series main controller.
Initialize GC
Initialize the GC Series main controller.
Clicking this item displays a confirmation message.
Select from [Initialize all settings], [Except comm.
settings] and [Cancel].
With [Initialize all settings] selected, the main controller
settings, history data and communication settings will
be initialized to recover the default settings.
Communication settings With [Except comm. settings] selected, the main
Clicking this item displays the communication settings controller settings and history data will be deleted.
8 dialog box. Select [Cancel] to cancel the process.
For details, refer to "Communication settings" (page 8-
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
3). Reference It takes a maximum of 20 seconds to complete
the initialization.
Read out settings from GC After the initialization, the GC Series will restart
automatically.
Read the settings from the GC Series main controller into
the GC Configurator.
Restart GC
Transfer settings to GC Restart the GC Series.
Transfer the program set with the GC Configurator to the
GC Series main controller. After transferring, the monitoring
mode will be displayed.
Read out history from GC
Read the history data from the GC Series main controller
into the GC Configurator.
Identification & Maintenance (M)
When only PROFINET communication is used, this is
displayed.
The information about PROFINET communication can be
checked. Also "TAG FUNCTION", "TAG LOCATION",
"INSTALLATION DATE", and "DESCRIPTOR" can be set,
transferred and read.
Set GC to "RUN"
Change the GC Series to RUN.
Set GC to "STOP"
Change the GC Series to STOP.
8-12 GC Series User’s Manual
8-3 Menu
Log-in Authentication Language
English/Japanese
Change the display language of the GC Configurator.
Log-in
Clicking this item displays the log-in dialog box.
Reference When the display language is changed, it will
For details, refer to "12-1 Log-in Authentication" (page
be reflected after restarting the GC
12-2).
Configurator.
Log out
Clicking this item stops the communication with the GC
Series main controller and logs the user out.
Help
8
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
Management of privileges and passwords
Clicking this item displays the dialog box for management
of privileges and passwords.
For details, refer to "12-1 Log-in Authentication" (page
12-2).
If you forget the password The GC Configurator provides the manual in a PDF format.
Clicking this item displays the [If you forget the password] If you are not sure about the operations, refer to the manual
dialog box. via the [Help] menu.
For details, refer to "12-1 Log-in Authentication" (page
12-2).
About
Clicking this item displays the GC Configurator version
information dialog box.
GC Series User’s Manual 8-13
GC Series User’s Manual
MEMO
8-14
Basic Operations of GC Configurator
8
9
Creating New Project
with GC Configurator
This chapter describes how to create a new project with the GC Configurator.
9-1 Create a new configuration file ...........................................................................page 9-2 9
Creating New Project with GC Configurator
GC Series User’s Manual 9-1
9-1 Create a new configuration file
9
Creating New Project with GC Configurator
Item Details
Select Main Controller Select the main controller used for a project to be created from [GC-1000] and [GC-1000R].
Read out unit configuration*1 Read the unit configuration information from the GC Series connected to the PC.
Unit settings Configure the unit settings. Clicking this button displays the [Unit settings] window.
Programming mode Select the programming mode from [Standard mode] or [EASY mode].
Project name Set a project name. (Up to 64 half-width alphanumeric characters)
Comment Set a comment for the project. (Up to 100 characters)
*1 Before operating, connect the GC Series with a PC and put them in a communication enabled state.
9-2 GC Series User’s Manual
9-1 Create a new configuration file
Programming Mode
The GC Configurator provides two programming modes: "Standard mode" and "EASY mode" for creating a safety control
program.
Standard mode
The standard mode allows you to use all of the function blocks and create a safety control program supporting various
types of applications with a high degree of freedom.
Creating New Project with GC Configurator
For details, refer to "11-2 Standard Mode" (page 11-25).
GC Series User’s Manual 9-3
9-1 Create a new configuration file
EASY mode
The EASY mode allows you to easily create a safety control program by simply selecting an application and registering
input device(s). This is useful when performing a relatively simple safety control.
Step 1 Select an application.
Select an application according to
the control content.
9
Creating New Project with GC Configurator
Step 2 Register input device(s).
A program for the selected application
has been prepared.
9-4 GC Series User’s Manual
9-1 Create a new configuration file
Register input device(s) by the
drag-and-drop operation.
The program is now completed.
9
Creating New Project with GC Configurator
For details, refer to "11-1 EASY Mode" (page 11-2).
GC Series User’s Manual 9-5
9-1 Create a new configuration file
Unit Settings
You can expand the number of input/output points of the main controller "GC-1000" by connecting expansion units and
remote I/O modules. To use expansion units or remote I/O modules, you need to register a unit to connect using [Unit
settings].
Point The GC-1000R cannot be connected to expansion units or remote I/O modules.
Name and function of each part on [Unit settings]
Change Main Controller Read out unit configuration
Change the main controller. Read the unit configuration from the GC Series.
Extension cable
When a bus extension unit is
used, the extension cable is
9 indicated with a dotted line.
Unit label
Creating New Project with GC Configurator
[Meaning of alphabet]
M: Main controller
E: Expansion units
B: Bus extension unit
R: Remote I/O modules
[Meaning of number]
Numbers (1, 2, 3...) are
assigned to expansion units
and remote I/O modules in the
Unit selection order of placement.
Select the unit to place.
Reference The unit label can
be changed.
Registering expansion units and remote I/O modules
Placeable area
The placeable area for the unit
is highlighted (pink).
Drag and drop
Point The unit settings can also be performed via the [Configuration] screen.
9-6 GC Series User’s Manual
9-1 Create a new configuration file
Detailed unit settings dialog box
Right-click the unit placed and select [Detailed settings] to display the detailed settings dialog box.
The label of the unit can be changed in the detailed settings dialog box. (Up to four characters)
Point • Labels are limited to four half width alphanumeric characters.
• You cannot set the same name for multiple units.
Creating New Project with GC Configurator
GC Series User’s Manual 9-7
GC Series User’s Manual
MEMO
9-8
Creating New Project with GC Configurator
9
10
GC Configurator
[Settings] -
[Configuration]
This chapter describes how to set the device configuration with the GC Configurator.
10-1 Overview of [Configuration] Screen .................................................................page 10-2
10-2 Name and Function of Each Part ......................................................................page 10-3
10-3 Device Configuration Registration and Setting Procedure ............................page 10-4 10
10-4 Registering Input Devices .................................................................................page 10-5
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
10-5 Registering Output Devices ............................................................................page 10-12
10-6 Assigning Terminals ........................................................................................page 10-17
10-7 Setting Options.................................................................................................page 10-20
GC Series User’s Manual 10-1
10-1 Overview of [Configuration] Screen
On the [Configuration] screen, configure the unit settings, input/output device registration and option settings such as
Ethernet communication function used for a project.
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
System configuration "Unit Settings" (page 9-6)
Input device registration
• Connection destination setting
• Connection type setting "10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5)
• Comment input
• Input device detailed settings
Output device registration
• Connection destination setting
• Connection type setting "10-5 Registering Output Devices" (page 10-12)
• Comment input
• Output device detailed settings
Terminal assignment "10-6 Assigning Terminals" (page 10-17)
Option settings
• Ethernet basic setting
"10-7 Setting Options" (page 10-20)
• Ethernet communication function setting
• Program function setting
10-2 GC Series User’s Manual
10-2 Name and Function of Each Part
[Configuration] screen
Menu bar
Current mode Mode selecting bar
Toolbar
System configuration
Setting properties
[Unit settings] button
Project information
Log-in status Device list Device setting area Program capacity
Name Details 10
Current mode Displays the current operation mode. There are [Settings], [Monitoring] and [History] modes.
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Menu bar Menu items. Displays the menu to execute each function.
"8-3 Menu" (page 8-6)
Mode selecting bar Used to change the operation mode and screen.
Toolbar Displays each function window.
System configuration Displays the system configuration.
Setting properties Displays the [Setting properties] window.
[Unit settings] button Displays the [Unit settings] window.
"Unit Settings" (page 9-6)
Project information Displays the project information.
"Setting properties" (page 8-8)
Program capacity Displays the currently created program capacity. (Unit: %)
Device setting area Used to display/edit the registered device settings.
Device list Allows you to select an input device, output device and optional function.
Log-in status Displays the current log-in status.
GC Series User’s Manual 10-3
Device Configuration Registration and
10-3 Setting Procedure
- Device configuration procedure -
Step 1-1 Register input device(s).
Register the input device to use by dragging and dropping from the device list to device setting area.
"10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5)
Step 1-2 Configure the basic and detailed settings for the input device.
Set the connection destination, connection type, etc. for the registered input device.
"10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5)
Step 2-1 Register output device(s).
Register the output device to use by dragging and dropping from the device list to device setting area.
"10-5 Registering Output Devices" (page 10-12)
10
Step 2-2 Configure the basic and detailed settings for the output device.
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Set the connection destination, connection type, etc. for the registered output device.
"10-5 Registering Output Devices" (page 10-12)
Step 3 Assign terminals.
Assign the terminal numbers of the registered input/output devices.
"10-6 Assigning Terminals" (page 10-17)
Step 4 Set options.
Set options such as Ethernet communication function.
"10-7 Setting Options" (page 10-20)
Reference You can add a device from the [Program] screen as well.
"Input block(s)/Output block(s)" (page 11-26)
10-4 GC Series User’s Manual
10-4 Registering Input Devices
Registering Input Devices
Register input device(s) by dragging and dropping from the device list to device setting area.
Drag and drop The placeable area is
highlighted (pink).
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
List of input devices
Safety input devices Other input devices
Reference For details about input devices, refer to "A-2 List of
input devices" (page A-10).
GC Series User’s Manual 10-5
10-4 Registering Input Devices
Name and Function of Each Part in Device Setting Area (Input Device)
Connection Connection unit/ Detailed
ID Label destination/ terminal Comment settings Grip
type
Name Details
ID An ID number assigned to each input device in order from 00.
Label A label of the input device. This is used to represent an input device in a program.
(Up to 22 characters)
Connection destination/type Displays the destination and type of the input device to be connected.
Connection unit/terminal Displays the unit and terminal to which the input device is connected.
10 Comment You can enter a comment for the output device. (Up to 50 characters)
You can also click [] on the right side of the comment field to select a pre-registered comment.
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Detailed settings Displays the detailed settings dialog box for the input device.
Grip You can rearrange the order of the input devices by dragging the grip part.
Input Device Basic Settings
The following describes the basic settings of an input device.
Connection destinations
Reference The selectable connection destinations vary by the input device.
For details, refer to "A-2 List of input devices" (page A-10).
Select a destination to connect the input device. One of the following four options can be selected.
Connection destinations Description
GC-Link port Select this when connecting to the GC-Link port of GC-1000/1000R.
Terminal blocks Select this when connecting to the terminal block of the main controller or expansion unit.
Remote I/O M12 5-pin Select this when connecting to the M12 connector (M12 5 pins) of GC-R45.
Remote I/O M12 8-pin Select this when connecting to the M12 connector (M12 8 pins) of GC-R48.
10-6 GC Series User’s Manual
10-4 Registering Input Devices
Connection types
Select a connection type according to the output signal of the input device. The connection type can be selected from the
following options.
Connection type Contact/PNP Duplicate/Single Test output
2 inputs 2 test outputs
Used
2 inputs 1 test output Duplicate signal
2 inputs Contact Not used
1 input 1 test output Used
Single signal
1 input
PNP 2 inputs Duplicate signal Not used
PNP
PNP 1 input Single signal
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Reference The selectable connection types vary by the input device.
For details, refer to "A-2 List of input devices" (page A-10).
Connection units/terminals
Select the unit and terminal to which the input device is connected.
For the selection method, refer to "10-6 Assigning Terminals" (page 10-17).
Labels
A label of the input device. This is used to represent an input device in a program
Reference You can edit the existing label and use an arbitrary character string.
(Up to 22 characters)
GC Series User’s Manual 10-7
10-4 Registering Input Devices
Comments
A comment for the input device. (Up to 50 characters)
Reference You can also click [] on the right side of the comment field
to select a pre-registered comment.
Input Device Detailed Settings
10 The following describes the detailed settings of an input device.
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Displaying the detailed settings dialog box
Click the mark.
Example: Detailed settings for an emergency stop switch Example: Detailed settings for the GS/GS-M Series
10-8 GC Series User’s Manual
10-4 Registering Input Devices
Items in the detailed settings dialog box
Reference The items displayed in the detailed settings dialog box vary by the input device.
For details, refer to "A-2 List of input devices" (page A-10).
NO/NC
Set the input logic of the input device.
Item Setting range Default
NO/NC 1NO, 2NO, NONC, 1NC, 2NC, NCNO Depends on the device.
ON-OFF filter
Set the filtering time for the event of the input signal ON -> OFF in seconds or milliseconds.
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Reference "Safety Input Functions" (page 6-15)
Item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2 ms
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
OFF-ON filter
Set the filtering time for the event of the input signal OFF -> ON in seconds or milliseconds.
Reference "Safety Input Functions" (page 6-15)
Item Setting range Default
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filtering time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10 ms
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 1.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond):
Options (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User’s Manual 10-9
10-4 Registering Input Devices
Discrepancy detection time
Set the time for detecting a discrepancy when using a duplicate signal.
Reference "Safety Input Functions" (page 6-15)
Item Setting range Default
Discrepancy time With the check box checked, the discrepancy detection function is enabled. 0.5 s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (second): 0.1 to 30.0 s, in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (millisecond): Options (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Advanced inputs
You can use Pin 2 and Pin 5 of the remote I/O module "GC-R45" and Pin 1 and Pin 6 of the "GC-R48" for advanced inputs.
Reference The advanced inputs vary by the input device and connection type used.
For the input devices allowing the use of advanced inputs, refer to "A-2 List of input devices" (page A-10).
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
10-10 GC Series User’s Manual
10-4 Registering Input Devices
Advanced output
You can use Pin 2 of the remote I/O module "GC-R45" and Pin 3 of the "GC-R48" for advanced outputs.
Reference The advanced output varies by the input device and connection type to use.
For the input devices allowing the use of an advanced output, refer to "A-2 List of input devices" (page A-10).
State output
"Error output" can be set as the state output of an input device.
Reference The state output varies by the input device used.
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
For the input devices allowing the state output, refer to "A-2 List of input devices" (page A-10).
GC Series User’s Manual 10-11
10-5 Registering Output Devices
Registering Output Devices
Register an output device(s) by dragging and dropping from the device list to the device setting area.
Drag and drop
The placeable area is
highlighted (pink).
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
List of output devices
Safety outputs Other outputs
Reference For details about output devices, refer to "A-3 Output Device List" (page A-87).
10-12 GC Series User’s Manual
10-5 Registering Output Devices
Name and Function of Each Part in Device Setting Area (Output Device)
Connection Connection unit/ Detailed
ID Label destination/ terminal Comment settings Grip
type
Name Details
ID An ID number assigned to each output device in order from 50.*
Label A label of the output device. This is used to represent an output device in a program
(editable, 1 to 22 characters).
Connection port/type Displays the port type and connection type of the output device to be connected.
Connection unit/terminal Displays the unit and terminal to which the output device is connected.
Comment You can enter a comment for the output device. (Up to 50 characters)
You can also click [] on the right side of the comment field to select a pre-registered comment.
Detailed settings Displays the detailed settings dialog box for the output device.
Grip You can rearrange the order of the output devices by dragging the grip part.
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
* When 50 or more input devices are registered, an ID number is assigned after the input devices in order.
Output Device Basic Settings
The following describes the basic settings of an output device.
Connection destinations
Reference A safety output device can only be connected to the main controller or expansion unit.
Only the AUX output can select [Terminal block] and [Remote I/O M12 5-pin].
Connection types
Safety output S-OUT Safety output S-OUT (relay output) Other outputs AUX-OUT
GC Series User’s Manual 10-13
10-5 Registering Output Devices
Connection units/terminals
Select the unit and terminal to which the output device is connected.
For the selection method, refer to "10-6 Assigning Terminals" (page 10-17).
Labels
A label of the output device. This is used to represent an output device in a program
Reference You can edit the existing label and use an arbitrary character string.
(Up to 22 characters)
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Comments
A comment for the output device. (Up to 50 characters)
Reference You can also click [] on the right side of the comment field to
select a pre-registered comment.
10-14 GC Series User’s Manual
10-5 Registering Output Devices
Output Device Detailed Settings
Displaying the detailed settings dialog box
Click the mark.
Detailed settings for S-OUT Detailed settings for S-OUT (Relay output)
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Items in the detailed settings dialog box
EDM
Item Details
Use EDM input Check this check box to enable the EDM function.
Number Select the number of EDM input signals. Setting range: 1 or 2
Detect EDM error even when output is Check this check box to detect an EDM error even when the output is ON. (Default: Enabled)
ON
EDM error detection time Set the EDM error detection time. Setting range: 0.15 to 3.00 s
Reference EDM (External Device Monitoring) is a function used to detect a failure of an external device (contact welding, etc.).
"Safety Output Functions" (page 6-18)
GC Series User’s Manual 10-15
10-5 Registering Output Devices
Use reset input
Use error reset input
Check these check boxes to use the reset input and error reset input.
When enabled, an input terminal is displayed in the output block in a program.
Reset input
Error reset input
EDM input
Enable self-diagnosis of output
Check this check box to enable the self-diagnosis function of output. (Default: Enabled)
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
10-16 GC Series User’s Manual
10-6 Assigning Terminals
The terminal assignment process refers to assigning the input and output devices registered on the [Configuration] screen
to the terminals of the main controller, expansion unit and remote I/O module.
Point Before assigning terminals, complete the connection settings (connection destination/connection type)
for the registered devices.
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Individual Assignment
1 Click the [Terminal] block of the assignment target device.
GC Series User’s Manual 10-17
10-6 Assigning Terminals
2 Select the unit to assign the device and then select the terminal to assign.
After assigning, click the [OK] button and close the dialog box.
Select the unit to assign the input/output device.
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Select the terminal to assign the input/output
device.
Reference When the dialog box is displayed, you will
find the device automatically assigned to the
terminals. You can change the assignment
by clicking the desired terminal number. You
can also change the test terminal numbers
that you will use.
Reference When the [Terminal] block is clicked, the display will change to [OK]. Check the unit and terminal selection status. When
there are not any terminal assignment issues, you can just click the [OK] button to assign terminals.
10-18 GC Series User’s Manual
10-6 Assigning Terminals
Reviewing Terminal Assignment
Select a unit in the system configuration area to review the assigned terminals in the project information area.
1 Select a unit you want to review in the system configuration area. The terminal assignment status of the
selected unit will be displayed in the project information area.
Select a unit.
2 You can confirm the assignment while switching the display between the terminal block and the terminal table.
[Terminal block display] [Terminal table display]
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
GC Series User’s Manual 10-19
10-7 Setting Options
Ethernet
The GC-1000 is equipped with the Ethernet communication function, and it supports Ethernet protocols: EtherNet/IP,
Modbus/TCP, MC protocol and the UDP communication function.
For details, refer to "15 Ethernet Communication Function" (page 15-1).
Point The Ethernet communication function is available only on the main controller "GC-1000".
Ethernet basic setting
Select [Ethernet] from the device list and register it by dragging and dropping it to the device setting area.
Clicking this displays the basic setting
dialog box.
Basic settings
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Item Details
Transfer communication settings With the check box checked, the Ethernet settings configured in the basic settings are
(applied at the next start-up) transferred to the GC Series main controller.
IP settings Select the IP address setting of the GC Series main controller from [Static IP] and [BOOTP/
DHCP].
Advanced settings Clicking this button displays the advanced settings dialog box.
IP address Set the IP address (enabled when [Static IP] is selected).
Subnet mask Set the subnet mask. (enabled when [Static IP] is selected).
Default gateway Set the default gateway. (enabled when [Static IP] is selected).
Device name Enter the device name of the GC Series main controller used for the project.
Clicking the [Edit] button displays the [Edit device name] dialog box.
Point The following values cannot be set for an IP address.
• 0.0.0.0
• 127.0.0.1 to 127.255.255.254
• 224.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
• Bits of host are all 0 or 1.
10-20 GC Series User’s Manual
10-7 Setting Options
Point The following values cannot be set for a subnet mask.
• 0.0.0.0
• 255.255.255.255
• Mask bit is not continued from the higher bit (e.g. 255.254.255.0).
Point The following restrictions are placed on a device name to be entered.
• The device name length is limited to 63 characters.
• Usable characters for label are "a to z", "0 to 9" and "-".
• A hyphen cannot be used as the first and last characters of device name.
• "Port-x (x indicates a number)" cannot be used.
Advanced settings
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Item Setting range Default
*1
TCP port number 0 to 65535 8638
Keep-alive time 10 to 600 (seconds) 90 (seconds)
Timeout time 10 to 60 (seconds) 10 (seconds)
*1 The following port numbers cannot be used.
502, 5100, 5900, 44818, 63103
EtherNet/IP
To use the EtherNet/IP communication function, select [EtherNet/IP] from the device list and register it by dragging and
dropping it to the device setting area.
Reference The EtherNet/IP communication function is described in "16 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function" (page 16-1).
For details, refer to "16 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function" (page 16-1).
GC Series User’s Manual 10-21
10-7 Setting Options
UDP
To use the UDP communication function, select [UDP] from the device list and register it by dragging and dropping it to the
device setting area.
Reference The UDP communication function is described in "18 UDP Communication Function" (page 18-1).
For details, refer to "18 UDP Communication Function" (page 18-1).
Modbus/TCP
10 To use the Modbus/TCP communication function, select [Modbus/TCP] from the device list and register it by dragging and
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
dropping it to the device setting area.
Reference The Modbus/TCP communication function is described in "19 Modbus/TCP Communication Function" (page 19-1).
For details, refer to "19 Modbus/TCP Communication Function" (page 19-1).
10-22 GC Series User’s Manual
10-7 Setting Options
MC protocol
To use the MC protocol communication function, select [MC protocol] from the device list and register it by dragging and
dropping it to the device setting area.
Reference The MC protocol communication function is described in "20 MC Protocol Communication Function" (page 20-1).
For details, refer to "20 MC Protocol Communication Function" (page 20-1).
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
GC Series User’s Manual 10-23
10-7 Setting Options
Communication Inputs/Outputs
The data acquired via the EtherNet/IP, UDP, Modbus/TCP and MC protocol communications cannot be
DANGER used for the safety-related control system. If the data is used accidentally, there is a possibility of
significant harm, including serious injury or death, to the machine operators.
Point The Ethernet communication function is available only on the main controller "GC-1000".
[Communication input] and [Communication output] are an input block and output block that can be used in a program
when using the Ethernet communication function.
They can be used in a program alongside input/output devices.
10 Communication input details
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Communication output details
Reference The communication function is described in the following chapters.
"15 Ethernet Communication Function" (page 15-1)
"16 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function" (page 16-1)
"18 UDP Communication Function" (page 18-1)
"19 Modbus/TCP Communication Function" (page 19-1)
"20 MC Protocol Communication Function" (page 20-1)
10-24 GC Series User’s Manual
10-7 Setting Options
System
Registers
Registers serve as virtual input/output devices, making load and store a pair.
The output status, etc. of a function block can be received by a register to use it as an input signal for another program
circuit.
A maximum of 32 registers can be used.
Reference A signal output from a function block to a register (store) is transmitted to the paired register (load) at the next scan.
To use a register, select [Register] from the device list and register it by dragging and dropping it to the device setting area.
Clicking this displays the register setting dialog box.
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Item Details
ID Automatically assigned register ID.
Name A register name displayed in a program. (Up to 22 characters)
Comment A comment for the register. (Up to 50 characters)
Add Click this button to add a register.
Edit Clicking this button displays the detailed register settings. You can edit the register name or comment.
Delete Delete the registered register.
GC Series User’s Manual 10-25
10-7 Setting Options
System restart
Using a signal from an external device, you can restart the GC Series.
With system restart registered, "system restart" is registered with the input device.
When the terminal assigned to "system restart" turns ON, the GC Series will restart.
Point For system restart, only main controller [Terminals] can be selected.
Event history setting
The event history setting is used to set whether or not to save the event of a safety output OFF in the event history.
10
GC Configurator [Settings] - [Configuration]
Item Details
Enable (default) When the state of a safety output OFF persists for 90 seconds or longer, it will be saved in the event history.
Disable Even when the safety output turns OFF, it will not be saved in the event history. Saving in the event history occurs
only when the event history trigger function block turns ON.
Reference The event history function is described in "14 GC Configurator [History]" (page 14-1) .
For details, refer to "14 GC Configurator [History]" (page 14-1).
Setting for start-up delay
You can set the delay time of the start of the program operation from the start-up of the GC Series main controller.
Use this setting when there is a time difference between the start of the GC Series main controller and the start of the
connected input/output device(s).
Item Setting range Default
Start-up delay time 0 to 300 (seconds) 0 (seconds)
10-26 GC Series User’s Manual
11
GC Configurator
[Settings] -
Programming
This chapter describes how to create a program in the GC Configurator.
11-1 EASY Mode .........................................................................................................page 11-2
11-2 Standard Mode..................................................................................................page 11-25
11-3 Simulation .........................................................................................................page 11-45
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
GC Series User’s Manual 11-1
11-1 EASY Mode
Overview of EASY Mode
EASY mode is a programming mode that allows you to easily create a safety control program by selecting an application
and registering input devices. Even without special knowledge of safety control, all you need to do to create a safety
control program is register input devices according to the displayed guidance. This is used to create a relatively simple
safety control program.
Names and Functions on the Program Screen (EASY Mode)
Menu bar
Current Mode changing bar
mode
Toolbar
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Device list Program creation area
Name Details
Current mode Displays the current operation mode.
Menu bar Menu items. Displays the menu which executes each function.
"8-3 Menu" (page 8-6)
Mode changing bar Changes the operation mode and screen mode.
Toolbar Displays each function window.
Device list Area where you select the devices and functions used in the program.
Program creation area Programming area.
11-2 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
- EASY mode programming flow -
Step 1 Selecting an application
Select an application you want to use on the [Select app] screen.
"Selecting an Application" (page 11-4)
Step 2-1 Registering input devices
Drag and drop registered input devices to the program to register.
"Registering Input Devices" (page 11-9)
Step 2-2 Adding the maintenance function
Set the maintenance function if it is used.
"Maintenance Function" (page 11-10)
Step 3 Simulation function
Verify the operation using the simulation function. 11
"11-3 Simulation" (page 11-45)
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Reference You can convert a program created in EASY mode into a program for standard mode.
"Conversion into standard mode" (page 11-21)
GC Series User’s Manual 11-3
11-1 EASY Mode
Selecting an Application
There are four applications available in EASY mode. If you select an application appropriate for your machine, the
appropriate program for the application is automatically selected.
<<Selecting an application>>
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
<<Program of the selected application>>
The appropriate program for the selected application is displayed,
and already created.
11-4 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
Manual reset
Application
"Manual reset" is an interlock method used to initiate the start up
and/or restart of the safety output through a reset switch (etc).
Once the area is deemed safe by the safety devices and the reset
signal is provided, the safety output will be turned on.
This is required for recovering the safety output after the
emergency stop switch has been activated. It is also used when a
light curtain is installed in a location where individuals can enter a
dangerous area or the door may be closed unexpectedly.
Program
Safety inputs 11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Reset switch
Timing chart
(1) (2) (3)
Safety inputs
(Manual reset)
Reset switch
Safety outputs
(1) Confirm that all of the safety inputs are ON and then turn OFF, ON, and OFF the reset switch. The safety output is
then turned ON.
(2) Even if one of the registered safety inputs is turned OFF, the safety output is turned OFF.
(3) To restart the machine, confirm that all of the safety inputs are ON and turn ON the reset switch to turn ON the
safety output.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-5
11-1 EASY Mode
Auto-reset
Application
"Auto reset" is an interlock method used to automatically initiate
the start up and/or restart of the safety output once the area is
deemed safe by the safety devices.
When you place your hand in between the transmitter and
receiver, the light curtain will detect an obstruction and the safety
output will turn off. When you remove your hand from the
detection region, the safety output will restart automatically. This
type of interlock method is used when individuals cannot pass
through the protected area. (Ex. small machines)
Program
11 Safety inputs
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Timing chart
(1) (2) (3)
Safety inputs
Safety outputs
(1) When all of the safety inputs are turned ON, the safety output is turned ON.
(2) Even if one of the registered safety inputs is turned OFF, the safety output is turned OFF.
(3) When all of the safety inputs are turned ON again, the safety output is turned ON.
11-6 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
Manual reset + Auto-reset
Application
This interlock method is used when the safety output will be
activated by both a manual reset and an auto reset.
When you place your hand in between the transmitter and
receiver, the light curtain will detect an obstruction and the safety
output will turn off. When you remove your hand from the
detection region, the safety output will restart automatically. When
the emergency stop switch is activated, the manual reset switch is
required to restart the safety output.
Program
Safety inputs
(Manual reset)
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Reset switch
Safety inputs
(Auto-reset)
Timing chart
(1) (2) (3)
Safety inputs
(Manual reset)
Reset switch
Safety inputs
(Auto-reset)
Safety outputs
(1) Confirm that all of the safety inputs are ON and then turn OFF, ON, and OFF the reset switch. The safety output is
then turned ON.
(2) Even if one of the registered safety inputs is turned OFF, the safety output is turned OFF.
(3) When the safety inputs registered to auto-reset are turned ON, the safety output is turned ON.
* After the safety input (manual reset) is turned OFF, the reset switch needs to be turned OFF, ON, and then OFF to
restart the machine.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-7
11-1 EASY Mode
Collaborative operation
Application
"Collaborative operation" or "Auto-switching" is an interlock
method used to employ the operation of multiple sets of safety
inputs. The safety output will only turn OFF when all of the
involved safety inputs are turned OFF. The safety output will
remain ON when only safety input 1 OR safety input 2 is turned off
(since there is no risk of contact between the individual and the
robot). The safety output is turned off when both safety input 1
AND safety input 2 are turned off. The manual reset signal is
required for recovery of the safety output if the emergency stop
switch has been activated.
Program
Safety inputs
(Manual reset)
11 Reset switch
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Safety inputs
(Auto-reset)
Timing chart
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Safety inputs
(Manual reset)
Reset switch
Safety inputs
(Auto-reset)
Safety inputs
(Auto-reset)
Safety outputs
(1) Confirm that all of the safety inputs are ON and then turn OFF, ON, and OFF the reset switch. The safety output is
then turned ON.
(2) Even if one of the safety inputs registered to auto-reset is turned OFF, the safety output remains ON.
(3) When both of the safety inputs registered to auto-reset are turned OFF, the safety output is turned OFF.
(4) When one of the safety inputs registered to auto-reset is turned ON, the safety output is turned ON again.
* After the safety input (manual reset) is turned OFF, the reset switch needs to be turned OFF, ON, and then OFF to
restart the machine.
11-8 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
Registering Input Devices
In EASY mode, when you select an application, the appropriate program for the application is displayed, and already
created.
You can complete the program just by dragging and dropping the input devices registered on the configuration screen to
the program to register.
Drag and drop
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Areas in which blocks can be placed are displayed in pink.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-9
11-1 EASY Mode
Maintenance Function
What is the maintenance function?
The maintenance function can temporarily disable a signal from a safety input device when specific conditions are met.
By temporarily disabling an input from a safety light curtain or safety interlock switch, you can put the machine in the low-
speed or inching operation for machine maintenance.
In EASY mode, use the mode selecting switch to change the mode to "maintenance mode". When maintenance mode is
set, a safety input signal from the disablement target device is temporarily disabled, allowing you to perform maintenance.
After completing maintenance, change the mode back to "standard mode" with the mode selecting switch and configure
normal operation.
• The maintenance function disables a signal from a specific safety input device while a signal from the
mode selecting switch is active. Therefore, additional safety measures are required for the whole
machine in order to ensure safety while the maintenance function is activated.
• The input devices (such as a mode selecting switch), the installation of those devices, and the
procedures to activate the maintenance function must fulfill the conditions specified in this user's
manual as well as the requirements of the laws, rules, regulations, and standards in the country or
region in which the GC and those devices are used. Failure to follow this warning may result in
significant harm, including serious injury or death, to the machine operators.
DANGER • Only the person responsible for safety management may be allowed to install or wire the devices to
activate the maintenance function.
• The customer is fully responsible for complying with the requirements for the maintenance function.
11 KEYENCE accepts NO responsibility or NO liability for any damage or any injury due to the
unauthorized installation, usage, or maintenance, which are not specified in this user's manual, and/
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
or due to noncompliance with the laws, rules, regulations and standards in the country or region in
which the GC is used.
• The person responsible for safety management must perform the risk assessment based on the
machine operating conditions before changing the conditions for the maintenance function.
11-10 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
How to Set the Maintenance Function
Point Set the maintenance function after registering the input devices to the application program in EASY mode.
Make sure that the application input devices are registered before this setting.
Disablement target input device
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Maintenance function setting area
- Maintenance function setting flow -
[1] Registering the maintenance function
In the device list, drag [Maintenance function] from [Option] and drop it to the program setting area to
register.
[2] Selecting the disablement method
On the [Disablement method settings] window, select the disablement method.
[3] Setting the disablement method operation
On the [Disablement method settings] window, select a device you want to use for disablement and set
the maximum disablement period.
[4] Selecting the disablement target
Select a device you want to disable while the maintenance function is used.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-11
11-1 EASY Mode
[1] Registering the maintenance function
In the device list, drag [Maintenance function] from [Option] and drop it to the program creation area to register.
Drag and drop
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
[2] Selecting the disablement method
Select the disablement method from the following options:
• Mode selecting switch + enabling device
• Mode selecting switch + two hand control device
• Mode selecting switch + hold-to-run switch
• Mode selecting switch only
11-12 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
Mode selecting switch + enabling device
Operation description
Use the mode selecting switch to change the mode to maintenance mode.
When maintenance mode is set, the selected safety input is disabled, and the safety output is turned ON by turning on
the enabling device input.
Item Details
Mode selecting switch Select the mode selecting switch to enable/disable the maintenance function. 11
Reset switch Select the reset switch to reset maintenance mode to the normal operation.
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Enabling device Select the enabling device to turn ON the safety output.
Maximum Disablement period Set the maximum disablement period. (Setting range: 1 (sec) to 12 (hr))
If the specified maximum disablement period is exceeded, the GC Series main controller enters
into the error state, and the safety output is turned OFF.
Mode selecting switch + two hand control device
GC Series User’s Manual 11-13
11-1 EASY Mode
Operation description
Use the mode selecting switch to change the mode to maintenance mode.
When maintenance mode is set, the selected safety input is disabled, and the safety output is turned ON by turning ON
the two hand control device input.
Item Details
Mode selecting switch Select the mode selecting switch to enable/disable the maintenance function.
Reset switch Select the reset switch to reset maintenance mode to the normal operation.
Two hand control device Select the two hand control device to turn ON the safety output.
Maximum Disablement period Set the maximum disablement period. (Setting range: 1 (sec) to 12 (hr))
If the specified maximum disablement period is exceeded, the GC Series main controller enters
into the error state, and the safety output is turned OFF.
Mode selecting switch + hold-to-run switch
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Operation description
Use the mode selecting switch to change the mode to maintenance mode.
When maintenance mode is set, the selected safety input is disabled, and the safety output is turned ON by turning ON
the hold-to-run switch input.
Item Details
Mode selecting switch Select the mode selecting switch to enable/disable the maintenance function.
Reset switch Select the reset switch to reset maintenance mode to the normal operation.
Hold-to-run switch Select the hold-to-run switch to turn ON the safety output.
Maximum Disablement period Set the maximum disablement period. (Setting range: 1 (sec) to 12 (hr))
If the specified maximum disablement period is exceeded, the GC Series main controller enters
into the error state, and the safety output is turned OFF.
11-14 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
Mode selecting switch only
Operation description
Use the mode selecting switch to change the mode to maintenance mode.
When maintenance mode is set, the selected safety input is disabled and the safety output is turned ON.
Item Details
Mode selecting switch Select the mode selecting switch to enable/disable the maintenance function.
Maximum Disablement period Set the maximum disablement period. (Setting range: 1 (sec) to 12 (hr)) 11
If the specified maximum disablement period is exceeded, the GC Series main controller enters
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
into the error state, and the safety output is turned OFF.
If [Mode selecting switch only] is selected to use the maintenance function, when the mode is changed
from maintenance mode to standard mode, the output may be turned ON immediately, depending on the
DANGER
input device status. Additional safety measures are required for the whole machine in order to ensure
the area is safe while standard mode is used.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-15
11-1 EASY Mode
[3] Setting the disablement method operation
Selecting an input device
Select an input device you want to use for the maintenance function.
Adding an input device
If an input device used for the maintenance function is not registered, select and add it from the pull-down menu.
Point When a new input device is added on the [Disablement method settings] window, a terminal is not
assigned to it.
Select and right-click the target device in the maintenance function setting area and click [Detailed
11 settings] to assign a terminal on the [Detailed settings] screen.
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
For the terminal assignment method, refer to "10-6 Assigning Terminals" (page 10-17).
11-16 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
Maximum Disablement period
Set the maximum disablement period.
Item Setting range Default
Maximum Disablement period 1 (sec) to 12 (hr) 5 (min)
Point If the specified maximum disablement period is exceeded, the GC Series main controller enters into the
error state, and the safety output is turned OFF.
[4] Selecting the disablement target
Select the input device you will use to disable the input signal while the maintenance function is used.
1 When you click the [Go to selection mode] button, the input devices selectable as disablement targets are
framed in pink.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Input devices selectable as disablement
targets are framed in pink.
2 When you click the block for an input device to be disabled, it indicates that it is selected by framing the device
block in pink.
When an input block is selected as a disablement target, the right edge of the block
indicates that it is selected.
3 When you finish selecting the disablement target, click the [Go to selection mode] button to confirm.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-17
11-1 EASY Mode
Other Functions
When using multiple S-OUTs
In EASY mode, you need to create a program for each S-OUT.
If multiple S-OUTs are used, they are displayed in separate pages.
You can create a program in a separate page for each S-OUT.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
When using the unlock output
When KEYENCE Safety Interlock Switches "GS Series (Lock)", "GS-M Series" or "Guard locking switch" is selected for the
input device, the unlock output can be used. On the [Select app] screen, you can select the unlock input method and set
whether or not to use an unlock enable input.
(Example: 2 inputs (unlock input + lock input) * The unlock enable input is not used.)
11-18 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
[Select app] screen
Item Details
Unlock input Select the lock control input type.
• 2 inputs (unlock input + lock input)
• 1 input (ON: unlock / OFF: lock)
Unlock enable input Use this item to restrict the unlock timing so that the door cannot be opened while the machine is running.
When using the unlock enable input
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Unlock control enablement
detailed settings
Item Details
Invert unlock enable input Inverts the unlock enable input signal when selected.
ON delay for unlock enable input Set the ON-delay time of the unlock enable input. (Setting range: 0 (ms) to 10 (min))
GC Series User’s Manual 11-19
11-1 EASY Mode
When using the AUX-OUT output
You can output the system information and block information of the GC Series main controller by using the AUX-OUT
output.
Status Detailed settings
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Item Details
System Information Outputs the status of the GC Series main controller.
• RUN: Turns ON the AUX-OUT output when the GC main controller is running.
• Error/Alert: Turns ON the AUX-OUT output when the GC main controller is not in an error or
alarm state.
Block information Outputs the signal status of the input/output blocks and function blocks.
11-20 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
Std. mode preview
Displays the program created in "EASY mode" in a preview of converting it into a program for standard mode.
Conversion into standard mode
11
Convert the program created in "EASY mode" into a program for standard mode.
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Point Once a program created in EASY mode is converted into a program for standard mode, it cannot be edited
again in EASY mode. To prevent data loss, be sure to save the project before converting it into a program
for standard mode.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-21
11-1 EASY Mode
Note
Program information can be displayed as a note.
To use a note, drag [Note] from the device list and drop it to the program creation area.
Note
Note detailed settings
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Item Details
Note Edit a string containing 1 to 260 characters. (A break is treated as 2 characters)
Character color Select the character color from the color palette. Clicking this item displays the color palette.
Background color Select the background color from the color palette. Clicking this item displays the color palette.
Transparency Set the transparency of the background color. Specify a value between 0 and 100 (%).
11-22 GC Series User’s Manual
11-1 EASY Mode
Simulation Function
The simulation function allows you to simulate the operation of a created program on the PC without connecting to the GC
Series main controller. Verifying the program operation according to the operation flow conducted by the operator allows
efficient debugging.
You can perform simulations using various methods such as continuous execution or step execution.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Reference The simulation function is described in "11-3 Simulation" (page 11-45).
For details, refer to "11-3 Simulation" (page 11-45).
GC Series User’s Manual 11-23
11-1 EASY Mode
Restrictions on EASY Mode
These are the following restrictions on EASY mode:
• The reset input cannot be used at the S-OUT block.
• When the GS/GS-M Series is selected, the indicator control output cannot be used.
• When the GL-S Series is selected, the indicator control output cannot be used.
• When the SZ/SZ-V is selected, the bank output cannot be used.
• When the mode selecting switch is selected, the error output cannot be used.
• The muting input cannot be used for the input device.
• Register cannot be selected.
• On the program screen, a function block cannot be added, deleted, or edited.
• On the program screen, an output block cannot be added or deleted.
• On the program screen, the recipe function cannot be used.
• On the program screen, the page name cannot be edited. (This refers to the label name of an output device.)
• On the monitoring screen, the responsible function (forced input) cannot be used.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
11-24 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
Overview of Standard Mode
Standard mode is used to create a safety control program using function blocks. This mode allows intuitive programming
by connecting registered input/output blocks to function blocks with lines. Function blocks supporting various types of
applications are provided, so you can easily create a safety control program by selecting function blocks according to your
purpose. With a higher degree of freedom than EASY mode, this programming mode supports various applications.
Reference For details on the function block types and specifications,
refer to the "GC Series Function Block Reference Manual".
Names and Functions on the Program Screen (Standard Mode)
Menu bar
Current Mode changing bar
mode Toolbar
Edit/simulation
changing button
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Log in status Block list Program creation area Program size Zoom in/out
Item Name
Current mode Displays the current operation mode.
Menu bar Menu items. Displays the menu which executes each function.
"8-3 Menu" (page 8-6)
Mode changing bar Changes the operation mode and screen mode.
Toolbar Displays each function window.
Edit/simulation changing
Changes between edit mode and simulation mode.
button
Log in status Displays the current login status.
Block list Area where you select input blocks, output blocks, and function blocks.
Program creation area Programming area.
Program size Displays the size of the program currently created. (Unit: %)
Zoom in/out Zooms in or out on the program creation area.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-25
11-2 Standard Mode
Block list
The block list consists of "Input block(s)" and "Output block(s)", which refer to input devices and output devices registered
on the configuration screen, "Communications", "Register", "Function blocks", "System blocks", and "Other functions".
Input block(s)/Output block(s)
Input devices and output devices registered on the configuration screen are listed.
On the program screen, input devices and output devices are called "blocks", such as
"input blocks" and "output blocks", respectively.
Drag and drop them to the program creation area to register.
Reference An input/output device can also be added on the program screen.
When you click [Add new I/O device] at the bottom of the block list, the input/
output device list appears, allowing you to select and add an input/output device.
Precautions for using function blocks
Function blocks which are used in the program.
11 For details on the function block types and specifications,
Reference
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
refer to the "GC Series Function Block Reference Manual".
Communications
This type of block uses the Ethernet communication function to interact with a general-
purpose PLC via Ethernet communication.
"15 Ethernet Communication Function" (page 15-1)
11-26 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
Register
A register works as a virtual input/output block with a pair of load and store.
The function block output status received by a register can be used as the input signal for
another program circuit.
System blocks
System blocks which are used in the program.
Reference For details on the function block types and specifications,
refer to the "GC Series Function Block Reference Manual".
Other functions
Blocks used for the note and the recipe functions, which can be written on the program.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
GC Series User’s Manual 11-27
11-2 Standard Mode
Program creation area
Page tab
Output block
Comment Precautions for using the function blocks
Input block
placement area
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Block placement area
Item Details
Page tab You can manage programs in separate pages.
"Page management" (page 11-42)
Comment Displays the comment for each input device.
"10-4 Registering Input Devices" (page 10-5)
Input block placement area Area where only input blocks can be placed.
Block placement area Area where all blocks can be placed.
11-28 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
Standard Mode Programming Flow
- Standard mode programming flow -
Step 1 Placing input/output blocks
Drag and drop input/output blocks to the program to place them.
"Placing Input/Output Blocks" (page 11-30)
Step 2 Placing function blocks
Drag and drop function blocks to the program to place them according to the safety control program to
be created.
"Placing Function Blocks" (page 11-31)
Step 3 Wiring blocks
Create a program by connecting blocks with lines.
"Wiring Blocks" (page 11-34)
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Step4 Simulation function
Verify the operation using the simulation function.
"11-3 Simulation" (page 11-45)
GC Series User’s Manual 11-29
11-2 Standard Mode
Placing Input/Output Blocks
Input devices and output devices registered on the configuration screen are displayed as input blocks and output blocks in
the block list.
Drag and drop them to the program creation area if you want to place them on the program.
Placing input/output blocks
Drag and drop input/output blocks to place them. Areas in which blocks can be placed are displayed in pink.
Drag and drop
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Reference When you go to the program screen for the first time after registering input/output devices on the configuration screen,
the following message appears.
If you select [Input / output devices] or [Input device only], the registered devices are automatically placed.
Moving a placed block
To move a placed block, select the target block and drag and drop it. Areas in which
blocks can be placed are displayed in pink.
11-30 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
Placing Function Blocks
Drag and drop them to the program creation area if you want to place them on the program.
Drag and drop
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Function block detailed settings
You can configure the operation settings and state output settings on the [Detailed settings] screen depending on the
function blocks.
To display the [Detailed settings] screen, use one of the following:
• Double-click the target function block.
• Select and right-click the target function block and click [Detailed settings].
• Select [Edit] > [Detailed settings] from the menu.
Example: Reset
Label
Simulation
Diagram
Detailed settings
Help
Item Details
Label Label of the function block. It is displayed in the diagram.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-31
11-2 Standard Mode
Item Details
Simulation Check the function block operation in a simulation.
"Simulating a function block" (page 11-32)
Diagram Symbol on the program.
Detailed settings Detailed settings of the function block.
Help Displays the detailed description manual of the function block when clicked.
Reference The configurable items on the detailed settings screen vary depending on the function blocks.
For details, refer to the "GC Series Function Block Reference Manual".
Simulating a function block
On the function block detailed setting screen, you can simulate a function block.
This is used to verify the basic operation of the function block or when configuring the detailed settings.
Entering simulation mode
When you click the [Simulation] button on the function block detailed setting screen, the unit enters into simulation mode.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Area and function names of simulation mode
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
Item Details
(1) Changes between edit mode and simulation mode.
(2) Executes or pauses the continuous scan for the simulation.
(3) Set the simulation play interval. (Setting range: x0.01/x0.1/x1/x2/x5/x20)
(4) Executes at the interval specified by (5).
(5) Set the step execution interval. (Setting range: 2 ms/10 ms/100 ms/1 s/10 s/30 s)
(6) Resets the input status and elapsed time.
(7) Displays the elapsed simulation execution time. (hh:mm:ss:ttt, Maximum: 36:00:00:000)
11-32 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
How to operate simulation mode
The following example uses a "reset" function block to describe how to operate simulation mode.
"Reset" function block
<Input> (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
A "reset" function block retains the output OFF state until the
ON
reset signal is turned on with the safety inputs ON. When the Input
OFF
reset signal is correctly sent, the output is turned ON. 10ms~5s 10ms~5s
ON
Reset
OFF
<Output>
ON
Output
OFF
Reset ON
Required OFF
1 When the machine enters simulation mode, a
continuous scan automatically starts.
2 Click a port that is the function block input condition. In this example, click "Input".
When "Input" is active, the status changes to "Waiting for reset input".
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
3 Next, click "Reset" to turn it OFF, ON, and OFF.
When "Reset" is correctly turned on, the function block symbol turns green, turning ON the output.
Reference The operation and setting items vary depending on the function blocks.
For details, refer to the "GC Series Function Block Reference Manual".
GC Series User’s Manual 11-33
11-2 Standard Mode
Wiring Blocks
When you click or drag a block port, the wiring path is formed. Click the destination block port to connect the two ports with
a line.
Wired
Connection source port Connection destination port
Point Wiring is not permitted in the following cases:
• You are unable to wire a port to any other location besides another port.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
• If you try to wire from IN to IN or from OUT to OUT or wire to a non-connectable port, the destination
port is displayed in gray.
• When a wired circuit ends up looping, the error message "The wire connection has a loop." appears.
• Under the following conditions, the error message "Connection is not permitted." appears, preventing
the wiring from completing.
• You try to connect an input device without configuring input permission settings to AND (with
connection constraint function).
• You try to connect any other block than the specified block: port (MMC input bypass: BY for IB, MMC
output enable: EN for OE) to the output port under the manual mode control.
11-34 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
Recipe Function
What is the recipe function?
The recipe function allows you to reuse a standard program, for another project by registering it as a recipe file. Using the
recipe function, programs are registered or read out in units of pages.
These are the following recipe file types: "Preset recipe", pre-registered in the GC Configurator, and "Registered recipe",
which can be newly registered by the user.
Recipe file
Preset recipe 11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Preset recipes are pre-registered in the GC Configurator.
You can use a program just by selecting an appropriate recipe for the application and registering input blocks and output
blocks.
How to use a preset recipe
1 From the menu, select [File] > [Recipe] > [Open] > [Preset recipe].
The [Select preset recipe] dialog box appears.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-35
11-2 Standard Mode
2 Select the preset recipe and click the [Open] button.
A page is added to the program screen and displays the program of the selected preset recipe.
The file is opened with dummy blocks placed in input blocks and output blocks.
3 Place the registered input blocks and output blocks in the dummy block locations.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Point • Dummy input blocks and dummy output blocks cannot be transferred to the GC Series main controller.
To use a recipe, replace the dummy blocks with the input blocks and output blocks to be used.
• You can execute a simulation even when there are dummy input blocks and dummy output blocks.
11-36 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
Registered recipe
The registered recipe function allows registration of a program created by the user as a recipe file.
A registered recipe can be used for another project, so you can create a program efficiently by registering a standard
program.
How to register a recipe
The following describes how to register a created program as a recipe.
Reference Register a recipe for each program page.
Register this program as a recipe.
1 From the menu, select [File] > [Recipe] > [Registration/management] to display the [Registered recipe
management] dialog box.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Item Details
Register Select the page where you want to register the recipe and set the recipe name. (Recipe name: limited to a
maximum of 64 characters)
Clicking this button displays the [Select page to register recipe] dialog box.
Edit Rename a registered recipe name.
Clicking this button displays the [Edit recipe name] dialog box.
Delete Deletes the selected registered recipe when clicked.
Import Import a recipe created in another project.
Clicking this button displays the [Open] dialog box.
Export Export a registered recipe.
Clicking this button displays the [Save as] dialog box.
Comment Displays the page information of the registered recipe. (The note set in the page properties is shown.)
Recipe CRC Displays the CRC of the registered recipe. (This is the CRC value when the recipe was registered.)
GC Series User’s Manual 11-37
11-2 Standard Mode
2 Click the [Register] button, and then select the page where you want to register the recipe and set the recipe
name.
3 When you click the [OK] button, the recipe is registered.
Point During recipe registration, the input blocks and output blocks of a program to be registered are converted
into dummy input blocks and dummy output blocks.
Load the registered recipe and create a program.
The following describes how to create a program by loading a recipe registered to the project currently created.
1 From the menu, select [File] > [Recipe] > [Open] > [Registered recipe].
The [Select registered recipe] dialog box appears.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Select the registered
recipe.
The program of the selected
recipe is displayed.
2 Select the registered recipe and click the [Open] button.
A page is added to the program screen and displays the program of the selected preset recipe.
3 Place the registered input blocks and output blocks in the dummy block locations.
Point Dummy input blocks and dummy output blocks cannot be transferred to the GC Series main controller.
To use a recipe, replace the dummy blocks with the input blocks and output blocks to be used.
11-38 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
Importing/exporting a registered recipe
On the [Registered recipe management] dialog box, you can import a recipe created on another PC or export a recipe
file.
Point The registered recipe file extension is "*.gcr".
Lift restrictions on edit
When you load a preset recipe or registered recipe, you cannot change the detailed settings of the read function blocks.
To edit the read function block detailed settings, select [File] > [Recipe] > [Lift restrictions on edit] from the menu to 11
enable editing.
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Point • Once the edit restriction is lifted, you cannot place the edit restriction again. To place the edit restriction,
register the edited program as a recipe. "How to register a recipe" (page 11-37)
• When the edit restriction is lifted, the edit restriction on all the preset recipes and registered recipes
currently placed as programs will be lifted.
Recipe blocks
A recipe block can be placed as a dummy input/output block.
Use it to create a standard program, which can be reused for a registered recipe.
Point Dummy input blocks and dummy output blocks cannot be transferred to
the GC Series main controller.
To use a recipe, replace the dummy blocks with the input blocks and
output blocks to be used.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-39
11-2 Standard Mode
Dummy inputs
A dummy input block can be used as an input block when creating a program for a registered recipe.
<<Dummy input>> <<Dummy input detailed settings>>
Item Details
Display as You can add an input device icon to a dummy input block. This indicates which input is assumed to be placed
on the program when using a recipe.
Reference An input device other than those set for [Display as] can also be placed.
Dummy outputs
A dummy output block can be used as an output block when creating a program for a registered recipe.
<<Dummy output (1 input)>> <<Dummy output (1-5 inputs)>> <<Dummy output (1-10 inputs)>>
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
<<Dummy output detailed settings>>
Item Details
Display as You can add an output device icon to a dummy output block. This indicates which output is assumed to be
placed on the program when using a recipe.
Input count When "Dummy output (1-5 inputs)" or "Dummy output (1-10 inputs)" is selected, you can set the number of inputs
to an output block.
11-40 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
AND (with connection constraint function)
AND (with connection constraint function) is an AND function block that allows you to limit the number of device blocks
that can be connected to the input.
You can set it so that only specified input devices (input blocks) can be wired when creating a program for a registered
recipe.
If you try to wire any other input block than the ones specified, the error message "Connection is not permitted." appears.
<<AND (with connection constraint function)>> <<AND (with connection constraint function) detailed settings>>
Only selected input devices (input blocks)
can be wired.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
GC Series User’s Manual 11-41
11-2 Standard Mode
Other Functions
Page management
In the GC Configurator, you can create and manage safety control programs in separate pages.
The following describes how to manage the pages.
Page tab
Page management dialog box
On the [Page management] dialog box, you can add or delete a page and set the page name and page properties.
11 You can open the [Page management] dialog box from the right-click menu of any page tab.
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Item Details
Properties Displays the [Page properties] dialog box when clicked.
You can edit the note as the page information.
Changes the page order.
?
Add Adds a new page.
Clicking this button displays the [Page detailed settings] dialog box, allowing you to set the page name.
Edit Edits the page name of the selected page.
Clicking this button displays the [Page detailed settings] dialog box.
Delete Deletes the selected page.
11-42 GC Series User’s Manual
11-2 Standard Mode
[Page properties] dialog box
On the [Page properties] dialog box, you can set a comment as page information. (Maximum: 100 characters)
[Page detailed settings] dialog box
On the [Page detailed settings] dialog box, you can set the page name. (Maximum: 22 characters)
Adding or deleting a row/column
You can add or delete a row/column in the program creation area.
[+] Add a column [-] Delete a column
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
[+] Add a row
[-] Delete a row
Point A row/column cannot be deleted if a block is already placed in it.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-43
11-2 Standard Mode
Notes
Program information can be displayed as a note.
Note
Note detailed settings
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Item Details
Note Edit a string containing 1 to 260 characters. (You can break it up into ten lines.)
Character color Select the character color from the color palette. Clicking this item displays the color palette.
Background color Select the background color from the color palette. Clicking this item displays the color palette.
Transparency Set the transparency of the background color. Specify a value between 0 and 100 (%).
11-44 GC Series User’s Manual
11-3 Simulation
Overview of the Simulation Function
The simulation function allows you to simulate the operation of a created program on the PC without connecting to the GC
Series.
With this function, you can perform the following:
• Check the operating state of the program by changing the state of an input block.
• Perform simulations using various methods such as continuous execution or step execution.
• Verify the operation according to the correct operation flow in the operation log.
Click
Area and Function Names of the Simulation Function 11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Menu bar
Current mode Mode changing bar
Toolbar
Edit/simulation changing
Operation panel button
Condition
window
Operation
log display
Item Name
Current mode Displays the current operation mode.
Operation panel Start or stop the simulation or perform the step execution.
Condition window Simulate the EDM input status when using the EDM input.
Operation log Displays up to 50 simulation operations in order from newest to oldest.
Menu bar Menu items. Displays the menu which executes each function.
"8-3 Menu" (page 8-6)
GC Series User’s Manual 11-45
11-3 Simulation
Item Name
Mode changing bar Changes the operation mode and screen mode.
Toolbar Displays each function window.
Edit/simulation changing button Changes between edit mode and simulation mode.
Program area Displays the created program.
Starting and Stopping the Simulation
How to start the simulation
When you click the [Simulation] button, the simulation starts.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Point If there is a setting error that does not allow a simulation, the simulation does not start. The error details
are shown in the checklist. Correct the error and start the simulation again.
How to stop the simulation
When you click the [Edit] button, the simulation stops.
11-46 GC Series User’s Manual
11-3 Simulation
How to Operate the Simulation
When you click an input block during simulation, you can check the program operation with the ON/OFF state changing.
Reference • An input block with the input logic set to "N.C." starts with the ON state when the simulation starts.
• A mode selecting switch starts with In1 ON when the simulation starts.
(Operation example)
1 Click the "emergency stop switch" input block.
When clicked, the "emergency stop switch" input block changes from ON to OFF.
Click
2 The program changes, turning OFF the "S-OUT" output block.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Operable input blocks
You can operate the input status in a simulation only for input blocks.
Input blocks framed in pink are operable.
Pink frame
Reference Some input blocks such as "System
information", "GS closed state" and "Always
Operable ON" cannot be operated in a simulation.
Inoperable
GC Series User’s Manual 11-47
11-3 Simulation
ON/OFF state change by clicking
Every time you click an input block, the state toggles between ON and OFF.
However, when operating a "reset switch", one click changes the state from OFF to ON to OFF.
Input blocks other than a "reset switch" input block
Clicking when the state is ON changes the status Clicking when the state is OFF changes the status
from ON to OFF. from OFF to ON.
ON OFF OFF ON
"Reset switch" input block
One click changes the status from OFF to ON to OFF.
OFF ON OFF
Reference When you unselect [Enable auto-OFF] from the right-click menu, the behavior changes so that each click toggles the
block between ON and OFF like other input blocks.
Block states and display colors
The following table shows the states and display colors of input blocks, output blocks, and function blocks.
11
State ON OFF Standby* Suspended Error
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Display color Green Red Orange Blue Yellow
Input block
Precautions for
using the
function block
Output block
Standby
When a "reset" function block is waiting for a reset input or an "ON-delay" function block is within its ON-delay time, the
background color is orange as the block is on standby.
Precautions for using the function blocks Standby
Reset, Reset (with AND) Waiting for reset input
Dual reset Waiting for reset input
Existence detection reset Waiting for reset input
Control guard Waiting for reset input
Master ON Waiting for reset input
PSDI Waiting for reset input
11-48 GC Series User’s Manual
11-3 Simulation
Precautions for using the function blocks Standby
Manual mode control (MMC) Waiting for restart input
Mode changing control Waiting for error recovery
ON-delay During ON-delay
Block status
You can display the states of the function blocks and input/output blocks on the program screen.
To display the block status, click the [Block status] button.
(Image)
Block
information
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Operation panel
Item Details
Elapsed time Displays the elapsed simulation execution time. (hh:mm:ss:ttt, Maximum: 36:00:00:000)
Executes or pauses the continuous scan for the simulation.
Resets the elapsed time.
Performs the step execution at the interval specified as "step interval".
Set the step execution interval. (Setting range: 2 ms/10 ms/100 ms/1 s/10 s/30 s)
Set the simulation play interval. (Setting range: x0.01/x0.1/x1/x2/x5/x20)
GC Series User’s Manual 11-49
11-3 Simulation
Item Details
Exits the simulation and returns to edit mode.
Condition window
You can simulate the EDM input status when using the EDM input.
EDM input
Output link
Item Details
Output link When this check box is selected, the EDM input block starts linking with the S-OUT that is set to use the EDM
input.
The output link operation is in reverse order of the ON/OFF operation of the S-OUT EDM error
block.
When this check box is unselected, the ON/OFF state of the EDM input block can be
changed by clicking.
If the EDM input operation is incorrect in a simulation, an EDM error occurs at the S-
OUT block.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
Operation log
The input block operations (ON/OFF switching) can be recorded in a simulation. (Maximum: 50)
Operation time
Input block
Operation details
Item Details
Operation time Displays the elapsed operation time of the simulation.
Operation details Displays the details of the operation.
ON: The input block was changed from OFF to ON.
OFF: The input block was changed from ON to OFF.
Input block Displays the operated input block.
11-50 GC Series User’s Manual
11-3 Simulation
Configuration screen
You can perform a simulation by operating the input devices on the configuration screen.
Click
Reference Like the program screen, you can operate the input status in a simulation only for the input blocks.
11
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
The input blocks framed in pink are operable.
GC Series User’s Manual 11-51
GC Series User’s Manual
MEMO
11-52
GC Configurator [Settings] - Programming
11
12
GC Configurator
[Settings] - Transfer
This chapter describes the procedure for transferring a project and the log-in authentication in the GC
Configurator.
12-1 Log-in Authentication ........................................................................................page 12-2
12-2 Transfer ...............................................................................................................page 12-5
12
GC Configurator [Settings] - Transfer
GC Series User’s Manual 12-1
12-1 Log-in Authentication
To transfer the settings to the GC Series main controller, connect the PC to the GC Series main controller and log in to the
controller.
Point Be sure to connect the PC to the GC Series via USB or Ethernet before login.
"Communication settings" (page 8-3)
Log-in privileges
Access to the GC Series can be restricted through the use of passwords in order to prevent unauthorized changes. There
are restrictions on access to some functions depending on the log-in privileges, and you can configure a password for
each of the log-in privileges.
Log-in privilege types and accessible functions
The following table shows the log-in privilege types and accessible functions.
Privilege Types
Item Page Responsible Maintenance Operator
personnel personnel
Read out the settings from the GC main controller 8-12
Monitor the GC main controller 13-1
Read out the history from the GC main controller 14-1
Switch the GC main controller operation between RUN and STOP 8-12 --
Restart the GC main controller 8-12 --
12 Transfer the approved settings 12-7 --
Transfer the unapproved settings 12-7 -- --
GC Configurator [Settings] - Transfer
Run the forced input during monitoring 13-14 -- --
Initialize the GC main controller 8-12 -- --
Clear the history of the GC main controller 8-12 -- --
Clear the error history of the GC main controller 13-13 -- --
Change the password 12-3 -- --
Point • Only the "responsible personnel" privileges can be used by default.
• The user must manually configure the "maintenance personnel" and " operator" privileges.
"How to set the log-in privileges"
• The default "responsible personnel" password is "1111".
• There are no set default "maintenance personnel" and "operator" passwords.
You need to log in as the "responsible personnel" to reset the password.
• The "maintenance personnel" privileges can only transfer the settings that have been approved by the
"responsible personnel".
• If the settings approved by the "responsible personnel" are saved to a file, the "maintenance personnel"
can open the file and transfer the settings. However, if the "maintenance personnel" modifies the
settings, then those settings cannot be transferred.
• The following operations are possible even without log-in privileges:
• Saving, reading, and viewing the configuration file (project)*
• Viewing and saving the GC main controller error list and error history*
• Saving the GC main controller history file*
• Viewing the unit monitor
• Reading out the unit configuration, and GS and GL-R configuration information
* When the "operator" privileges are granted, the "operator" or higher privileges are required.
12-2 GC Series User’s Manual
12-1 Log-in Authentication
Management of the log-in privileges and passwords
This section describes how to add the "maintenance personnel" and "operator" privileges and how to set the password.
1 From the menu, select [Log-in authentication] > [Management of privileges and passwords].
The [Management of privileges and passwords] dialog box appears.
Item Details
Privileges Select the privileges to configure the privileges and password settings.
Enable privileges Displayed only when "maintenance personnel" or "operator" is selected. With the check box checked, the
respective privileges are enabled.
New password Enter a new password. (Maximum: 16 characters. Allowable characters are only single-byte
alphanumeric characters and hyphens (-).)
Confirm password Enter the new password (for confirmation). 12
GC Configurator [Settings] - Transfer
Important If you forget the password, you cannot change the safety control settings. Keep the password in a safe
place.
"If you forget the password"
Point • The default "responsible personnel" password is "1111".
• There are no set default "maintenance personnel" and "operator" passwords.
You need to log in as the "responsible personnel" to set the password.
If you forget the password
When you enter the initialization password, the password is reset to the default setting.
1 From the menu, select [Log-in authentication] > [If you forget the password].
GC Series User’s Manual 12-3
12-1 Log-in Authentication
Item Details
Reference code The code necessary to reset the password. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office with this code to
receive an initialization password.
Initialization password Enter the initialization password.
Log-in
1 From the menu, select [Log-in authentication] > [Log-in].
The [Log-in] dialog box appears.
Item Details
Privileges Select the log-in privileges.
12 Password Enter the password set for the privileges.
GC Configurator [Settings] - Transfer
Log out
1 From the menu, select [Log-in authentication] > [Log out].
When you are logged out, the log in status at the lower left of the screen changes to "Log out".
12-4 GC Series User’s Manual
12-2 Transfer
Point • To transfer the settings to the GC Series main controller, you need to connect the PC to the GC Series
main controller and log in to the unit.
"12-1 Log-in Authentication" (page 12-2)
• If the unit configuration set in [Unit settings] is different from that of the GC Series main controller, you
can transfer the settings, but an error will occur in the GC Series main controller after the transfer.
Connecting the PC to the GC Series
Connecting to a USB port
USB cable (mini-B)
Reference • OP-51580 (2 m-USB cable) and OP-86941 (5 m-USB cable) can be used.
• The ground of USB port is electrically-connected to the "0V" of power supply terminal.
12
GC Configurator [Settings] - Transfer
Connecting to an Ethernet port
Configure the communication settings before transfer.
"Communication settings"
Hub
STP cable STP cable
Point • Ethernet connection is available only for the GC-1000.
• The IP address of the GC-1000 is not assigned as the factory default, so use one of the following
methods to assign the IP address:
• Use the IP Setting Tool to assign the IP address.
• Use the BOOTP/DHCP server to assign the IP address.
• Transfer the settings via USB connection in advance.
• Both a straight cable or cross cable can be used since the GC-1000 Ethernet port supports AutoMDIX.
GC Series User’s Manual 12-5
12-2 Transfer
Transfer
Point • Only the "responsible personnel" privileges can be used by default.
• Only the "responsible personnel" privileges can approve unapproved settings and transfer them to the
GC Series main controller.
• When settings are transferred to the GC Series main controller and approved with the "responsible
personnel" privileges, the file is handled as approved file. With the "maintenance personnel" privileges,
only the approved files can be transferred to the GC Series.
• When a part of approved file is edited, the file will return to the unapproved state.
• The default "responsible personnel" password is "1111".
1 Click [Settings] > [Transfer] in the mode changing bar.
Alternatively, select [Communication] > [Transfer settings to GC] from the menu.
12
GC Configurator [Settings] - Transfer
The [Check] dialog box appears. When you click the [OK] button, the [Log-in] dialog box appears.
Point • If the settings cannot be transferred due to a setting error, the "Checklist" appears. Review the error
details and correct the error.
• Once the settings are transferred, the history data in the GC Series main controller is discarded. Select
[Communication] > [Read out history from GC] from the menu as necessary to load and save the history
data.
"Reading Out the History Data" (page 14-6)
2 Enter the password and click the [OK] button.
When you communicate with and log in to the GC Series main controller, the first page of the [Check of settings] dialog
box appears.
12-6 GC Series User’s Manual
12-2 Transfer
3 Scroll the scroll bar down to the bottom and review all of the settings. If there are no problems with the settings,
click the [Approve] button.
12
GC Configurator [Settings] - Transfer
Point Make sure that all of the settings to be transferred are correct before clicking the [Approve] button. If any
unintended settings are displayed, click the [Cancel] button.
4 Set the GC Series main controller to "RUN".
The GC Series starts operation according to the transferred settings. The GC Configurator enters monitoring mode.
GC Series User’s Manual 12-7
GC Series User’s Manual
MEMO
12-8
GC Configurator [Settings] - Transfer
12
13
GC Configurator
[Monitoring]
This chapter describes how to monitor in the GC Configurator.
13-1 Monitoring Function...........................................................................................page 13-2
13-2 Names and Functions on the Monitoring Screen............................................page 13-3
13-3 How to Check the Monitor .................................................................................page 13-5
13-4 Responsible Function (Forced Input).............................................................page 13-14
13
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
GC Series User’s Manual 13-1
13-1 Monitoring Function
Overview of the Monitoring Function
Monitoring refers to transferring a project created in the GC Configurator to the GC Series main controller and verifying the
operation by running the program. You can also load a project from the GC Series main controller currently connected and
verify the project operation.
With this function, you can perform the following:
• Verify the program operation in real-time on the program screen.
• Check the alert and error status of the GC Series main controller.
• Monitor the ON/OFF states of the input/output devices.
• Monitor the ON/OFF states of the input/output devices in a timing chart.
• Change the operation mode of the GC Series main controller.
• Run a forced input (ON/OFF) for an input block.
Functions Available in the Monitoring Function
Program monitor Status panel
The program monitor allows you to monitor the execution The status panel allows you to check the operation mode,
status on the program screen. You can check the the operation time, and the error status of the GC Series
execution status of the input blocks, the function blocks, main controller.
and the output blocks in real-time. For details, refer to "Status panel".
For details, refer to "Program Monitor" (page 13-5).
Responsible function (forced input)
Timing chart The responsible function (forced input) allows you to run a
The timing chart allows you to check the ON/OFF states of forced input (ON/OFF) for an input block through the PC.
the input blocks, the function blocks, and the output blocks For details, refer to "13-4 Responsible Function (Forced
in a timing chart form. Input)" (page 13-14).
For details, refer to "Timing Chart" (page 13-6).
13 Error history
Block status The error history allows you to display errors that occurred
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
The block status allows you to display and monitor the in the GC Series main controller in order from the newest to
information of the function blocks and the output blocks on oldest.
the program screen. For details, refer to "Error History" (page 13-13).
You can monitor the status of blocks in real-time.
For details, refer to "Block Status" (page 13-8).
Unit monitor
The unit monitor allows you to monitor the terminal ON/OFF
states of the main controller, expansion units, and remote I/
O modules and the status of KEYENCE safety sensors
connected to GC-Link ports.
For details, refer to "Unit Monitor" (page 13-9).
13-2 GC Series User’s Manual
Names and Functions on the
13-2 Monitoring Screen
[Monitoring] - Program
Menu bar
Current mode
Mode changing bar
Toolbar
Responsible function
Status panel
Output display
Log in status
PLC text Program area
Item Details
Current mode Displays the current operation mode.
Menu bar Menu items. Displays the menu which executes each function.
"8-3 Menu" (page 8-6)
Mode changing bar Changes the operation mode and the screen mode. 13
Toolbar Displays each function window.
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
Responsible function Displays the responsible function (forced input).
Status panel Displays the operating state, the operation time, and the error state of the GC Series main
controller.
Output display Displays the output status.
Log in status Displays the current login status.
Program area Displays the program execution status.
PLC text Displays the PLC text written from the PLC via Ethernet communication.
GC Series User’s Manual 13-3
13-2 Names and Functions on the Monitoring Screen
[Monitoring] - Configuration
Menu bar
Current mode Mode changing bar
Toolbar
Status panel
System configuration
Output display
Terminal block
display
Log in status
PLC text Input/output device
Item Details
Current mode Displays the current operation mode.
Menu bar Menu items. Displays the menu which executes each function.
"8-3 Menu" (page 8-6)
13 Mode changing bar Changes the operation mode and the screen mode.
Toolbar Displays each function window.
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
System configuration Displays the current system configuration.
Terminal block display Displays the assignment of the registered input/output devices to the terminal blocks.
Status panel Displays the operating state, the operation time, and the error state of the GC Series main
controller.
Output display Displays the output status.
Log in status Displays the current login status.
Input/output device Displays the ON/OFF states of the registered input/output devices.
PLC text Displays the PLC text written from the PLC via Ethernet communication.
13-4 GC Series User’s Manual
13-3 How to Check the Monitor
Program Monitor
The program monitor allows you to check the ON/OFF state of each block and the conductive/non-conductive state of the
wiring connections.
ON Standby OFF OFF
Non-conductive
Conductive
13
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
Item Display color State
Block Green ON
Red OFF
Orange Standby
Blue Muted
Yellow Error (OFF)
Connected wire Green Conductive
Red Non-conductive
GC Series User’s Manual 13-5
13-3 How to Check the Monitor
Timing Chart
You can check the ON/OFF state of each block in a timing chart form. Clicking [Timing chart] displays a pop-up screen.
Zoom in/Zoom out Play/Stop
[+] button
Scale view
Item Details
Zoom in/Zoom out Zooms in or out on the time axis.
Play/Stop Plays or stops the timing chart view.
*
[+] button Adds a detailed signal if it is available for the block when clicked.
13 Scale view Displays the current time scale.
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
* This cannot be set when the program mode is "EASY mode".
Selecting a block
When you select a block, the block is focused.
13-6 GC Series User’s Manual
13-3 How to Check the Monitor
Moving a block
You can change the block order. To change the order, select a block and drag it.
Areas to which a block can be moved are displayed in pink.
Drag
Adding and deleting a block
To add a block to the timing chart, select and right-click it and click [Add to chart].
To delete a block from the timing chart, right-click the block on the timing chart and select [Delete].
13
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
Adding a detailed signal
When detailed signals are available for a block, you can click the [+] button next to the signal block and add the target
signal to the timing chart.
GC Series User’s Manual 13-7
13-3 How to Check the Monitor
Block Status
You can display and monitor the status of the function blocks and the input/output blocks on the program screen.
To display the block status, click the [Block status] button.
(Image)
13
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
13-8 GC Series User’s Manual
13-3 How to Check the Monitor
Unit Monitor
You can also monitor the ON/OFF states of terminals and the statuses of sensors connected to the GC-Link ports. Clicking
[Unit monitor] displays a pop-up screen.
I/O monitor
The I/O monitor allows you to monitor the terminal status of the main controller, expansion unit(s), and remote I/O
module(s).
13
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
Reference Only the connected units are displayed.
Signal
ON/OFF state
Green ON
Red OFF
Gray No data
GC Series User’s Manual 13-9
13-3 How to Check the Monitor
GC-Link monitor (Port A/Port B)
You can monitor the status of the GS/GS-M Series and GL-R Series connected to GC-Link ports.
Point GC-Link monitor is only available for the GS/GS-M Series and GL-R Series.
If any other device is connected to a GC-Link port, only the input/output statuses can be monitored.
GS Series monitor
Operating state
OSSD status Connected model
GS lock signal
Detection state
Lock state
Item Details
13 Operating state Displays the operating state.
Green: Normal operation
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
OSSD status Displays the OSSD status.
Green: OSSD ON
Red: OSSD OFF
GS lock signal Displays the GS unlock output state.
LOCK: Unlock output OFF
UNLOCK: Unlock output ON
You can check the status of each Item Details
GS/GS-M Series unit connected.
Connected Displays the model name. (GS-M5/9*, GS-ML5*, GS-1*, GS-5*,
model GS-7*)
Detection state Displays the detection state.
Closed: An actuator is detected.
Open: No actuator is detected.
Lock state Displays the lock state of the GS Series.
Locked: The unit is locked.
Unlocked: The unit is unlocked.
13-10 GC Series User’s Manual
13-3 How to Check the Monitor
GL-R monitor
Unit configuration
Operating state
OSSD status
Received-light-
amount monitor
Item Details
Operating state Displays the operating state.
Green: Normal operation/Normal operation (Received light
amount decreases)/Normal operation (Unstable clear)*1
Red: Error
OSSD status Displays the OSSD status.
Green: OSSD ON
Red: OSSD OFF 13
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
Unit Changes to the GL-R monitor (configuration display).
configuration
Error Changes to the GL-R monitor (error information).
information
*1 Normal operation (Received light amount decreases): Displayed when the conditions for received-light-amount decrease alert set in
the GC Series main controller are met.
Normal operation (Unstable clear): Displayed when the received-light-amount of the GL-R is unstable. For example, when at least one
of multiple optical axes remains unstable for at least five seconds.
Item Details
Unit Displays the models of the main controller, sub unit 1, and sub unit
configuration 2.
Error Displays the error information.
information
GC Series User’s Manual 13-11
13-3 How to Check the Monitor
Item Details
Stop/Start Stops or starts the received-light-amount monitor.
Peak-hold Displays a (red) line that indicates the peak value of the
received-light-amount when selected.
Reverse order Reverses the unit display and the beam axis order.
Status Panel
The status panel displays the operating state, the operation time, and the error state of the GC Series main controller.
[RUN] button
Main controller
operating state
Operation time
Main controller
error status
Error list
13 Output status
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
Item Details
Main controller operating state Displays the operating state of the GC Series main controller.
RUN (green): The GC main controller is running.
STOP (red): The GC main controller is stopped.
OFFLINE (white): The PC is not connected to the main controller.
Operation time Displays the operation time elapsed since the start of the GC main controller. (hh: Hour, mm:
Minute, ss: Second)
Output status Displays the output status of the output device.
[RUN] button Clicking the [RUN] button sets the GC main controller to run. This button is displayed only when
the GC main controller is stopped.
Main controller error status Displays the error/alert status of the main controller.
: ERROR (red)
: ALERT (red)
: INFORMATION (white)
Error list Displays any INFORMATION/ERRORS/ALERTS that are currently occurring.
13-12 GC Series User’s Manual
13-3 How to Check the Monitor
Error History
Error history displays errors that occurred in the GC main controller in order from the newest to oldest.
Clicking [Error history] displays a pop-up screen.
Item Details
Error code Displays the code associated with the error.
Error cause Displays the error description.
Operation time Displays the operation time elapsed since the start of the GC
main controller to when the error occurred.
PLC text Displays the contents of the "PLC text" written from the PLC via
communications.
Read out from GC Reads out the error history from the GC main controller.
Clear Clears the error history of the GC main controller.
Copy to clipboard Saves the error history details to the clipboard.
13
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
GC Series User’s Manual 13-13
13-4 Responsible Function (Forced Input)
Responsible Function (Forced Input)
The responsible function (forced input) allows you to run a forced input (ON/OFF) for an input block through the PC.
This is used to verify the program operation by forcibly turning ON/OFF an unconnected input device or inoperable device
when starting up the machine.
The forced input function changes the signal state of an input device in the GC Configurator through the
DANGER PC operation to differentiate from that of the actual input device. Therefore, the safety manager must
perform a risk assessment in order to appropriately determine the risk of a forced input.
Point Only responsible personnel can run a forced input. You need to log in as the responsible personnel.
Item Details
<< Shows the responsible function.
>> Hides the responsible function.
Select device Makes input blocks selectable for a forced input when clicked. When you click the button again,
13 the selection is finished, allowing you to run or stop the function.
Period Set the forced input period. (1 to 20 (min))
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
Force input execution flow
1 Click the [Select device] button.
A dialog box appears. Click the [OK] button.
2 Select an input block you want to forcibly turn ON/OFF.
Selectable blocks are framed in pink.
Selectable input block
When a block is selected, a (yellow) mark is displayed on the right edge of the block.
13-14 GC Series User’s Manual
13-4 Responsible Function (Forced Input)
3 When you select the block, click the [Select device] button.
A dialog box appears. Click the [OK] button.
4 When you click the [Run] button, a dialog box appears.
Click the [OK] button to close the dialog box.
5 On the [Log-in] dialog box, enter the password.
Point Only responsible personnel can run a
forced input.
Log in as the responsible personnel.
6 Click the input block you want to forcibly turn ON/OFF.
When you select [Force the input to turn on.] or [Force the input to turn off.] and click the [OK] button, the block is
forcibly turned ON/OFF.
13
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
Point When [Period] reaches 0, the GC Series main controller is stopped.
The forced input run state is also reset.
To continue the forced input beyond [Period], click the [Reset] button and reset the period.
GC Series User’s Manual 13-15
MEMO
13
GC Configurator [Monitoring]
13-16 GC Series User’s Manual
14
GC Configurator
[History]
This chapter describes how to check the history in the GC Configurator.
14-1 History Function .................................................................................................page 14-2
14-2 Area and Function Names on the History Screen ...........................................page 14-4
14-3 How to Check the History ..................................................................................page 14-6
14
GC Configurator [History]
GC Series User’s Manual 14-1
14-1 History Function
Overview of the History Function
The history function stores the input/output block statuses before and after a specific change event and the execution
timing of the event history trigger function blocks into the GC Series main controller. This helps the user investigate the
cause of the change event after trouble occurs.
There are two history data types: "Full-time histories", which are stored in the volatile memory, and "event histories", which
are stored in the non-volatile memory so that they are not erased even when the GC Series main controller is turned OFF.
Full-time histories
Full-time histories store the states of the change timing (ON -> OFF, OFF -> ON) of the input/output blocks and function
blocks. Without any special settings required, the states of the change timing of all blocks can be stored. Full-time histories
are stored in the volatile memory of the GC Series main controller, so you can check the change state by loading a specific
history in the GC Configurator.
Point • Full-time histories are stored in the volatile memory of the GC Series main controller. Therefore, when
the GC Series main controller is turned OFF, full-time histories data is erased. To prevent history data
loss, read out the history data in the GC Configurator before turning OFF the GC Series main controller.
• Up to 100,000 full-time history data can be saved. However, this number varies depending on the
program size. In the case of the maximum program size, up to 40,960 data can be saved.
(If multiple blocks change during the same scan, they are counted as one save.)
Event histories
Event history data are saved into the system memory (non-volatile memory) mounted on the GC Series main controller and
not erased even when the GC Series main controller is turned OFF. Therefore, data are not erased even if the equipment is
rebooted after a trouble occurs.
14 Event histories are saved at the following timings:
• States before and after an event history trigger function block is executed
GC Configurator [History]
• States before and after an S-OUT block remains OFF for 90 seconds and is then turned OFF
Based on the above timings, 31 block changes before and 8 block changes after an event occurs are stored. Check the
saved data in the GC Configurator.
Point • For event history data, 31 block changes before and 8 block changes after an event are stored as one
history. Up to 915 events can be saved. However, this number varies depending on the program size. In
the case of the maximum program size, up to 121 events can be saved.
• If an interval between events to be saved as event histories is short, a "history data save alert" occurs,
which may prevent the second event history from being saved. In such a case, change the trigger
occurrence frequency. An event interval that causes a "history data save alert" varies depending on the
program size (approximately 4 to 25 seconds).
• You can set whether or not to save the turning off of the S-OUT block (safety output) as an event history.
(Default: Enabled) "Event history setting" (page 10-26)
14-2 GC Series User’s Manual
14-1 History Function
Event history trigger
By using an event history trigger function block, you can store the change of any block into the event history.
Connect a block you want to store into the event history to an event history trigger function block in the program.
(Example: Store when the AND block changes.)
(Example: Store when the emergency stop input
block changes.)
Event history trigger
Function blocks
Event history trigger
14
GC Configurator [History]
Item Details
Trigger type Select the trigger type.
[Rising Edge]:
Detects the rising edge of the trigger signal and stores it as a history.
[Pulse]:
Stores a history if the ON width is within the time specified in [Max. pulse width] when the
trigger signal changes from ON to OFF after it is turned ON. If the trigger signal remains ON
for more than the specified time, it is not stored.
[Timer]:
Stores a history when the trigger signal remains ON for more than the time specified in
[Elapsed time].
Max. pulse width This item is available when [Pulse] is selected for the trigger type.
Setting range: 2 ms to 10 min, Default: 100 ms
Elapsed time This item is available when [Timer] is selected for the trigger type.
Setting range: 2 ms to 10 min, Default: 100 ms
Use enablement input Allows you to use an enablement input when selected. (Default: Disabled)
Invert trigger input Inverts the trigger input signal logic when selected.
GC Series User’s Manual 14-3
Area and Function Names on the
14-2 History Screen
[History] - Program
Menu bar
Current mode
Mode changing bar
Toolbar
Operation History operation
panel buttons
Display
conditions
History list
PLC text Program area
Item Details
Current mode Displays the current operation mode.
Menu bar Menu items. Displays the menu which executes each function.
"8-3 Menu" (page 8-6)
14 Mode changing bar Changes the operation mode and the screen mode.
Toolbar Displays each function window.
GC Configurator [History]
History operation buttons Use these buttons to change the history display screen.
Operation panel Read out the history data from the GC main controller and clear or save it.
Display conditions Set the conditions to display in the history list.
History list Lists the histories.
Program area Displays the program execution status when the selected history occurred.
PLC text Displays the PLC text written from the PLC via Ethernet communication.
14-4 GC Series User’s Manual
14-2 Area and Function Names on the History Screen
[History] - Configuration
Menu bar
Current mode Mode changing bar
Toolbar
Operation panel
Display
conditions
History list
PLC text Input/output device
Item Details
Current mode Displays the current operation mode.
Menu bar Menu items. Displays the menu which executes each function.
"8-3 Menu" (page 8-6)
Mode changing bar Changes the operation mode and the screen mode. 14
Toolbar Displays each function window.
GC Configurator [History]
Operation panel Read out the history data from the GC main controller and clear or save it.
Display conditions Set the conditions to display in the history list.
History list Lists the histories.
Input/output device Displays the program execution status when the selected history occurred.
PLC text Displays the PLC text written from the PLC via Ethernet communication.
GC Series User’s Manual 14-5
14-3 How to Check the History
Reading Out the History Data
There are two methods to check the history data: Reading out the history data from the GC main controller or opening a
saved history file.
<<Reading out from the GC main controller>> <<<Opening a saved history file>>
Saved history files
Read out
Click [History] in the mode changing bar.
When clicked, it reads out the history data from the GC Series.
Click [] in [History] on the mode changing bar.
• When [Read out history from GC] is selected, the history data is read out from the GC Series.
• When [Open history file] is selected, the current settings are closed, and you can open a saved history file in the
[Open] dialog box.
14
GC Configurator [History]
From the menu, select [File] > [Open history file].
The current settings are closed, and you can open a saved history file in the [Open] dialog box.
From the menu, select [Communication] > [Read out history from GC].
The history data is read from the GC Series.
14-6 GC Series User’s Manual
14-3 How to Check the History
How to Check the History
The program execution status when the history selected in the history list occurred is displayed.
Selected history Program execution status when the selected history occurred Status change
Reference When you select a history you want to check from the history list, the status of the program when the history occurred
is shown.
On the program screen, the status change (such as ) of each block is shown, allowing you to promptly
check the reason why the S-OUT was turned OFF.
14
GC Configurator [History]
List display
Block where the event occurred
History number
Save time
Selected history
Input block icon
GC Series User’s Manual 14-7
14-3 How to Check the History
Item Details
Block where the event occurred Displays the label of the block where the event occurred.
History number Number assigned to the read history data. It is assigned in order from newest data to oldest
data, starting with the lowest number first.
Save time Displays the time when the history was stored.
[Full-time histories]:
Displays the time when the history was stored, which is calculated based on the operation
time from when the GC main controller started to when the history was saved and the time
data of the PC that read out the history data.
[Event histories]:
Displays the trigger occurrence time as the operation time from when the GC main controller
started to when the history was saved.
Input block icon Displays the input block icons related to the history data. The highlighted input block icons
indicate that the corresponding input block ON/OFF status has changed at the timing of that
history event.
ON/OFF state Displays the input/output status when the history was saved.
Selected history Displays the currently selected history data (framed in blue).
History operation buttons
Item Details
[Full-time histories]: Moves the focus to the last history in the history list.
[Event histories]: Moves the focus to the event history trigger position or the beginning.
14 Moves the focus to the last change point of the selected signal before the related block.
GC Configurator [History]
Moves the focus to the first change point of the selected signal after the related block.
[Full-time histories]: Moves the focus to the first history in the history list.
[Event histories]: Moves the focus to the event history trigger position or the end.
Moves back the current time by the interval specified in [step execution interval].
Moves forward the current time by the interval specified in [step execution interval].
Select the step execution interval. (Default: 100 ms)
Setting range: 2 ms/10 ms/100 ms/1 s/10 s/30 s/1 min/10 min/30 min
14-8 GC Series User’s Manual
14-3 How to Check the History
Search filter
You can narrow down the target block, status change, and time using the filter function.
Item Details
Target block Select the filter target block.
Target change point Select the filter target change point. (ON to OFF only, OFF to ON only, ON to OFF / OFF to ON)
Time Select the filter target time. To specify the period, select the start date and the end date.
Search filter Select the input block (input device) to display when [S-OUT] or [AUX-OUT] is selected for the target
block.
Operation panel
On the operation panel, you can read out the history data from the GC Series and clear or save it to a file.
Item Details
• Reads out the history data from the GC Series.
[Full-time histories]: Reads out the last 1,000 items. 14
[Event histories]: Reads out the last 100 items.
GC Configurator [History]
• Click the [] button and select the number of items to read.
[Full-time histories]: Read out last 1,000 items/Read out last 10,000 items/Read out all history
[Event histories]: Read out last 100 items/Read out all history
Clears all the full-time histories and event histories stored in the GC Series main controller.
• Saves the currently displayed history data to a file.
• Click the [] button and select the content to save to a file.
• Save histories currently displayed
• Save all histories stored in GC
(Setting range: Save histories currently displayed/Save full-time histories only/Save event histories
only)
GC Series User’s Manual 14-9
14-3 How to Check the History
Timing chart
Zoom in/ Time
Zoom out measurement Current position bar
[+] button
Scale view
Cursor
information
Item Details
Zoom in/Zoom out Zooms in or out on the time axis.
Time measurement Displays the time difference between the current position bar and the mouse cursor position
when clicked.
Current position bar Displays the timing when the selected history occurred.
[+] button Adds a detailed signal if it is available for the block when clicked.
Scale view Displays the current time scale.
14 Cursor information [Curr. pos.]: Displays the date and time data when the selected history occurred.
[Mouse cursor]: Displays the date and time data at the position where the mouse cursor is
GC Configurator [History]
located.
[Time diff.]: Displays the time difference between the current position and the mouse cursor
position.
14-10 GC Series User’s Manual
14-3 How to Check the History
How to check the timing chart
The history with the blue background in the history list corresponds to the timing of the current position bar.
The range of the orange line
at the left edge of the history
list corresponds to the time
range displayed in orange at
the bottom of the timing
chart.
Each green line indicates that a history item is shown at the corresponding time in the history list.
Time measurement
You can measure the time difference between blocks using the timing chart. 14
This is used to check the time from an input block change to safety output OFF or check a muting input signal timing.
GC Configurator [History]
GC Series User’s Manual 14-11
MEMO
14
GC Configurator [History]
14-12 GC Series User’s Manual
15
Ethernet
Communication
Function
This chapter describes the settings and functions of the Ethernet communication function.
15-1 Overview of the Ethernet Communication Function.......................................page 15-2
15-2 GC Configurator Settings ..................................................................................page 15-3
15
Ethernet Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 15-1
Overview of the Ethernet
15-1 Communication Function
This section describes the Ethernet communication function.
All of the data received from the communication of the EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET, UDP, Modbus/TCP, or
DANGER MC protocol cannot be used for the safety related part of the control system. When used incorrectly,
there is a possibility that the operator of the device may be threatened with major injury or even death.
Point The Ethernet communication function is available only on the main controller "GC-1000".
What You Can Do with the Ethernet Communication Function
The main controller GC-1000 is equipped with an Ethernet port to communicate signals with a general-purpose PLC using
Ethernet protocols. You can transmit the status of a device controlled on a general-purpose PLC to the GC Series or
transmit the operation status of the GC Series or the status of a safety sensor controlled by the GC Series to a general-
purpose PLC.
General-purpose PLC • EtherNet/IP™
• UDP
• Modbus/TCP
• MC protocol
Communication output/GC main controller information
Communication input
15
Ethernet Communication Function
Communication
input from the
PLC
Communication
output to the PLC
Supported Protocols
The Ethernet communication function supports the following Ethernet protocols.
• EtherNet/IP™ "Chapter 16 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function" (page16-1)
• PROFINET "Chapter 17 PROFINET Communication Function" (page17-1)
• UDP "Chapter 18 UDP Communication Function" (page18-1)
• Modbus/TCP "Chapter 19 Modbus/TCP Communication Function" (page19-1)
• MC protocol "Chapter 20 MC Protocol Communication Function" (page20-1)
* EtherNet/IP™ is a registered trademark or trademark of ODVA, Inc.
* The MC protocol is an abbreviation of the MELSEC communication protocol. MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation.
15-2 GC Series User’s Manual
15-2 GC Configurator Settings
GC Configurator - Configuration Screen Settings
Basic Ethernet settings
In the device list, drag [Ethernet] from [Option] and drop it to the program registration area to register.
Drag and drop
Detailed settings
(Basic settings) (Advanced settings) 15
Ethernet Communication Function
Reference For the basic Ethernet settings, refer to "10-7 Setting Options" (page 10-20).
GC Series User’s Manual 15-3
15-2 GC Configurator Settings
Registering a communication protocol
In the device list, drag the target communication protocol from [Option] and drop it in the program creation area to register.
Example: Registering the communication protocol "EtherNet/IP"
Drag and drop
15 Once a communication
protocol to be used is
Ethernet Communication Function
registered, you can use
communication inputs and
communication outputs.
Reference For the UDP settings and MC protocol settings, refer to the upcoming chapters.
"Chapter 18 UDP Communication Function" (page18-1)
"Chapter 20 MC Protocol Communication Function" (page20-1)
15-4 GC Series User’s Manual
15-2 GC Configurator Settings
Communication input
Registering communication inputs
In the device list, drag communication inputs from [Communications] and drop them in the program registration area to
register.
Reset input (COM)
Other input (COM)
Item Details
Label Label of the communication input block. (Editable: 1 to 22 characters)
Offset: bit Refer to the below.
Comment
Enablement code
Enter a comment for the communication input block. (Maximum: 50 characters)
Enable or disable the enablement code function.
15
When this is enabled, set the code number used for input permission. (Setting range: 1 to 255) Ethernet Communication Function
Maximum enablement code period Limit the time to turn ON/OFF the communication input block when the enablement code
matches the specified value if the enablement code function is enabled.
• Unit (min): 1 to 10 (minutes)
• Unit (s): 1 to 59 (seconds) (Default: 1 (min))
Do not specify maximum enablement Does not limit the enablement code period when selected.
code period
Point When the enablement code is used, assign a value between "0:00" and "1:13" to [Offset: bit].
Reference There are no differences in behavior when executing the GC main controller program between the communication
inputs [Reset comm. input] and [Other comm. input]. During a simulation, however, there are the following differences:
[Reset comm. input] has the same behavior as " Reset switch".
[Other comm. input] has the same behavior as " Other switch".
GC Series User’s Manual 15-5
15-2 GC Configurator Settings
Offset: bit
Communication inputs are assigned to the "communication input data" (4 addresses = 4 words = 64 bits) of each protocol.
Offset bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
0 0:15 0:14 0:13 0:12 0:11 0:10 0:09 0:08 0:07 0:06 0:05 0:04 0:03 0:02 0:01 0:00
1 1:15 1:14 1:13 1:12 1:11 1:10 1:09 1:08 1:07 1:06 1:05 1:04 1:03 1:02 1:01 1:00
2 2:15 2:14 2:13 2:12 2:11 2:10 2:09 2:08 2:07 2:06 2:05 2:04 2:03 2:02 2:01 2:00
3 3:15 3:14 3:13 3:12 3:11 3:10 3:09 3:08 3:07 3:06 3:05 3:04 3:03 3:02 3:01 3:00
(Correspondence between [Offset: bit] and communication input data)
Offset bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
0 0:15 0:14 0:13 0:12 0:11 0:10 0:09 0:08 0:07 0:06 0:05 0:04 0:03 0:02 0:01 0:00 Offset: bit Offset: bit
0:00 RST00 (Reset comm. input)
0:01 CIN00 (Other comm. input)
0:02 CIN01 (Other comm. input)
0:03 CIN02 (Other comm. input)
0:04 CIN03 (Other comm. input)
0:05 CIN04 (Other comm. input)
0:06 CIN05 (Other comm. input)
0:07 CIN06 (Other comm. input)
0:08 CIN07 (Other comm. input)
0:09 CIN08 (Other comm. input)
0:10 CIN09 (Other comm. input)
0:11 CIN10 (Other comm. input)
0:12 CIN11 (Other comm. input)
0:13 CIN12 (Other comm. input)
0:14 CIN13 (Other comm. input)
0:15 CIN14 (Other comm. input)
1:00 :
1:01 :
: :
For the address of "communication input data", refer to the following:
15 • EtherNet/IP: "OUT Area Data Map" (page 16-15)
Ethernet Communication Function
• UDP: "Word address" (page 18-13)
"Bit address" (page 18-22)
• Modbus/TCP: "Input Registers and Holding Registers" (page 19-13)
"Inputs and Coils" (page 19-22)
• MC protocol: "Word address" (page 20-17)
"Bit address" (page 20-25)
15-6 GC Series User’s Manual
15-2 GC Configurator Settings
Enablement code
The enablement code is used to enhance the safety of signals specified via communications.
Send a code number called an enablement code, separately from a communication input, and only when the number
matches the specified value, the signal of the communication input block is enabled.
(The enablement code matches the
specified value.)
0 10 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OUT ON
(The enablement code does not
match the specified value.)
0 20 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
OUT OFF
Point • When the enablement code is used, assign a value between "0:00" and "1:13" to [Offset: bit].
• You cannot set the same enablement code to multiple communication input blocks.
• The enablement code setting range is 1 to 255.
• After sending the enablement code, control (turn ON/OFF) the communication input bit.
Maximum enablement code period
You can limit the time to turn ON/OFF the communication input block when the enablement code matches the specified
15
value if the enablement code function is enabled. Ethernet Communication Function
[Setting range]
• Unit (min): 1 to 10 (minutes)
• Unit (s): 1 to 59 (seconds)
(Default: 1 (min))
(Timing chart)
Enablement code 0 10 0 10
Communication input
Out
Error
Maximum enablement code period Maximum enablement code period
GC Series User’s Manual 15-7
15-2 GC Configurator Settings
Communication output
Registering communication outputs
In the device list, drag communication outputs from [Communications] and drop them in the program registration area to
register.
Communication output
Item Details
Label Label of the communication output block. (Editable: 1 to 22 characters)
Offset: bit Refer to the below.
Comment Enter a comment for the communication output block. (Maximum: 50 characters)
Offset: bit
Communication outputs are assigned to the "communication output data" (4 addresses = 4 words = 64 bits) of each
15 protocol.
Ethernet Communication Function
Offset bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
0 0:15 0:14 0:13 0:12 0:11 0:10 0:09 0:08 0:07 0:06 0:05 0:04 0:03 0:02 0:01 0:00
1 1:15 1:14 1:13 1:12 1:11 1:10 1:09 1:08 1:07 1:06 1:05 1:04 1:03 1:02 1:01 1:00
2 2:15 2:14 2:13 2:12 2:11 2:10 2:09 2:08 2:07 2:06 2:05 2:04 2:03 2:02 2:01 2:00
3 3:15 3:14 3:13 3:12 3:11 3:10 3:09 3:08 3:07 3:06 3:05 3:04 3:03 3:02 3:01 3:00
For the address of "communication output data", refer to the following:
• EtherNet/IP: "IN Area Data Map" (page 16-8)
• UDP: "Word address" (page 18-13)
"Bit address" (page 18-22)
• Modbus/TCP: "Input Registers and Holding Registers" (page 19-13)
"Inputs and Coils" (page 19-22)
• MC protocol: "Word address" (page 20-17)
"Bit address" (page 20-25)
15-8 GC Series User’s Manual
15-2 GC Configurator Settings
How to Use a Communication Block
A communication input and a communication output can be used in a program like an input block and an output block.
Drag and drop them from the block list to the program to register.
[Block list]
Communication input
Communication output
(Example: Communication input) (Example: Communication output)
Communication output
15
Communication input Ethernet Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 15-9
MEMO
15
Ethernet Communication Function
15-10 GC Series User’s Manual
16
EtherNet/IP™
Communication
Function
This chapter describes the settings and functions of the EtherNet/IP™ communication function.
16-1 Overview of the EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function ..............................page 16-2
16-2 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Specifications .................................................page 16-3
16-3 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Settings ...........................................................page 16-4
16-4 Cyclic Communication.......................................................................................page 16-6
16-5 Message Communication ................................................................................page 16-16
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 16-1
Overview of the EtherNet/IP™
16-1 Communication Function
This section describes the EtherNet/IP™ communication function.
All of the data received from the communication of the EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET, UDP, Modbus/TCP, or
DANGER MC protocol cannot be used for the safety related part of the control system. When used incorrectly,
there is a possibility that the operator of the device may be threatened with major injury or even death.
Point The Ethernet communication function is available only for the main controller "GC-1000".
Overview of the EtherNet/IP™ communication function
What is EtherNet/IP™ communication?
EtherNet/IP™ is an industrial communication network, whose specifications are published (open) and managed by ODVA
(Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.). It was standardized as EtherNet/IP™ (Industrial Protocol), where an industrial
protocol is integrated with Ethernet.
Communications are enabled by integrating a protocol called CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) with TCP/IP and Ethernet.
This allows the use of both general Ethernet and the network at the same time.
The GC Series supports the following two communication methods: Cyclic communication (implicit message), which
communicates at a fixed cycle, and message communication (explicit message), which communicates at a specific timing.
Cyclic communication can update data without a ladder program.
What you can do with EtherNet/IP™ communication
The GC Series functions as an EtherNet/IP™ adapter, allowing you to perform the following:
Item Cyclic Message
communication communication
Write a communication input.
Write an enablement code.
Write a character string that is stored into the history function.
Read out a communication output.
16 Read out an error code.
Read out the unit configuration and model information.
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Read out the received-light-amount and ON/OFF state of the GL-R Series connected to a
GC-Link port.
Read out the door open/close state and ON/OFF state of the GS/GS-M Series connected
to a GC-Link port.
Read out the ON/OFF status of the main controller, expansion unit, and remote I/O module. --
Read out the block status. --
Read out the error history. --
Reference EtherNet/IP™ opens a communication line called a "connection" when starting communications. A device that opens a
connection is called a "scanner" while a device that is opened is called an "adapter". In cyclic communication, setting
a "connection" to exchange data between the EtherNet/IP™ scanner and the GC Series allows data transmission without
a program. A data communication cycle (RPI) can be set for each connection. However, if a heavy load is applied to
the network when many devices are connected to the network, a delay or packet loss may occur. Verify the operation
thoroughly before putting it into production.
16-2 GC Series User’s Manual
EtherNet/IP™ Communication
16-2 Specifications
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Specifications for the GC Series
Category Item Details
Ethernet specifications Communication media 100BASE-TX
Basic specifications Vendor name Keyence Corporation
Vendor ID 367
Device type 43 (Generic Device)
Product code 2601
Product name GC Series
Cyclic specifications Transmission trigger Cyclic only
PRI specification 5 to 10000 ms (Default: 20 ms)
Maximum number of connections 16
Bandwidth restriction Restricted to 3000 pps
Supported connection type Input-Only, Exclusive Owner
Instance specification method Logical instance (number specification) only.
Tag specification (name specification) is not supported.
Maximum cyclic size 1280 bytes (This applies to Class 1 Large Forward Open.)
EtherNet/IP™ conformance testing Compliant with CT16
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 16-3
16-3 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Settings
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Settings
GC Configurator settings
[Setting procedure]
Basic Ethernet settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and configure the basic Ethernet settings. "15-2 GC Configurator
Settings" (page 15-3)
EtherNet/IP™ settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [EtherNet/IP] to the screen to register.
Registering communication inputs and communication outputs
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [Communication input] and [Communication output] to
the screen to register.
"15-2 GC Configurator Settings" (page 15-3)
Programming
Perform programming using the communication blocks.
" How to Use a Communication Block" (page 15-9)
16 EtherNet/IP™ scanner settings
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Set the IP address and configure the EtherNet/IP™ communication settings as follows:
[Setting procedure]
Registering the EDS file
If you set the GC Series for the first time using the EtherNet/IP™ configuration software, install the GC Series EDS file on
the configuration software.
The GC Series EDS file can be downloaded from the KEYENCE website.
www.keyence.com/glb
In order to use the KEYENCE configuration software, KV STUDIO, download the file with the extension ".EZ1". ".EZ1"
refers to an EDS file with the KEYENCE-specific information added.
16-4 GC Series User’s Manual
16-3 EtherNet/IP™ Communication Settings
Communication settings
(1) Cyclic communication
Set a connection to exchange data between the EtherNet/IP™ scanner and the GC Series.
"16-4 Cyclic Communication" (page 16-6)
(2) Message communication
Create a program for the communications.
"16-5 Message Communication" (page 16-16)
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 16-5
16-4 Cyclic Communication
What is cyclic communication?
It is a function to exchange data between a PLC (EtherNet/IP™ scanner) and the GC Series at a fixed cycle. This is used to
read out the program execution status of the GC Series and periodically read out the received-light-amount and door open/
close state of the GL-R Series and GS Series connected to the GC-Link ports without a ladder program. Additionally, you
are able to use a signal from a PLC in a program of the GC Series.
Available connections
The following connections are available for the GC Series cyclic communication.
Assembly RPI
Instance Size Application (ms)
No. Connection name Input/output
(byte) type Minimum
HEX DEC Default
RPI
1 Comm. input/ Input 64H 100 174 Exclusive 20 5
Status data (GC => Scanner) Owner
Output 6EH 110 92 20 5
(Scanner => GC)
2 Status data Input 64H 100 174 Input-Only 20 5
(GC => Scanner)
3 GL-R Monitor data Input 65H 101 446 Input-Only 20 10
(GC-Link PortA) (GC => Scanner)
4 GS Monitor data Input 66H 102 72 Input-Only 20 10
(GC-Link PortA) (GC => Scanner)
5 GL-R Monitor data Input 67H 103 446 Input-Only 20 10
(GC-Link PortB) (GC => Scanner)
6 GS Monitor data Input 68H 104 72 Input-Only 20 10
(GC-Link PortB) (GC => Scanner)
*1 In the KEYENCE configuration software KV STUDIO, the connection name is shown as follows:
- Comm. input/Status data: Monitor data/Control data
- Status data: Monitor data
16 Reference • Each connection is triggered at a cyclic timing. The supported connection types are point-to-point and multicast.
• The description of each application type is as follows:
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
- Input-Only:
This connection allows you to only set the data transmission from the GC Series to the EtherNet/IP™ scanner.
Multiple scanners can establish "Input-Only" connections simultaneously for a single adapter (the GC Series). To
establish connections from multiple EtherNet/IP™ scanners simultaneously, set the connection type to multicast.
- Exclusive Owner:
This connection allows you to set the data transmission from the EtherNet/IP™ scanner to the GC Series and the
data transmission from the GC Series to the EtherNet/IP™ scanner simultaneously. Multiple "Exclusive Owner"
connections cannot be established for the "Comm. input/Status data" of a single adapter (the GC Series).
• If you need to specify "Configuration" when using a third-party PLC, set the instance ID to "1" and the size to "0" in
"Assembly Object".
16-6 GC Series User’s Manual
16-4 Cyclic Communication
Cyclic communication flow (example)
Communication input
The following describes how to use a signal from a general-purpose PLC for a GC Series program using a
"communication input" block.
1 Set a connection.
Set the following connection in the EtherNet/IP™ scanner configuration software.
Assembly RPI
Instance Size Application (ms)
No. Connection name Input/output
(byte) type Minimum
HEX DEC Default
RPI
1 Comm. input/ Input 64H 100 174 Exclusive 20 5
Status data (GC => Scanner) Owner
Output 6EH 110 92 20 5
(Scanner => GC)
2 Assign a device used for cyclic communication.
Assign a device that stores cyclic communication data. For more information about the setting method, refer to the
scanner device manual.
When a KEYENCE PLC (EtherNet/IP™ scanner) is used, steps 1 to 2 are automatically set just by selecting the GC
Series (You can also change the settings manually).
3 Set a communication input in the GC Configurator.
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop a [Communication input] to the screen to register.
"15-2 GC Configurator Settings" (page 15-3)
4 Perform programming in the GC Configurator.
Perform programming using the communication blocks. 16
"How to Use a Communication Block" (page 15-9)
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 16-7
16-4 Cyclic Communication
IN Area Data Map
Data from the GC Series are assigned to the IN area of the EtherNet/IP™ scanner.
Assembly instance: 100 (64H)
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
Indicates the number of connected
0 Number of connected units (expansion unit) UINT 0 to 65535
expansion units.
Number of connected units (remote I/O Indicates the number of connected remote I/
1 UINT 0 to 65535
module) O modules.
bit 0 to 7: Unit model
2 Model information (main controller) WORD 1: GC-1000
2: GC-1000R
3: GC-S84
4: GC-S16
3 Model information (1st expansion unit) WORD 5: GC-S1R
Indicates the connected unit model. 6: GC-A16
bit 8: Positional relationship to the GC-B30
... ... ... 0: Unit positioned before the GC-B30
1: Unit positioned after the GC-B30
If the GC-B30 does not exist in the unit
12 Model information (10th expansion unit) WORD configuration, all units are set to 0.
bit 9 to 15: System reserved (fixed to 0)
13 Model information (1st remote I/O module) WORD bit 0 to 7: Unit model
7: GC-R45
... ... Indicates the connected unit model. ...
8: GC-R48
16 Model information (4th remote I/O module) WORD bit 8 to 15: System reserved (fixed to 0)
17 System reserved
18
Indicates the time elapsed since the start of
Operation time DWORD 0 to FFFFFFFFH
19 the unit in units of 10 ms.
bit 0: RUN state
0: The unit is stopped.
1: The unit is running.
bit 1: Abnormal state
20 GC operating state Indicates the operating state of the GC. WORD 0: Normal
1: Abnormal
* An abnormal state means that at least one
16 alert or error is occurring.
bit 2 to 15: System reserved (fixed to 0)
Indicates the number of errors that are
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
21 Number of errors that occurred UINT 0 to 30
currently occurring.
22 Main code of the (1st) error code Indicates the code of the error that is UINT
currently occurring.
23 Detailed code of the (1st) error code Error codes are sorted in the following order: UINT
(1) Errors are sorted in order of Error,
... ... Alert, and Info, starting from the first ...
0 to 65535
error.
80 Main code of the (30th) error code UINT
(2) Errors are sorted by error category in
the order that they occurred.
81 Detailed code of the (30th) error code The high byte represents the main code while UINT
the low byte represents the detailed code.
82 Communication output [0:00] to [0:15] Indicates the output status of the WORD bit 0: Communication output bit 0
communication outputs. bit 1: Communication output bit 1
... ... ...
When a communication output is turned ON, ...
85 Communication output [3:00] to [3:15] the corresponding bit is turned ON. WORD bit 15: Communication output bit 15
16-8 GC Series User’s Manual
16-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
bit 0 to 3: GC-Link port A connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 4 to 7: GC-Link port A error status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
86 GC-Link port status Indicates the GC-Link port status. WORD
bit 8 to 11: GC-Link port B connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 12 to 15: GC-Link port B error status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
Assembly instance: 101 (65H)
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the number of GL-R units connected to the 1: Main unit only
0 UINT
Number of connected units GC-Link port A. 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit 2
1 System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
2 UINT
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 1: Type F
3 UINT
Sub unit 1 type port A. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
4 UINT
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port A GL-R
5 Number of optical axes of the UINT 0 to 127
main unit
16
GC-Link port A GL-R
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Indicates the number of optical axes of the GL-R
6 Number of optical axes of sub UINT 0 to 127
connected to the GC-Link port A.
unit 1
GC-Link port A GL-R
7 Number of optical axes of sub UINT 0 to 127
unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of the GL-R (receiver) bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R
connected to the GC-Link port A. bit 1: Switch 2
8 Main controller setting switch WORD
When each switch is turned ON, the corresponding bit ...
settings
is turned ON. bit 5: Switch 6
9 System reserved
GC Series User’s Manual 16-9
16-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
10 Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
11 Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
73 Received-light-amount, Main WORD
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
74 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1, 1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the received-light-amount of each optical axis bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
75 Received-light-amount, Sub unit of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A. WORD
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
1, 3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis The received-light-amount range is 0 to 63.
... ... The high byte of the 127th optical axis is always 0. ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
137 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
138 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
2, 1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
139 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
2, 3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
201 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
2, 127th optical axis
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 2nd optical axis
202 ON/OFF information of each WORD
...
optical axis [15:0]
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 16th optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information of each optical axis of bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 17th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A. bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 18th optical axis
203 ON/OFF information of each A sub unit is placed with the bits following the optical WORD
...
optical axis [31:16] axis of the last unit. bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 32nd optical axis
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an optical axis
16 ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
configured with fixed blanking. ...
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 225th optical axis
bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 226th optical axis
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
216 ON/OFF information of each WORD
...
optical axis [239:224]
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 240th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL-R connected to the 0: No error
217 WORD
Error status GC-Link port A. 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the OSSD output status of the GL-R 0: OFF
218 WORD
OSSD output status connected to the GC-Link port A. 1: ON
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the enablement status of the received-light-
0: Disabled
219 Received-light-amount decrease amount decrease alert of the GL-R connected to the WORD
1: Enabled
alert enablement status GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection status of the received-light-
0: No alert
220 Received-light-amount decrease amount decrease alert of the GL-R connected to the WORD
1: Alert occurring
alert detection status GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection threshold of the received-light-
221 Received-light-amount decrease amount decrease alert of the GL-R connected to the UINT 0 to 100
alert detection threshold GC-Link port A in percentage.
0: No set
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection time of the received-light-
1: 5 sec
222 Received-light-amount decrease amount decrease alert of the GL-R connected to the UINT
2: 30 sec
alert detection time GC-Link port A.
3: 5 min
16-10 GC Series User’s Manual
16-4 Cyclic Communication
Assembly instance: 102 (66H)
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
GC-Link port A GS Indicates the number of GS/GS-M units connected to
0 UINT 0 to 16
Number of connected units the GC-Link port A.
bit 0 to 2: Model information
GC-Link port A GS 000: GS-10
1 WORD
Model information (1st unit) 001: GS-50
011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
GC-Link port A GS bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
2 Indicates the model information of the GS/GS-M WORD bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
Model information (2nd unit)
connected to the GC-Link port A. 00: Normal operation (Default)
01: OFF
... ... ... 10: OFF when GS is closed (locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
bit 6: Coding level settings
GC-Link port A GS 0: Low (multi operation)
16 WORD
Model information (16th unit) 1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
1: ON
GC-Link port A GS Indicates the OSSD status and lock control status of the
17 WORD bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link port A.
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
GC-Link port A GS Indicates the open/close state of each GS/GS-M 0: Open
18 WORD
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link port A. 1: Close
...
bit 15: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
Indicates the lock status of each GS/GS-M connected to
GC-Link port A GS 0: Unlocked
19
Lock status
the GC-Link port A.
This is always 0 for the non-contact type.
WORD
...
1: Locked 16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
GC-Link port A GS 0: Open
20 WORD
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port A GS 1: Locked
21 WORD
2nd unit status Indicates the detailed information of the GS/GS-M bit 2: Red LED display status
connected to the GC-Link port A. 0: OFF
1: ON
... ... ...
bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port A GS 1: ON
35 WORD
16th unit status
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
GC Series User’s Manual 16-11
16-4 Cyclic Communication
Assembly instance: 103 (67H)
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the number of GL-R units connected to the 1: Main unit only
0 UINT
Number of connected units GC-Link port B. 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit 2
1 System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
2 UINT
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 1: Type F
3 UINT
Sub unit 1 type port B. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
4 UINT
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port B GL-R
5 UINT 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of the main unit
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the number of optical axes of the GL-R
6 UINT 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of sub unit 1 connected to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R
7 UINT 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of sub unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of the GL-R (receiver) bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R
connected to the GC-Link port B. bit 1: Switch 2
8 Main controller setting switch WORD
When each switch is turned ON, the corresponding bit ...
settings
is turned ON. bit 5: Switch 6
9 System reserved
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
10 Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
11 Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
16 73 Received-light-amount, Main
unit, 127th optical axis
WORD
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
74 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1, 1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the received-light-amount of each optical axis bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
75 Received-light-amount, Sub unit of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B. WORD
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
1, 3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis The received-light-amount range is 0 to 63.
... ... The high byte of the 127th optical axis is always 0. ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
137 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
138 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
2, 1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
139 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
2, 3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
201 Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
2, 127th optical axis
16-12 GC Series User’s Manual
16-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 2nd optical axis
202 ON/OFF information of each WORD
...
optical axis [15:0]
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 16th optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information of each optical axis of bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 17th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B. bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 18th optical axis
203 ON/OFF information of each A sub unit is placed with the bits following the optical WORD
...
optical axis [31:16] axis of the last unit. bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 32nd optical axis
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an optical axis
... ... configured with fixed blanking. ...
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 225th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 226th optical axis
216 ON/OFF information of each WORD
...
optical axis [239:224]
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 240th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL-R connected to the 0: No error
217 WORD
Error status GC-Link port B. 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the OSSD output status of the GL-R 0: OFF
218 WORD
OSSD output status connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: ON
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the enablement status of the received-light-
0: Disabled
219 Received-light-amount decrease amount decrease alert of the GL-R connected to the WORD
1: Enabled
alert enablement status GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection status of the received-light-
0: No alert
220 Received-light-amount decrease amount decrease alert of the GL-R connected to the WORD
1: Alert occurring
alert detection status GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection threshold of the received-light-
221 Received-light-amount decrease amount decrease alert of the GL-R connected to the UINT 0 to 100
alert detection threshold GC-Link port B in percentage.
0: No set
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection time of the received-light-
1: 5 sec
222 Received-light-amount decrease amount decrease alert of the GL-R connected to the UINT
2: 30 sec
alert detection time GC-Link port B.
3: 5 min
Assembly instance: 104 (68H)
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
GC-Link port B GS Indicates the number of GS/GS-M units connected to
0
Number of connected units the GC-Link port B.
UINT 0 to 16
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
bit 0 to 2: Model information
GC-Link port B GS 000: GS-10
1 WORD
Model information (1st unit) 001: GS-50
011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
GC-Link port B GS bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
2 Indicates the model information of the GS/GS-M WORD bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
Model information (2nd unit)
connected to the GC-Link port B. 00: Normal operation (Default)
01: OFF
... ... ... 10: OFF when GS is closed (locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
bit 6: Coding level settings
GC-Link port B GS 0: Low (multi operation)
16 WORD
Model information (16th unit) 1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
1: ON
GC-Link port B GS Indicates the OSSD status and lock control status of the
17 WORD bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link port B.
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
GC Series User’s Manual 16-13
16-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
GC-Link port B GS Indicates the open/close state of each GS/GS-M 0: Open
18 WORD
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: Close
...
bit 15: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
Indicates the lock status of each GS/GS-M connected to
GC-Link port B GS 0: Unlocked
19 the GC-Link port B. WORD
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-contact type.
...
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
GC-Link port B GS 0: Open
20 WORD
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port B GS 1: Locked
21 WORD
2nd unit status Indicates the detailed information of the GS/GS-M bit 2: Red LED display status
connected to the GC-Link port B. 0: OFF
1: ON
... ... ...
bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port B GS 1: ON
35 WORD
16th unit status
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
16-14 GC Series User’s Manual
16-4 Cyclic Communication
OUT Area Data Map
Data to the GC Series are assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP™ scanner.
Assembly Instance: 110 (6EH)
Data
Offset Item Details Value
type
bit 0: Communication input bit 0
0: OFF
0 Communication input [0:00] to [0:15] WORD
1: ON
bit 1: Communication input bit 1
Indicates the status of the communication inputs.
0: OFF
... ... When a bit is turned ON, the corresponding communication ...
1: ON
input is turned ON.
...
bit 15: Communication input bit 15
3 Communication input [3:00] to [3:15] WORD
0: OFF
1: ON
Enablement code of communication input
4 UINT
[0:00]
Indicates the status of the enablement code.
... ... The upper eight bits are ignored. ... 0000H to 00FFH
(Range: 1 to 255)
Enablement code of communication input
33 UINT
[1:13]
34 System reserved
35 System reserved
36 Displays the status of the PLC text.
The first character is set in the low byte while the second
... PLC text STRING
character is set in the high byte in the ASCII code format.
45 The end terminal is NULL (00H).
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 16-15
16-5 Message Communication
What is message communication?
In message communication, data reading and writing are performed by exchanging commands and responses between
the EtherNet/IP™ scanner and the GC Series. GC Series-specific object data and EtherNet/IP™-defined standard object
data can be read and written.
Objects available in the GC Series
Object name Class ID Details
GC-specific object 115 (73H) This object type allows data to be read and written with the GC Series.
Identity Object 1 (01H) This object type provides the identification information, general information, and reset
service.
Assembly Object 4 (04H) This object type provides access to devices transmitted via cyclic communication. This
is used for data transmission to devices that do not support cyclic communication.
Connection Manager Object 6 (06H) This object type is used for connection-type communication.
TCP/IP Interface Object 245 (F5H) This object type provides a framework to set a TCP/IP network interface. You can set the
IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
Ethernet Link Object 246 (F6H) This object type provides the Ethernet status information.
Basic format and process flow of message communication
The EtherNet/IP™ scanner communicates with the machine by transmitting explicit messages. The following basic
example shows the command format of explicit messages transmitted by the EtherNet/IP™ scanner and the response
formats returned from the machine to the EtherNet/IP™ scanner.
Command format
Item Details
Service code Specify the service code to use.
0EH: Parameter read (Get_Attribute_Single)
10H: Parameter write (Set_Attribute_Single)*1
16 Class ID
Instance ID
Specify the class ID according to the service to be used.
Specify the instance ID according to the service to be used.
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Attribute ID Specify the attribute ID according to the service to be used.
Service data Specify the service data according to the service to be used.
*1 When cyclic communication is performed, data cannot be written by message communication.
Response format
Item Details
General status Returns the general status as a response to the command. 00H is returned when in a normal state.
Service response data Returns the service response data as a response to the command.
16-16 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Response format on errors
The general status data is set as follows when an error occurs. There is no service response data.
General status Details
00H Normal end
05H The instance ID is outside the valid range.
08H This service is not supported or cannot be executed by the specified instance ID.
09H The written data is outside the valid range.
0EH You tried to write to a non-writable attribute ID.
10H The system is starting up. Try again later.
13H The service data size is less than the specified value.
14H The attribute ID is outside the valid range.
1FH This service is supported by the specified instance ID but cannot be used with the specified attribute ID.
FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 16-17
16-5 Message Communication
Parameter list
GC-specific object (Class ID:115 (73H))
Word address
Instance Bit
Attribute ID Data
ID Item Details Attribute Value address
type
DEC DEC HEX availability
bit 0: Communication input bit 0
Communication input [0:00] to 0: OFF
0 256 100H WORD R/W
[0:15] 1: ON
Indicates the status of the
bit 1: Communication input bit 1
communication inputs.
0: OFF
... ... ... ... When a bit is turned ON, the ... ...
1: ON
corresponding communication input is
...
turned ON.
Communication input [3:00] to bit 15: Communication input bit 15
0 259 103H WORD R/W
[3:15] 0: OFF
1: ON
Enablement code of
0 260 104H UINT R/W
communication input [0:00] Indicates the status of the enablement
code.
... ... ... ... ... ... 0000H to 00FFH
The upper eight bits are ignored.
Enablement code of (Range: 1 to 255)
0 289 121H UINT R/W
communication input [1:13]
0 290 122H System reserved
0 291 123H System reserved
Displays the status of the PLC text.
The first character is set in the low byte
0 292 124H PLC text STRING R/W 0000H to FFFFH
while the second character is set in the
high byte in the ASCII code format.
Number of connected units Indicates the number of connected
0 512 200H UINT R 0 to 65535
(expansion unit) expansion units.
Number of connected units Indicates the number of connected
0 513 201H UINT R 0 to 65535
(remote I/O module) remote I/O modules.
bit 0 to 7: Unit model
1: GC-1000
Model information (main
0 514 202H WORD R 2: GC-1000R
controller)
3: GC-S84
4: GC-S16
5: GC-S1R
16 0 515 203H
Model information (1st
expansion unit)
WORD R
6: GC-A16
bit 8: Positional relationship to
the GC-B30
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Indicates the connected unit model.
0: Unit positioned before the
GC-B30
... ... ... ... ... ... 1: Unit positioned after the
GC-B30
If the GC-B30 does not exist
Model information (10th in the unit configuration, all
0 524 20CH WORD R
expansion unit) units are set to 0.
bit 9 to 15: System reserved
(fixed to 0)
Model information (1st remote
0 525 20DH WORD R bit 0 to 7: Unit model
I/O module)
7: GC-R45
... ... ... ... Indicates the connected unit model. ... ... 8: GC-R48
bit 8 to 15: System reserved
Model information (4th remote
0 528 210H WORD R (fixed to 0)
I/O module)
0 529 211H System reserved
Indicates the time elapsed since the
0 530 212H Operation time DWORD R 0 to FFFFFFFFH
start of the unit in units of 10 ms.
16-18 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Instance Bit
Attribute ID Data
ID Item Details Attribute Value address
type
DEC DEC HEX availability
bit 0: RUN state
0: The unit is stopped.
1: The unit is running.
bit 1: Abnormal state
0: Normal
0 532 214H GC operating state Indicates the operating state of the GC. WORD R 1: Abnormal
* An abnormal state means
that at least one alert or
error is occurring.
bit 2 to 15: System reserved
(fixed to 0)
Number of errors that Indicates the number of errors that are
0 533 215H UINT R 0 to 30
occurred currently occurring.
Main code of the (1st) error Indicates the code of the error that is
0 534 216H UINT R
code currently occurring.
Error codes are sorted in the following
Detailed code of the (1st) error
0 535 217H order: UINT R
code
(1) Errors are sorted in order of Error,
... ... ... ... Alert, and Info, starting from the ... ...
first error.
Main code of the (30th) error 0 to 65535
0 592 250H (2) Errors are sorted by error UINT R
code category in the order that they
occurred.
The high byte represents the main code
Detailed code of the (30th)
0 593 251H while the low byte represents the UINT R
error code
detailed code. "Alert/Error list"
(page A-7)
Communication output [0:00] bit 0: Communication output bit
0 594 252H WORD R
to [0:15] 0
Indicates the output status of the
bit 1: Communication output bit
0 ... ... ... communication outputs. ... ...
1
When a communication output is turned
...
Communication output [3:00] ON, the corresponding bit is turned ON.
0 597 255H WORD R bit 15: Communication output
to [3:15]
bit 15
bit 0 to 3: GC-Link port A
connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 4 to 7: GC-Link port A error
status
0000: No error
0 598 256H GC-Link port status Indicates the GC-Link port status. WORD R
0001: Communication error
bit 8 to 11: GC-Link port B 16
connection status
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 12 to 15: GC-Link port B
error status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
0: Not connected
1: Main unit only
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the number of GL-R units
0 768 300H UINT R 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port A.
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub
unit 2
0 769 301H System reserved
GC Series User’s Manual 16-19
16-5 Message Communication
Instance Bit
Attribute ID Data
ID Item Details Attribute Value address
type
DEC DEC HEX availability
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
0 770 302H UINT R
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1: Type F
0 771 303H UINT R
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port A. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
0 772 304H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port A GL-R
0 773 305H Number of optical axes of the UINT R 0 to 127
main unit
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the number of optical axes of
0 774 306H Number of optical axes of sub the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port UINT R 0 to 127
unit 1 A.
GC-Link port A GL-R
0 775 307H Number of optical axes of sub UINT R 0 to 127
unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of the
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R GL-R (receiver) connected to the GC-
bit 1: Switch 2
0 776 308H Main controller setting switch Link port A. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned ON, the
bit 5: Switch 6
corresponding bit is turned ON.
0 777 309H System reserved
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
0 778 30AH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
0 779 30BH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
0 ... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
0 841 349H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
16 0 842 34AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1,
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis Indicates the received-light-amount of
WORD R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC-Link port A GL-R each optical axis of the GL-R connected
to the GC-Link port A. bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
0 843 34BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
1, 3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis The received-light-amount range is 0 to
63.
0 ... ... ... The high byte of the 127th optical axis is ... ...
always 0.
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
0 905 389H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
0 906 38AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
0 907 38BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
0 ... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
0 969 3C9H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis
16-20 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Instance Bit
Attribute ID Data
ID Item Details Attribute Value address
type
DEC DEC HEX availability
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
0 970 3CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R 2nd optical axis
optical axis [15:0] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of
the 16th optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information of bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
each optical axis of the GL-R connected 17th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R to the GC-Link port A. bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
0 971 3CBH ON/OFF information of each A sub unit is placed with the bits WORD R 18th optical axis
optical axis [31:16] following the optical axis of the last unit. ...
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an bit 15: ON/OFF information of
optical axis configured with fixed the 32nd optical axis
0 ... ... ... blanking. ... ...
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
225th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
0 984 3D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R 226th optical axis
optical axis [239:224] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of
the 240th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL-R 0: No error
0 985 3D9H WORD R
Error status connected to the GC-Link port A. 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the OSSD output status of the 0: OFF
0 986 3DAH WORD R
OSSD output status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A. 1: ON
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the enablement status of the
0: Disabled
0 987 3DBH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Enabled
alert enablement status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection status of the
0: No alert
0 988 3DCH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Alert occurring
alert detection status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the detection threshold of the
GC-Link port A GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert of the
0 989 3DDH Received-light-amount decrease UINT R 0 to 100
GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A in
alert detection threshold
percentage.
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port A GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert of 1: 5 sec
0 990 3DEH Received-light-amount UINT R
the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port 2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time
0 1024 400H
GC-Link port A GS
A.
Indicates the number of GS/GS-M units
UINT R
3: 5 min
0 to 16
16
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port A.
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
bit 0 to 2: Model information
000: GS-10
GC-Link port A GS 001: GS-50
0 1025 401H WORD R
Model information (1st unit) 011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to
0)
GC-Link port A GS bit 4 to 5: Indicator control
0 1026 402H Indicates the model information of the WORD R
Model information (2nd unit) mode
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
00: Normal operation
port A.
(Default)
01: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... ...
10: OFF when GS is closed
(locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
GC-Link port A GS bit 6: Coding level settings
0 1040 410H WORD R
Model information (16th unit) 0: Low (multi operation)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
GC Series User’s Manual 16-21
16-5 Message Communication
Instance Bit
Attribute ID Data
ID Item Details Attribute Value address
type
DEC DEC HEX availability
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and lock 1: ON
GC-Link port A GS
0 1041 411H control status of the GS/GS-M WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status
connected to the GC-Link port A. 0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the
1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the
Indicates the open/close state of each 2nd unit
GC-Link port A GS
0 1042 412H GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link WORD R 0: Open
Open/close state
port A. 1: Close
...
bit 15: Open/close state of the
16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
Indicates the lock status of each GS/
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port A GS GS-M connected to the GC-Link port A.
0 1043 413H WORD R 1: Locked
Lock status This is always 0 for the non-contact
...
type.
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th
unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
GC-Link port A GS 0: Open
0 1044 414H WORD R
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port A GS 1: Locked
0 1045 415H Indicates the detailed information of the WORD R
2nd unit status bit 2: Red LED display status
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
0: OFF
port A.
1: ON
0 ... ... ... ... ... bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
1: ON
16 0 1059 423H
GC-Link port A GS
16th unit status
WORD R
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
0: Not connected
1: Main unit only
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the number of GL-R units
0 1280 500H UINT R 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port B.
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub
unit 2
0 1281 501H System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
0 1282 502H UINT R
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1: Type F
0 1283 503H UINT R
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port B. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
0 1284 504H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
16-22 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Instance Bit
Attribute ID Data
ID Item Details Attribute Value address
type
DEC DEC HEX availability
GC-Link port B GL-R
0 1285 505H Number of optical axes of the UINT R 0 to 127
main unit
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the number of optical axes of
0 1286 506H Number of optical axes of sub the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port UINT R 0 to 127
unit 1 B.
GC-Link port B GL-R
0 1287 507H Number of optical axes of sub UINT R 0 to 127
unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of the
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R GL-R (receiver) connected to the GC-
bit 1: Switch 2
0 1288 508H Main controller setting switch Link port B. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned ON, the
bit 5: Switch 6
corresponding bit is turned ON.
0 1289 509H System reserved
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Main bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
0 1290 50AH WORD R
unit, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Main bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
0 1291 50BH WORD R
unit, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis
0 ... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
0 1353 549H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
0 1354 54AH WORD R
unit 1, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis Indicates the received-light-amount of
GC-Link port B GL-R each optical axis of the GL-R connected
Received-light-amount, Sub to the GC-Link port B. bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
0 1355 54BH The received-light-amount range is 0 to WORD R
unit 1, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis 63.
The high byte of the 127th optical axis is
0 ... ... ... always 0. ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
0 1417 589H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
unit 1, 127th optical axis
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
16
GC-Link port B GL-R
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
0 1418 58AH WORD R
unit 2, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
0 1419 58BH WORD R
unit 2, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis
0 ... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
0 1481 5C9H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis
GC Series User’s Manual 16-23
16-5 Message Communication
Instance Bit
Attribute ID Data
ID Item Details Attribute Value address
type
DEC DEC HEX availability
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
1st optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
0 1482 5CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R 2nd optical axis
optical axis [15:0] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of
the 16th optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information of bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
each optical axis of the GL-R connected 17th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R to the GC-Link port B. bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
0 1483 5CBH ON/OFF information of each A sub unit is placed with the bits WORD R 18th optical axis
optical axis [31:16] following the optical axis of the last unit. ...
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an bit 15: ON/OFF information of
optical axis configured with fixed the 32nd optical axis
0 ... ... ... blanking. ... ... ...
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
225th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
0 1496 5D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R 226th optical axis
optical axis [239:224] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of
the 240th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL-R 0: No error
0 1497 5D9H WORD R
Error status connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the OSSD output status of the 0: OFF
0 1498 5DAH WORD R
OSSD output status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: ON
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the enablement status of the
0: Disabled
0 1499 5DBH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Enabled
alert enablement status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection status of the
0: No alert
0 1500 5DCH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Alert occurring
alert detection status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection threshold of the
Received-light-amount received-light-amount decrease alert of
0 1501 5DDH UINT R 0 to 100
decrease alert detection the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port
threshold B in percentage.
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port B GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert of 1: 5 sec
0 1502 5DEH Received-light-amount UINT R
the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port 2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time
16 0 1536 600H
GC-Link port B GS
B.
Indicates the number of GS/GS-M units
UINT R
3: 5 min
0 to 16
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port B.
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
bit 0 to 2: Model information
000: GS-10
GC-Link port B GS 001: GS-50
0 1537 601H WORD R
Model information (1st unit) 011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to
0)
GC-Link port B GS bit 4 to 5: Indicator control
0 1538 602H Indicates the model information of the WORD R
Model information (2nd unit) mode
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
00: Normal operation
port B.
(Default)
01: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... ...
10: OFF when GS is closed
(locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
GC-Link port B GS bit 6: Coding level settings
0 1552 610H WORD R
Model information (16th unit) 0: Low (multi operation)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
16-24 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Instance Bit
Attribute ID Data
ID Item Details Attribute Value address
type
DEC DEC HEX availability
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and lock 1: ON
GC-Link port B GS
0 1553 611H control status of the GS/GS-M WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status
connected to the GC-Link port B. 0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the
1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the
Indicates the open/close state of each 2nd unit
GC-Link port B GS
0 1554 612H GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link WORD R 0: Open
Open/close state
port B. 1: Close
...
bit 15: Open/close state of the
16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
Indicates the lock status of each GS/
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port B GS GS-M connected to the GC-Link port B.
0 1555 613H WORD R 1: Locked
Lock status This is always 0 for the non-contact
...
type.
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th
unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
GC-Link port B GS 0: Open
0 1556 614H WORD R
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port B GS 1: Locked
0 1557 615H Indicates the detailed information of the WORD R
2nd unit status bit 2: Red LED display status
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
0: OFF
port B.
1: ON
0 ... ... ... ... ...
bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port B GS 1: ON
0 1571 623H
16th unit status
WORD R
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Indicates the project name of the
0 1792 700H Project name STRING R
configuration file (UTF-16).
Indicates the configuration CRC of the
0 1857 741H Configuration CRC STRING R
configuration file (UTF-16).
Indicates the date and time of transfer
0 1866 74AH Date and time of transfer STRING R
of the configuration file (UTF-16).
GC Series User’s Manual 16-25
16-5 Message Communication
Instance Bit
Attribute ID Data
ID Item Details Attribute Value address
type
DEC DEC HEX availability
0 2048 800H Input status (GC-Link port) WORD R
0 2049 801H Input status (main controller) WORD R
Input status (1st expansion
0 2050 802H WORD R
unit)
0 ... ... ... ... ...
Input status (10th expansion
0 2059 80BH WORD R
unit)
Input status (1st remote I/O
0 2060 80CH WORD R
module)
0 ... ... ... ... ...
Input status (4th remote I/O
0 2063 80FH WORD R
module) Indicates the input/output status of each
0 2064 810H Output status (GC-Link port) unit.* 1 WORD R
0 2065 811H Output status (main controller) WORD R
Output status (1st expansion
0 2066 812H WORD R
unit)
0 ... ... ... ... ...
Output status (10th expansion
0 2075 81BH WORD R
unit)
Output status (1st remote I/O
0 2076 81CH WORD R
module)
0 ... ... ... ... ...
Output status (4th remote I/O
0 2079 81FH WORD R
module)
Indicates the number of blocks used by
0 2304 900H Number of used blocks UINT R 0 to 500
the program.
Block output status (Block ID
0 2305 901H WORD R
1)
Indicates the output status of each
0 ... ... ... ... ...
block used by the program.* 2
Block output status (Block ID
0 2804 AF4H WORD R
500)
0 2816 B00H Number of error histories Indicates the number of error histories. UINT R 0 to 100
1st error history, Error code, Indicates the error code of the 1st error
16 0 2817 B01H
Main code history.
Error histories are sorted in newest-first
UINT R 0 to 99
1st error history, Error code,
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
0 2818 B02H chronological order. "Alert/Error UINT R 0 to 9999
Detailed code list" (page A-7)
Indicates the time elapsed since the
1st error history, Operation
0 2819 B03H start of the GC Series when the error DWORD R 0 to FFFFFFFFH
time on error
was detected in seconds.
0 ... ... ... ... ... ...
100th error history, Error code,
0 3213 C8DH UINT R 0 to 99
Main code Indicates the error code of the 100th
100th error history, Error code, error history.
0 3214 C8EH UINT R 0 to 9999
Detailed code
Indicates the time elapsed since the
100th error history, Operation
0 3215 C8FH start of the GC Series when the error DWORD R 0 to FFFFFFFFH
time on error
was detected in seconds.
*1 For the bit assignment of each unit, refer to "Input/output status assignment by unit" (page 16-35).
*2 Check the block ID in the GC Configurator report. For the bit assignment of each block, refer to "Output status assignment by
block" (page 16-37).
16-26 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Bit address
Instance
Attribute ID Corresponding word address
ID Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC DEC HEX
position
0 4096 1000H 0 [0:00] Bit R/W
Communication input
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R/W
[0:00] to [0:15] Indicates the status of the
0 4111 100FH 15 [0:15] communication inputs. Bit R/W
When a bit is turned ON, the 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... ... Bit R/W
corresponding 1: ON
0 4144 1030H 0 [3:00] communication input is Bit R/W
Communication input turned ON.
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R/W
[3:00] to [3:15]
0 4159 103FH 15 [3:15] Bit R/W
0: The unit is
Indicates the RUN state of stopped.
0 8512 2140H 0 RUN state Bit R
the GC. 1: The unit is
running.
GC operating state Indicates the abnormal state
of the GC.
0: Normal
0 8513 2141H 1 Abnormal state An abnormal state means Bit R
1: Abnormal
that at least one alert or error
is occurring.
0 9504 2520H 0 Communication output [0:00] Bit R
Communication output
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
[0:00] to [0:15] Indicates the output status of
0 9519 252FH 15 Communication output [0:15] the communication outputs. Bit R
When a communication 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... ... Bit R
output is turned ON, the 1: ON
0 9552 2550H 0 Communication output [3:00] corresponding bit is turned Bit R
Communication output ON.
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
[3:00] to [3:15]
0 9567 255FH 15 Communication output [3:15] Bit R
GC-Link port A GL-R
0 12416 3080H 0 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R
0 12417 3081H 1 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 2
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the setting switch
0 12418 3082H 2 Main controller setting switch status of the GL-R (receiver) Bit R
GC-Link port A GL-R
Main controller setting
settings, Switch 3
GC-Link port A GL-R
connected to the GC-Link
port A.
0: OFF
1: ON
16
switch settings When each switch is turned
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
0 12419 3083H 3 Main controller setting switch ON, the corresponding bit is Bit R
settings, Switch 4 turned ON.
GC-Link port A GL-R
0 12420 3084H 4 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 5
GC-Link port A GL-R
0 12421 3085H 5 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 6
GC Series User’s Manual 16-27
16-5 Message Communication
Instance
Attribute ID Corresponding word address
ID Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC DEC HEX
position
GC-Link port A GL-R
0 15520 3CA0H 0 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
optical axis, 1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
0 ... ... ON/OFF information of ... ... Bit R
each optical axis [15:0]
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the ON/OFF
0 15535 3CAFH 15 ON/OFF information of each information of each optical Bit R
optical axis, 16th optical axis axis of the GL-R connected
to the GC-Link port A.
0 ... ... ... ... ... Bit R
A sub unit is placed with the 0: OFF
GC-Link port A GL-R offset following the optical 1: ON
ON/OFF information of each axis of the last unit.
0 15744 3D80H 0 Bit R
optical axis, 225th optical The ON/OFF logic is inverted
axis for an optical axis configured
GC-Link port A GL-R
with fixed blanking.
0 ... ... ON/OFF information of ... ... Bit R
each optical axis [239:224]
GC-Link port A GL-R
ON/OFF information of each
0 15759 3D8FH 15 Bit R
optical axis, 240th optical
axis
Indicates the error status of 0: No error
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R
0 15760 3D90H 0 the GL-R connected to the Bit R 1: Error
Error status Error status
GC-Link port A. occurring
Indicates the OSSD output
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R 0: OFF
0 15776 3DA0H 0 status of the GL-R connected Bit R
OSSD output status OSSD output status 1: ON
to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the enablement
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R
status of the received-light-
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount 0: Disabled
0 15792 3DB0H 0 amount decrease alert of the Bit R
decrease alert enablement decrease alert enablement 1: Enabled
GL-R connected to the GC-
status status
Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection status of
0: No alert
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount the received-light-amount
0 15808 3DC0H 0 Bit R 1: Alert
decrease alert detection decrease alert detection decrease alert of the GL-R
occurring
status status connected to the GC-Link port A.
0 16400 4010H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model
001:GS-50
GC-Link port A GS information of the 1st GS/
0 16401 4011H 1 Bit R 011:GS-70
1st GS model information GS-M connected to the GC-
100:GS-M5/9
Link port A.
0 16402 4012H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
16 0 16403 4013H
GC-Link port A GS
3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
0 16404 4014H Model information (1st unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
0 16405 4015H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port A GS settings of the 1st GS/GS-M operation)
0 16406 4016H 6 Bit R
1st GS coding level settings connected to the GC-Link 1: High (unique
port A. operation)
0 ... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
0 16640 4100H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model
001:GS-50
GC-Link port A GS information of the 16th GS/
0 16641 4101H 1 Bit R 011:GS-70
16th GS model information GS-M connected to the
100:GS-M5/9
GC-Link port A.
0 16642 4102H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
0 16643 4103H GC-Link port A GS 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Model information (16th
0 16644 4104H 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
unit)
0 16645 4105H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port A GS settings of the 16th GS/GS-M operation)
0 16646 4106H 6 Bit R
16th GS coding level settings connected to the GC-Link 1: High (unique
port A. operation)
16-28 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Instance
Attribute ID Corresponding word address
ID Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC DEC HEX
position
Indicates the OSSD status of
GC-Link port A GS 0: OFF
0 16656 4110H 0 the GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
OSSD status 1: ON
the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GS
OSSD/lock control status Indicates the OSSD status
GC-Link port A GS and lock control status of the 0: Unlocked
0 16657 4111H 1 Bit R
Lock control status GS/GS-M connected to the 1: Locked
GC-Link port A.
Indicates the open/close
GC-Link port A 1st GS state of the 1st GS/GS-M 0: Open
0 16672 4120H 0 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link 1: Close
port A.
GC-Link port A GS
0 ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Open/close state
Indicates the open/close
GC-Link port A 16th GS state of the 16th GS/GS-M 0: Open
0 16687 412FH 15 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link 1: Close
port A.
Indicates the lock status of
the 1st GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Unlocked
0 16688 4130H 0 to the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
GC-Link port A GS
0 ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Lock status
Indicates the lock status of
the 16th GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Unlocked
0 16703 413FH 15 to the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
Indicates the open/close
GC-Link port A 1st GS state of the 1st GS/GS-M 0: Open
0 16704 4140H 0 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link 1: Close
port A.
Indicates the lock status of
the 1st GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Unlocked
0 16705 4141H 1 to the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port A GS contact type.
1st unit status
Indicates the red LED display
0 16706 4142H 2
GC-Link port A 1st GS
Red LED display status
status of the 1st GS/GS-M
connected to the GC-Link
port A.
Bit R
0: OFF
1: ON 16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port A 1st GS display status of the 1st GS/ 0: OFF
0 16707 4143H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port A.
0 ... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
GC Series User’s Manual 16-29
16-5 Message Communication
Instance
Attribute ID Corresponding word address
ID Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC DEC HEX
position
Indicates the open/close
GC-Link port A 16th GS state of the 16th GS/GS-M 0: Open
0 16944 4230H 0 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link 1: Close
port A.
Indicates the lock status of
the 16th GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Unlocked
0 16945 4231H 1 to the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port A GS contact type.
16th unit status
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port A 16th GS status of the 16th GS/GS-M 0: OFF
0 16946 4232H 2 Bit R
Red LED display status connected to the GC-Link 1: ON
port A.
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port A 16th GS display status of the 16th GS/ 0: OFF
0 16947 4233H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port B GL-R
0 20608 5080H 0 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R
0 20609 5081H 1 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 2
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the setting switch
0 20610 5082H 2 Main controller setting switch status of the GL-R (receiver) Bit R
GC-Link port B GL-R settings, Switch 3 connected to the GC-Link
0: OFF
Main controller setting port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: ON
switch settings When each switch is turned
0 20611 5083H 3 Main controller setting switch ON, the corresponding bit is Bit R
settings, Switch 4 turned ON.
GC-Link port B GL-R
0 20612 5084H 4 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 5
GC-Link port B GL-R
0 20613 5085H 5 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 6
GC-Link port B GL-R
0 23712 5CA0H 0 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
16 0 ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
ON/OFF information of ...
optical axis, 1st optical axis
... Bit R
each optical axis [15:0]
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the ON/OFF
0 23727 5CAFH 15 ON/OFF information of each information of each optical Bit R
optical axis, 16th optical axis axis of the GL-R connected
to the GC-Link port B.
0 ... ... ... ... ... Bit R
A sub unit is placed with the 0: OFF
GC-Link port B GL-R offset following the optical 1: ON
ON/OFF information of each axis of the last unit.
0 23936 5D80H 0 Bit R
optical axis, 225th optical The ON/OFF logic is inverted
axis for an optical axis configured
GC-Link port B GL-R
with fixed blanking.
0 ... ... ON/OFF information of ... ... Bit R
each optical axis [239:224]
GC-Link port B GL-R
ON/OFF information of each
0 23951 5D8FH 15 Bit R
optical axis, 240th optical
axis
Indicates the error status of 0: No error
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R
0 23952 5D90H 0 the GL-R connected to the Bit R 1: Error
Error status Error status
GC-Link port B. occurring
Indicates the OSSD output
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R 0: OFF
0 23968 5DA0H 0 status of the GL-R connected Bit R
OSSD output status OSSD output status 1: ON
to the GC-Link port B.
16-30 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Instance
Attribute ID Corresponding word address
ID Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC DEC HEX
position
Indicates the enablement
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R
status of the received-light-
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount 0: Disabled
0 23984 5DB0H 0 amount decrease alert of the Bit R
decrease alert enablement decrease alert enablement 1: Enabled
GL-R connected to the GC-
status status
Link port B.
Indicates the detection status
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R
of the received-light-amount 0: No alert
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount
0 24000 5DC0H 0 decrease alert of the GL-R Bit R 1: Alert
decrease alert detection decrease alert detection
connected to the GC-Link occurring
status status
port B.
0 24592 6010H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information 001:GS-50
GC-Link port B GS
0 24593 6011H 1 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected to Bit R 011:GS-70
1st GS model information
the GC-Link port B. 100:GS-M5/9
0 24594 6012H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
0 24595 6013H 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
GC-Link port B GS
0 24596 6014H Model information (1st unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
0 24597 6015H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port B GS settings of the 1st GS/GS-M operation)
0 24598 6016H 6 Bit R
1st GS coding level settings connected to the GC-Link 1: High (unique
port B. operation)
0 ... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
0 24832 6100H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information 001:GS-50
GC-Link port B GS
0 24833 6101H 1 of the 16th GS/GS-M connected Bit R 011:GS-70
16th GS model information
to the GC-Link port B. 100:GS-M5/9
0 24834 6102H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
0 24835 6103H GC-Link port B GS 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Model information (16th
0 24836 6104H 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
unit)
0 24837 6105H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port B GS settings of the 16th GS/GS-M operation)
0 24838 6106H 6 Bit R
16th GS coding level settings connected to the GC-Link 1: High (unique
port B. operation)
Indicates the OSSD status of
0 24848 6110H 0
GC-Link port B GS
OSSD status
the GS connected to the GC-
Link port B.
Bit R
0: OFF
1: ON 16
GC-Link port B GS
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
OSSD/lock control status Indicates the lock control
GC-Link port B GS 0: Unlocked
0 24849 6111H 1 status of the GS connected to Bit R
Lock control status 1: Locked
the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the open/close
GC-Link port B 1st GS state of the 1st GS/GS-M 0: Open
0 24864 6120H 0 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link 1: Close
port B.
GC-Link port B GS
0 ... ... Open/close state ... ... ... Bit R ...
Indicates the open/close state of
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Open
0 24879 612FH 15 the 16th GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
the GC-Link port B.
GC Series User’s Manual 16-31
16-5 Message Communication
Instance
Attribute ID Corresponding word address
ID Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC DEC HEX
position
Indicates the lock status of
the 1st GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Unlocked
0 24880 6130H 0 to the GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
GC-Link port B GS
0 ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Lock status
Indicates the lock status of
the 16th GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Unlocked
0 24895 613FH 15 to the GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
Indicates the open/close
GC-Link port B 1st GS state of the 1st GS/GS-M 0: Open
0 24896 6140H 0 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link 1: Close
port B.
Indicates the lock status of
the 1st GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Unlocked
0 24897 6141H 1 to the GC-Link port B. Bit R
GC-Link port B GS Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
1st unit status contact type.
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: OFF
0 24898 6142H 2 status of the 1st GS/GS-M Bit R
Red LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the green LED display
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: OFF
0 24899 6143H 3 status of the 1st GS/GS-M Bit R
Green LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port B.
0 ... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Indicates the open/close
GC-Link port B 16th GS state of the 16th GS/GS-M 0: Open
0 25136 6230H 0 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link 1: Close
port B.
Indicates the lock status of
the 16th GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Unlocked
0 25137 6231H 1 to the GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port B GS contact type.
16th unit status
Indicates the red LED display
16 0 25138 6232H 2
GC-Link port B 16th GS
Red LED display status
status of the 16th GS/GS-M
connected to the GC-Link
port B.
Bit R
0: OFF
1: ON
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port B 16th GS display status of the 16th GS/ 0: OFF
0 25139 6233H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port B.
Input status (GC-Link port)
0 32768 8000H 0 Bit R
bit 0
Indicates the input status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... Input status (GC-Link port) ... ... Bit R
the GC-Link port.* 1 1: ON
Input status (GC-Link port)
0 32783 800FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
Input status (main controller)
0 32784 8010H 0 Bit R
bit 0
Input status (main Displays the input status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
controller) the main controller.* 1 1: ON
Input status (main controller)
0 32799 801FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
16-32 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Instance
Attribute ID Corresponding word address
ID Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC DEC HEX
position
Input status (1st expansion
0 32800 8020H 0 Bit R
unit) bit 0
Input status (1st expansion Indicates the input status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
unit) the 1st expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Input status (1st expansion
0 32815 802FH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
0 ... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Input status (10th expansion
0 32944 80B0H 0 Bit R
unit) bit 0
Input status (10th Indicates the input status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) the 10th expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Input status (10th expansion
0 32959 80BFH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
Input status (1st remote I/O
0 32960 80C0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Input status (1st remote I/O Indicates the input status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
module) the 1st remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Input status (1st remote I/O
0 32975 80CFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
0 ... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Input status (4th remote I/O
0 33008 80F0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Input status (4th remote I/O Indicates the input status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
module) the 4th remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Input status (4th remote I/O
0 33023 80FFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
Output status (GC-Link port)
0 33024 8100H 0 Bit R
bit 0
Output status (GC-Link Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
port) the GC-Link port.* 1 1: ON
Output status (GC-Link port)
0 33039 810FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
Output status (main
0 33040 8110H 0 Bit R
controller) bit 0
Output status (main Displays the output status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
controller) the main controller.* 1 1: ON
Output status (main
0 33055 811FH 15 Bit R
controller) bit 15
0 33056 8120H 0
Output status (1st expansion
unit) bit 0
Bit R 16
Output status (1st Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) the 1st expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Output status (1st expansion
0 33071 812FH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
0 ... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Output status (10th
0 33200 81B0H 0 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 0
Output status (10th Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) the 10th expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Output status (10th
0 33215 81BFH 15 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 15
Output status (1st remote I/O
0 33216 81C0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Output status (1st remote I/ Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
O module) the 1st remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Output status (1st remote I/O
0 33231 81CFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
0 ... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
GC Series User’s Manual 16-33
16-5 Message Communication
Instance
Attribute ID Corresponding word address
ID Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC DEC HEX
position
Output status (4th remote I/O
0 33264 81F0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Output status (4th remote I/ Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
O module) the 4th remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Output status (4th remote I/O
0 33279 81FFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
Block output status (Block ID
0 36880 9010H 0 Bit R
1) bit 0
Block output status (Block Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
ID 1) the Block ID 1 block.* 2 1: ON
Block output status (Block ID
0 36895 901FH 15 Bit R
1) bit 15
0 ... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Block output status (Block ID
0 44864 AF40H 0 Bit R
500) bit 0
Block output status (Block Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
0 ... ... ... ... Bit R
ID 500) the Block ID 500 block.* 2 1: ON
Block output status (Block ID
0 44879 AF4FH 15 Bit R
500) bit 15
*1 For the bit assignment of each unit, refer to "Input/output status assignment by unit" (page 16-35).
*2 Check the block ID in the GC Configurator report. For the bit assignment of each block, refer to "Output status assignment by
block" (page 16-37).
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
16-34 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Input/output status assignment by unit
Input status (GC-Link port)
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Port B Port A Port B Port A
Reserved
Ai Ai Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-1000R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-S16
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (nth remote I/O module)
GC-R45/R48
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved
CN4
Ai
CN3
Ai
CN2
Ai
CN1
Ai Si1
CN4
Si0 Si1
CN3
Si0 Si1
CN2
Si0 Si1
CN1
Si0
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (GC-Link port)
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Port B Port A
Reserved
Ao1 Ao0 Ao1 Ao0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC Series User’s Manual 16-35
16-5 Message Communication
Output status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 So5 So4 So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-1000R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 SRo So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-S1R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved SRo
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-A16
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Ao15 Ao14 Ao13 Ao12 Ao11 Ao10 Ao9 Ao8 Ao7 Ao6 Ao5 Ao4 Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (nth remote I/O module)
GC-R45
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
Ao Ao Ao Ao
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
16 GC-R48
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
So So So So
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
16-36 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Output status assignment by block
Block name Bit assignment
Emergency stop switch
Limit switch
Interlock switch
Guard locking switch
GS/GS-M Series [KEYENCE]
Light curtain
GL-R Series [KEYENCE]
GL-S Series [KEYENCE]
Safety input devices Laser scanner bit 0: Output
SZ-V Series [KEYENCE]
SZ Series [KEYENCE]
Rope pull switch
Safety mat
Input devices
Two hand control device
Enabling device
Other safety switch
Other safety input
Reset switch bit 0: Output
bit 0: Mode Output 1
Mode selecting switch bit 1: Mode Output 2
bit 2: Error
EDM input
Other input devices
Muting input
Safety plug
bit 0: Output
Hold-to-run switch
Other switch
Other input
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 16-37
16-5 Message Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety 1 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
S-OUT bit 6: EDM2 Error
S-OUT EDM enabled bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety outputs Safety 2 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
Output devices
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output)
bit 3: Error Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output) EDM enabled
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
Other outputs AUX-OUT bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
Enablement code disabled bit 0: Output
Reset input (COM) bit 0: Output
Communication input
Other input (COM) Enablement code enabled bit1: Ready
Communications bit 2: Error
bit 0: Output
Communication output Communication output bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
Register (Load)
Register bit 0: Output
Register (Store)
GS closed state
bit 0: Output
GS locked state
16 Expansion blocks None
GS indicator control output
bit 0: Red
bit 1: Green
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
bit 2: Output Error
GL-R received-light-amount decrease alert
AUX-IN
Other input blocks bit 0: Output
OSSD 3/4
IN
16-38 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
Lock control 1 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
Unlock output
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
Lock control 2 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
bit 0: Red
Indicator control output bit 1: Green
bit 2: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
Independent bank
bit 2: Input Mismatch
bit 3: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
Other output blocks bit 3: Bank Output b
Single
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
bit 6: Input Mismatch
bit 7: Output Error
Bank switching output
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
bit 3: Bank Output b
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
Binary
bit 6: Bank Output D
bit 7: Bank Output d
bit 8: Bank Output E
bit 9: Bank Output e
bit 10: Input Mismatch
bit 11: Output Error
bit 0: Output
OUT bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error 16
AND
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
AND (6-10 inputs)
OR
NOT
NAND
Function blocks Logic bit 0: Output
NOR
XOR
SR Flip-Flop (Set has priority)
RS Flip-Flop (Reset has priority)
JK Flip-Flop
GC Series User’s Manual 16-39
16-5 Message Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
Reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
Reset (with AND)
bit 1: Reset Required
Reset bit 0: Output
Dual reset bit 1: Reset Required1
bit 2: Reset Required2
bit 0: Output
Existence detection reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Sequential muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Parallel muting
bit 3: Override Active
Function blocks bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting Cross-muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting for exit
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
16 Position detection muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
bit 5: Timeout
16-40 GC Series User’s Manual
16-5 Message Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Master ON Ready
Master ON
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Unlock Output
Unlock control
bit 1: Unlock Required
bit 0: Output
Bypass
bit 1: Bypass Active
bit 0: Output
Application Control guard
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Break Required
PSDI control bit 3: Reset Required
bit 4: Normal Operation
bit 5: PSDI Error
bit 6: PSDI Timeout
bit 0: Input Bypass
bit 1: Output Enable
Manual mode control (MMC)
bit 2: Restart Required
bit 3: Manual Mode Active
Manual mode
Function blocks MMC input bypass bit 0: Output
MMC input bypass_ bit 0: Output
MMC output enable bit 0: Output
bit 0: Output
OFF-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
bit 0: Output
ON-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
Pulse generator bit 0: Output
bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
Up-down counter
bit 1: Reached Zero
Timers / Counters bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
bit 1: Reached Zero
bit 2: Output bit 0
bit 3: Output bit 1
bit 4: Output bit 2
Up-down counter (with binary output)
bit 5: Output bit 3
bit 6: Output bit 4
16
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
bit 7: Output bit 5
bit 8: Output bit 6
bit 9: Output bit 7
GC Series User’s Manual 16-41
16-5 Message Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Rising Edge
Edge detection
bit 1: Falling Edge
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Output3
bit 3: Output4
Binary decoder
bit 4: Output5
bit 5: Output6
bit 6: Output7
bit 7: Output8
bit 0: Output bit 0
bit 1: Output bit 1
Binary encoder
bit 2: Output bit 2
Function blocks Others
bit 3: Error
bit 0: Mode Output1
bit 1: Mode Output2
bit 2: Mode Output3
bit 3: Mode Output4
bit 4: Mode Output5
Mode changing control
bit 5: Mode Output6
bit 6: Mode Output7
bit 7: Mode Output8
bit 8: Mode Error
bit 9: Trigger Required
Selector (2 inputs) bit 0: Output
Selector (4 inputs) bit 1: Mode Error
Always ON
Always OFF
1 scan ON upon start-up
System Information
System blocks None bit 0: Output
Block information
Jump (Load)
Jump (Store)
Event history trigger
16 Other functions Recipe block AND (with connection constraint function) bit 0: Output
EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function
16-42 GC Series User’s Manual
17
PROFINET
Communication
Function
This chapter describes the settings and functions of the PROFINET communication function.
17-1 Overview of the PROFINET Communication Function ...................................page 17-2
17-2 PROFINET Communication Specifications......................................................page 17-3
17-3 PROFINET Communication Settings ................................................................page 17-4
17-4 Cyclic Communication.......................................................................................page 17-6
PROFINET Communication Function
17-5 Acyclic Communication...................................................................................page 17-20
17-6 Diagnostic Function .........................................................................................page 17-38
17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-1
Overview of the PROFINET
17-1 Communication Function
This section describes the PROFINET communication function.
All of the data received from the communication of the EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET, UDP, Modbus/TCP, or
DANGER MC protocol cannot be used for the safety related part of the control system. When used incorrectly,
there is a possibility that the operator of the device may be threatened with major injury or even death.
Point The Ethernet communication function is available only for the main controller "GC-1000".
Overview of the PROFINET Communication Function
The GC Series functions as a PROFINET IO device, allowing you to perform the following:
Cyclic Acyclic
Item
communication communication
Write a communication input. --
Write an enablement code. --
Write a character string that is stored into the history function. --
Read out a communication output.
Read out an error code.
Read out the unit configuration and model information.
Read out the received-light-amount and ON/OFF state of the GL-R Series connected to a
PROFINET Communication Function
GC-Link port.
Read out the door open/close state and ON/OFF state of the GS/GS-M Series connected
to a GC-Link port.
Read out the ON/OFF status of the main controller, expansion unit, and remote I/O module. --
Read out the block status. --
Read out the error history. --
17
17-2 GC Series User’s Manual
PROFINET Communication
17-2 Specifications
PROFINET Communication Specifications for the GC Series
Category Item Details
Ethernet specifications Communication media 100BASE-TX full-duplex
Basic specifications Applicable network PROFINET IO communication
Supported function Cyclic communication (data I/O communication)
Acyclic communication (record data communication)
Conformance class Conformance class B
GSDML version Version 2.35
Conformance test version Based on version 2.35
Applicable protocol LLDP, SNMP, DCP
Netload Class 3
Cyclic communication Update time 1 to 512 ms
specifications
PROFINET Communication Function
17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-3
17-3 PROFINET Communication Settings
PROFINET Communication Settings
GC Configurator settings
[Setting procedure]
Basic Ethernet settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and configure the basic Ethernet settings. "15-2 GC Configurator
Settings" (page 15-3)
PROFINET settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [PROFINET] to the screen to register.
Detailed settings
PROFINET Communication Function
Detailed settings
17
Item Details
Diagnostics Set the error/alert and information items to be notified by the PROFINET Diagnostics function.
17-4 GC Series User’s Manual
17-3 PROFINET Communication Settings
Registering communication inputs and communication outputs
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [Communication input] and [Communication output] to
the screen to register.
"15-2 GC Configurator Settings" (page 15-3)
Programming
Perform programming using the communication blocks.
" How to Use a Communication Block" (page 15-9)
PROFINET IO controller settings
Set the IP address and configure the PROFINET communication settings as follows:
[Setting procedure]
1 Register the GSDML file.
The GC Series functions which can be used with the PROFINET IO communication are defined in the GSDML file. If
you set the GC Series for the first time using the PROFINET IO controller configuration software, install the GC Series
GSDML file on the configuration software.
The GC Series GSDML file can be downloaded from the KEYENCE website.
www.keyence.com/glb
2 Add the GC Series to the PROFINET IO system.
Installing the GSDML file on the configuration software adds the GC Series to the hardware catalog of the configuration
PROFINET Communication Function
software. Select the GC Series from the hardware catalog and add it to the PROFINET IO system.
3 Enter a device name.
Set a device name for the added GC Series.
4 Assign a communication module.
Select a communication module to use from the hardware catalog and assign it to the GC Series slot. For the
communication modules which can be assigned to each slot, refer to "17-4 Cyclic Communication" (page 17-6).
17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-5
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Cyclic communication is a function to exchange data between a PLC (PROFINET IO controller) and the GC Series at a
fixed cycle. Programming on the PLC side is not necessary to execute cyclic communication.
For what you can do with cyclic communication, refer to "17-1 Overview of the PROFINET Communication Function"
(page 17-2).
Communication Module List
Available communication modules
The following communication module are available for the GC Series cyclic communication.
Communication module name Input Output Assignable slot number
Communication input/output 8 bytes 60 bytes Slot 1
GC-1000 Status Data 160 bytes 0 byte Slot 2
GL-R (GC-Link Port A) 425 bytes 0 byte Slot 3
GS (GC-Link Port A) 38 bytes 0 byte Slot 3
GL-R (GC-Link Port B) 425 bytes 0 byte Slot 4
GS (GC-Link Port B) 38 bytes 0 byte Slot 4
Communication Module: Communication Input/Output
PROFINET Communication Function
Input (from the GC Series to the PROFINET IO controller)
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
bit0: Communication output bit 0
Communication output [0:00] to 1 byte bit1: Communication output bit 1
0
[0:07] BYTE ...
bit7: Communication output bit 7
bit0: Communication output bit 8
Communication output [0:08] to 1 byte bit1: Communication output bit 9
1
[0:15] BYTE ...
17 Indicates the output status of the
communication outputs.
bit7: Communication output bit 15
... When a communication output is
turned ON, the corresponding bit
bit0: Communication output bit 0
is turned ON.
Communication output [3:00] to 1 byte bit1: Communication output bit 1
6
[3:07] BYTE ...
bit7: Communication output bit 7
bit0: Communication output bit 8
Communication output [3:08] to 1 byte bit1: Communication output bit 9
7
[3:15] BYTE ...
bit7: Communication output bit 15
17-6 GC Series User’s Manual
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Output (from the PROFINET IO controller to the GC Series)
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
bit0: Communication input bit 0
Communication input [0:00] to 1 byte bit1: Communication input bit 1
0
[0:07] BYTE ...
bit7: Communication input bit 7
bit0: Communication input bit 8
Communication input [0:08] to 1 byte bit1: Communication input bit 9
1
[0:15] Indicates the input status of the BYTE ...
communication inputs. bit7: Communication input bit 15
... When a communication input is
turned ON, the corresponding bit
bit0: Communication input bit 0
is turned ON.
Communication input [3:00] to 1 byte bit1: Communication input bit 1
6
[3:07] BYTE ...
bit7: Communication input bit 7
bit0: Communication input bit 8
Communication input [3:08] to 1 byte bit1: Communication input bit 9
7
[3:15] BYTE ...
bit7: Communication input bit 15
Enablement code of
8
communication input [0:00]
PROFINET Communication Function
Enablement code of
9 Indicates the status of the 1 byte
communication input [0:01] 00H to FFH
enablement code. USINT
...
Enablement code of
37
communication input [1:13]
38 System reserved
39 System reserved
1 byte
40 PLC text, 1st character
CHAR
Displays the status of the PLC
1 byte
41 PLC text, 2nd character text. The ASCII code format is
CHAR
used for setting. The end terminal
... is NULL (00H).
1 byte
17
59 PLC text, 20th character
CHAR
GC Series User’s Manual 17-7
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Communication Module: GC-1000 Operating State
Input (from the GC Series to the PROFINET IO controller)
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
Number of connected units Indicates the number of 1 byte
0 0 to 10
(expansion unit) connected expansion units. USINT
Number of connected units (remote Indicates the number of 1 byte
1 0 to 4
I/O module) connected remote I/O modules. USINT
Indicates the connected unit 1 byte 1: GC-1000
2 Model information (main controller)
model. USINT 2: GC-1000R
3 System reserved
3: GC-S84
Model information (1st expansion Indicates the connected unit 1 byte 4: GC-S16
4
unit) model. USINT 5: GC-S1R
6: GC-A16
Indicates the positional
Positional relationship to the GC- 1 byte 0: Unit positioned before the GC-B30
5 relationship between the
B30 (1st expansion unit) USINT 1: Unit positioned after the GC-B30
connected unit and the GC-B30.
...
PROFINET Communication Function
3: GC-S84
Model information (10th expansion Indicates the connected unit 1 byte 4: GC-S16
22
unit) model. USINT 5: GC-S1R
6: GC-A16
Indicates the positional
Positional relationship to the GC- 1 byte 0: Unit positioned before the GC-B30
23 relationship between the
B30 (10th expansion unit) USINT 1: Unit positioned after the GC-B30
connected unit and the GC-B30.
Model information (1st remote I/O Indicates the connected unit 1 byte 7: GC-R45
24
module) model. USINT 8: GC-R48
25 System reserved
Model information (2nd remote I/O Indicates the connected unit 1 byte 7: GC-R45
26
module) model. USINT 8: GC-R48
17 27 System reserved
...
Model information (4th remote I/O Indicates the connected unit 1 byte 7: GC-R45
30
module) model. USINT 8: GC-R48
31 System reserved
Indicates the time elapsed since
4 bytes
32 Operation time the start of the unit in units of 10 0 to 4294967295
UDINT
ms.
bit 0: RUN state
0: The unit is stopped.
1: The unit is running.
Indicates the operating state of the 1 byte bit 1: Abnormal state
36 GC operating state
GC. BYTE 0: Normal
1: Abnormal
* An abnormal state means that at
least one alert or error is occurring.
17-8 GC Series User’s Manual
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
Indicates the number of errors that 1 byte
37 Number of errors that occurred 0 to 30
are currently occurring. USINT
Indicates the main code of the 2 bytes
38 Main code of the (1st) error code
error that is currently occurring. UINT
Detailed code of the (1st) error Error codes are sorted in the 2 bytes
40
code following order: UINT
(1) Errors are sorted in order of
...
Error, Alert, and Info, starting
from the first error. 2 bytes
154 Main code of the (30th) error code
(2) Errors are sorted by error UINT
Detailed code of the (30th) error category in (1) in order that they 2 bytes
156
code occurred. UINT
1 byte bit 0 to 3: GC-Link connection status
158 GC-Link port status (port A)
BYTE 0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
Indicates the GC-Link port status. 0010: Connected
1 byte
159 GC-Link port status (port B) bit 4 to 7: GC-Link error status
BYTE
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
PROFINET Communication Function
17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-9
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Communication Module: GL-R (GC-Link Port A)
Input (from the GC Series to the PROFINET IO controller)
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
0: Not connected
Indicates the number of GL-R
GC-Link port A GL-R 1 byte 1: Main unit only
0 units connected to the GC-Link
Number of connected units USINT 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
port A.
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit 2
GC-Link port A GL-R 1 byte
1
Main unit type USINT 0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1 byte 1: Type F
2
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port A. USINT 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port A GL-R 1 byte
3
Sub unit 2 type USINT
GC-Link port A GL-R
1 byte
4 Number of optical axes of the main
USINT
unit
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the number of optical
1 byte
5 Number of optical axes of sub unit axes of the GL-R connected to the 0 to 127
USINT
1 GC-Link port A.
PROFINET Communication Function
GC-Link port A GL-R
1 byte
6 Number of optical axes of sub unit
USINT
2
Indicates the setting switch status
of the GL-R (receiver) connected bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R
to the GC-Link port A. 1 byte bit 1: Switch 2
7 Main controller setting switch
When each switch is turned ON, BYTE ...
settings
the corresponding bit is turned bit 5: Switch 6
ON.
17
17-10 GC Series User’s Manual
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
GC-Link port A GL-R
1 byte
8 Received-light-amount, Main unit,
USINT
1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
1 byte
9 Received-light-amount, Main unit,
USINT
2nd optical axis
...
GC-Link port A GL-R
1 byte
134 Received-light-amount, Main unit,
USINT
127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
1 byte
135 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1,
USINT
1st optical axis
Indicates the received-light-
GC-Link port A GL-R amount of each optical axis of the
1 byte
136 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, GL-R connected to the GC-Link
USINT 0 to 63
2nd optical axis port A.
... The received-light-amount range
is 0 to 63.
GC-Link port A GL-R
1 byte
261 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1,
USINT
127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
PROFINET Communication Function
1 byte
262 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2,
USINT
1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
1 byte
263 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2,
USINT
2nd optical axis
...
GC-Link port A GL-R
1 byte
388 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2,
USINT
127th optical axis
17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-11
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st
optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 2nd
1 byte
389 ON/OFF information of each optical optical axis
BYTE
axis [7:0] ...
bit 7: ON/OFF information of the 8th
optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information
bit0: ON/OFF information of the 9th
of each optical axis of the GL-R
optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A. bit1: ON/OFF information of the 10th
A sub unit is placed with the bits 1 byte
390 ON/OFF information of each optical optical axis
following the optical axis of the last BYTE
axis [15:8] ...
unit. bit7: ON/OFF information of the 16th
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for
optical axis
an optical axis configured with
... fixed blanking.
bit0: ON/OFF information of the 233th
optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit1: ON/OFF information of the 234th
1 byte
418 ON/OFF information of each optical optical axis
BYTE
axis [239:232] ...
Bit7: ON/OFF information of the 240th
optical axis
PROFINET Communication Function
Indicates the error status of the
GC-Link port A GL-R 1 byte 0: No error
419 GL-R connected to the GC-Link
Error status USINT 1: Error occurring
port A.
Indicates the OSSD output status
GC-Link port A GL-R 1 byte 0: OFF
420 of the GL-R connected to the GC-
OSSD output status USINT 1: ON
Link port A.
Indicates the enablement status of
GC-Link port A GL-R
the received-light-amount 1 byte 0: Disabled
421 Received-light-amount decrease
decrease alert of the GL-R USINT 1: Enabled
alert enablement status
connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the detection status of
GC-Link port A GL-R
the received-light-amount 1 byte 0: No alert
422 Received-light-amount decrease
decrease alert of the GL-R USINT 1: Alert occurring
17 alert detection status
connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the detection threshold
GC-Link port A GL-R
of the received-light-amount
Received-light-amount decrease 1 byte
423 decrease alert of the GL-R 0 to 100
alert detection threshold USINT
connected to the GC-Link port A in
percentage.
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port A GL-R
received-light-amount decrease 1 byte 1: 5 sec
424 Received-light-amount decrease
alert of the GL-R connected to the USINT 2: 30 sec
alert detection time
GC-Link port A. 3: 5 min
17-12 GC Series User’s Manual
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Communication Module: GS (GC-Link Port A)
Input (from the GC Series to the PROFINET IO controller)
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
Indicates the number of GS/GS-M
GC-Link port A GS 1 byte
0 units connected to the GC-Link 0 to 16
Number of connected units USINT
port A.
GC-Link port A GS 1 byte bit 0 to 2: Model information
1
Model information (1st unit) BYTE 000: GS-10
GC-Link port A GS 1 byte 001: GS-50
2 011: GS-70
Model information (2nd unit) BYTE
100: GS-M5/9
...
101: GS-ML5
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
Indicates the model information of
bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
the GS/GS-M connected to the
00: Normal operation (Default)
GC-Link port A.
01: OFF
GC-Link port A GS 1 byte 10: OFF when GS is closed
16
Model information (16th unit) BYTE (locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
bit 6: Coding level settings
PROFINET Communication Function
0: Low (multi operation)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 0: OSSD state
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and
GC-Link port A GS 1 byte 1: ON
17 lock control status of the GS/GS-M
OSSD/lock control status BYTE bit 1: Lock control information
connected to the GC-Link port A.
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
GC-Link port A GS
1 byte 0: Open
18 Open/close state
(1st to 8th units)
BYTE 1: Close
...
17
bit 7: Open/close state of the 8th unit
0: Open
Indicates the open/close state of
1: Close
each GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port A. bit 0: Open/close state of the 9th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 10th unit
GC-Link port A GS
1 byte 0: Open
19 Open/close state
BYTE 1: Close
(9th to 16th units)
...
bit 7: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
GC Series User’s Manual 17-13
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
GC-Link port A GS
1 byte 0: Unlocked
20 Lock status
BYTE 1: Locked
(1st to 8th units)
...
bit 7: Lock status of the 8th unit
Indicates the lock status of each
0: Unlocked
GS/GS-M connected to the
1: Locked
GC-Link port A.
bit 0: Lock status of the 9th unit
This is always 0 for the non-
0: Unlocked
contact type.
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 10th unit
GC-Link port A GS
1 byte 0: Unlocked
21 Lock status
BYTE 1: Locked
(9th to 16th units)
...
bit 7: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
GC-Link port A GS 1 byte bit 0: Open/close state
22
1st unit status BYTE 0: Open
1: Close
PROFINET Communication Function
GC-Link port A GS 1 byte
23 bit 1: Lock status
2nd unit status BYTE
0: Unlocked
... Indicates the detailed information
1: Locked
of the GS/GS-M connected to the
bit 2: Red LED display status
GC-Link port A.
0: OFF
GC-Link port A GS 1 byte 1: ON
37
16th unit status BYTE bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
1: ON
17
17-14 GC Series User’s Manual
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Communication Module: GL-R (GC-Link Port B)
Input (from the GC Series to the PROFINET IO controller)
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
0: Not connected
Indicates the number of GL-R
GC-Link port B GL-R 1 byte 1: Main unit only
0 units connected to the GC-Link
Number of connected units USINT 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
port B.
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit 2
GC-Link port B GL-R 1 byte
1
Main unit type USINT 0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1 byte 1: Type F
2
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port B. USINT 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port B GL-R 1 byte
3
Sub unit 2 type USINT
GC-Link port B GL-R
1 byte
4 Number of optical axes of the main
USINT
unit
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the number of optical
1 byte
5 Number of optical axes of sub unit axes of the GL-R connected to the 0 to 127
USINT
1 GC-Link port B.
PROFINET Communication Function
GC-Link port B GL-R
1 byte
6 Number of optical axes of sub unit
USINT
2
Indicates the setting switch status
of the GL-R (receiver) connected bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R
to the GC-Link port B. 1 byte bit 1: Switch 2
7 Main controller setting switch
When each switch is turned ON, BYTE ...
settings
the corresponding bit is turned bit 5: Switch 6
ON.
17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-15
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
GC-Link port B GL-R
1 byte
8 Received-light-amount, Main unit,
USINT
1st optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
1 byte
9 Received-light-amount, Main unit,
USINT
2nd optical axis
...
GC-Link port B GL-R
1 byte
134 Received-light-amount, Main unit,
USINT
127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
1 byte
135 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1,
USINT
1st optical axis
Indicates the received-light-
GC-Link port B GL-R amount of each optical axis of the
1 byte
136 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, GL-R connected to the GC-Link
USINT 0 to 63
2nd optical axis port B.
... The received-light-amount range
is 0 to 63.
GC-Link port B GL-R
1 byte
261 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1,
USINT
127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
PROFINET Communication Function
1 byte
262 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2,
USINT
1st optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
1 byte
263 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2,
USINT
2nd optical axis
...
GC-Link port B GL-R
1 byte
388 Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2,
USINT
127th optical axis
17
17-16 GC Series User’s Manual
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 2nd
1 byte
389 ON/OFF information of each optical optical axis
BYTE
axis [7:0] ...
bit 7: ON/OFF information of the 8th
optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information
bit0: ON/OFF information of the 9th
of each optical axis of the GL-R
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B. bit1: ON/OFF information of the 10th
A sub unit is placed with the bits 1 byte
390 ON/OFF information of each optical optical axis
following the optical axis of the last BYTE
axis [15:8] ...
unit. bit7: ON/OFF information of the 16th
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for
optical axis
an optical axis configured with
... fixed blanking.
bit0: ON/OFF information of the 233th
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit1: ON/OFF information of the 234th
1 byte
418 ON/OFF information of each optical optical axis
BYTE
axis [239:232] ...
Bit7: ON/OFF information of the 240th
optical axis
PROFINET Communication Function
Indicates the error status of the
GC-Link port B GL-R 1 byte 0: No error
419 GL-R connected to the GC-Link
Error status USINT 1: Error occurring
port B.
Indicates the OSSD output status
GC-Link port B GL-R 1 byte 0: OFF
420 of the GL-R connected to the GC-
OSSD output status USINT 1: ON
Link port B.
Indicates the enablement status of
GC-Link port B GL-R
the received-light-amount 1 byte 0: Disabled
421 Received-light-amount decrease
decrease alert of the GL-R USINT 1: Enabled
alert enablement status
connected to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the detection status of
GC-Link port B GL-R
the received-light-amount 1 byte 0: No alert
422 Received-light-amount decrease
decrease alert of the GL-R USINT 1: Alert occurring
alert detection status
connected to the GC-Link port B. 17
Indicates the detection threshold
GC-Link port B GL-R of the received-light-amount
1 byte
423 Received-light-amount decrease decrease alert of the GL-R 0 to 100
USINT
alert detection threshold connected to the GC-Link port B in
percentage.
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port B GL-R
received-light-amount decrease 1 byte 1: 5 sec
424 Received-light-amount decrease
alert of the GL-R connected to the USINT 2: 30 sec
alert detection time
GC-Link port B. 3: 5 min
GC Series User’s Manual 17-17
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Communication Module: GS (GC-Link Port B)
Input (from the GC Series to the PROFINET IO controller)
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
Indicates the number of GS/GS-M
GC-Link port B GS 1 byte
0 units connected to the GC-Link 0 to 16
Number of connected units USINT
port B.
GC-Link port B GS 1 byte bit 0 to 2: Model information
1
Model information (1st unit) BYTE 000: GS-10
GC-Link port B GS 1 byte 001: GS-50
2 011: GS-70
Model information (2nd unit) BYTE
100: GS-M5/9
...
101: GS-ML5
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
Indicates the model information of
bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
the GS/GS-M connected to the
00: Normal operation (Default)
GC-Link port B.
01: OFF
GC-Link port B GS 1 byte 10: OFF when GS is closed
16
Model information (16th unit) BYTE (locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
bit 6: Coding level settings
PROFINET Communication Function
0: Low (multi operation)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 0: OSSD state
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and
GC-Link port B GS 1 byte 1: ON
17 lock control status of the GS/GS-M
OSSD/lock control status BYTE bit 1: Lock control information
connected to the GC-Link port B.
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
GC-Link port B GS
1 byte 0: Open
18 Open/close state
17 (1st to 8th units)
BYTE 1: Close
...
bit 7: Open/close state of the 8th unit
0: Open
Indicates the open/close state of
1: Close
each GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port B. bit 0: Open/close state of the 9th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 10th unit
GC-Link port B GS
1 byte 0: Open
19 Open/close state
BYTE 1: Close
(9th to 16th units)
...
bit 7: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
17-18 GC Series User’s Manual
17-4 Cyclic Communication
Data
Byte offset Item Description Value
type
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
GC-Link port B GS
1 byte 0: Unlocked
20 Lock status
BYTE 1: Locked
(1st to 8th units)
...
bit 7: Lock status of the 8th unit
Indicates the lock status of each
0: Unlocked
GS/GS-M connected to the
1: Locked
GC-Link port B.
bit 0: Lock status of the 9th unit
This is always 0 for the non-
0: Unlocked
contact type.
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 10th unit
GC-Link port B GS
1 byte 0: Unlocked
21 Lock status
BYTE 1: Locked
(9th to 16th units)
...
bit 7: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
GC-Link port B GS 1 byte bit 0: Open/close state
22
1st unit status BYTE 0: Open
1: Close
PROFINET Communication Function
GC-Link port B GS 1 byte
23 bit 1: Lock status
2nd unit status BYTE
0: Unlocked
... Indicates the detailed information
1: Locked
of the GS/GS-M connected to the
bit 2: Red LED display status
GC-Link port B.
0: OFF
GC-Link port B GS 1 byte 1: ON
37
16th unit status BYTE bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
1: ON
17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-19
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Acyclic communication is a function to read data through exchange of commands and responses between a PLC
(PROFINET IO controller) and the GC Series.
Parameter List
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
bit 0: Communication input bit 0
Communication input [0:00] to 0: OFF
256 100H WORD R
[0:15] 1: ON
Indicates the status of the
bit 1: Communication input bit 1
communication inputs.
0: OFF
... ... ... When a bit is turned ON, the ... ...
1: ON
corresponding communication input is
...
turned ON.
Communication input [3:00] to bit 15: Communication input bit 15
259 103H WORD R
[3:15] 0: OFF
1: ON
Enablement code of
260 104H UINT R
communication input [0:00] Indicates the status of the enablement
code.
... ... ... ... ... 0000H to 00FFH
The upper eight bits are ignored.
Enablement code of (Range: 1 to 255)
289 121H UINT R
communication input [1:13]
290 122H System reserved
291 123H System reserved
Displays the status of the PLC text STRING
PROFINET Communication Function
292 124H PLC text (ASCII code format). (Up to 21 R 0000H to FFFFH
Up to 20 characters. bytes)
Number of connected units Indicates the number of connected
512 200H UINT R 0 to 65535
(expansion unit) expansion units.
Number of connected units Indicates the number of connected
513 201H UINT R 0 to 65535
(remote I/O module) remote I/O modules.
0 1
bit 0 to 7: Unit model
1: GC-1000
Model information (main
514 202H WORD R 2: GC-1000R
controller)
3: GC-S84
4: GC-S16
5: GC-S1R
6: GC-A16
Model information (1st bit 8: Positional relationship to
515 203H WORD R
expansion unit) the GC-B30
Indicates the connected unit model.
0: Unit positioned before the
GC-B30
17 ... ... ... ... ... 1: Unit positioned after the
GC-B30
If the GC-B30 does not exist
Model information (10th in the unit configuration, all
524 20CH WORD R
expansion unit) units are set to 0.
bit 9 to 15: System reserved
(fixed to 0)
Model information (1st remote
525 20DH WORD R bit 0 to 7: Unit model
I/O module)
7: GC-R45
... ... ... Indicates the connected unit model. ... ... 8: GC-R48
bit 8 to 15: System reserved
Model information (4th remote
528 210H WORD R (fixed to 0)
I/O module)
529 211H System reserved
Indicates the time elapsed since the
530 212H Operation time DWORD R 0 to FFFFFFFFH
start of the unit in units of 10 ms.
17-20 GC Series User’s Manual
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
bit 0: RUN state
0: The unit is stopped.
1: The unit is running.
bit 1: Abnormal state
0: Normal
532 214H GC operating state Indicates the operating state of the GC. WORD R 1: Abnormal
* An abnormal state means
that at least one alert or
error is occurring.
bit 2 to 15: System reserved
(fixed to 0)
Number of errors that Indicates the number of errors that are
533 215H UINT R 0 to 30
occurred currently occurring.
Main code of the (1st) error Indicates the code of the error that is
534 216H UINT R
code currently occurring.
Error codes are sorted in the following
Detailed code of the (1st) error
535 217H order: UINT R
code
(1) Errors are sorted in order of Error,
... ... ... Alert, and Info, starting from the ... ...
first error.
Main code of the (30th) error 0 to 65535
592 250H (2) Errors are sorted by error UINT R
code category in the order that they
occurred.
The high byte represents the main code
Detailed code of the (30th)
593 251H while the low byte represents the UINT R
error code
detailed code. "Alert/Error list"
(page A-7)
Communication output [0:00] bit 0: Communication output bit
594 252H WORD R
to [0:15] 0
PROFINET Communication Function
0 1 Indicates the output status of the
bit 1: Communication output bit
... ... ... communication outputs. ... ...
1
When a communication output is turned
...
Communication output [3:00] ON, the corresponding bit is turned ON.
597 255H WORD R bit 15: Communication output
to [3:15]
bit 15
bit 0 to 3: GC-Link port A
connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 4 to 7: GC-Link port A error
status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
598 256H GC-Link port status Indicates the GC-Link port status. WORD R
bit 8 to 11: GC-Link port B
connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 12 to 15: GC-Link port B
17
error status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
0: Not connected
1: Main unit only
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the number of GL-R units
768 300H UINT R 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port A.
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub
unit 2
769 301H System reserved
GC Series User’s Manual 17-21
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
770 302H UINT R
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1: Type F
771 303H UINT R
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port A. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
772 304H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port A GL-R
773 305H Number of optical axes of the UINT R 0 to 127
main unit
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the number of optical axes of
774 306H Number of optical axes of sub the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port UINT R 0 to 127
unit 1 A.
GC-Link port A GL-R
775 307H Number of optical axes of sub UINT R 0 to 127
unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of the
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R GL-R (receiver) connected to the GC-
bit 1: Switch 2
776 308H Main controller setting switch Link port A. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned ON, the
bit 5: Switch 6
corresponding bit is turned ON.
777 309H System reserved
PROFINET Communication Function
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
778 30AH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
0 1 1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
779 30BH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
841 349H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
842 34AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis Indicates the received-light-amount of
GC-Link port A GL-R each optical axis of the GL-R connected
to the GC-Link port A. bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
843 34BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit WORD R
17 1, 3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis The received-light-amount range is 0 to
63.
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
... ... ... The high byte of the 127th optical axis is ... ...
always 0.
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
905 389H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
906 38AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
907 38BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
969 3C9H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis
17-22 GC Series User’s Manual
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
970 3CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R 2nd optical axis
optical axis [15:0] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of
the 16th optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information of bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
each optical axis of the GL-R connected 17th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R to the GC-Link port A. bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
971 3CBH ON/OFF information of each A sub unit is placed with the bits WORD R 18th optical axis
optical axis [31:16] following the optical axis of the last unit. ...
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an bit 15: ON/OFF information of
optical axis configured with fixed the 32nd optical axis
... ... ... blanking. ... ...
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
225th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
984 3D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R 226th optical axis
optical axis [239:224] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of
the 240th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL-R 0: No error
985 3D9H WORD R
Error status connected to the GC-Link port A. 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the OSSD output status of the 0: OFF
986 3DAH WORD R
OSSD output status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A. 1: ON
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the enablement status of the
0: Disabled
PROFINET Communication Function
987 3DBH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Enabled
alert enablement status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection status of the
0 1 0: No alert
988 3DCH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Alert occurring
alert detection status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the detection threshold of the
GC-Link port A GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert of the
989 3DDH Received-light-amount decrease UINT R 0 to 100
GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A in
alert detection threshold
percentage.
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port A GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert of 1: 5 sec
990 3DEH Received-light-amount UINT R
the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port 2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time
A. 3: 5 min
GC-Link port A GS Indicates the number of GS/GS-M units
1024 400H UINT R 0 to 16
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port A.
bit 0 to 2: Model information
1025 401H
GC-Link port A GS
WORD R
000: GS-10
001: GS-50
17
Model information (1st unit) 011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to
0)
GC-Link port A GS bit 4 to 5: Indicator control
1026 402H Indicates the model information of the WORD R
Model information (2nd unit) mode
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
00: Normal operation
port A.
(Default)
01: OFF
... ... ... ... ...
10: OFF when GS is closed
(locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
GC-Link port A GS bit 6: Coding level settings
1040 410H WORD R
Model information (16th unit) 0: Low (multi operation)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
GC Series User’s Manual 17-23
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and lock 1: ON
GC-Link port A GS
1041 411H control status of the GS/GS-M WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status
connected to the GC-Link port A. 0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the
1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the
Indicates the open/close state of each 2nd unit
GC-Link port A GS
1042 412H GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link WORD R 0: Open
Open/close state
port A. 1: Close
...
bit 15: Open/close state of the
16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
Indicates the lock status of each GS/
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port A GS GS-M connected to the GC-Link port A.
1043 413H WORD R 1: Locked
Lock status This is always 0 for the non-contact
...
type.
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th
unit
PROFINET Communication Function
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
0 1 GC-Link port A GS
1044 414H WORD R 0: Open
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port A GS 1: Locked
1045 415H Indicates the detailed information of the WORD R
2nd unit status bit 2: Red LED display status
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
0: OFF
port A.
1: ON
... ... ... ... ... bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port A GS 1: ON
1059 423H WORD R
16th unit status
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
0: Not connected
17 1280 500H
GC-Link port B GL-R
Number of connected units
Indicates the number of GL-R units
connected to the GC-Link port B.
UINT R
1: Main unit only
2: Main unit + sub unit 1
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub
unit 2
1281 501H System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
1282 502H UINT R
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1: Type F
1283 503H UINT R
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port B. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
1284 504H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
17-24 GC Series User’s Manual
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
GC-Link port B GL-R
1285 505H Number of optical axes of the UINT R 0 to 127
main unit
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the number of optical axes of
1286 506H Number of optical axes of sub the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port UINT R 0 to 127
unit 1 B.
GC-Link port B GL-R
1287 507H Number of optical axes of sub UINT R 0 to 127
unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of the
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R GL-R (receiver) connected to the GC-
bit 1: Switch 2
1288 508H Main controller setting switch Link port B. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned ON, the
bit 5: Switch 6
corresponding bit is turned ON.
1289 509H System reserved
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Main bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1290 50AH WORD R
unit, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Main bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1291 50BH WORD R
unit, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
0 1 1353 549H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
PROFINET Communication Function
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1354 54AH WORD R
unit 1, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis Indicates the received-light-amount of
GC-Link port B GL-R each optical axis of the GL-R connected
Received-light-amount, Sub to the GC-Link port B. bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1355 54BH The received-light-amount range is 0 to WORD R
unit 1, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis 63.
The high byte of the 127th optical axis is
... ... ... always 0. ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1417 589H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1418 58AH WORD R
unit 2, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis 17
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1419 58BH WORD R
unit 2, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1481 5C9H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis
GC Series User’s Manual 17-25
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
1st optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
1482 5CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R 2nd optical axis
optical axis [15:0] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of
the 16th optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information of bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
each optical axis of the GL-R connected 17th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R to the GC-Link port B. bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
1483 5CBH ON/OFF information of each A sub unit is placed with the bits WORD R 18th optical axis
optical axis [31:16] following the optical axis of the last unit. ...
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an bit 15: ON/OFF information of
optical axis configured with fixed the 32nd optical axis
... ... ... blanking. ... ... ...
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
225th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
1496 5D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R 226th optical axis
optical axis [239:224] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of
the 240th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL-R 0: No error
1497 5D9H WORD R
Error status connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the OSSD output status of the 0: OFF
1498 5DAH WORD R
OSSD output status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: ON
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the enablement status of the
0: Disabled
PROFINET Communication Function
1499 5DBH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Enabled
alert enablement status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection status of the
0 1 0: No alert
1500 5DCH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Alert occurring
alert detection status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection threshold of the
Received-light-amount received-light-amount decrease alert of
1501 5DDH UINT R 0 to 100
decrease alert detection the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port
threshold B in percentage.
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port B GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert of 1: 5 sec
1502 5DEH Received-light-amount UINT R
the GL-R connected to the GC-Link port 2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time
B. 3: 5 min
GC-Link port B GS Indicates the number of GS/GS-M units
1536 600H UINT R 0 to 16
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port B.
bit 0 to 2: Model information
17 1537 601H
GC-Link port B GS
WORD R
000: GS-10
001: GS-50
Model information (1st unit) 011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to
0)
GC-Link port B GS bit 4 to 5: Indicator control
1538 602H Indicates the model information of the WORD R
Model information (2nd unit) mode
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
00: Normal operation
port B.
(Default)
01: OFF
... ... ... ... ...
10: OFF when GS is closed
(locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
GC-Link port B GS bit 6: Coding level settings
1552 610H WORD R
Model information (16th unit) 0: Low (multi operation)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
17-26 GC Series User’s Manual
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and lock 1: ON
GC-Link port B GS
1553 611H control status of the GS/GS-M WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status
connected to the GC-Link port B. 0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the
1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the
Indicates the open/close state of each 2nd unit
GC-Link port B GS
1554 612H GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link WORD R 0: Open
Open/close state
port B. 1: Close
...
bit 15: Open/close state of the
16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
Indicates the lock status of each GS/
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port B GS GS-M connected to the GC-Link port B.
1555 613H WORD R 1: Locked
Lock status This is always 0 for the non-contact
...
type.
0 1 bit 15: Lock status of the 16th
unit
PROFINET Communication Function
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
GC-Link port B GS 0: Open
1556 614H WORD R
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port B GS 1: Locked
1557 615H Indicates the detailed information of the WORD R
2nd unit status bit 2: Red LED display status
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
0: OFF
port B.
1: ON
... ... ... ... ...
bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port B GS 1: ON
1571 623H WORD R
16th unit status
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
Indicates the project name of the STRING
1792 700H Project name configuration file (ASCII code format). (up to 65 R
Up to 64 characters. bytes) 17
Indicates the configuration CRC of the STRING
1857 741H Configuration CRC configuration file (ASCII code format). (up to 9 R
Up to 8 characters. bytes)
Indicates the date and time of transfer STRING
1866 74AH Date and time of transfer of the configuration file (ASCII code (up to 21 R
format). Up to 20 characters. bytes)
GC Series User’s Manual 17-27
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
2 bytes
2048 800H Input status (GC-Link port) R
WORD
2 bytes
2049 801H Input status (main controller) R
WORD
Input status (1st expansion 2 bytes
2050 802H R
unit) WORD
Input status (2nd expansion 2 bytes
2051 803H R
unit) WORD
...
Input status (10th expansion 2 bytes
2059 80BH R
unit) WORD
Input status (1st remote I/O 2 bytes
2060 80CH R
module) WORD
Input status (2nd remote I/O 2 bytes
2061 80DH R
module) WORD
...
Input status (1st remote I/O 2 bytes
2063 80FH R
module) Indicates the input/output status of each WORD
unit.* 2 2 bytes
2064 810H Output status (GC-Link port) R
WORD
2 bytes
2065 811H Output status (main controller) R
WORD
Output status (1st expansion 2 bytes
2066 812H R
unit) WORD
PROFINET Communication Function
Output status (2nd expansion 2 bytes
2067 813H R
unit) WORD
...
0 1
Output status (10th expansion 2 bytes
2075 81BH R
unit) WORD
Output status (1st remote I/O 2 bytes
2076 81CH R
module) WORD
Output status (2nd remote I/O 2 bytes
2077 81DH R
module) WORD
...
Output status (4th remote I/O 2 bytes
2079 81FH R
module) WORD
Indicates the number of blocks used by 2 bytes
2304 900H Number of used blocks R 0 to 500
the program. UINT
17 2305 901H
Block output status (Block ID 2 bytes
R
1) WORD
Block output status (Block ID 2 bytes
2306 902H Indicates the output status of each R
2) WORD
block used by the program.* 3
...
Block output status (Block ID 2 bytes
2804 AF4H R
500) WORD
2 bytes
2816 B00H Number of error histories Indicates the number of error histories. R 0 to 100
UINT
1st error history, Error code, Indicates the error code of the 1st error 2 bytes
2817 B01H R 0 to 99
Main code history. UINT
Error histories are sorted in newest-first
1st error history, Error code, chronological order. 2 bytes
2818 B02H R 0 to 9999
Detailed code " Alert/Error list" (page A-7) UINT
Indicates the time elapsed since the
1st error history, Operation 4 bytes
2819 B03H start of the GC Series when the error R 0 to 4294967295
time on error UDINT
was detected in seconds.
17-28 GC Series User’s Manual
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Sub Index Data
Slot*1 Item Details Attribute Value
Slot*1 DEC HEX type
2nd error history, Error code, Indicates the error code of the 2nd error 2 bytes
2821 B05H R 0 to 99
Main code history. UINT
Error histories are sorted in newest-first
2nd error history, Error code, chronological order. 2 bytes
2822 B06H R 0 to 9999
Detailed code " Alert/Error list" (page A-7) UINT
Indicates the time elapsed since the
2nd error history, Operation 4 bytes
2823 B07H start of the GC Series when the error R 0 to 4294967295
time on error UDINT
was detected in seconds.
0 1 ...
100th error history, Error code, Indicates the error code of the 100th 2 bytes
3213 C8DH R 0 to 99
Main code error history. UINT
Error histories are sorted in newest-first
100th error history, Error code, chronological order. 2 bytes
3214 C8EH R 0 to 9999
Detailed code " Alert/Error list" (page A-7) UINT
Indicates the time elapsed since the
100th error history, Operation 4 bytes
3215 C8FH start of the GC Series when the error R 0 to 4294967295
time on error UDINT
was detected in seconds.
*1 For this example, the slot is set to 0 and the sub slot is set to 1. As long as it is a combination of a connected slot and sub slot, any
number can be set.
*2 For the bit assignment of each unit, refer to "Input/output status assignment by unit" (page 17-30).
*3 Check the block ID in the GC Configurator report. For the bit assignment of each block, refer to "Output status assignment by block"
(page 17-32).
PROFINET Communication Function
17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-29
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Input/output status assignment by unit
0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (GC-Link port)
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Port B Port A Port B Port A
Reserved
Ai Ai Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0
Input status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
GC-1000R
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Reserved Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Reserved Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
PROFINET Communication Function
GC-S16
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status (nth remote I/O module)
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
Ai Ai Ai AI Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0
Output status (GC-Link port)
17 bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Port B Port A
Reserved
Ao1 Ao0 Ao1 Ao0
Output status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 So5 So4 So3 So2 So1 So0
GC-1000R
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 SRo So3 So2 So1 So0
17-30 GC Series User’s Manual
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Output status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Reserved So3 So2 So1 So0
GC-S1R
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Reserved SRo
GC-A16
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Ao15 Ao14 Ao13 Ao12 Ao11 Ao10 Ao9 Ao8 Ao7 Ao6 Ao5 Ao4 Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0
Output status (nth remote I/O module)
GC-R45
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
Ao Ao Ao Ao
GC-R48
PROFINET Communication Function
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
So So So So
17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-31
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Output status assignment by block
Block name Bit assignment
Emergency stop switch
Limit switch
Interlock switch
Guard locking switch
GS/GS-M Series [KEYENCE]
Light curtain
GL-R Series [KEYENCE]
GL-S Series [KEYENCE]
Safety input devices Laser scanner bit 0: Output
SZ-V Series [KEYENCE]
SZ Series [KEYENCE]
Rope pull
Safety mat
Input devices
Two hand control switch
Enabling device
Other safety switch
Other safety input
PROFINET Communication Function
Reset switch bit 0: Output
bit 0: Mode Output 1
Mode selecting switch bit 1: Mode Output 2
bit 2: Error
EDM input
Other input devices Muting input
Safety plug
bit 0: Output
Hold-to-run switch
Other switch
Other input
17
17-32 GC Series User’s Manual
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety 1 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
S-OUT bit 6: EDM2 Error
S-OUT EDM enabled bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety outputs Safety 2 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
Output devices
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output)
bit 3: Error Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output) EDM enabled
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
Other outputs AUX-OUT bit 1: Reserved
PROFINET Communication Function
bit 2: Error
Enablement code
bit 0: Output
disabled
Reset input (COM)
Communication input bit 0: Output
Other input (COM) Enablement code
bit1: Ready
Communications enabled
bit 2: Error
bit 0: Output
Communication output Communication output bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
Register (Load)
Register bit 0: Output
Register (Store)
GS closed state
GS locked state
bit 0: Output
17
Expansion blocks None
bit 0: Red
GS indicator control output bit 1: Green
bit 2: Output Error
GL-R received-light-amount decrease alert
AUX-IN
Other input blocks bit 0: Output
OSSD 3/4
IN
GC Series User’s Manual 17-33
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
Lock control 1 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
Unlock output
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
Lock control 2 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
bit 0: Red
Indicator control output bit 1: Green
bit 2: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
Independent bank
bit 2: Input Mismatch
bit 3: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
Other output blocks bit 3: Bank Output b
Single
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
bit 6: Input Mismatch
bit 7: Output Error
PROFINET Communication Function
Bank switching output
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
bit 3: Bank Output b
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
Binary
bit 6: Bank Output D
bit 7: Bank Output d
bit 8: Bank Output E
bit 9: Bank Output e
bit 10: Input Mismatch
bit 11: Output Error
bit 0: Output
17 OUT bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
AND
AND (6-10 inputs)
OR
NOT
NAND
Function blocks Logic bit 0: Output
NOR
XOR
SR Flip-Flop (Set has priority)
RS Flip-Flop (Reset has priority)
JK Flip-Flop
17-34 GC Series User’s Manual
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
Reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
Reset (with AND)
bit 1: Reset Required
Reset bit 0: Output
Dual reset bit 1: Reset Required1
bit 2: Reset Required2
bit 0: Output
Existence detection reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Sequential muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Parallel muting
bit 3: Override Active
Function blocks
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
PROFINET Communication Function
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting Cross-muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting for exit
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
Position detection muting
bit 2: Muting Error
bit 3: Override Active
17
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
GC Series User’s Manual 17-35
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Master ON Ready
Master ON
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Unlock Output
Unlock control
bit 1: Unlock Required
bit 0: Output
Bypass
bit 1: Bypass Active
bit 0: Output
Application Control guard
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Break Required
PSDI control bit 3: Reset Required
bit 4: Normal Operation
bit 5: PSDI Error
bit 6: PSDI Timeout
bit 0: Input Bypass
bit 1: Output Enable
Manual mode control (MMC)
bit 2: Restart Required
bit 3: Manual Mode Active
Manual mode
Function blocks MMC input bypass bit 0: Output
MMC input bypass_ bit 0: Output
MMC output enable bit 0: Output
PROFINET Communication Function
bit 0: Output
OFF-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
bit 0: Output
ON-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
Pulse generator bit 0: Output
bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
Up-down counter
bit 1: Reached Zero
bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
Timers / Counters
bit 1: Reached Zero
bit 2: Output bit 0
bit 3: Output bit 1
bit 4: Output bit 2
17 Up-down counter (with binary output)
bit 5: Output bit 3
bit 6: Output bit 4
bit 7: Output bit 5
bit 8: Output bit 6
bit 9: Output bit 7
17-36 GC Series User’s Manual
17-5 Acyclic Communication
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Rising Edge
Edge detection
bit 1: Falling Edge
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Output3
bit 3: Output4
Binary decoder
bit 4: Output5
bit 5: Output6
bit 6: Output7
bit 7: Output8
bit 0: Output bit 0
bit 1: Output bit 1
Binary encoder
bit 2: Output bit 2
Function blocks Others
bit 3: Error
bit 0: Mode Output1
bit 1: Mode Output2
bit 2: Mode Output3
bit 3: Mode Output4
bit 4: Mode Output5
Mode changing control
bit 5: Mode Output6
bit 6: Mode Output7
bit 7: Mode Output8
bit 8: Mode Error
PROFINET Communication Function
bit 9: Trigger Required
Selector (2 inputs) bit 0: Output
Selector (4 inputs) bit 1: Mode Error
Always ON
Always OFF
1 scan ON upon start-up
System Information
System blocks None bit 0: Output
Block information
Jump (Load)
Jump (Store)
Event history trigger
Other functions Recipe block AND (with connection constraint function) bit 0: Output 17
GC Series User’s Manual 17-37
17-6 Diagnostic Function
Using the PROFINET Diagnostics function, the information of alerts or errors that occurred in the GC Series can be
transmitted to a PLC (PROFINET IO controller) via PROFINET communication.
Slot where the error Corresponding
Diagnostics number
Error category occurred Details main code of the
DEC HEX Slot Sub slot error code
4097 1001H 0 1 Muting Error 01
Function Block Alert Max. Muting / Override
4098 1002H 0 1 02
Period Exceeded
Mode Changing Control
4099 1003H 0 1 03
Inputs Mismatch
4100 1004H Information 0 1 Bank Inputs Mismatch 04
Waiting For Input Block
4106 100AH 0 1 10
Recovery
AUX Output Terminal
4107 100BH 0 1 11
Overcurrent
Test Output Terminal
4108 100CH 0 1 12
Overcurrent
Terminal alert Safety Input Diag. (Test
4109 100DH 0 1 13
Output
4110 100EH 0 1 Inputs Incorrect 14
Remote I/O Module Power
4111 100FH 0 1 15
Overcurrent
PROFINET Communication Function
4112 1010H 0 1 EDM Error 16
Safety Output Terminal
4113 1011H 0 1 17
Overcurrent
Terminal error
4114 1012H 0 1 Safety Output Terminal Error 18
Safety Relay Output Terminal
4115 1013H 0 1 19
Error
GC-Link Port A GS
4117 1015H 0 1 21
GS (port A) alert Connection
4118 1016H 0 1 GC-Link Port A GS Error 22
GC-Link Port B GS
4119 1017H 0 1 23
GS (port B) alert Connection
17 4120 1018H 0 1 GC-Link Port B GS Error 24
GC-Link Port A GL-R
4121 1019H 0 1 25
Connection
GL-R (port A) alert
4122 101AH 0 1 GC-Link Port A GL-R Error 26
4123 101BH 0 1 GC-Link Port A GL-R Alert 27
GC-Link Port B GL-R
4124 101CH 0 1 28
Connection
GL-R (port B) alert
4125 101DH 0 1 GC-Link Port B GL-R Error 29
4126 101EH 0 1 GC-Link Port B GL-R Alert 30
4127 101FH Information 0 1 Waiting For Configuration 31
4128 1020H 0 1 Waiting For Activation 32
Main controller error Settings Unsupported By
4129 1021H 0 1 33
Version
17-38 GC Series User’s Manual
17-6 Diagnostic Function
Slot where the error Corresponding
Diagnostics number
Error category occurred Details main code of the
DEC HEX Slot Sub slot error code
GC-Link Port A GS Config.
4132 1024H 0 1 36
Mismatch
GC-Link Port B GS Config.
4133 1025H 0 1 37
Mismatch
GC-Link Port A GL-R Config
4134 1026H 0 1 38
Mismatch
GC-Link Port B GL-R Config
4135 1027H 0 1 39
Mismatch
4136 1028H 0 1 Low Power Voltage 40
GC-Link Port A GS
4139 102BH Main controller alert 0 1 43
Connection
GC-Link Port B GS
4140 102CH 0 1 44
Connection
GC-Link Port A GS Low
4141 102DH 0 1 45
Power Voltage
GC-Link Port B GS Low
4142 102EH 0 1 46
Power Voltage
4143 102FH 0 1 History Data Save Failed 47
4144 1030H 0 1 History Data Error 48
PROFINET Communication Function
4145 1031H 0 1 IP Address Conflict 49
4146 1032H 0 1 Configuration Mismatch 50
Remote I/O Module Config.
4147 1033H 0 1 51
Mismatch
4148 1034H 0 1 System Memory Data Error 52
4149 1035H 0 1 System Memory Data Error 53
4150 1036H 0 1 Expansion Unit Comm. Error 54
Remote I/O Module Comm.
4151 1037H 0 1 55
Error
4152 1038H 0 1 Expansion Unit Comm. Error 56
4153 1039H
Main controller error
0 1
Remote I/O Module Comm.
Error
57 17
4154 103AH 0 1 High Power Voltage 58
Expansion Unit Unsupported
4155 103BH 0 1 59
Version
Remote I/O Module
4156 103CH 0 1 60
Unsupported Version
4157 103DH 0 1 System Memory Access Error 61
4158 103EH 0 1 System Memory Data Error 62
GC-Link Port A Unsupported
4159 103FH 0 1 63
GS
GC-Link Port B Unsupported
4160 1040H 0 1 64
GS
4194 1062H 0 1 System Error 98
System error
4195 1063H 0 1 System Error 99
GC Series User’s Manual 17-39
MEMO
PROFINET Communication Function
17
17-40 GC Series User’s Manual
18
UDP Communication
Function
This chapter describes the settings and functions of the UDP communication function.
18-1 Overview of the UDP Communication Function..............................................page 18-2
18-2 UDP Communication Settings...........................................................................page 18-3
18-3 UDP Communication Commands .....................................................................page 18-4
18
UDP Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 18-1
Overview of the UDP Communication
18-1 Function
All of the data received from the communication of the EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET, UDP, Modbus/TCP, or
DANGER MC protocol cannot be used for the safety related part of the control system. When used incorrectly,
there is a possibility that the operator of the device may be threatened with major injury or even death.
Point The Ethernet communication function is available only for the main controller "GC-1000".
Overview of the UDP Communication Function
What is UDP communication?
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is one of the Internet protocols. This protocol establishes communications in a "command-
response" format, where data read and write commands are transmitted to the GC Series specified from a general-purpose
PLC or PC and the GC Series returns responses to the requests.
What you can do with UDP communication function
With UDP communication, you can perform the following in the GC Series.
Item UDP
communication
Write a communication input
Write an enablement code
Write a character string that is stored into the history function
Read out a communication output
Read out an error code
Read out the unit configuration and model information
Read out the received-light-amount and ON/OFF state of the GL-R Series connected to a GC-Link port.
Read out the door open/close state and ON/OFF state of the GS/GS-M Series connected to a GC-Link port.
Read out the ON/OFF status of the main controller, expansion unit, and remote I/O module.
Read out the block status
Read out the error history
18 UDP communication specifications
UDP Communication Function
Interface UDP (Ethernet)
UDP port number Default: 8900
Setting range: 0 to 65535*1
Communication speed 100Mbps
*1 The following port numbers cannot be used.
2222, 5100, 8638, 22112, 22096, 34964, 44818, 49152, 53248, 57345, 57346
18-2 GC Series User’s Manual
18-2 UDP Communication Settings
UDP Communication Settings
GC Configurator settings
[Setting procedure]
Basic Ethernet settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and configure the basic Ethernet settings. "15-2 GC Configurator
Settings" (page 15-3)
UDP settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [UDP] to the screen to register.
Detailed settings
Detailed
Item Details
Endianness Select the endian for UDP communication data. (Default: Little-endian)
UDP port number Set the port number used for UDP communication. Setting range: 0 to 65535 (Default: 8900)
18
Registering communication inputs and communication outputs
UDP Communication Function
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [Communication input] and [Communication output] to
the screen to register.
"15-2 GC Configurator Settings" (page 15-3)
Programming
Perform programming using the communication blocks.
"How to Use a Communication Block" (page 15-9)
GC Series User’s Manual 18-3
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
UDP Communication Command List
The commands available in UDP communication are as follows.
Type Command Name Details
80H Word read Read word data of a specified size from a specified word address.
Read
(GC Series -> 81H Multi-word read Read word data of a specified size from specified multiple word addresses.
External device)
82H Bit read Read bit data of a specified size from a specified bit address.
Write 90H Word write Write word data of a specified size to a specified word address.
(External device
91H Multi-word write Write word data of a specified size to specified multiple word addresses.
->
GC Series)*1 92H Bit write Write bit data of a specified size to a specified bit address.
*1 When cyclic communication is performed, data cannot be written.
18
UDP Communication Function
18-4 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
UDP Command Details
80H: Word read
Read word data of a specified size from a specified word address.
Request command
Command Empty Empty Sequence Start address Number of addresses
80H 00H 00H No.
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Details Data length
Command Set the word read command. "80H" 1 byte
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
Sequence No. Set the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Start address Specify the word address to start reading the data from. 2 bytes
Number of addresses Specify the number of word addresses to read the data from. 2 bytes
Response (normal state)
Response Error Empty Sequence Start address Data . . .
80H 00H 00H No. Response 1 Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the word read command. "80H" 1 byte
Error Returns "00H" when in a normal state. 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Start address Returns the start word address. 2 bytes
Data Returns the read word data. If multiple addresses are read, word data of these 2 bytes x
addresses is returned in 2-byte chunks. Number of addresses
Response (abnormal state)
Response Error
80H **H
Empty
00H
Sequence
No. Response
18
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
UDP Communication Function
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the word read command. "80H" 1 byte
Error Returns the error code. (Refer to "Error codes" (page 18-12).) 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
GC Series User’s Manual 18-5
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
81H: Multi-word read
Read word data of a specified size from specified multiple word addresses.
This command reads out multiple start word addresses and the data of these addresses at once with a word address to
start reading data and the number of addresses as one command set.
Request command
Command set 1 Command set 2
Command Empty Empty Sequence Number of Start address 1 Number of addresses Start address 2 Number of addresses
81H 00H 00H No. command sets ...
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
Command set n-1 Command set n
Start address n-1 Number of addresses Start address n Number of addresses
...
2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Details Data length
Command Set the multi-word read command. "81H" 1 byte
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
Sequence No. Set the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Number of command A word address to start reading the data and the number of addresses are counted as 2 bytes
sets one command set. Set the number of command sets to be transmitted in the request
command.
Start address Specify the word address to start reading the data from. 2 bytes
Number of addresses Specify the number of word addresses to read the data from. 2 bytes
Response (normal state)
Command set 1 Command set 2
Response Error Empty Sequence Number of Start address 1 Data . . . Start address 2 Data . . .
81H 00H 00H No. Response command sets Response Response ...
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses
Command set n-1 Command set n
Start address n-1 Data . . . Start address n Data . . .
... Response Response
2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses
Item Details Data length
18 Response Returns the multi-word read command. "81H" 1 byte
Error Returns "00H" when in a normal state. 1 byte
UDP Communication Function
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Number of command Returns the number of command sets. 2 bytes
sets
Start address Returns the start word address. 2 bytes
Data Returns the read word data. If multiple addresses are read, word data of these 2 bytes x
addresses is returned in 2-byte chunks. Number of addresses
18-6 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Response (abnormal state)
Response Error Empty Sequence
81H **H 00H No. Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the multi-word read command. "81H" 1 byte
Error Returns the error code. (Refer to "Error codes" (page 18-12).) 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
82H: Bit read
Read bit data of a specified size from a specified bit address.
Request command
Command Empty Empty Sequence Start address Number of
82H 00H 00H No. addresses
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Details Data length
Command Set the bit read command. "82H" 1 byte
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
Sequence No. Set the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Start address Specify the bit address to start reading the data from. 2 bytes
Number of addresses Specify the number of bit addresses to read the data from. 2 bytes
Response (normal state)
Response Error Empty Sequence Start address Data . . .
82H 00H 00H No. Response Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the bit read command. "82H" 1 byte
Error Returns "00H" when in a normal state. 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte 18
UDP Communication Function
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Start address Returns the start bit address. 2 bytes
Data Returns the read bit data. The read bit data is stored starting from bit 0. 2 bytes
Unit*
* If 17 or more addresses (17 bits) are read, the data size increases in increments of two bytes.
GC Series User’s Manual 18-7
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Example: When reading three bits from bit address "****H" (Communication output 4)
Bit
Content
address
*** Communication output 0
*** Communication output 1
*** Communication output 2 Start address
*** Communication output 3
*** Communication output 4
*** Communication output 5
*** Communication output 6
*** Communication output 7
. .
. .
. . bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
*** Communication output 12 Data part
*** Communication output 13
*** Communication output 14
*** Communication output 15
Response (abnormal state)
Response Error Empty Sequence
82H **H 00H No. Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the bit read command. "82H" 1 byte
Error Returns the error code. (Refer to "Error codes" (page 18-12).) 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
90H: Word write
Write word data of a specified size to a specified word address.
Request command
Command Empty Empty Sequence Start address Number of addresses Write data . . .
90H 00H 00H No.
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses
Item Details Data length
Command Set the word write command. "90H" 1 byte
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
18 Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
Sequence No. Set the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
UDP Communication Function
Start address Specify the word address to start writing the data to. 2 bytes
Number of addresses Specify the number of word addresses to write the data to. 2 bytes
Write data Specify the write word data. To write multiple addresses, set word data of these 2 bytes x
addresses in 2-byte chunks. Number of addresses
18-8 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Response (normal state)
Response Error Empty Sequence Start address
90H 00H 00H No. Response Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the word write command. "90H" 1 byte
Error Returns "00H" when in a normal state. 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Start address Returns the start bit address. 2 bytes
Response (abnormal state)
Response Error Empty Sequence
90H **H 00H No. Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the word write command. "90H" 1 byte
Error Returns the error code. (Refer to "Error codes" (page 18-12).) 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
91H: Multi-word write
Write word data of a specified size to specified multiple word addresses.
Request command
Command set 1 Command set 2
Command Empty Empty Sequence Number of command Start address 1 Number of addresses Data . . . Start address 2 Number of addresses Data . . .
91H 00H 00H No. sets Response Response .
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses
Command set n-1 Command set n
Start address n-1 Number of addresses Data . . . Start address n Number of addresses Data . . .
...
2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes x Number of addresses
Item Details Data length
Command Set the multi-word write command. "91H" 1 byte
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte 18
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
UDP Communication Function
Sequence No. Set the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Number of command A word address to start writing the data and the number of addresses are counted as 2 bytes
sets one command set. Set the number of command sets to be transmitted in the request
command.
Start address Specify the word address to start writing the data to. 2 bytes
Number of addresses Specify the number of word addresses to write the data to. 2 bytes
Write data Specify the write word data. To write multiple addresses, set word data of these 2 bytes x
addresses in 2-byte chunks. Number of addresses
GC Series User’s Manual 18-9
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Response (normal state)
Command set 1 Command set 2 Command set n-1 Command set n
Response Response Response Response
Response Error Empty Sequence Number of command Start address 1 Start address 2 Start address n-1 Start address n
91H 00H 00H No. sets Response Response Response ... Response Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the multi-word write command. "91H" 1 byte
Error Returns "00H" when in a normal state. 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Number of command Returns the number of command sets. 2 bytes
sets
Start address Returns the start bit address. 2 bytes
Response (abnormal state)
Response Error Empty Sequence
91H **H 00H No. Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the multi-word write command. "91H" 1 byte
Error Returns the error code. (Refer to "Error codes" (page 18-12).) 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
92H: Bit write
Write bit data of a specified size to a specified bit address.
Request command
Command Empty Empty Sequence Start address Number of Write data . . .
92H 00H 00H No. addresses
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Details Data length
18 Command Set the bit write command. "92H" 1 byte
UDP Communication Function
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
Empty Not used. Set "00H". 1 byte
Sequence No. Set the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Start address Specify the bit address to start writing the data to. 2 bytes
Number of addresses Specify the number of bit addresses to write the data to. 2 bytes
Write data Specify the write bit data. Set the write word data starting from bit 0. 2 bytes
Unit*
* If 17 or more addresses (17 bits) are written, the data size increases in increments of two bytes.
18-10 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Example: When writing four bits from bit address "****H" (Communication input 3)
Bit
Content
address
*** Communication input 0
*** Communication input 1
*** Communication input 2
*** Communication input 3
*** Communication input 4
*** Communication input 5
*** Communication input 6
*** Communication input 7
. .
. .
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 . .
*** Communication input 14
Data part
*** Communication input 15
Response (normal state)
Response Error Empty Sequence Sequence
92H 00H 00H No. Response No. Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the bit write command. "92H" 1 byte
Error Returns "00H" when in a normal state. 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Start address Returns the start bit address. 2 bytes
Response (abnormal state)
Response Error Empty Sequence
92H **H 00H No. Response
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Item Details Data length
Response Returns the bit write command. "92H" 1 byte
Error Returns the error code. (Refer to "Error codes" (page 18-12).) 1 byte
Empty Not used. "00H" is returned. 1 byte
Sequence No. Returns the sequence number. (Refer to "Sequence numbers" (page 18-11).) 1 byte
Sequence numbers
18
UDP Communication Function
Sequence numbers are used to correlate request commands and responses.
When a request command is sent with a specific number stored in a sequence number, the same number is returned to the
sequence number of the response.
Checking the sequence number enhances the safety of the communications.
GC Series User’s Manual 18-11
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Error codes
Error code Details
00H Normal response
01H The GC main controller cannot execute the command.
02H The command was sent to the wrong address.
03H The parameter of the sent command is incorrect.
04H The data length of the sent command is insufficient.
FFH Command analysis error
18
UDP Communication Function
18-12 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Parameter List
Word address
To use the following UDP commands, use the word address parameter:
• 80H: Word read
• 81H: Multi-word read
• 90H: Word write
• 91H: Multi-word write
Address Bit
Data
Item Details Attribute Value address
DEC HEX type
availability
bit 0: Communication input bit 0
Communication input [0:00] 0: OFF
256 100H WORD R/W
to [0:15] Indicates the status of the 1: ON
communication inputs. bit 1: Communication input bit 1
When a bit is turned ON, the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... ...
corresponding 1: ON
communication input is ...
Communication input [3:00] turned ON. bit 15: Communication input bit 15
259 103H WORD R/W
to [3:15] 0: OFF
1: ON
Enablement code of
260 104H Indicates the status of the UINT R/W
communication input [0:00]
enablement code.
... ... ... The upper eight bits are ... ... 0000H to 00FFH
ignored.
Enablement code of
289 121H (Range: 1 to 255) UINT R/W
communication input [1:13]
290 122H System reserved
291 123H System reserved
PLC text, 1st character, 2nd Displays the status of the
292 124H STRING R/W
character PLC text.
The first character is set in the
... ... ... ... ... 0000H to FFFFH
low byte while the second
PLC text, 19th character, 20th character is set in the high
301 12DH STRING R/W
character byte in the ASCII code format.
Number of connected units Indicates the number of
512 200H UINT R 0 to 65535
(expansion unit) connected expansion units.
Number of connected units Indicates the number of
513 201H UINT R 0 to 65535
(remote I/O module) connected remote I/O modules.
Model information (main bit 0 to 7: Unit model
514 202H WORD R
controller) 1: GC-1000
2: GC-1000R
515 203H
Model information (1st
expansion unit)
WORD R 3: GC-S84
4: GC-S16
18
5: GC-S1R
UDP Communication Function
... ... ... ... ...
6: GC-A16
Model information (10th
524 20CH WORD R 7: GC-R45
expansion unit)
8: GC-R48
Indicates the connected unit
Model information (1st bit 8: Positional relationship to the
525 20DH model. WORD R
remote I/O module) GC-B30
0: Unit positioned before the
... ... ... ... ... GC-B30
1: Unit positioned after the GC-
B30
Model information (4th If the GC-B30 does not exist in
528 210H WORD R
remote I/O module) the unit configuration, all units
are set to 0.
bit 9 to 15: System reserved (fixed to 0)
529 211H System reserved
GC Series User’s Manual 18-13
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Bit
Data
Item Details Attribute Value address
DEC HEX type
availability
530 212H Operation time, Byte 0, Byte 1 Indicates the time elapsed WORD R 0 to FFFFH
since the start of the unit in
531 213H Operation time, Byte 2, Byte 3 units of 10 ms. WORD R 0 to FFFFH
bit 0: RUN state
0: The unit is stopped.
1: The unit is running.
bit 1: Abnormal state
0: Normal
Indicates the operating state
532 214H GC operating state WORD R 1: Abnormal
of the GC.
* An abnormal state means that
at least one alert or error is
occurring.
bit 2 to 15: System reserved (fixed
to 0)
Indicates the number of
Number of errors that
533 215H errors that are currently UINT R 0 to 30
occurred
occurring.
Indicates the code of the
Main code of the (1st) error
534 216H error that is currently UINT R
code
occurring.
Error codes are sorted in the
Detailed code of the (1st) following order:
535 217H UINT R
error code (1) Errors are sorted in
order of Error, Alert,
... ... ... and Info, starting from ... ...
the first error.
0 to 65535
Main code of the (30th) error (2) Errors are sorted by
592 250H UINT R
code error category in the
order that they
occurred.
The high byte represents the
Detailed code of the (30th) main code while the low byte
593 251H UINT R
error code represents the detailed code.
"Alert/Error list" (page A-
7)
Communication output [0:00] Indicates the output status of
594 252H WORD R
to [0:15] the communication outputs. bit 0: Communication output bit 0
When a communication bit 1: Communication output bit 1
... ... ... ... ...
output is turned ON, the ...
Communication output [3:00] corresponding bit is turned bit 15: Communication output bit 15
597 255H WORD R
to [3:15] ON.
bit 0 to 3: GC-Link port A
connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 4 to 7: GC-Link port A error
status
0000: No error
18 598 256H GC-Link port status
Indicates the GC-Link port
status.
WORD R
0001: Communication error
bit 8 to 11: GC-Link port B
UDP Communication Function
connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 12 to 15: GC-Link port B error
status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
0: Not connected
Indicates the number of GL-R 1: Main unit only
GC-Link port A GL-R
768 300H units connected to the GC- UINT R 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
Number of connected units
Link port A. 3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit
2
769 301H System reserved
18-14 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Bit
Data
Item Details Attribute Value address
DEC HEX type
availability
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
770 302H UINT R
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
Indicates the type of the GL-
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
771 303H R connected to the GC-Link UINT R
Sub unit 1 type 2: Type H
port A.
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
772 304H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port A GL-R
773 305H Number of optical axes of the UINT R 0 to 127
main unit
Indicates the number of
GC-Link port A GL-R
optical axes of the GL-R
774 306H Number of optical axes of UINT R 0 to 127
connected to the GC-Link
sub unit 1
port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R
775 307H Number of optical axes of UINT R 0 to 127
sub unit 2
Indicates the setting switch
status of the GL-R (receiver)
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R connected to the GC-Link
bit 1: Switch 2
776 308H Main controller setting switch port A. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned
bit 5: Switch 6
ON, the corresponding bit is
turned ON.
777 309H System reserved
GC-Link port A GL-R
Received-light-amount, Main bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
778 30AH WORD R
unit, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
779 30BH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
841 349H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
842 34AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, WORD R
Indicates the received-light- bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis amount of each optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R of the GL-R connected to the
843 34BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1,
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
GC-Link port A.
The received-light-amount
WORD R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis 18
range is 0 to 63.
UDP Communication Function
... ... ... The high byte of the 127th ... ...
optical axis is always 0.
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
905 389H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
906 38AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
907 38BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
969 3C9H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis
GC Series User’s Manual 18-15
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Bit
Data
Item Details Attribute Value address
DEC HEX type
availability
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st
optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
970 3CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R 2nd optical axis
optical axis [15:0] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the
16th optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF
information of each optical bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
axis of the GL-R connected 17th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R to the GC-Link port A. bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
971 3CBH ON/OFF information of each A sub unit is placed with the WORD R 18th optical axis
optical axis [31:16] bits following the optical axis ...
of the last unit. bit 15: ON/OFF information of the
The ON/OFF logic is inverted 32nd optical axis
... ... ... for an optical axis configured ... ...
with fixed blanking.
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
225th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
984 3D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R 226th optical axis
optical axis [239:224] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the
240th optical axis
Indicates the error status of
GC-Link port A GL-R 0: No error
985 3D9H the GL-R connected to the WORD R
Error status 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port A.
Indicates the OSSD output
GC-Link port A GL-R 0: OFF
986 3DAH status of the GL-R connected WORD R
OSSD output status 1: ON
to the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the enablement status
Received-light-amount of the received-light-amount 0: Disabled
987 3DBH WORD R
decrease alert enablement decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Enabled
status connected to the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection status of
Received-light-amount the received-light-amount 0: No alert
988 3DCH WORD R
decrease alert detection decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Alert occurring
status connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the detection
GC-Link port A GL-R
threshold of the received-light-
Received-light-amount
989 3DDH amount decrease alert of the UINT R 0 to 100
decrease alert detection
GL-R connected to the GC-
threshold
Link port A in percentage.
Indicates the detection time of 0: No set
GC-Link port A GL-R
the received-light-amount 1: 5 sec
990 3DEH Received-light-amount UINT R
decrease alert of the GL-R 2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time
connected to the GC-Link port A. 3: 5 min
Indicates the number of GS/GS-M
18 1024 400H
GC-Link port A GS
Number of connected units
units connected to the GC-Link
port A.
UINT R 0 to 16
UDP Communication Function
bit 0 to 2: Model information
000: GS-10
GC-Link port A GS
1025 401H WORD R 001: GS-50
Model information (1st unit)
011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
GC-Link port A GS Indicates the model
1026 402H WORD R bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
Model information (2nd unit) information of the GS/GS-M
00: Normal operation (Default)
connected to the GC-Link
01: OFF
port A.
10: OFF when GS is closed
... ... ... ... ... (locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
bit 6: Coding level settings
GC-Link port A GS
1040 410H WORD R 0: Low (multi operation)
Model information (16th unit)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
18-16 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Bit
Data
Item Details Attribute Value address
DEC HEX type
availability
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status
1: ON
GC-Link port A GS and lock control status of the
1041 411H WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status GS/GS-M connected to the
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port A.
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
Indicates the open/close bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
GC-Link port A GS state of each GS/GS-M 0: Open
1042 412H WORD R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link 1: Close
port A. ...
bit 15: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
Indicates the lock status of
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
each GS/GS-M connected to
GC-Link port A GS 0: Unlocked
1043 413H the GC-Link port A. WORD R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
...
contact type.
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
GC-Link port A GS 0: Open
1044 414H WORD R
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port A GS Indicates the detailed 1: Locked
1045 415H information of the GS/GS-M WORD R bit 2: Red LED display status
2nd unit status
connected to the GC-Link 0: OFF
port A. 1: ON
... ... ... ... ... bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port A GS 1: ON
1059 423H WORD R
16th unit status
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
0: Not connected
Indicates the number of GL-R
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Main unit only
1280 500H units connected to the GC- UINT R
Number of connected units 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
Link port B.
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit 2
1281 501H System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
1282 502H
Main unit type
UINT R
2: Type H
3: Type L
18
UDP Communication Function
0: Not connected
Indicates the type of the GL-
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
1283 503H R connected to the GC-Link UINT R
Sub unit 1 type 2: Type H
port B.
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
1284 504H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port B GL-R
1285 505H UINT R 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of the main unit
Indicates the number of
GC-Link port B GL-R optical axes of the GL-R
1286 506H UINT R 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of sub unit 1 connected to the GC-Link
port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R
1287 507H UINT R 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of sub unit 2
GC Series User’s Manual 18-17
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Bit
Data
Item Details Attribute Value address
DEC HEX type
availability
Indicates the setting switch
status of the GL-R (receiver)
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R connected to the GC-Link
bit 1: Switch 2
1288 508H Main controller setting switch port B. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned
bit 5: Switch 6
ON, the corresponding bit is
turned ON.
1289 509H System reserved
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1290 50AH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1291 50BH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1353 549H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1354 54AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis Indicates the received-light-
GC-Link port B GL-R amount of each optical axis
of the GL-R connected to the bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1355 54BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, WORD R
GC-Link port B. bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
The received-light-amount
... ... ... range is 0 to 63. ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R The high byte of the 127th
optical axis is always 0. bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1417 589H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1418 58AH WORD R
unit 2, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1419 58BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1481 5C9H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
1482 5CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R 2nd optical axis
18 optical axis [15:0] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the
16th optical axis
UDP Communication Function
Indicates the ON/OFF
information of each optical bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
axis of the GL-R connected 17th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R to the GC-Link port B. bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
1483 5CBH ON/OFF information of each A sub unit is placed with the WORD R 18th optical axis
optical axis [31:16] bits following the optical axis ...
of the last unit. bit 15: ON/OFF information of the
The ON/OFF logic is inverted 32nd optical axis
... ... ... for an optical axis configured ... ... ...
with fixed blanking.
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the
225th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the
1496 5D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R 226th optical axis
optical axis [239:224] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the
240th optical axis
18-18 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Bit
Data
Item Details Attribute Value address
DEC HEX type
availability
Indicates the error status of
GC-Link port B GL-R 0: No error
1497 5D9H the GL-R connected to the WORD R
Error status 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port B.
Indicates the OSSD output
GC-Link port B GL-R 0: OFF
1498 5DAH status of the GL-R connected WORD R
OSSD output status 1: ON
to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the enablement
GC-Link port B GL-R
status of the received-light-
Received-light-amount 0: Disabled
1499 5DBH amount decrease alert of the WORD R
decrease alert enablement 1: Enabled
GL-R connected to the GC-
status
Link port B.
Indicates the detection status
GC-Link port B GL-R
of the received-light-amount
Received-light-amount 0: No alert
1500 5DCH decrease alert of the GL-R WORD R
decrease alert detection 1: Alert occurring
connected to the GC-Link
status
port B.
Indicates the detection
GC-Link port B GL-R threshold of the received-
Received-light-amount light-amount decrease alert
1501 5DDH UINT R 0 to 100
decrease alert detection of the GL-R connected to the
threshold GC-Link port B in
percentage.
Indicates the detection time
0: No set
GC-Link port B GL-R of the received-light-amount
1: 5 sec
1502 5DEH Received-light-amount decrease alert of the GL-R UINT R
2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time connected to the GC-Link
3: 5 min
port B.
Indicates the number of GS/
GC-Link port B GS
1536 600H GS-M units connected to the UINT R 0 to 16
Number of connected units
GC-Link port B.
bit 0 to 2: Model information
000: GS-10
GC-Link port B GS
1537 601H WORD R 001: GS-50
Model information (1st unit)
011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
GC-Link port B GS Indicates the model
1538 602H WORD R bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
Model information (2nd unit) information of the GS/GS-M
00: Normal operation (Default)
connected to the GC-Link
01: OFF
port B.
10: OFF when GS is closed
... ... ... ... ... (locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
bit 6: Coding level settings
GC-Link port B GS
1552 610H WORD R 0: Low (multi operation)
Model information (16th unit)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
18
Indicates the OSSD status
UDP Communication Function
1: ON
GC-Link port B GS and lock control status of the
1553 611H WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status GS/GS-M connected to the
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port B.
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
Indicates the open/close bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
GC-Link port B GS state of each GS/GS-M 0: Open
1554 612H WORD R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link 1: Close
port B. ...
bit 15: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
GC Series User’s Manual 18-19
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Bit
Data
Item Details Attribute Value address
DEC HEX type
availability
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
Indicates the lock status of
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
each GS/GS-M connected to
GC-Link port B GS 0: Unlocked
1555 613H the GC-Link port B. WORD R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
...
contact type.
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
GC-Link port B GS 0: Open
1556 614H WORD R
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port B GS Indicates the detailed 1: Locked
1557 615H WORD R
2nd unit status information of the GS/GS-M bit 2: Red LED display status
connected to the GC-Link 0: OFF
... ... ... port B. ... ... 1: ON
bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port B GS 1: ON
1571 623H WORD R
16th unit status
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
1792 700H Project name, 1st character STRING R
Indicates the project name of
... ... the configuration file (UTF- ... ...
16).
1855 73FH Project name, 64th character STRING R
1856 740H System reserved
Configuration CRC, 1st
1857 741H STRING R
character
Indicates the configuration
... ... CRC of the configuration file ... ...
(UTF-16).
Configuration CRC, 8th
1864 748H STRING R
character
1865 749H System reserved
Date and time of transfer, 1st
1866 74AH STRING R
character
Indicates the date and time
... ... of transfer of the ... ...
configuration file (UTF-16).
Date and time of transfer,
1885 75DH STRING R
20th character
1886 75EH System reserved
2048 800H Input status (GC-Link port) WORD R
2049 801H Input status (main controller) WORD R
18 2050
...
802H
...
Input status (1st expansion unit)
...
WORD
...
R
...
UDP Communication Function
2059 80BH Input status (10th expansion unit) WORD R
Input status (1st remote I/O
2060 80CH WORD R
module)
... ... ... ... ...
Indicates the input/output
Input status (4th remote I/O status of each unit.* 1
2063 80FH WORD R
module)
2064 810H Output status (GC-Link port) WORD R
2065 811H Output status (main controller) WORD R
Output status (1st expansion
2066 812H WORD R
unit)
... ... ... ... ...
Output status (10th
2075 81BH WORD R
expansion unit)
18-20 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Bit
Data
Item Details Attribute Value address
DEC HEX type
availability
Output status (1st remote I/O
2076 81CH WORD R
module)
Indicates the input/output
... ... ... ... ...
status of each unit.* 1
Output status (4th remote I/O
2079 81FH WORD R
module)
Indicates the number of
2304 900H Number of used blocks UINT R 0 to 500
blocks used by the program.
2305 901H Block output status (Block ID 1) WORD R
Indicates the output status of
... ... ... ... ...
each block used by the
Block output status (Block ID program.* 2
2804 AF4H WORD R
500)
Indicates the number of error
2816 B00H Number of error histories UINT R 0 to 100
histories.
Indicates the error code of
1st error history, Error code,
2817 B01H the 1st error history. UINT R 0 to 99
Main code
Error histories are sorted in
newest-first chronological
order.
1st error history, Error code,
2818 B02H "Alert/Error list" (page A- UINT R 0 to 9999
Detailed code
7)
1st error history, Operation Indicates the time elapsed
2819 B03H WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, Low since the start of the GC
1st error history, Operation Series when the error was
2820 B04H detected in seconds. WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, High
... ... ... ... ... ...
100th error history, Error
3213 C8DH UINT R 0 to 99
code, Main code Indicates the error code of
100th error history, Error the 100th error history.
3214 C8EH UINT R 0 to 9999
code, Detailed code
100th error history, Operation Indicates the time elapsed
3215 C8FH WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, Low since the start of the GC
100th error history, Operation Series when the error was
3216 C90H detected in seconds. WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, High
*1 For the bit assignment of each unit, refer to "Input/output status assignment by unit" (page 18-30).
*2 Check the block ID in the GC Configurator report. For the bit assignment of each block, refer to "Output status assignment by block"
(page 18-32).
18
UDP Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 18-21
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Bit address
To use the following UDP commands, use the bit address parameter:
• 82H: Bit read
• 92H: Bit write
Address Corresponding word address
Data Attri
Bit Item Details Value
DEC HEX type bute
position
4096 1000H 0 [0:00] Bit R/W
Communication input [0:00] to
... ... ... ... Bit R/W
[0:15]
Indicates the status of the
4111 100FH 15 [0:15] Bit R/W
communication inputs.
0: OFF
... ... ... ... ... When a bit is turned ON, the Bit R/W
1: ON
corresponding communication
4144 1030H 0 [3:00] Bit R/W
input is turned ON.
Communication input [3:00] to
... ... ... ... Bit R/W
[3:15]
4159 103FH 15 [3:15] Bit R/W
0: The unit is
stopped.
8512 2140H 0 RUN state Indicates the RUN state of the GC. Bit R
1: The unit is
running.
GC operating state
Indicates the abnormal state of the
GC. 0: Normal
8513 2141H 1 Abnormal state Bit R
An abnormal state means that at 1: Abnormal
least one alert or error is occurring.
9504 2520H 0 Communication output [0:00] Bit R
Communication output [0:00]
... ... ... ... Bit R
to [0:15]
Indicates the output status of the
9519 252FH 15 Communication output [0:15] Bit R
communication outputs.
0: OFF
... ... ... ... ... When a communication output is Bit R
1: ON
turned ON, the corresponding bit
9552 2550H 0 Communication output [3:00] Bit R
is turned ON.
Communication output [3:00]
... ... ... ... Bit R
to [3:15]
9567 255F 15 Communication output [3:15] Bit R
GC-Link port A GL-R
12416 3080H 0 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R
12417 3081H 1 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 2
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the setting switch status
12418 3082H 2 Main controller setting switch of the GL-R (receiver) connected Bit R
GC-Link port A GL-R settings, Switch 3 to the GC-Link port A. 0: OFF
Main controller setting switch
GC-Link port A GL-R When each switch is turned ON, 1: ON
settings
18 12419 3083H 3 Main controller setting switch
settings, Switch 4
the corresponding bit is turned
ON.
Bit R
UDP Communication Function
GC-Link port A GL-R
12420 3084H 4 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 5
GC-Link port A GL-R
12421 3085H 5 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 6
18-22 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Corresponding word address
Data Attri
Bit Item Details Value
DEC HEX type bute
position
GC-Link port A GL-R
15520 3CA0H 0 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
optical axis, 1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
... ... ON/OFF information of each ... ... Bit R
optical axis [15:0]
GC-Link port A GL-R
Indicates the ON/OFF information
15535 3CAFH 15 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
of each optical axis of the GL-R
optical axis, 16th optical axis
connected to the GC-Link port A.
... ... ... ... ... A sub unit is placed with the offset Bit R
0: OFF
following the optical axis of the last
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: ON
unit.
ON/OFF information of each
15744 3D80H 0 The ON/OFF logic is inverted for Bit R
optical axis, 225th optical
an optical axis configured with
axis
GC-Link port A GL-R fixed blanking.
... ... ON/OFF information of each ... ... Bit R
optical axis [239:224]
GC-Link port A GL-R
ON/OFF information of each
15759 3D8FH 15 Bit R
optical axis, 240th optical
axis
Indicates the error status of the
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R 0: No error
15760 3D90H 0 GL-R connected to the GC-Link Bit R
Error status Error status 1: Error occurring
port A.
Indicates the OSSD output status
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R 0: OFF
15776 3DA0H 0 of the GL-R connected to the GC- Bit R
OSSD output status OSSD output status 1: ON
Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the enablement status of
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount the received-light-amount 0: Disabled
15792 3DB0H 0 Bit R
decrease alert enablement decrease alert enablement decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Enabled
status status connected to the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection status of
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount the received-light-amount 0: No alert
15808 3DC0H 0 Bit R
decrease alert detection decrease alert detection decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Alert occurring
status status connected to the GC-Link port A.
16400 4010H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information of 001:GS-50
GC-Link port A GS
16401 4011H 1 the 1st GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R 011:GS-70
1st GS model information
GC-Link port A. 100:GS-M5/9
16402 4012H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
16403 4013H 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
GC-Link port A GS
16404 4014H Model information (1st unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
16405 4015H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
0: Low (multi
Indicates the coding level settings
GC-Link port A GS operation)
16406 4016H 6 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
1st GS coding level settings 1: High (unique
the GC-Link port A.
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R
operation)
...
18
UDP Communication Function
16640 4100H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information of 001:GS-50
GC-Link port A GS
16641 4101H 1 the 16th GS/GS-M connected to Bit R 011:GS-70
16th GS model information
the GC-Link port A. 100:GS-M5/9
16642 4102H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
16643 4103H 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
GC-Link port A GS
16644 4104H Model information (16th unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
16645 4105H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
0: Low (multi
Indicates the coding level settings
GC-Link port A GS operation)
16646 4106H 6 of the 16th GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
16th GS coding level settings 1: High (unique
the GC-Link port A.
operation)
GC Series User’s Manual 18-23
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Corresponding word address
Data Attri
Bit Item Details Value
DEC HEX type bute
position
Indicates the OSSD status of the GS/
GC-Link port A GS 0: OFF
16656 4110H 0 GS-M connected to the GC-Link port Bit R
OSSD status 1: ON
GC-Link port A GS A.
OSSD/lock control status Indicates the OSSD status and
GC-Link port A GS 0: Unlocked
16657 4111H 1 lock control status of the GS/GS-M Bit R
Lock control status 1: Locked
connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the open/close state of
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Open
16672 4120H 0 the 1st GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Open/close state
Indicates the open/close state of
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Open
16687 412FH 15 the 16th GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the lock status of the 1st
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Unlocked
16688 4130H 0 Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
GC-Link port A GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Lock status
Indicates the lock status of the
16th GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Unlocked
16703 413FH 15 GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
Indicates the open/close state of
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Open
16704 4140H 0 the 1st GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
GC-Link port A.
Indicates the lock status of the 1st
GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Unlocked
16705 4141H 1 GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
GC-Link port A GS This is always 0 for the non-
1st unit status contact type.
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: OFF
16706 4142H 2 status of the 1st GS/GS-M Bit R
Red LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the green LED display
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: OFF
16707 4143H 3 status of the 1st GS/GS-M Bit R
Green LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port A.
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Indicates the open/close state of
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Open
16944 4230H 0 the 16th GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the lock status of the 16th
18 16945 4231H 1
GC-Link port A 16th GS
Lock status
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
port A.
Bit R
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
GC-Link port A GS This is always 0 for the non-contact type.
UDP Communication Function
16th unit status
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: OFF
16946 4232H 2 status of the 16th GS/GS-M Bit R
Red LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the green LED display
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: OFF
16947 4233H 3 status of the 16th GS/GS-M Bit R
Green LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port A.
18-24 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Corresponding word address
Data Attri
Bit Item Details Value
DEC HEX type bute
position
GC-Link port B GL-R
20608 5080H 0 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R
20609 5081H 1 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 2
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the setting switch status
20610 5082H 2 Main controller setting switch of the GL-R (receiver) connected Bit R
GC-Link port B GL-R settings, Switch 3 to the GC-Link port B. 0: OFF
Main controller setting switch
GC-Link port B GL-R When each switch is turned ON, 1: ON
settings
20611 5083H 3 Main controller setting switch the corresponding bit is turned Bit R
settings, Switch 4 ON.
GC-Link port B GL-R
20612 5084H 4 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 5
GC-Link port B GL-R
20613 5085H 5 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 6
GC-Link port B GL-R
23712 5CA0H 0 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
optical axis, 1st optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
... ... ON/OFF information of each ... ... Bit R
optical axis [15:0] Indicates the ON/OFF information
GC-Link port B GL-R
of each optical axis of the GL-R
23727 5CAFH 15 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
connected to the GC-Link port B.
optical axis, 16th optical axis
A sub unit is placed with the offset
0: OFF
... ... ... ... ... following the optical axis of the last Bit R
1: ON
unit.
GC-Link port B GL-R
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for
23936 5D80H 0 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
an optical axis configured with
optical axis, 225th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R fixed blanking.
... ... ON/OFF information of each ... ... Bit R
optical axis [239:224]
GC-Link port B GL-R
23951 5D8FH 15 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
optical axis, 240th optical axis
Indicates the error status of the
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R 0: No error
23952 5D90H 0 GL-R connected to the GC-Link Bit R
Error status Error status 1: Error occurring
port B.
Indicates the OSSD output status
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R 0: OFF
23968 5DA0H 0 of the GL-R connected to the GC- Bit R
OSSD output status OSSD output status 1: ON
Link port B.
Indicates the enablement status of
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R
the received-light-amount 0: Disabled
23984 5DB0H Received-light-amount decrease 0 Received-light-amount decrease Bit R
decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Enabled
alert enablement status alert enablement status
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R
connected to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the detection status of
18
UDP Communication Function
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount the received-light-amount 0: No alert
24000 5DC0H 0 Bit R
decrease alert detection decrease alert detection decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Alert occurring
status status connected to the GC-Link port B.
24592 6010H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information of 001:GS-50
GC-Link port B GS
24593 6011H 1 the 1st GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R 011:GS-70
1st GS model information
GC-Link port B. 100:GS-M5/9
24594 6012H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
24595 6013H 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
GC-Link port B GS
24596 6014H Model information (1st unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
24597 6015H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
0: Low (multi
Indicates the coding level settings
GC-Link port B GS operation)
24598 6016H 6 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
1st GS coding level settings 1: High (unique
the GC-Link port B.
operation)
GC Series User’s Manual 18-25
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Corresponding word address
Data Attri
Bit Item Details Value
DEC HEX type bute
position
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
24832 6100H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information of 001:GS-50
GC-Link port B GS
24833 6101H 1 the 16th GS/GS-M connected to Bit R 011:GS-70
16th GS model information
the GC-Link port B. 100:GS-M5/9
24834 6102H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
24835 6103H 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
GC-Link port B GS
24836 6104H Model information (16th unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
24837 6105H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
0: Low (multi
Indicates the coding level settings
GC-Link port B GS operation)
24838 6106H 6 of the 16th GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
16th GS coding level settings 1: High (unique
the GC-Link port B.
operation)
Indicates the OSSD status of the
GC-Link port B GS 0: OFF
24848 6110H 0 GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R
OSSD status 1: ON
GC-Link port B GS GC-Link port B.
OSSD/lock control status Indicates the lock control status of
GC-Link port B GS 0: Unlocked
24849 6111H 1 the GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R
Lock control status 1: Locked
GC-Link port B.
Indicates the open/close state of
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Open
24864 6120H 0 the 1st GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Open/close state
Indicates the open/close state of
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Open
24879 612FH 15 the 16th GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the lock status of the 1st
GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Unlocked
24880 6130H 0 GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
GC-Link port B GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Lock status
Indicates the lock status of the
16th GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Unlocked
24895 613FH 15 GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
Indicates the open/close state of
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Open
24896 6140H 0 the 1st GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
GC-Link port B.
Indicates the lock status of the 1st
GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Unlocked
18 24897 6141H
GC-Link port B GS
1
Lock status
GC-Link port B.
This is always 0 for the non-
Bit R
1: Locked
1st unit status contact type.
UDP Communication Function
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: OFF
24898 6142H 2 status of the 1st GS/GS-M Bit R
Red LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the green LED display
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: OFF
24899 6143H 3 status of the 1st GS/GS-M Bit R
Green LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port B.
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
18-26 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Corresponding word address
Data Attri
Bit Item Details Value
DEC HEX type bute
position
Indicates the open/close state of
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Open
25136 6230H 0 the 16th GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the lock status of the
16th GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Unlocked
25137 6231H 1 GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
GC-Link port B GS This is always 0 for the non-
16th unit status contact type.
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: OFF
25138 6232H 2 status of the 16th GS/GS-M Bit R
Red LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the green LED display
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: OFF
25139 6233H 3 status of the 16th GS/GS-M Bit R
Green LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port B.
Input status (GC-Link port)
32768 8000H 0 Bit R
bit 0
Indicates the input status of the 0: OFF
... ... Input status (GC-Link port) ... ... Bit R
GC-Link port.* 1 1: ON
Input status (GC-Link port)
32783 800FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
Input status (main controller)
32784 8010H 0 Bit R
bit 0
Displays the input status of the 0: OFF
... ... Input status (main controller) ... ... Bit R
main controller.* 1 1: ON
Input status (main controller)
32799 801FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
Input status (1st expansion
32800 8020H 0 Bit R
unit) bit 0
Input status (1st expansion Indicates the input status of the 1st 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
unit) expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Input status (1st expansion
32815 802FH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Input status (10th expansion
32944 80B0H 0 Bit R
unit) bit 0
Input status (10th expansion Indicates the input status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
unit) 10th expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Input status (10th expansion
32959 80BFH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
18
UDP Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 18-27
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Corresponding word address
Data Attri
Bit Item Details Value
DEC HEX type bute
position
Input status (1st remote I/O
32960 80C0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Input status (1st remote I/O Indicates the input status of the 1st 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
module) remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Input status (1st remote I/O
32975 80CFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Input status (4th remote I/O
33008 80F0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Input status (4th remote I/O Indicates the input status of the 4th 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
module) remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Input status (4th remote I/O
33023 80FFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
Output status (GC-Link port)
33024 8100H 0 Bit R
bit 0
Indicates the output status of the 0: OFF
... ... Output status (GC-Link port) ... ... Bit R
GC-Link port.* 1 1: ON
Output status (GC-Link port)
33039 810FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
Output status (main
33040 8110H 0 Bit R
controller) bit 0
Displays the output status of the 0: OFF
... ... Output status (main controller) ... ... Bit R
main controller.* 1 1: ON
Output status (main
33055 811FH 15 Bit R
controller) bit 15
Output status (1st expansion
33056 8120H 0 Bit R
unit) bit 0
Output status (1st expansion Indicates the output status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
unit) 1st expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Output status (1st expansion
33071 812FH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Output status (10th
33200 81B0H 0 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 0
Output status (10th expansion Indicates the output status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
unit) 10th expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Output status (10th
33215 81BFH 15 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 15
Output status (1st remote I/O
33216 81C0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Output status (1st remote I/O Indicates the output status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
module) 1st remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Output status (1st remote I/O
33231 81CFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
18 33264 81F0H 0
Output status (4th remote I/O
module) bit 0
Bit R
UDP Communication Function
Output status (4th remote I/O Indicates the output status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
module) 4th remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Output status (4th remote I/O
33279 81FFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
Block output status (Block ID
36880 9010H 0 Bit R
1) bit 0
Block output status (Block ID Indicates the output status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
1) Block ID 1 block.* 2 1: ON
Block output status (Block ID
36895 901FH 15 Bit R
1) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
18-28 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Address Corresponding word address
Data Attri
Bit Item Details Value
DEC HEX type bute
position
Block output status (Block ID
44864 AF40H 0 Bit R
500) bit 0
Block output status (Block ID Indicates the output status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
500) Block ID 500 block.* 2 1: ON
Block output status (Block ID
44879 AF4FH 15 Bit R
500) bit 15
*1 For the bit assignment of each unit, refer to "Input/output status assignment by unit" (page 18-30).
*2 Check the block ID in the GC Configurator report. For the bit assignment of each block, refer to "Output status assignment by block"
(page 18-32).
18
UDP Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 18-29
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Input/output status assignment by unit
Input status (GC-Link port)
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Port B Port A Port B Port A
Reserved
Ai Ai Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-1000R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-S16
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (nth remote I/O module)
GC-R45/R48
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
Ai Ai Ai Ai Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (GC-Link port)
18 bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
UDP Communication Function
Port B Port A
Reserved
Ao1 Ao0 Ao1 Ao0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
18-30 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Output status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 So5 So4 So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-1000R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 SRo So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-S1R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved SRo
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-A16
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Ao15 Ao14 Ao13 Ao12 Ao11 Ao10 Ao9 Ao8 Ao7 Ao6 Ao5 Ao4 Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (nth remote I/O module)
GC-R45
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
Ao Ao Ao Ao
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-R48
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
So So So So
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON 18
UDP Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 18-31
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Output status assignment by block
Block name Bit assignment
Emergency stop switch
Limit switch
Interlock switch
Guard locking switch
GS/GS-M Series [KEYENCE]
Light curtain
GL-R Series [KEYENCE]
GL-S Series [KEYENCE]
Safety input devices Laser scanner bit 0: Output
SZ-V Series [KEYENCE]
SZ Series [KEYENCE]
Rope pull switch
Safety mat
Input devices
Two hand control device
Enabling device
Other safety switch
Other safety input
Reset switch bit 0: Output
bit 0: Mode Output 1
Mode selecting switch bit 1: Mode Output 2
bit 2: Error
EDM input
Other input devices
Muting input
Safety plug
bit 0: Output
Hold-to-run switch
Other switch
Other input
18
UDP Communication Function
18-32 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety 1 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
S-OUT bit 6: EDM2 Error
S-OUT EDM enabled bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety outputs Safety 2 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
Output devices
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output)
bit 3: Error Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output) EDM enabled
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
Other outputs AUX-OUT bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
Enablement code disabled bit 0: Output
Reset input (COM) bit 0: Output
Communication input
Other input (COM) Enablement code enabled bit1: Ready
Communications bit 2: Error
bit 0: Output
Communication output Communication output bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
Register (Load)
Register bit 0: Output
Register (Store)
GS closed state
bit 0: Output
GS locked state
Expansion blocks None
bit 0: Red
GS indicator control output bit 1: Green
bit 2: Output Error
GL-R received-light-amount decrease alert
Other input blocks
AUX-IN
OSSD 3/4
bit 0: Output 18
UDP Communication Function
IN
GC Series User’s Manual 18-33
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
Lock control 1 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
Unlock output
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
Lock control 2 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
bit 0: Red
Indicator control output bit 1: Green
bit 2: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
Independent bank
bit 2: Input Mismatch
bit 3: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
Other output blocks bit 3: Bank Output b
Single
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
bit 6: Input Mismatch
bit 7: Output Error
Bank switching output
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
bit 3: Bank Output b
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
Binary
bit 6: Bank Output D
bit 7: Bank Output d
bit 8: Bank Output E
bit 9: Bank Output e
bit 10: Input Mismatch
bit 11: Output Error
bit 0: Output
OUT bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
AND
AND (6-10 inputs)
OR
18 NOT
UDP Communication Function
NAND
Function blocks Logic bit 0: Output
NOR
XOR
SR Flip-Flop (Set has priority)
RS Flip-Flop (Reset has priority)
JK Flip-Flop
18-34 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
Reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
Reset (with AND)
bit 1: Reset Required
Reset bit 0: Output
Dual reset bit 1: Reset Required1
bit 2: Reset Required2
bit 0: Output
Existence detection reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Sequential muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Parallel muting
bit 3: Override Active
Function blocks bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting Cross-muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting for exit
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Position detection muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
18
UDP Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 18-35
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Master ON Ready
Master ON
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Unlock Output
Unlock control
bit 1: Unlock Required
bit 0: Output
Bypass
bit 1: Bypass Active
bit 0: Output
Application Control guard
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Break Required
PSDI control bit 3: Reset Required
bit 4: Normal Operation
bit 5: PSDI Error
bit 6: PSDI Timeout
bit 0: Input Bypass
bit 1: Output Enable
Manual mode control (MMC)
bit 2: Restart Required
bit 3: Manual Mode Active
Manual mode
Function blocks MMC input bypass bit 0: Output
MMC input bypass_ bit 0: Output
MMC output enable bit 0: Output
bit 0: Output
OFF-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
bit 0: Output
ON-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
Pulse generator bit 0: Output
bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
Up-down counter
bit 1: Reached Zero
Timers / Counters bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
bit 1: Reached Zero
bit 0: Output bit 2
bit 3: Output bit 1
bit 4: Output bit 2
Up-down counter (with binary output)
bit 5: Output bit 3
bit 6: Output bit 4
bit 7: Output bit 5
bit 8: Output bit 6
bit 9: Output bit 7
18
UDP Communication Function
18-36 GC Series User’s Manual
18-3 UDP Communication Commands
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Rising Edge
Edge detection
bit 1: Falling Edge
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Output3
bit 3: Output4
Binary decoder
bit 4: Output5
bit 5: Output6
bit 6: Output7
bit 7: Output8
bit 0: Output bit 0
bit 1: Output bit 1
Binary encoder
bit 2: Output bit 2
Function blocks Others
bit 3: Error
bit 0: Mode Output1
bit 1: Mode Output2
bit 2: Mode Output3
bit 3: Mode Output4
bit 4: Mode Output5
Mode changing control
bit 5: Mode Output6
bit 6: Mode Output7
bit 7: Mode Output8
bit 8: Mode Error
bit 9: Trigger Required
Selector (2 inputs) bit 0: Output
Selector (4 inputs) bit 1: Mode Error
Always ON
Always OFF
1 scan ON upon start-up
System Information
System blocks None bit 0: Output
Block information
Jump (Load)
Jump (Store)
Event history trigger
Other functions Recipe block AND (with connection constraint function) bit 0: Output
18
UDP Communication Function
GC Series User’s Manual 18-37
MEMO
18
UDP Communication Function
18-38 GC Series User’s Manual
19
Modbus/TCP
Communication
Function
This chapter describes the settings and functions of the Modbus/TCP communication function.
19-1 Overview of the Modbus/TCP Communication Function ...............................page 19-2
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications..................................page 19-3
19-3 Modbus/TCP Communication Settings ..........................................................page 19-12
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List...............................................................................page 19-13
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-1
Overview of the Modbus/TCP
19-1 Communication Function
All of the data received from the communication of the EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET, UDP, Modbus/TCP, or
DANGER MC protocol cannot be used for the safety related part of the control system. When used incorrectly,
there is a possibility that the operator of the device may be threatened with major injury or even death.
Point The Ethernet communication function is available only for the main controller "GC-1000".
Overview of the Modbus/TCP Communication Function
What is Modbus/TCP communication?
The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol developed by Modicon Inc. (AEG Schneider Automation International
S.A.S) for PLCs. With the specifications published, the Modbus protocol is so simple that it is widely used in the fields of FA
(Factory Automation) and PA (Process Automation), however there are no organizations for verification and certification.
Therefore, you need to verify the connectivity before use. Modbus is a trademark or registered trademark of Schneider
Automation Inc.
What you can do with Modbus/TCP communication
With Modbus/TCP communication, you can perform the following in the GC Series.
Item Modbus/TCP
communication
Write a communication input
Write an enablement code
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Write a character string that is stored into the history function
Read out a communication output
Read out an error code
Read out the unit configuration and model information
Read out the received-light-amount and ON/OFF state of the GL-R Series connected to a GC-Link port.
Read out the door open/close state and ON/OFF state of the GS/GS-M Series connected to a GC-Link port.
Read out the ON/OFF status of the main controller, expansion unit, and remote I/O module.
Read out the block status
Read out the error history
19
19-2 GC Series User’s Manual
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
19-2 Specifications
Modbus/TCP Communication Specifications
Item Specification
Communication media Ethernet 100BASE-TX
Communication mode TCP/IP
Supported configuration Server
Maximum number of concurrent connected clients 4
Port number 502 (fixed)
Command and Response Formats
Modbus/TCP frame format
Ethernet header IP header TCP header Application data
Application data format
In the Modbus/TCP frame format, the format of the application data part is as follows.
Transaction Protocol ID Data length Unit ID Function code Data part
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
ID
2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 4 to 251 bytes
Item Size Details
Transaction ID 2 bytes Used by the client to identify a response from the server (GC). The server copies the
request value from the client and stores it in the response.
Protocol ID 2 bytes Normally fixed to 0. The server (GC) copies the command value from the client and
stores it in the response.
Data length 2 bytes Stores the data size of this and subsequent areas in bytes.
Unit ID 1 byte The server (GC) copies the command value from the client and stores it in the response.
The client can specify any value, which does not affect a response to each command.
Normally, specify 1.
Function code 1 byte This is a function number that the client requests for the server (GC).
For the function codes supported by the GC Series, refer to the following.
19
When a response is returned from the server (GC), the completion state is added as
follows:
• Normal end: Stores the function code requested from the client.
• Abnormal end: Stores the function code requested from the client with the highest bit
ON (80H + function code).
Example: When the function code is 03H, 83H is stored.
Data part 4 to 251 bytes Transmits the data required to execute the requested process when the client sends a
request.
Returns the execution result of the requested process when the server (GC) returns a
response. For the data part format of each function code, refer to the following.
GC Series User’s Manual 19-3
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications
Modbus/TCP Function Codes
Supported function codes
The GC Series supports the following function codes:
Function code
Function Details
(hexadecimal)
01H Coil read Read coils.
02H Input read Read inputs.
03H Holding register read Read holding register values.
04H Input register read Read input register values.
*1
05H Coil single write Turn ON/OFF a signal coil.
06H Holding register single write*1 Write a value to a single holding register.
07H Exception status read 0 can be read in the GC Series.
10H Holding register sequential Write a value to as many holding registers as specified from a
write*1 specified address.
*1 When cyclic communication is performed, data cannot be written.
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
19
19-4 GC Series User’s Manual
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications
Function Code Details
The following describes the details of each function code used in Modbus/TCP communication.
In this section, the information of the parts following the "function code" of the "application data" in the command and
response formats is explained.
01H: Coil read
Read one or more coil states (ON/OFF).
Request command
Function Read start address Number of read addresses
01H Any value Any value
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 01H Coil read
Read start address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Specify the address to start reading the data from.
Number of read 2 bytes 1 to 2000 (bits) Specify the number of addresses (bits) to read the data
addresses from.
Response (normal state)
Function Number of Data 1 Data 2 ... Data n
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
bytes to
01H read
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Number of bytes to read: n
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 01H Coil read
Number of bytes to read 1 byte 0 to 250 bytes Returns the quotient of (Number of read addresses + 7)
/ 8.
Read data n byte(s) 00H to FFH Returns the 8-bit ON (1)/OFF (0) information as 1-byte
data.
Response (abnormal state)
19
Exception
81H
code
1 byte 1 byte
"Response exception codes"
GC Series User’s Manual 19-5
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications
02H: Input read
Read one or more input states (ON/OFF).
Request command
Function Read start address Number of read addresses
02H Any value Any value
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 02H Coil read
Read start address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Specify the address to start reading the data from.
Number of read 2 bytes 1 to 2000 (bits) Specify the number of addresses (bits) to read the data
addresses from.
Response (normal state)
Function Number of Data 1 Data 2 ... Data n
bytes to
02H read
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Number of bytes to read: n
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 02H Input read
Number of bytes to read 1 byte 0 to 250 bytes Returns the quotient of (Number of read addresses + 7)
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
/ 8.
Read data n byte(s) 00H to FFH Returns the 8-bit ON (1)/OFF (0) information as 1-byte
data.
Response (abnormal state)
Exception
82H code
1 byte 1 byte
"Response exception codes"
19
19-6 GC Series User’s Manual
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications
03H: Holding register read
Read one or multiple holding register values.
Request command
Function Read start address Number of read addresses
03H Any value Any value
1 byte 2 byte 2 byte
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 03H Holding register read
Read start address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Specify the address to start reading the data from.
Number of read 2 bytes 1 to 125 (words) Specify the number of addresses (words) to read the
addresses data from.
Response (normal state)
Function Number of Data 1 Data 2 ... Data n-1 Data n
bytes to
03H read (1st word) (n/2-th word)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Number of bytes to read: n
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 03H Holding register read
Number of bytes to read 1 byte 0 to 250 bytes Returns 2 to 250 (Number of read addresses x 2).
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Read data n byte(s) 00H to FFH Returns the read holding register value(s).
Response (abnormal state)
Exception
83H code
1 byte 1 byte
"Response exception codes"
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-7
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications
04H: Input register read
Read one or multiple input register values.
Request command
Function Read start address Number of read addresses
04H Any value Any value
1 byte 2 byte 2 byte
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 04H Input register read
Read start address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Specify the address to start reading the data from.
Number of read 2 bytes 1 to 125 (words) Specify the number of addresses (words) to read the
addresses data from.
Response (normal state)
Function Number of Data 1 Data 2 ... Data n-1 Data n
bytes to
04H read (1st word) (n/2-th word)
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Number of bytes to read: n
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 04H Input register read
Number of bytes to read 1 byte 0 to 250 bytes Returns 2 to 250 (Number of read addresses x 2).
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Read data n byte(s) 00H to FFH Returns the read input register value(s).
Response (abnormal state)
84H Exception
code
1 byte 1 byte
"Response exception codes"
19
19-8 GC Series User’s Manual
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications
05H: Coil single write
Write the coil state (ON/OFF) to a single coil.
Request command
Function Read start address Number of read addresses
05H Any value Any value
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 05H Coil single write
Write address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Specify the address to write the data to.
Write data 2 bytes OFF: 0 Specify the write data.
ON: Other than 0
Response (normal state)
Function Read start address Number of read addresses
05H Any value Any value
1 byte 2 byte 2 bytes
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 05H Coil single write
Write address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Returns the request command.
Write data 2 bytes OFF: 0
ON: Other than 0
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Response (abnormal state)
Exception
85H code
1 byte 1 byte
"Response exception codes"
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-9
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications
06H: Holding register single write
Write a value to a single holding register.
Request command
Function Write address Write data
06H Any value Any value
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 06H Holding register single write
Write address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Specify the address to write the data to.
Write data 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Specify the write data.
Response (normal state)
Function Write address Write data
06H Any value Any value
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 06H Holding register single write
Write address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Returns the request command.
Write data 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Response (abnormal state)
86H Exception
code
1 byte 1 byte
"Response exception codes"
19
19-10 GC Series User’s Manual
19-2 Modbus/TCP Communication Function Specifications
10H: Holding register continuous write
Write values to multiple holding registers.
Request command
Function Write start address Number of write addresses Number of Data 1 Data 2 ... Data n-1 Data n
bytes to
10H Any value Any value write (1st word) (n/2-th word)
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Number of bytes to write: n
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 10H Holding register sequential write
Write start address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Specify the address to start writing the data to.
Number of write 2 bytes 1 to 123 (words) Specify the number of addresses (words) to write the
addresses data to.
Number of bytes to write 1 byte 2 to 246 bytes Specify the (number of write addresses x 2).
Write data n byte(s) 00H to FFH Specify each byte of 1-word data in order from high to
low.
Response (normal state)
Function Write start address Number of write addresses
10H Any value Any value
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Item Size Data range Details
Function code 1 byte 10H Holding register sequential write
Write start address 2 bytes 0 to 65535 bytes Returns the request command.
Number of write 2 bytes 1 to 123 bytes
addresses
Response (abnormal state)
90H Exception
code
1 byte 1 byte
"Response exception codes"
19
Response exception codes
Exception code (H) Description
01 The received function code is not supported.
02 The specified address is not supported.
03 The specified number of addresses is not supported. Otherwise, the specified number of addresses
extends over the address area outside the valid area.
GC Series User’s Manual 19-11
19-3 Modbus/TCP Communication Settings
Modbus/TCP Communication Settings
GC Configurator settings
[Setting procedure]
Basic Ethernet settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and configure the basic Ethernet settings.
"15-2 GC Configurator Settings" (page 15-3)
Modbus/TCP settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [Modbus/TCP] to the screen to register.
Registering communication inputs and communication outputs
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [Communication input] and [Communication output] to
the screen to register.
"15-2 GC Configurator Settings" (page 15-3)
Programming
Perform programming using the communication blocks.
"How to Use a Communication Block" (page 15-9)
19
19-12 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Input Registers and Holding Registers
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
bit 0: Communication input bit 0
Communication input [0:00] 0: OFF
256 100H WORD R/W
to [0:15] 1: ON
Indicates the status of the
bit 1: Communication input bit 1
communication inputs.
0: OFF
... ... ... When a bit is turned ON, the ... ...
1: ON
corresponding communication input
...
is turned ON.
Communication input [3:00] bit 15: Communication input bit 15
259 103H WORD R/W
to [3:15] 0: OFF
1: ON
Enablement code of
260 104H UINT R/W
communication input [0:00] Indicates the status of the enablement
code.
... ... ... ... ... 0000H to 00FFH
The upper eight bits are ignored.
Enablement code of (Range: 1 to 255)
289 121H UINT R/W
communication input [1:13]
290 122H System reserved
291 123H System reserved
PLC text, 1st character, 2nd
292 124H Displays the status of the PLC text. STRING R/W
character
The first character is set in the low
... ... ... byte while the second character is set ... ... 0000H to FFFFH
in the high byte in the ASCII code
PLC text, 19th character, 20th
301 12DH format. STRING R/W
character
Number of connected units Indicates the number of connected
512 200H UINT R 0 to 65535
(expansion unit) expansion units.
Number of connected units Indicates the number of connected
513 201H UINT R 0 to 65535
(remote I/O module) remote I/O modules.
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Model information (main bit 0 to 7: Unit model
514 202H WORD R
controller) 1: GC-1000
2: GC-1000R
Model information (1st
515 203H WORD R 3: GC-S84
expansion unit)
4: GC-S16
... ... ... ... ... 5: GC-S1R
6: GC-A16
Model information (10th
524 20CH WORD R 7: GC-R45
expansion unit) Indicates the connected unit model. 8: GC-R48
Model information (1st bit 8: Positional relationship to the GC-
525 20DH WORD R B30
remote I/O module)
0: Unit positioned before the GC-B30
... ... ... ... ... 1: Unit positioned after the GC-B30
If the GC-B30 does not exist in the
Model information (4th unit configuration, all units are set to
528 210H WORD R
remote I/O module) 0.
bit 9 to 15: System reserved (fixed to 0)
529 211H System reserved
530 212H Operation time, Byte 0, Byte 1 Indicates the time elapsed since the
start of the unit in units of 10 ms.
WORD R 0 to FFFFH 19
531 213H Operation time, Byte 2, Byte 3 WORD R 0 to FFFFH
bit 0: RUN state
0: The unit is stopped.
1: The unit is running.
bit 1: Abnormal state
Indicates the operating state of the
532 214H GC operating state WORD R 0: Normal
GC.
1: Abnormal
* An abnormal state means that at
least one alert or error is occurring.
bit 2 to 15: System reserved (fixed to 0)
Number of errors that Indicates the number of errors that
533 215H UINT R 0 to 30
occurred are currently occurring.
GC Series User’s Manual 19-13
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
Main code of the (1st) error Indicates the code of the error that is
534 216H UINT R
code currently occurring.
Error codes are sorted in the following order:
Detailed code of the (1st) (1) Errors are sorted in order of
535 217H UINT R
error code Error, Alert, and Info, starting
from the first error.
... ... ... ... ... 0 to 65535
(2) Errors are sorted by error
Main code of the (30th) error category in (1) in order that
592 250H UINT R
code they occurred.
The high byte represents the main code while
Detailed code of the (30th) the low byte represents the detailed code.
593 251H UINT R
error code "Alert/Error list" (page A-7)
Communication output [0:00]
594 252H Indicates the output status of the WORD R
to [0:15] bit 0: Communication output bit 0
communication outputs.
bit 1: Communication output bit 1
... ... ... When a communication output is ... ...
...
turned ON, the corresponding bit is
Communication output [3:00] to bit 15: Communication output bit 15
597 255H turned ON. WORD R
[3:15]
bit 0 to 3: GC-Link port A connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 4 to 7: GC-Link port A error status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
598 256H GC-Link port status Indicates the GC-Link port status. WORD R
bit 8 to 11: GC-Link port B connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 12 to 15: GC-Link port B error status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the number of GL-R units 1: Main unit only
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
768 300H UINT R
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port A. 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit 2
769 301H System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
770 302H UINT R
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1: Type F
771 303H UINT R
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port A. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
772 304H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port A GL-R
773 305H UINT R 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of the main unit
19 774 306H
GC-Link port A GL-R
Indicates the number of optical axes
of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link UINT R 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of sub unit 1
port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R
775 307H UINT R 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of sub unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R the GL-R (receiver) connected to the
bit 1: Switch 2
776 308H Main controller setting switch GC-Link port A. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned ON, the
bit 5: Switch 6
corresponding bit is turned ON.
777 309H System reserved
19-14 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
778 30AH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
779 30BH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
841 349H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
842 34AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the received-light-amount of
each optical axis of the GL-R bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
843 34BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, WORD R
connected to the GC-Link port A. bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
The received-light-amount range is 0
... ... ... to 63. ... ...
The high byte of the 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
is always 0. bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
905 389H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
906 38AH WORD R
unit 2, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
907 38BH WORD R
unit 2, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
969 3C9H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 2nd
970 3CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R optical axis
optical axis [15:0] ...
Indicates the ON/OFF information of
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 16th optical axis
each optical axis of the GL-R
connected to the GC-Link port A. bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 17th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R A sub unit is placed with the bits bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 18th optical axis
971 3CBH ON/OFF information of each following the optical axis of the last WORD R
...
optical axis [31:16] unit. bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 32nd optical axis
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an
... ... ... optical axis configured with fixed ... ...
blanking. bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 225th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 226th optical axis
984 3D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R
...
optical axis [239:224]
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 240th optical axis
985 3D9H
GC-Link port A GL-R
Error status
Indicates the error status of the GL-R
connected to the GC-Link port A.
WORD R
0: No error
1: Error occurring
19
Indicates the OSSD output status of
GC-Link port A GL-R 0: OFF
986 3DAH the GL-R connected to the GC-Link WORD R
OSSD output status 1: ON
port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the enablement status of the
0: Disabled
987 3DBH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Enabled
alert enablement status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection status of the
0: No alert
988 3DCH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Alert occurring
alert detection status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection threshold of
Received-light-amount the received-light-amount decrease
989 3DDH UINT R 0 to 100
decrease alert detection alert of the GL-R connected to the
threshold GC-Link port A in percentage.
GC Series User’s Manual 19-15
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port A GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert 1: 5 sec
990 3DEH Received-light-amount UINT R
of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time
port A. 3: 5 min
Indicates the number of GS/GS-M
GC-Link port A GS
1024 400H units connected to the GC-Link port UINT R 0 to 16
Number of connected units
A.
bit 0 to 2: Model information
GC-Link port A GS 000: GS-10
1025 401H WORD R
Model information (1st unit) 001: GS-50
011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
GC-Link port A GS bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
1026 402H Indicates the model information of the WORD R
Model information (2nd unit) bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
00: Normal operation (Default)
port A.
01: OFF
... ... ... ... ... 10: OFF when GS is closed (locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
bit 6: Coding level settings
GC-Link port A GS 0: Low (multi operation)
1040 410H WORD R
Model information (16th unit) 1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and lock 1: ON
GC-Link port A GS
1041 411H control status of the GS/GS-M WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status
connected to the GC-Link port A. 0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
Indicates the open/close state of each
GC-Link port A GS 0: Open
1042 412H GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link WORD R
Open/close state 1: Close
port A.
...
bit 15: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
Indicates the lock status of each GS/
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
GS-M connected to the GC-Link port
GC-Link port A GS 0: Unlocked
1043 413H A. WORD R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-contact
...
type.
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
19 1044 414H
GC-Link port A GS
1st unit status
WORD R 0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port A GS 1: Locked
1045 415H Indicates the detailed information of WORD R
2nd unit status bit 2: Red LED display status
the GS/GS-M connected to the
0: OFF
GC-Link port A.
1: ON
... ... ... ... ... bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port A GS 1: ON
1059 423H WORD R
16th unit status
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
19-16 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the number of GL-R units 1: Main unit only
1280 500H UINT R
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port B. 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit 2
1281 501H System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
1282 502H UINT R
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1: Type F
1283 503H UINT R
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port B. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
1284 504H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port B GL-R
1285 505H Number of optical axes of the UINT R 0 to 127
main unit
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the number of optical axes
1286 506H Number of optical axes of of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link UINT R 0 to 127
sub unit 1 port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R
1287 507H Number of optical axes of UINT R 0 to 127
sub unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R the GL-R (receiver) connected to the
bit 1: Switch 2
1288 508H Main controller setting switch GC-Link port B. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned ON, the
bit 5: Switch 6
corresponding bit is turned ON.
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
1289 509H System reserved
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-17
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Main bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1290 50AH WORD R
unit, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Main bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1291 50BH WORD R
unit, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1353 549H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1354 54AH Indicates the received-light-amount of WORD R
unit 1, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
each optical axis of the GL-R
optical axis
connected to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R The received-light-amount range is 0
Received-light-amount, Sub to 63. bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1355 54BH WORD R
unit 1, 3rd optical axis, 4th The high byte of the 127th optical axis bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis is always 0.
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1417 589H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1418 58AH WORD R
unit 2, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1419 58BH WORD R
unit 2, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
Indicates the received-light-amount of
each optical axis of the GL-R
GC-Link port B GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B.
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1481 5C9H Received-light-amount, Sub The received-light-amount range is 0 WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis to 63.
The high byte of the 127th optical axis
is always 0.
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 2nd optical axis
1482 5CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R ...
optical axis [15:0] bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 16th
optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information of bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 17th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R each optical axis of the GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 18th optical axis
1483 5CBH ON/OFF information of each connected to the GC-Link port B. WORD R ...
19 optical axis [31:16] A sub unit is placed with the bits
following the optical axis of the last
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 32nd
optical axis
unit.
... ... ... The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an ... ... ...
optical axis configured with fixed bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 225th
blanking. optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 226th
1496 5D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R optical axis
optical axis [239:224] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 240th
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL-R 0: No error
1497 5D9H WORD R
Error status connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the OSSD output status of the 0: OFF
1498 5DAH WORD R
OSSD output status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: ON
19-18 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the enablement status of the
0: Disabled
1499 5DBH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Enabled
alert enablement status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection status of the
0: No alert
1500 5DCH Received-light-amount decrease received-light-amount decrease alert of the WORD R
1: Alert occurring
alert detection status GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection threshold of
Received-light-amount the received-light-amount decrease
1501 5DDH UINT R 0 to 100
decrease alert detection alert of the GL-R connected to the
threshold GC-Link port B in percentage.
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port B GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert 1: 5 sec
1502 5DEH Received-light-amount UINT R
of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time
port B. 3: 5 min
Indicates the number of GS/GS-M
GC-Link port B GS
1536 600H units connected to the GC-Link port UINT R 0 to 16
Number of connected units
B.
bit 0 to 2: Model information
GC-Link port B GS 000: GS-10
1537 601H WORD R
Model information (1st unit) 001: GS-50
011: GS-70
100: GS-M5/9
101: GS-ML5
GC-Link port B GS bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
1538 602H Indicates the model information of the WORD R
Model information (2nd unit) bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
00: Normal operation (Default)
port B.
01: OFF
... ... ... ... ... 10: OFF when GS is closed (locked)
11: Control via GC-Link port
bit 6: Coding level settings
GC-Link port B GS 0: Low (multi operation)
1552 610H WORD R
Model information (16th unit) 1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and lock 1: ON
GC-Link port B GS
1553 611H control status of the GS/GS-M WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status
connected to the GC-Link port B. 0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
Indicates the open/close state of each
GC-Link port B GS 0: Open
1554 612H GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link WORD R
Open/close state 1: Close
port B.
...
bit 15: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked 19
1: Locked
Indicates the lock status of each GS/
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
GS-M connected to the GC-Link port
GC-Link port B GS 0: Unlocked
1555 613H B. WORD R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-contact
...
type.
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
GC Series User’s Manual 19-19
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
bit 0: Open/close state
GC-Link port B GS 0: Open
1556 614H WORD R
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
GC-Link port B GS 1: Locked
1557 615H Indicates the detailed information of WORD R
2nd unit status bit 2: Red LED display status
the GS/GS-M connected to the
0: OFF
GC-Link port B.
1: ON
... ... ... ... ... bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port B GS 1: ON
1571 623H WORD R
16th unit status
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
1792 700H Project name, 1st character STRING R
Indicates the project name of the
... ... ... ...
configuration file (UTF-16).
1855 73FH Project name, 64th character STRING R
1856 740H System reserved
Configuration CRC, 1st
1857 741H STRING R
character
Indicates the configuration CRC of the
... ... ... ...
configuration file (UTF-16).
Configuration CRC, 8th
1864 748H STRING R
character
1865 749H System reserved
Date and time of transfer, 1st
1866 74AH STRING R
character
Indicates the date and time of transfer
... ... ... ...
of the configuration file (UTF-16).
Date and time of transfer,
1885 75DH STRING R
20th character
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
1886 745H System reserved
2048 800H Input status (GC-Link port) WORD R
2049 801H Input status (main controller) WORD R
Input status (1st expansion
2050 802H WORD R
unit)
... ... ... ... ...
Input status (10th expansion
2059 80BH WORD R
unit)
Input status (1st remote I/O
2060 80CH WORD R
module)
... ... ... ... ...
Input status (4th remote I/O
2063 80FH WORD R
module)
Indicates the input/output status of
2064 810H Output status (GC-Link port) each unit.* 1 WORD R
19 2065 811H
Output status (main
controller)
WORD R
Output status (1st expansion
2066 812H WORD R
unit)
... ... ... ... ...
Output status (10th
2075 81BH WORD R
expansion unit)
Output status (1st remote I/O
2076 81CH WORD R
module)
... ... ... ... ...
Output status (4th remote I/O
2079 81FH WORD R
module)
19-20 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
Indicates the number of blocks used
2304 900H Number of used blocks UINT R 0 to 500
by the program.
Block output status (Block ID
2305 901H WORD R
1)
Indicates the output status of each
... ... ... ... ...
block used by the program.* 2
Block output status (Block ID
2804 AF4H WORD R
500)
Indicates the number of error
2816 B00H Number of error histories UINT R 0 to 100
histories.
1st error history, Error code, Indicates the error code of the 1st
2817 B01H UINT R 0 to 99
Main code error history.
Error histories are sorted in newest-
1st error history, Error code, first chronological order.
2818 B02H UINT R 0 to 9999
Detailed code "Alert/Error list" (page A-7)
1st error history, Operation
2819 B03H Indicates the time elapsed since the WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, Low
start of the GC Series when the error
1st error history, Operation was detected in seconds.
2820 B04H WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, High
... ... ... ... ... ...
100th error history, Error
3213 C8DH UINT R 0 to 99
code, Main code Indicates the error code of the 100th
100th error history, Error error history.
3214 C8EH UINT R 0 to 9999
code, Detailed code
100th error history, Operation
3215 C8FH Indicates the time elapsed since the WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, Low
start of the GC Series when the error
100th error history, Operation was detected in seconds.
3216 C90H WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, High
*1 For the bit assignment of each unit, refer to "Input/output status assignment by unit" (page 19-30).
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
*2 Check the block ID in the GC Configurator report. For the bit assignment of each block, refer to "Output status assignment by block"
(page 19-32).
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-21
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Inputs and Coils
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC HEX
position
4096 1000H 0 [0:00] Bit R/W
Communication input
... ... ... ... Bit R/W
[0:00] to [0:15]
Indicates the status of the
4111 100FH 15 [0:15] Bit R/W
communication inputs.
0: OFF
... ... ... ... ... When a bit is turned ON, the Bit R/W
1: ON
corresponding communication
4144 1030H 0 [3:00] Bit R/W
input is turned ON.
Communication input
... ... ... ... Bit R/W
[3:00] to [3:15]
4159 103FH 15 [3:15] Bit R/W
0: The unit is
Indicates the RUN state of the stopped.
8512 2140H 0 RUN state Bit R
GC. 1: The unit is
running.
GC operating state Indicates the abnormal state of
the GC.
0: Normal
8513 2141H 1 Abnormal state An abnormal state means that Bit R
1: Abnormal
at least one alert or error is
occurring.
9504 2520H 0 Communication output [0:00] Bit R
Communication output
... ... ... ... Bit R
[0:00] to [0:15]
Indicates the output status of
9519 252FH 15 Communication output [0:15] Bit R
the communication outputs.
0: OFF
... ... ... ... ... When a communication output Bit R
1: ON
is turned ON, the
9552 2550H 0 Communication output [3:00] Bit R
corresponding bit is turned ON.
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Communication output
... ... ... ... Bit R
[3:00] to [3:15]
9567 255FH 15 Communication output [3:15] Bit R
GC-Link port A GL-R
12416 3080H 0 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R
12417 3081H 1 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 2
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the setting switch
12418 3082H 2 Main controller setting switch status of the GL-R (receiver) Bit R
GC-Link port A GL-R settings, Switch 3 connected to the GC-Link port
0: OFF
Main controller setting A.
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: ON
switch settings When each switch is turned
12419 3083H 3 Main controller setting switch ON, the corresponding bit is Bit R
settings, Switch 4 turned ON.
GC-Link port A GL-R
12420 3084H 4 Main controller setting switch Bit R
19 settings, Switch 5
GC-Link port A GL-R
12421 3085H 5 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 6
19-22 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC HEX
position
GC-Link port A GL-R
15520 3CA0H 0 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
optical axis, 1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
... ... ON/OFF information of ... ... Bit R
each optical axis [15:0]
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the ON/OFF
15535 3CAFH 15 ON/OFF information of each information of each optical axis Bit R
optical axis, 16th optical axis of the GL-R connected to the
GC-Link port A.
... ... ... ... ... Bit R
A sub unit is placed with the 0: OFF
GC-Link port A GL-R offset following the optical axis 1: ON
ON/OFF information of each of the last unit.
15744 3D80H 0 Bit R
optical axis, 225th optical The ON/OFF logic is inverted
axis for an optical axis configured
GC-Link port A GL-R
with fixed blanking.
... ... ON/OFF information of ... ... Bit R
each optical axis [239:224]
GC-Link port A GL-R
ON/OFF information of each
15759 3D8FH 15 Bit R
optical axis, 240th optical
axis
Indicates the error status of the
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R 0: No error
15760 3D90H 0 GL-R connected to the GC-Link Bit R
Error status Error status 1: Error occurring
port A.
Indicates the OSSD output
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R 0: OFF
15776 3DA0H 0 status of the GL-R connected to Bit R
OSSD output status OSSD output status 1: ON
the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the enablement
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R
status of the received-light-
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount 0: Disabled
15792 3DB0H 0 amount decrease alert of the Bit R
decrease alert enablement decrease alert enablement 1: Enabled
GL-R connected to the GC-Link
status status
port A.
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Indicates the detection status
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R
of the received-light-amount
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount 0: No alert
15808 3DC0H 0 decrease alert of the GL-R Bit R
decrease alert detection decrease alert detection 1: Alert occurring
connected to the GC-Link port
status status
A.
16400 4010H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information 001:GS-50
GC-Link port A GS
16401 4011H 1 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R 011:GS-70
1st GS model information
to the GC-Link port A. 100:GS-M5/9
16402 4012H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
16403 4013H 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
GC-Link port A GS
16404 4014H Model information (1st unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
16405 4015H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port A GS settings of the 1st GS/GS-M operation)
16406 4016H 6 Bit R
1st GS coding level settings connected to the GC-Link port 1: High (unique
A. operation)
19
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
GC Series User’s Manual 19-23
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC HEX
position
16640 4100H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information
001:GS-50
GC-Link port A GS of the 16th GS/GS-M
16641 4101H 1 Bit R 011:GS-70
16th GS model information connected to the GC-Link port
100:GS-M5/9
A.
16642 4102H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
16643 4103H GC-Link port A GS 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Model information (16th
16644 4104H 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
unit)
16645 4105H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port A GS settings of the 16th GS/GS-M operation)
16646 4106H 6 Bit R
16th GS coding level settings connected to the GC-Link port 1: High (unique
A. operation)
Indicates the OSSD status of
GC-Link port A GS 0: OFF
16656 4110H 0 the GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R
OSSD status 1: ON
GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GS
OSSD/lock control status Indicates the OSSD status and
GC-Link port A GS lock control status of the GS/ 0: Unlocked
16657 4111H 1 Bit R
Lock control status GS-M connected to the 1: Locked
GC-Link port A.
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Open
16672 4120H 0 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port A.
... ... GC-Link port A GS ... ... ... Bit R ...
Open/close state
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port A 16th GS of the 16th GS/GS-M 0: Open
16687 412FH 15 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link port 1: Close
A.
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Indicates the lock status of the
1st GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Unlocked
16688 4130H 0 GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
GC-Link port A GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Lock status
Indicates the lock status of the
16th GS/GS-M connected to
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Unlocked
16703 413FH 15 the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Open
16704 4140H 0 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the lock status of the
1st GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Unlocked
16705 4141H 1 GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
19 GC-Link port A GS
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
1st unit status Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port A 1st GS status of the 1st GS/GS-M 0: OFF
16706 4142H 2 Bit R
Red LED display status connected to the GC-Link port 1: ON
A.
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port A 1st GS display status of the 1st GS/ 0: OFF
16707 4143H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port A.
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
19-24 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC HEX
position
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port A 16th GS of the 16th GS/GS-M 0: Open
16944 4230H 0 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link port 1: Close
A.
Indicates the lock status of the
16th GS/GS-M connected to
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Unlocked
16945 4231H 1 the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port A GS contact type.
16th unit status
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port A 16th GS status of the 16th GS/GS-M 0: OFF
16946 4232H 2 Bit R
Red LED display status connected to the GC-Link port 1: ON
A.
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port A 16th GS display status of the 16th GS/ 0: OFF
16947 4233H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the GC- 1: ON
Link port A.
GC-Link port B GL-R
20608 5080H 0 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R
20609 5081H 1 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 2
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the setting switch
20610 5082H 2 Main controller setting switch status of the GL-R (receiver) Bit R
GC-Link port B GL-R settings, Switch 3 connected to the GC-Link port
0: OFF
Main controller setting B.
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: ON
switch settings When each switch is turned
20611 5083H 3 Main controller setting switch ON, the corresponding bit is Bit R
settings, Switch 4 turned ON.
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
GC-Link port B GL-R
20612 5084H 4 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 5
GC-Link port B GL-R
20613 5085H 5 Main controller setting switch Bit R
settings, Switch 6
GC-Link port B GL-R
23712 5CA0H 0 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
optical axis, 1st optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
... ... ON/OFF information of ... ... Bit R
each optical axis [15:0] Indicates the ON/OFF
GC-Link port B GL-R
information of each optical axis
23727 5CAFH 15 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
of the GL-R connected to the
optical axis, 16th optical axis
GC-Link port B.
... ... ... ... ... A sub unit is placed with the Bit R 0: OFF
offset following the optical axis 1: ON
GC-Link port B GL-R
of the last unit.
23936 5D80H
GC-Link port B GL-R
0 ON/OFF information of each
optical axis, 225th optical axis
The ON/OFF logic is inverted
for an optical axis configured
Bit R
19
... ... ... ... with fixed blanking. Bit R
ON/OFF information of
each optical axis [239:224] GC-Link port B GL-R
ON/OFF information of each
23951 5D8FH 15 Bit R
optical axis, 240th optical
axis
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL- 0: No error
23952 5D90H 0 Bit R
Error status Error status R connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: Error occurring
Indicates the OSSD output
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R 0: OFF
23968 5DA0H 0 status of the GL-R connected to Bit R
OSSD output status OSSD output status 1: ON
the GC-Link port B.
GC Series User’s Manual 19-25
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC HEX
position
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the enablement status of
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount the received-light-amount 0: Disabled
23984 5DB0H 0 Bit R
decrease alert enablement decrease alert enablement decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Enabled
status status connected to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection status of
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount the received-light-amount 0: No alert
24000 5DC0H 0 Bit R
decrease alert detection decrease alert detection decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Alert occurring
status status connected to the GC-Link port B.
24592 6010H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information 001:GS-50
GC-Link port B GS
24593 6011H 1 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R 011:GS-70
1st GS model information
to the GC-Link port B. 100:GS-M5/9
24594 6012H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
24595 6013H 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
GC-Link port B GS
24596 6014H Model information (1st unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
24597 6015H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port B GS settings of the 1st GS/GS-M operation)
24598 6016H 6 Bit R
1st GS coding level settings connected to the GC-Link port 1: High (unique
B. operation)
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
24832 6100H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information
001:GS-50
GC-Link port B GS of the 16th GS/GS-M
24833 6101H 1 Bit R 011:GS-70
16th GS model information connected to the GC-Link port
100:GS-M5/9
B.
24834 6102H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
24835 6103H GC-Link port B GS 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Model information (16th
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
24836 6104H 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
unit)
24837 6105H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port B GS settings of the 16th GS/GS-M operation)
24838 6106H 6 Bit R
16th GS coding level settings connected to the GC-Link port 1: High (unique
B. operation)
Indicates the OSSD status of
GC-Link port B GS 0: OFF
24848 6110H 0 the GS/GS-M connected to the Bit R
OSSD status 1: ON
GC-Link port B GS GC-Link port B.
OSSD/lock control status Indicates the lock control status
GC-Link port B GS 0: Unlocked
24849 6111H 1 of the GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
Lock control status 1: Locked
the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Open
24864 6120H 0 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Open/close state
19 24879 612FH 15
GC-Link port B 16th GS
Indicates the open/close state
of the 16th GS/GS-M connected Bit R
0: Open
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the lock status of the
1st GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Unlocked
24880 6130H 0 GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
GC-Link port B GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Lock status
Indicates the lock status of the
16th GS/GS-M connected to
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Unlocked
24895 613FH 15 the GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
19-26 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC HEX
position
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Open
24896 6140H 0 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the lock status of the
1st GS/GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Unlocked
24897 6141H 1 GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port B GS contact type.
1st unit status Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port B 1st GS status of the 1st GS/GS-M 0: OFF
24898 6142H 2 Bit R
Red LED display status connected to the GC-Link port 1: ON
B.
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port B 1st GS display status of the 1st GS/ 0: OFF
24899 6143H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port B.
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port B 16th GS of the 16th GS/GS-M 0: Open
25136 6230H 0 Bit R
Open/close state connected to the GC-Link port 1: Close
B.
Indicates the lock status of the
16th GS/GS-M connected to
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Unlocked
25137 6231H 1 the GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port B GS contact type.
16th unit status
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port B 16th GS status of the 16th GS/GS-M 0: OFF
25138 6232H 2 Bit R
Red LED display status connected to the GC-Link port 1: ON
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
B.
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port B 16th GS display status of the 16th GS/ 0: OFF
25139 6233H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port B.
Input status (GC-Link port)
32768 8000H 0 Bit R
bit 0
Indicates the input status of the 0: OFF
... ... Input status (GC-Link port) ... ... Bit R
GC-Link port.* 1 1: ON
Input status (GC-Link port)
32783 800FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
Input status (main controller)
32784 8010H 0 Bit R
bit 0
Input status (main Displays the input status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
controller) main controller.* 1 1: ON
Input status (main controller)
32799 801FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
32800 8020H 0
Input status (1st expansion
unit) bit 0
Bit R 19
Input status (1st expansion Indicates the input status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
unit) 1st expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Input status (1st expansion
32815 802FH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Input status (10th expansion
32944 80B0H 0 Bit R
unit) bit 0
Input status (10th Indicates the input status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) 10th expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Input status (10th expansion
32959 80BFH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
GC Series User’s Manual 19-27
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC HEX
position
Input status (1st remote I/O
32960 80C0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Input status (1st remote I/O Indicates the input status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
module) 1st remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Input status (1st remote I/O
32975 80CFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Input status (4th remote I/O
33008 80F0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Input status (4th remote I/O Indicates the input status of the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
module) 4th remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Input status (4th remote I/O
33023 80FFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
Output status (GC-Link port)
33024 8100H 0 Bit R
bit 0
Output status (GC-Link Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
port) the GC-Link port.* 1 1: ON
Output status (GC-Link port)
33039 810FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
Output status (main
33040 8110H 0 Bit R
controller) bit 0
Output status (main Displays the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
controller) the main controller.* 1 1: ON
Output status (main
33055 811FH 15 Bit R
controller) bit 15
Output status (1st expansion
33056 8120H 0 Bit R
unit) bit 0
Output status (1st Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) the 1st expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Output status (1st expansion
33071 812FH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Output status (10th
33200 81B0H 0 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 0
Output status (10th Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) the 10th expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Output status (10th
33215 81BFH 15 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 15
Output status (1st remote I/O
33216 81C0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Output status (1st remote I/ Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
O module) the 1st remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Output status (1st remote I/O
33231 81CFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Output status (4th remote I/O
19 33264
...
81F0H
...
Output status (4th remote I/
0
...
module) bit 0
...
Indicates the output status of
Bit
Bit
R
R
0: OFF
O module) the 4th remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Output status (4th remote I/O
33279 81FFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
Block output status (Block ID
36880 9010H 0 Bit R
1) bit 0
Block output status (Block Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
ID 1) the Block ID 1 block.* 2 1: ON
Block output status (Block ID
36895 901FH 15 Bit R
1) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
19-28 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Item Details Attribute Value
Bit type
DEC HEX
position
Block output status (Block ID
44864 AF40H 0 Bit R
500) bit 0
Block output status (Block Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
ID 500) the Block ID 500 block.* 2 1: ON
Block output status (Block ID
44879 AF4FH 15 Bit R
500) bit 15
*1 For the bit assignment of each unit, refer to "Input/output status assignment by unit" (page 19-30).
*2 Check the block ID in the GC Configurator report. For the bit assignment of each block, refer to "Output status assignment by block"
(page 19-32).
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-29
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Input/output status assignment by unit
Input status (GC-Link port)
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Port B Port A Port B Port A
Reserved
Ai Ai Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-1000R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-S16
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (nth remote I/O module)
GC-R45/R48
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
Ai Ai Ai Ai Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (GC-Link port)
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
19 Reserved
Ao1
Port B
Ao0 Ao1
Port A
Ao0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
19-30 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Output status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 So5 So4 So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-1000R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 SRo So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-S1R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved SRo
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-A16
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Ao15 Ao14 Ao13 Ao12 Ao11 Ao10 Ao9 Ao8 Ao7 Ao6 Ao5 Ao4 Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Output status (nth remote I/O module)
GC-R45
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
Ao Ao Ao Ao
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-R48
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
So So So So
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-31
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Output status assignment by block
Block name Bit assignment
Emergency stop switch
Limit switch
Interlock switch
Guard locking switch
GS/GS-M Series [KEYENCE]
Light curtain
GL-R Series [KEYENCE]
GL-S Series [KEYENCE]
Safety input devices Laser scanner bit 0: Output
SZ-V Series [KEYENCE]
SZ Series [KEYENCE]
Rope pull switch
Safety mat
Input devices
Two hand control device
Enabling device
Other safety switch
Other safety input
Reset switch bit 0: Output
bit 0: Mode Output 1
Mode selecting switch bit 1: Mode Output 2
bit 2: Error
EDM input
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Other input devices
Muting input
Safety plug
bit 0: Output
Hold-to-run switch
Other switch
Other input
19
19-32 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety 1 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
S-OUT bit 6: EDM2 Error
S-OUT EDM enabled bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety outputs Safety 2 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
Output devices
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output)
bit 3: Error Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output) EDM enabled
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
Other outputs AUX-OUT bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
Enablement code disabled bit 0: Output
Reset input (COM) bit 0: Output
Communication input
Other input (COM) Enablement code enabled bit1: Ready
Communications bit 2: Error
bit 0: Output
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Communication output Communication output bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
Register (Load)
Register bit 0: Output
Register (Store)
GS closed state
bit 0: Output
GS locked state
Expansion blocks None
bit 0: Red
GS indicator control output bit 1: Green
bit 2: Output Error
GL-R received-light-amount decrease alert
AUX-IN
Other input blocks bit 0: Output
OSSD 3/4
IN
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-33
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
Lock control 1 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
Unlock output
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
Lock control 2 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
bit 0: Red
Indicator control output bit 1: Green
bit 2: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
Independent bank
bit 2: Input Mismatch
bit 3: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
Other output blocks bit 3: Bank Output b
Single
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
bit 6: Input Mismatch
bit 7: Output Error
Bank switching output
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
bit 3: Bank Output b
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
Binary
bit 6: Bank Output D
bit 7: Bank Output d
bit 8: Bank Output E
bit 9: Bank Output e
bit 10: Input Mismatch
bit 11: Output Error
bit 0: Output
OUT bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
AND
AND (6-10 inputs)
OR
NOT
NAND
19 Function blocks Logic
NOR
bit 0: Output
XOR
SR Flip-Flop (Set has priority)
RS Flip-Flop (Reset has priority)
JK Flip-Flop
19-34 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
Reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
Reset (with AND)
bit 1: Reset Required
Reset bit 0: Output
Dual reset bit 1: Reset Required1
bit 2: Reset Required2
bit 0: Output
Existence detection reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Sequential muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Parallel muting
bit 3: Override Active
Function blocks bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting Cross-muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting for exit
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Position detection muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-35
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Master ON Ready
Master ON
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Unlock Output
Unlock control
bit 1: Unlock Required
bit 0: Output
Bypass
bit 1: Bypass Active
bit 0: Output
Application Control guard
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Break Required
PSDI control bit 3: Reset Required
bit 4: Normal Operation
bit 5: PSDI Error
bit 6: PSDI Timeout
bit 0: Input Bypass
bit 1: Output Enable
Manual mode control (MMC)
bit 2: Restart Required
bit 3: Manual Mode Active
Manual mode
Function blocks MMC input bypass bit 0: Output
MMC input bypass_ bit 0: Output
MMC output enable bit 0: Output
bit 0: Output
OFF-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
bit 0: Output
ON-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
Pulse generator bit 0: Output
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
Up-down counter
bit 1: Reached Zero
Timers / Counters bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
bit 1: Reached Zero
bit 0: Output bit 2
bit 3: Output bit 1
bit 4: Output bit 2
Up-down counter (with binary output)
bit 5: Output bit 3
bit 6: Output bit 4
bit 7: Output bit 5
bit 8: Output bit 6
bit 9: Output bit 7
19
19-36 GC Series User’s Manual
19-4 Modbus/TCP Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Rising Edge
Edge detection
bit 1: Falling Edge
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Output3
bit 3: Output4
Binary decoder
bit 4: Output5
bit 5: Output6
bit 6: Output7
bit 7: Output8
bit 0: Output bit 0
bit 1: Output bit 1
Binary encoder
bit 2: Output bit 2
Function blocks Others
bit 3: Error
bit 0: Mode Output1
bit 1: Mode Output2
bit 2: Mode Output3
bit 3: Mode Output4
bit 4: Mode Output5
Mode changing control
bit 5: Mode Output6
bit 6: Mode Output7
bit 7: Mode Output8
bit 8: Mode Error
bit 9: Trigger Required
Selector (2 inputs) bit 0: Output
Selector (4 inputs) bit 1: Mode Error
Always ON
Always OFF
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
1 scan ON upon start-up
System Information
System blocks None bit 0: Output
Block information
Jump (Load)
Jump (Store)
Event history trigger
Other functions Recipe block AND (with connection constraint function) bit 0: Output
19
GC Series User’s Manual 19-37
MEMO
Modbus/TCP Communication Function
19
19-38 GC Series User’s Manual
20
MC Protocol
Communication
Function
This chapter describes the settings and functions of the MC protocol communication function.
20-1 Overview of the MC Protocol Communication Function ................................page 20-2
20-2 MC Protocol Communication Settings .............................................................page 20-3
20-3 MC Protocol Communication Specifications...................................................page 20-4
20-4 MC Protocol Communication Commands........................................................page 20-9
20-5 Address List......................................................................................................page 20-17
MC Protocol Communication Function
20
GC Series User’s Manual 20-1
Overview of the MC Protocol
20-1 Communication Function
All of the data received from the communication of the EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET, UDP, Modbus/TCP, or
DANGER MC protocol cannot be used for the safety related part of the control system. When used incorrectly,
there is a possibility that the operator of the device may be threatened with major injury or even death.
Point The Ethernet communication function is available only for the main controller "GC-1000".
Overview of the MC protocol Communication Function
What is MC protocol communication?
The MC protocol is an abbreviation of "MELSEC communication protocol". The MC protocol is a communication mode
dedicated to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation PLCs, and is used to create a communication program on the PC or PLC and
read/write the target address data or program via an Ethernet unit or port.
* MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
What you can do with MC protocol communication
With MC protocol communication, you can perform the following in the GC Series.
Item MC protocol
communication
Write a communication input
Write an enablement code
Write a character string that is stored into the history function
Read out a communication output
Read out an error code
MC Protocol Communication Function
Read out the unit configuration and model information
Read out the received-light-amount and ON/OFF state of the GL-R Series connected to a GC-Link port.
Read out the door open/close state and ON/OFF state of the GS/GS-M Series connected to a GC-Link port.
Read out the ON/OFF status of the main controller, expansion unit, and remote I/O module.
Read out the block status
Read out the error history
20
20-2 GC Series User’s Manual
20-2 MC Protocol Communication Settings
MC Protocol Communication Settings
GC Configurator settings
[Setting procedure]
Basic Ethernet settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and configure the basic Ethernet settings.
"15-2 GC Configurator Settings"
MC protocol settings
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [MC protocol] to the screen to register.
Detailed settings
Detailed settings
MC Protocol Communication Function
Item Details
Communication code Select the communication data code. Setting range: Binary/ASCII (Default: Binary)
Type code Set the type code to be read in communications. Setting range: 0000H to FFFFH (Default: 0025H)
Type* Set the type to be read in communications. Setting range: Up to 16 ASCII code characters (Default: GC1000)
* Even when the binary code is used for communications, [Type] is returned as ASCII code characters.
If the type name contains less than 16 bytes, it is returned as 16-byte data with "20H" added to the end.
Registering communication inputs and communication outputs 20
Open the configuration screen from [Settings] and drag and drop [Communication input] and [Communication output] to
the screen to register.
"15-2 GC Configurator Settings"
Programming
Perform programming using the communication blocks.
"How to use a communication block"
GC Series User’s Manual 20-3
MC Protocol Communication
20-3 Specifications
MC Protocol Communication Specifications
The GC Series uses TCP/IP or UDP/IP for communication control. The TCP/IP and UDP/IP communication specifications
are as follows.
TCP/IP
Item Specification
Communication mode TCP/IP
Port number 5100 (fixed)
Maximum number of connections 4
Supported frame QnA-compatible 3E frame, 4E frame
Data format Binary/ASCII
UDP/IP
Item Specification
Communication mode UDP/IP
Port number 5100 (fixed)
Maximum number of connections 1
Supported frame QnA-compatible 3E frame, 4E frame
Data format Binary/ASCII
MC Protocol Communication Function
20
20-4 GC Series User’s Manual
20-3 MC Protocol Communication Specifications
MC Protocol Data Format
The communication data format of the MC protocol consists of "header" and "application".
The header part contains "Ethernet header", "IP header", and "TCP header (UDP header)" while the application part
contains "sub header" and "text".
Header Application data
TCP header/
Ethernet header IP header Sub header Text
UDP header
Sub header format
The sub header format is different between the QnA-compatible 3E frame and 4E frame.
QnA-compatible 3E frame
For the ASCII code
Command Response
5 0 0 0 D 0 0 0
35H 30H 30H 30H 44H 30H 30H 30H
For the binary code
Command Response
50H 00H D0H 00H
MC Protocol Communication Function
4E frame
For the ASCII code
Command Response
5 4 0 0 H - - L 0 0 0 0 D 4 0 0 H - - L 0 0 0 0
35H 34H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 44H 34H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H
Serial number* Serial number*
For the binary code
Command Response
L H L H 0 0
54H 00H 00H 00H D4H 00H 00H 00H 20
Serial number* Serial number*
* The serial number is used to identify a response to a command.
In the GC Series, the same serial number as that of a command received from an external device is added to a response to be sent.
Setting range: 0000H to FFFFH
GC Series User’s Manual 20-5
20-3 MC Protocol Communication Specifications
Text format
The text part format is the same for both the QnA-compatible 3E frame and 4E frame.
Request command
For the ASCII code
Header
Sub header
Network number
PC number
unit I/O number
Request destination
unit station number
Request destination
Request data length
CPU monitor timer
Command
Sub command
Request data part
H L H L H - - L H L H - - L H - - L H - - L H - - L
0 0 F F 0 3 F F 0 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 1 0
30H 30H 46H 46H 30H 33H 46H 46H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 38H 30H 30H 31H 30H
For the binary code
Header
Sub header
Network number
PC number
unit I/O number
Request destination
unit station number
Request destination
Request data length
CPU monitor timer
Command
Sub command
Request data part
L H L H L H L H L H
00H FFH FFH 03H 00H 18H 00H 10H 00H
In the GC Series, the network number, PC number, request destination unit I/O number, and request destination unit station
number are fixed.
Specify the following values.
Network number: 00H
PC number: FFH
Request destination unit I/O number: 03FFH
Request destination unit station number*: 00H
MC Protocol Communication Function
Specify the request data length and CPU monitor timer as follows:
Request data length: Specify the data length (in bytes) from the CPU monitor timer to the request data part.
CPU monitor timer: The CPU monitor timer value is ignored in the GC Series. Specify any value.
Point The data length to be sent from the sub header to the request data part must be 1024 bytes or less.
20
20-6 GC Series User’s Manual
20-3 MC Protocol Communication Specifications
Response (normal state)
For the ASCII code
Header
Sub header
Network number
PC number
unit I/O number
Request destination
unit station number
Request destination
Response data length
End code
Response data part
H L H L H - - L H L H - - L H - - L
0 0 F F 0 3 F F 0 0 0 0 0 C 0 0 0 0
30H 30H 46H 46H 30H 33H 46H 46H 30H 30H 30H 30H 30H 43H 30H 30H 30H 30H
For the binary code
Header
Sub header
Network number
PC number
unit I/O number
Request destination
unit station number
Request destination
Response data length
End code
Response data part
L H L H L H
00H FFH FFH 03H 00H 06H 00H 00H 00H
The same network number, PC number, request destination unit I/O number, and request destination unit station number as
those specified in the command are returned.
Request data length: Returns the data length (in bytes) from the end code to the response data part.
End code: Returns the command process result.
0000 is returned when in a normal state.
MC Protocol Communication Function
20
GC Series User’s Manual 20-7
20-3 MC Protocol Communication Specifications
Response (abnormal state)
For the ASCII code
Error information part
Header
Sub header
(access station)
Network number
(access station)
PC number
unit I/O number
Request destination
unit station number
Request destination
length
Response data
Other than 0H
End code:
(response station)
Network number
(response station)
PC number
unit I/O number
Request destination
unit station number
Request destination
Command
Sub command
H L H L H - - L H L H - - L H - - L H L H L H - - L H L H - - L H - - L
0 0 F F 0 3 F F 0 0 0 0 1 6 C 0 5 1 0 0 F F 0 3 F F 0 0
30H 30H 46H 46H 30H 30H 46H 46H 30H 30H 30H 30H 31H 46H 43H 30H 35H 31H 30H 30H 46H 46H 30H 33H 46H 46H 30H 30H
For the binary code
Error information part
Header
Sub header
unit I/O number
Request destination
unit station number
Request destination
Response data length
Other than 0H
End code:
(access station)
Network number
(access station)
PC number
(response station)
Network number
(response station)
PC number
unit I/O number
Request destination
unit station number
Request destination
Command
Sub command
L H L H L H L H L H L H
00H FFH FFH 03H 00H 06H 00H 51H 00H 00H FFH FFH 03H 00H
The same network number, PC number, request destination unit I/O number, and request destination unit station number as
those specified in the command are returned.
Request data length: Returns the data length (in bytes) from the end code to the response data part.
End code: Returns the command process result.
An error code is returned when in an abnormal state.
"End codes for communication errors"
Error information part: Returns the same network number, PC number, request destination unit I/O number, request
destination unit station number, command, and sub command as those specified in the
command.
MC Protocol Communication Function
20
20-8 GC Series User’s Manual
MC Protocol Communication
20-4 Commands
Command List
Function Data unit Command Sub command Reference page
(HEX) (HEX)
Sequential read Bit 0401H 0001H Page 20-11
Word 0401H 0000H Page 20-11
Sequential write*1 Bit 1401H 0001H Page 20-12
Word 1401H 0000H Page 20-12
Sequential read of multiple blocks Word 0406H 0000H Page 20-13
Sequential write of multiple blocks*1 Word 1406H 0000H Page 20-14
CPU format read -- 0101H 0000H Page 20-15
Loop-back test*2 -- 0619H 0000H Page 20-15
*1 When cyclic communication is performed, data cannot be written.
*2 Only UDP/IP is supported.
MC Protocol Communication Function
20
GC Series User’s Manual 20-9
20-4 MC Protocol Communication Commands
Command Details
Address and data format for ASCII code communication
When reading and writing bit addresses bit by bit
In bit-by-bit specification for bit addresses, each bit represents "1" (31H) if it is ON or "0" (30H) if it is OFF from left to right.
The data of as many addresses as specified from a specified address is processed.
When reading and writing bit addresses word by word
In word-by-word specification for bit addresses, one address is converted to hexadecimal from the most significant bit in
units of four bits, handling 16 addresses from specified addresses as a batch.
When reading and writing word addresses
In word addresses, each address consists of one word (16 bits). Each group of four bits is converted to hexadecimal,
starting from the most significant bit.
Address and data format for binary code communication
When reading and writing bit addresses bit by bit
In bit-by-bit specification for bit addresses, each address is specified by four bits. Each bit represents "1" (31H) if it is ON
or "0" (30H) if it is OFF, starting from the most significant bit. The data of as many addresses as specified from a specified
address is processed.
When reading and writing bit addresses word by word
In word-by-word specification for bit addresses, each address is specified by one bit. The data of as many addresses as
specified from a specified address is processed in 16-address chunks in order from low byte (L: Bit 0 to 7) to high byte
(H: Bit 8 to 15).
MC Protocol Communication Function
When reading and writing word addresses
In word addresses, each address consists of one word (16 bits). The data of as many addresses as specified from a
specified address is processed in 1-address chunks in order from low byte (L: Bit 0 to 7) to high byte (H: Bit 8 to 15).
20
20-10 GC Series User’s Manual
20-4 MC Protocol Communication Commands
0401H: Sequential read
Read the specified address(es) data sequentially.
Request command
ASCII
0401H Sub command Device code + Number of
Head device addresses
Binary
Sub command: When 0001 is specified, each address is read bit by bit.
When 0000 is specified, each address is read word by word.
Device code (ASCII): When using bit data, "X*" or "Y*" is used. When using word data, "D*" is used.
• When the device code is “D*” and the head device is “252H”
D * 0 0 0 2 5 2
44H 2AH 30H 30H 30H 32H 35H 32H
Device code (Binary): When using bit data, "9CH" or "9DH" is used. When using word data, "A8H" is used.
• When the device code is “A8H” and the head device is “252H”
52H 02H 00H A8H
Number of addresses that can be specified
ASCII code communication Binary code communication
Bit-by-bit specification 1 to 896 1 to 792
Word-by-word specification 1 to 480 1 to 480
MC Protocol Communication Function
Response
In case of bit-by-bit specification (ASCII)
Data 1 Data 2 Data n
In case of bit-by-bit specification (binary) and even number of addresses
Data 1, 2 Data 3, 4 Data n-1, n
In case of bit-by-bit specification (binary) and odd number of addresses
Data 1, 2 Data 3, 4 Data n 0 20
In case of word-by-word specification
ASCII
Data 1 Data 2 Data n
Binary
GC Series User’s Manual 20-11
20-4 MC Protocol Communication Commands
1401H: Sequential write
Write the specified address(es) data sequentially.
Request command
ASCII
1401H Sub command Device code + Number of Data
Head device addresses
Binary
Sub command: When 0001 is specified, each address is written bit by bit.
When 0000 is specified, each address is written word by word.
Device code (ASCII): When using bit data, "X*" or "Y*" is used. When using word data, "D*" is used.
• When the device code is “D*” and the head device is “252H”
D * 0 0 0 2 5 2
44H 2AH 30H 30H 30H 32H 35H 32H
Device code (Binary): When using bit data, "9CH" or "9DH" is used. When using word data, "A8H" is used.
• When the device code is “A8H” and the head device is “252H”
52H 02H 00H A8H
Number of addresses that can be specified
ASCII code communication Binary code communication
Bit-by-bit specification 1 to 896 1 to 1792
Word-by-word specification 1 to 480 1 to 480
MC Protocol Communication Function
In case of bit-by-bit specification (ASCII)
Data 1 Data 2 Data n
In case of bit-by-bit specification (binary) and even number of addresses
Data 1, 2 Data 3, 4 Data n-1, n
In case of bit-by-bit specification (binary) and odd number of addresses
Data 1, 2 Data 3, 4 Data n 0
20 In case of word-by-word specification
ASCII
Data 1 Data 2 Data n
Binary
Response
There is no response data part.
The header, sub header, network number, PC number, request destination unit I/O number, request destination station
number, response data length, and end code are returned.
20-12 GC Series User’s Manual
20-4 MC Protocol Communication Commands
0406H: Sequential read of multiple blocks
Read multiple blocks with sequential addresses as one block.
Request command
ASCII
0406H 0000H Number of word Number of bit Word address 1 Number of
address blocks address blocks (Device code + Head device) addresses
Binary
Word address n Number of Bit address 1 Number of
(Device code + Head device) addresses (Device code + Head device) addresses
Bit address n Number of
(Device code + Head device) addresses
Specify the number of word address blocks or the number of bit addresses blocks within the following range:
(Number of word address blocks + Number of bit address blocks) ≤ 32
(Total number of addresses of respective word address blocks + Total number of addresses of respective bit address
blocks) ≤ 480
When the number of word address blocks is 2 and the number of bit address blocks is 3:
• ASCII • Binary
0 2 0 3
30H 32H 30H 33H 02H 03H
Specify the number of blocks as follows:
For 5, specify 05H.
For 20, specify 14H.
MC Protocol Communication Function
Device code (ASCII): When using bit data, "X*" or "Y*" is used. When using word data, "D*" is used.
• When the device code is “D*” and the head device is “252H”
D * 0 0 0 2 5 2
44H 2AH 30H 30H 30H 32H 35H 32H
Device code (Binary): When using bit data, "9CH" or "9DH" is used. When using word data, "A8H" is used.
• When the device code is “A8H” and the head device is “252H”
52H 02H 00H A8H
Response
ASCII
Word address block 1 Word address block n Bit address block 1 Bit address block n
20
Data 1 Data m Data 1 Data m Data 1 Data m Data 1 Data m
Binary
GC Series User’s Manual 20-13
20-4 MC Protocol Communication Commands
1406H: Sequential write of multiple blocks
Write multiple blocks with sequential addresses as one block.
Request command
ASCII
Number of word Number of bit
1406H 0000H address blocks address blocks
Binary
Word address block 1 Word address block n
Word address 1 Number of Data 1 Data m Word address n Number of Data 1 Data m
(Device code + Head device) addresses (Device code + Head device) addresses
Bit address block 1 Bit address block n
Bit address 1 Number of Data 1 Data m Bit address n Number of Data 1 Data m
(Device code + Head device) addresses (Device code + Head device) addresses
Specify the number of word address blocks or the number of bit addresses blocks within the following range:
(4 x (Number of word address blocks + Number of bit address blocks) + Total number of addresses of respective word
address blocks + Total number of addresses of respective bit address blocks) ≤ 480
When the number of word address blocks is 2 and the number of bit address blocks is 3:
• ASCII • Binary
0 2 0 3
30H 32H 30H 33H 02H 03H
Specify the number of blocks as follows:
For 5, specify 05H.
For 20, specify 14H.
MC Protocol Communication Function
Device code (ASCII): When using bit data, "X*" or "Y*" is used. When using word data, "D*" is used.
• When the device code is “D*” and the head device is “252H”
D * 0 0 0 2 5 2
44H 2AH 30H 30H 30H 32H 35H 32H
Device code (Binary): When using bit data, "9CH" or "9DH" is used. When using word data, "A8H" is used.
• When the device code is “A8H” and the head device is “252H”
52H 02H 00H A8H
Response
20 There is no response data part.
The header, sub header, network number, PC number, request destination unit I/O number, request destination station
number, response data length, and end code are returned.
20-14 GC Series User’s Manual
20-4 MC Protocol Communication Commands
0101H: CPU format read
Read out the GC Series model.
Request command
ASCII
0101H 0000H
Binary
Response
Type: Returns the GC Series model name as follows:
"GC1000"
Type code: Returns the GC Series type code as follows:
"10H"
Reference The GC Series type and type code to be read can be changed in [MC protocol settings].
"12-3 MC Protocol Communication Settings"
0619H: Loop-back test
Check if communications are available. Only UDP/IP is supported.
Request command
ASCII
0619H 0000H Data length Data
MC Protocol Communication Function
Binary
Data length: Specify a value between 0 and 480 (1E0H) for the "Data" size (in bytes).
Data: Specify any value.
Response
ASCII
Data length Data
Binary
The same data length and data as those specified in the command are returned.
20
GC Series User’s Manual 20-15
20-4 MC Protocol Communication Commands
End Codes for Communication Errors
Code (HEX) Cause Initiated command
0000H The command was successfully executed. Common
**50H* • Any other value than 5000H was specified for the sub header when using the
3E frame.
Common
• Any other value than 5400H was specified for the sub header when using the
4E frame.
**54H* A non-numerical ASCII code was specified for the sub header. Common
C050H A non-numerical ASCII code was specified for any other item than the sub header. Common
4A00H Any other value than 00H was specified for the network number. Common
4B00H • Any other value than FFH was specified for the PC number.
Common
• Any other value than 03FFH was specified for the IO number.
C058H Data shorter than the set number of addresses or blocks was specified during
Common
ASCII code communication.
C059H • The specified command is not supported.
Common
• The specified sub command is not supported.
C061H Data shorter than the set number of addresses or blocks was specified during
Common
binary code communication.
C050H A non-existing device code was specified during ASCII code communication. 0401,1401,0406,1406
C05BH A non-existing device code was specified during binary code communication. 0401,1401,0406,1406
C056H The specified address number was outside the valid range. 0401,1401,0406,1406
C051H The specified number of addresses was outside the valid range. 0401,1401,0406,1406
C05CH "0001" was specified for the sub command, and a word address was specified
0401,1401,0406,1406
during bit address command execution.
4080H "0" was specified for both the number of word blocks and the number of bit
MC Protocol Communication Function
0406
addresses.
C051H More than 960 bytes loop-back data have been received. 0619
20
20-16 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Word address
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
bit 0: Communication input bit 0
Communication input [0:00] 0: OFF
256 100H WORD R/W
to [0:15] 1: ON
Indicates the status of the
bit 1: Communication input bit 1
communication inputs.
0: OFF
... ... ... When a bit is turned ON, the ... ...
1: ON
corresponding communication input
...
is turned ON.
Communication input [3:00] bit 15: Communication input bit 15
259 103H WORD R/W
to [3:15] 0: OFF
1: ON
Enablement code of
260 104H UINT R/W
communication input [0:00] Indicates the status of the enablement
code.
... ... ... ... ... 0000H to 00FFH
The upper eight bits are ignored.
Enablement code of (Range: 1 to 255)
289 121H UINT R/W
communication input [1:13]
290 122H System reserved
291 123H System reserved
PLC text, 1st character, 2nd
292 124H Displays the status of the PLC text. STRING R/W
character
The first character is set in the low
... ... ... byte while the second character is set ... ... 0000H to FFFFH
in the high byte in the ASCII code
PLC text, 19th character, 20th
301 12DH format. STRING R/W
character
Number of connected units Indicates the number of connected
512 200H UINT R 0 to 65535
(expansion unit) expansion units.
Number of connected units Indicates the number of connected
513 201H UINT R 0 to 65535
(remote I/O module) remote I/O modules.
Model information (main bit 0 to 7: Unit model
514 202H WORD R
controller) 1: GC-1000
MC Protocol Communication Function
2: GC-1000R
Model information (1st
515 203H WORD R 3: GC-S84
expansion unit)
4: GC-S16
... ... ... ... ... 5: GC-S1R
6: GC-A16
Model information (10th
524 20CH WORD R 7: GC-R45
expansion unit) Indicates the connected unit model.
8: GC-R48
Model information (1st bit 8: Positional relationship to the GC-
525 20DH WORD R B30
remote I/O module)
0: Unit positioned before the GC-B30
... ... ... ... ... 1: Unit positioned after the GC-B30
If the GC-B30 does not exist in the unit
Model information (4th
528 210H WORD R configuration, all units are set to 0.
remote I/O module) bit 9 to 15: System reserved (fixed to 0)
529 211H System reserved
Operation time, Byte 0, Byte
530 212H WORD R 0000H to FFFFH
1 Indicates the time elapsed since the
Operation time, Byte 2, Byte start of the unit in units of 10 ms.
531 213H
3
WORD R 0000H to FFFFH
bit 0: RUN state
20
0: The unit is stopped.
1: The unit is running.
bit 1: Abnormal state
Indicates the operating state of the
532 214H GC operating state WORD R 0: Normal
GC.
1: Abnormal
* An abnormal state means that at
least one alert or error is occurring.
bit 2 to 15: System reserved (fixed to 0)
Number of errors that Indicates the number of errors that
533 215H UINT R 0 to 30
occurred are currently occurring.
GC Series User’s Manual 20-17
20-5 Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
Main code of the (1st) error Indicates the code of the error that is
534 216H UINT R
code currently occurring.
Error codes are sorted in the following order:
Detailed code of the (1st)
535 217H (1) Errors are sorted in order of UINT R
error code
Error, Alert, and Info, starting
... ... ... from the first error. ... ...
(2) Errors are sorted by error 0 to 65535
Main code of the (30th) error
592 250H category in (1) in order that UINT R
code they occurred.
The high byte represents the main
Detailed code of the (30th) code while the low byte represents
593 251H UINT R
error code the detailed code.
"Alert/Error list" (page A-7)
Communication output [0:00]
594 252H Indicates the output status of the WORD R
to [0:15] bit 0: Communication output bit 0
communication outputs.
bit 1: Communication output bit 1
... ... ... When a communication output is ... ...
...
turned ON, the corresponding bit is
Communication output [3:00] bit 15: Communication output bit 15
597 255H turned ON. WORD R
to [3:15]
bit 0 to 3: GC-Link port A connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 4 to 7: GC-Link port A error status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
598 256H GC-Link port status Indicates the GC-Link port status. WORD R
bit 8 to 11: GC-Link port B connection status
0000: Searching
0001: Not connected
0010: Connected
bit 12 to 15: GC-Link port B error status
0000: No error
0001: Communication error
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the number of GL-R units 1: Main unit only
768 300H UINT R
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port A. 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit 2
MC Protocol Communication Function
769 301H System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
770 302H UINT R
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1: Type F
771 303H UINT R
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port A. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port A GL-R 1: Type F
772 304H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port A GL-R
773 305H Number of optical axes of the UINT R 0 to 127
main unit
20 774 306H
GC-Link port A GL-R
Number of optical axes of
Indicates the number of optical axes
of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link UINT R 0 to 127
sub unit 1 port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R
775 307H Number of optical axes of UINT R 0 to 127
sub unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R the GL-R (receiver) connected to the
bit 1: Switch 2
776 308H Main controller setting switch GC-Link port A. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned ON, the
bit 5: Switch 6
corresponding bit is turned ON.
777 309H System reserved
20-18 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
778 30AH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
779 30BH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
841 349H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
842 34AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis Indicates the received-light-amount of
GC-Link port A GL-R each optical axis of the GL-R
connected to the GC-Link port A. bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
843 34BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 1, WORD R
The received-light-amount range is 0 bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
to 63.
... ... ... The high byte of the 127th optical axis ... ...
is always 0.
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
905 389H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 1, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
906 38AH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
907 38BH Received-light-amount, Sub unit 2, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
3rd optical axis, 4th optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
969 3C9H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 2nd optical axis
MC Protocol Communication Function
970 3CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R ...
optical axis [15:0] bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 16th
Indicates the ON/OFF information of
optical axis
each optical axis of the GL-R
connected to the GC-Link port A. bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 17th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R A sub unit is placed with the bits bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 18th optical axis
971 3CBH ON/OFF information of each following the optical axis of the last WORD R
...
optical axis [31:16] unit. bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 32nd optical axis
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an
... ... ... optical axis configured with fixed ... ...
blanking. bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 225th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 226th optical axis
984 3D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R
...
optical axis [239:224]
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 240th optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL-R 0: No error
985 3D9H WORD R
Error status connected to the GC-Link port A. 1: Error occurring
Indicates the OSSD output status of
GC-Link port A GL-R 0: OFF
986 3DAH the GL-R connected to the GC-Link WORD R
OSSD output status 1: ON
port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R
Received-light-amount
Indicates the enablement status of the
received-light-amount decrease alert 0: Disabled
20
987 3DBH WORD R
decrease alert enablement of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 1: Enabled
status port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection status of the
Received-light-amount received-light-amount decrease alert 0: No alert
988 3DCH WORD R
decrease alert detection of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 1: Alert occurring
status port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection threshold of
Received-light-amount the received-light-amount decrease
989 3DDH UINT R 0 to 100
decrease alert detection alert of the GL-R connected to the
threshold GC-Link port A in percentage.
GC Series User’s Manual 20-19
20-5 Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port A GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert 1: 5 sec
990 3DEH Received-light-amount UINT R
of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time
port A. 3: 5 min
Indicates the number of GS/GS-M
GC-Link port A GS
1024 400H units connected to the GC-Link port UINT R 0 to 16
Number of connected units
A.
GC-Link port A GS bit 0 to 2: Model information
1025 401H WORD R
Model information (1st unit) 000: GS-10
001: GS-50
GC-Link port A GS
1026 402H WORD R 011: GS-70
Model information (2nd unit)
100: GS-M5/9
... ... ... ... ... 101: GS-ML5
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
Indicates the model information of the
bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
00: Normal operation (Default)
port A.
01: OFF
10: OFF when GS is closed (locked)
GC-Link port A GS
1040 410H WORD R 11: Control via GC-Link port
Model information (16th unit)
bit 6: Coding level settings
0: Low (multi operation)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and lock 1: ON
GC-Link port A GS
1041 411H control status of the GS/GS-M WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status
connected to the GC-Link port A. 0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
Indicates the open/close state of each
GC-Link port A GS 0: Open
1042 412H GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link WORD R
Open/close state 1: Close
port A.
...
MC Protocol Communication Function
bit 15: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
Indicates the lock status of each GS/
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
GS-M connected to the GC-Link port
GC-Link port A GS 0: Unlocked
1043 413H A. WORD R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-contact
...
type.
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 0: Open/close state
GC-Link port A GS 0: Open
1044 414H WORD R
1st unit status 1: Close
bit 1: Lock status
0: Unlocked
20 1045 415H
GC-Link port A GS
2nd unit status
Indicates the detailed information of
the GS/GS-M connected to the
WORD R
1: Locked
bit 2: Red LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port A.
1: ON
... ... ... ... ... bit 3: Green LED display status
0: OFF
GC-Link port A GS 1: ON
1059 423H WORD R
16th unit status
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the number of GL-R units 1: Main unit only
1280 500H UINT R
Number of connected units connected to the GC-Link port B. 2: Main unit + sub unit 1
3: Main unit + sub unit 1 + sub unit 2
20-20 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
1281 501H System reserved
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
1282 502H UINT R
Main unit type 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the type of the GL-R 1: Type F
1283 503H UINT R
Sub unit 1 type connected to the GC-Link port B. 2: Type H
3: Type L
0: Not connected
GC-Link port B GL-R 1: Type F
1284 504H UINT R
Sub unit 2 type 2: Type H
3: Type L
GC-Link port B GL-R
1285 505H Number of optical axes of the UINT R 0 to 127
main unit
Indicates the number of optical axes
GC-Link port B GL-R of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link
1286 506H UINT R 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of sub unit 1 port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R
1287 507H UINT R 0 to 127
Number of optical axes of sub unit 2
Indicates the setting switch status of
bit 0: Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R the GL-R (receiver) connected to the
bit 1: Switch 2
1288 508H Main controller setting switch GC-Link port B. WORD R
...
settings When each switch is turned ON, the
bit 5: Switch 6
corresponding bit is turned ON.
1289 509H System reserved 0 R 0
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1290 50AH Received-light-amount, Main unit, WORD R
bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
1st optical axis, 2nd optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Main bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1291 50BH WORD R
unit, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis
MC Protocol Communication Function
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1353 549H Received-light-amount, Main WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit, 127th optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
1354 54AH WORD R
unit 1, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
Indicates the received-light-amount of
GC-Link port B GL-R each optical axis of the GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub connected to the GC-Link port B. bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1355 54BH WORD R
unit 1, 3rd optical axis, 4th The received-light-amount range is 0 bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis to 63.
... ... ... The high byte of the 127th optical axis ... ...
is always 0.
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1417 589H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 1, 127th optical axis
1418 58AH
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub
WORD R
bit 0 to 7: 1st optical axis
20
unit 2, 1st optical axis, 2nd bit 8 to 15: 2nd optical axis
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
Received-light-amount, Sub bit 0 to 7: 3rd optical axis
1419 58BH WORD R
unit 2, 3rd optical axis, 4th bit 8 to 15: 4th optical axis
optical axis
... ... ... ... ...
GC-Link port B GL-R
bit 0 to 7: 127th optical axis
1481 5C9H Received-light-amount, Sub WORD R
bit 8 to 15: Fixed to 0
unit 2, 127th optical axis
GC Series User’s Manual 20-21
20-5 Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 1st
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 2nd
1482 5CAH ON/OFF information of each WORD R optical axis
optical axis [15:0] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 16th
optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF information of bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 17th
each optical axis of the GL-R optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R connected to the GC-Link port B. bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 18th
1483 5CBH ON/OFF information of each A sub unit is placed with the bits WORD R optical axis
optical axis [31:16] following the optical axis of the last ...
unit. bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 32nd
The ON/OFF logic is inverted for an optical axis
optical axis configured with fixed
... ... ... blanking. ... ... ...
bit 0: ON/OFF information of the 225th
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R bit 1: ON/OFF information of the 226th
1496 5D8H ON/OFF information of each WORD R optical axis
optical axis [239:224] ...
bit 15: ON/OFF information of the 240th
optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the error status of the GL-R 0: No error
1497 5D9H WORD R
Error status connected to the GC-Link port B. 1: Error occurring
Indicates the OSSD output status of
GC-Link port B GL-R 0: OFF
1498 5DAH the GL-R connected to the GC-Link WORD R
OSSD output status 1: ON
port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the enablement status of the
Received-light-amount received-light-amount decrease alert 0: Disabled
1499 5DBH WORD R
decrease alert enablement of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 1: Enabled
status port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection status of the
Received-light-amount received-light-amount decrease alert 0: No alert
1500 5DCH WORD R
decrease alert detection of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 1: Alert occurring
status port B.
MC Protocol Communication Function
GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection threshold of
Received-light-amount the received-light-amount decrease
1501 5DDH UINT R 0 to 100
decrease alert detection alert of the GL-R connected to the
threshold GC-Link port B in percentage.
Indicates the detection time of the 0: No set
GC-Link port B GL-R
received-light-amount decrease alert 1: 5 sec
1502 5DEH Received-light-amount UINT R
of the GL-R connected to the GC-Link 2: 30 sec
decrease alert detection time
port B. 3: 5 min
Indicates the number of GS/GS-M
GC-Link port B GS
1536 600H units connected to the GC-Link port UINT R 0 to 16
Number of connected units
B.
GC-Link port B GS bit 0 to 2: Model information
1537 601H WORD R
Model information (1st unit) 000: GS-10
001: GS-50
GC-Link port B GS
1538 602H WORD R 011: GS-70
Model information (2nd unit)
100: GS-M5/9
... ... ... ... ... 101: GS-ML5
20 Indicates the model information of the
GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link
bit 3: System reserved (fixed to 0)
bit 4 to 5: Indicator control mode
00: Normal operation (Default)
port B.
01: OFF
10: OFF when GS is closed (locked)
GC-Link port B GS
1552 610H WORD R 11: Control via GC-Link port
Model information (16th unit)
bit 6: Coding level settings
0: Low (multi operation)
1: High (unique operation)
bit 7 to 15: System reserved
20-22 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
bit 0: OSSD status
0: OFF
Indicates the OSSD status and lock 1: ON
GC-Link port B GS
1553 611H control status of the GS/GS-M WORD R bit 1: Lock control information
OSSD/lock control status
connected to the GC-Link port B. 0: Unlocked
1: Locked
bit 11 to 15: System reserved
bit 0: Open/close state of the 1st unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 1: Open/close state of the 2nd unit
Indicates the open/close state of each
GC-Link port B GS 0: Open
1554 612H GS/GS-M connected to the GC-Link WORD R
Open/close state 1: Close
port B.
...
bit 15: Open/close state of the 16th unit
0: Open
1: Close
bit 0: Lock status of the 1st unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
Indicates the lock status of each GS/
bit 1: Lock status of the 2nd unit
GS-M connected to the GC-Link port
GC-Link port B GS 0: Unlocked
1555 613H B. WORD R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-contact
...
type.
bit 15: Lock status of the 16th unit
0: Unlocked
1: Locked
GC-Link port B GS bit 0: Open/close state
1556 614H WORD R
1st unit status 0: Open
1: Close
GC-Link port B GS
1557 615H WORD R bit 1: Lock status
2nd unit status
0: Unlocked
... ... ... ... ... 1: Locked
Indicates the detailed information of
bit 2: Red LED display status
the GS/GS-M connected to the
0: OFF
GC-Link port B.
1: ON
bit 3: Green LED display status
GC-Link port B GS
1571 623H WORD R
MC Protocol Communication Function
0: OFF
16th unit status
1: ON
bit 4 to 15: System reserved
1792 700H Project name, 1st character STRING R
Indicates the project name of the
... ... ... ...
configuration file (UTF-16).
1855 73FH Project name, 64th character STRING R
1856 740H System reserved
Configuration CRC, 1st
1857 741H STRING R
character
Indicates the configuration CRC of the
... ... ... ...
configuration file (UTF-16).
Configuration CRC, 8th
1864 0748H STRING R
character
1865 749H System reserved
Date and time of transfer, 1st
1866 74AH
character
Indicates the date and time of transfer
STRING R
20
... ... ... ...
of the configuration file (UTF-16).
Date and time of transfer,
1885 75DH STRING R
20th character
1886 745H System reserved
GC Series User’s Manual 20-23
20-5 Address List
Address Data Bit address
Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type availability
2048 800H Input status (GC-Link port) WORD R
2049 801H Input status (main controller) WORD R
Input status (1st expansion
2050 802H WORD R
unit)
... ... ... ... ...
Input status (10th expansion
2059 80BH WORD R
unit)
Input status (1st remote I/O
2060 80CH WORD R
module)
... ... ... ... ...
Input status (4th remote I/O
2063 80FH WORD R
module)
Indicates the input/output status of
2064 810H Output status (GC-Link port) each unit.* 1 WORD R
Output status (main
2065 811H WORD R
controller)
Output status (1st expansion
2066 812H WORD R
unit)
... ... ... ... ...
Output status (10th
2075 81BH WORD R
expansion unit)
Output status (1st remote I/O
2076 81CH WORD R
module)
... ... ... ... ...
Output status (4th remote I/O
2079 81FH WORD R
module)
Indicates the number of blocks used
2304 900H Number of used blocks UINT R 0 to 500
by the program.
Block output status (Block ID
2305 901H WORD R
1)
Indicates the output status of each
MC Protocol Communication Function
... ... ... ... ...
block used by the program.* 2
Block output status (Block ID
2804 AF4H WORD R
500)
Indicates the number of error
2816 B00H Number of error histories UINT R 0 to 100
histories.
1st error history, Error code, Indicates the error code of the 1st
2817 B01H UINT R 0 to 99
Main code error history.
Error histories are sorted in newest-
1st error history, Error code, first chronological order.
2818 B02H UINT R 0 to 9999
Detailed code "Alert/Error list" (page A-7)
1st error history, Operation
2819 B03H Indicates the time elapsed since the WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, Low
start of the GC Series when the error
1st error history, Operation was detected in seconds.
2820 B04H WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, High
... ... ... ... ... ...
20 3213 C8DH
100th error history, Error
code, Main code Indicates the error code of the 100th
UINT R 0 to 99
100th error history, Error error history.
3214 C8EH UINT R 0 to 9999
code, Detailed code
100th error history, Operation
3215 C8FH Indicates the time elapsed since the WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, Low
start of the GC Series when the error
100th error history, Operation was detected in seconds.
3216 C90H WORD R 0 to 65535
time on error, High
*1 For the bit assignment of each unit, refer to "Input/output status assignment by unit" (page 20-32).
*2 Check the block ID in the GC Configurator report. For the bit assignment of each block, refer to "Output status assignment by block"
(page 20-34).
20-24 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Bit address
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Bit Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type
position
4096 1000H 0 [0:00] Bit R/W
Communication input ... ... Bit R/W
... ... [0:00] to [0:15]
4111 100FH 15 [0:15] Indicates the status of the Bit R/W
communication inputs.
... ... ... When a bit is turned ON, the Bit R/W 0: OFF
... ... corresponding 1: ON
communication input is turned
4144 1030H 0 [3:00] ON. Bit R/W
Communication input
... ... ... ... Bit R/W
[3:00] to [3:15]
4159 103FH 15 [3:15] Bit R/W
Indicates the RUN state of the 0: The unit is stopped.
8512 2140H 0 RUN state Bit R
GC. 1: The unit is running.
GC operating state Indicates the abnormal state
of the GC. 0: Normal
8513 2141H 1 Abnormal state Bit R
An abnormal state means that at 1: Abnormal
least one alert or error is occurring.
9504 2520H 0 Communication output [0:00] Bit R
Communication output
... ... ... ... Bit R
[0:00] to [0:15]
9519 252FH 15 Communication output [0:15] Indicates the output status of Bit R
the communication outputs.
When a communication 0: OFF
... ... ... ... ... Bit R
output is turned ON, the 1: ON
corresponding bit is turned
9552 2550H 0 Communication output [3:00] ON. Bit R
Communication output
... ... ... ... Bit R
[3:00] to [3:15]
9567 255FH 15 Communication output [3:15] Bit R
GC-Link port A GL-R
12416 3080H 0 Main controller setting Bit R
switch settings, Switch 1
GC-Link port A GL-R
MC Protocol Communication Function
12417 3081H 1 Main controller setting Bit R
switch settings, Switch 2
GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the setting switch
12418 3082H 2 Main controller setting status of the GL-R (receiver) Bit R
GC-Link port A GL-R switch settings, Switch 3 connected to the GC-Link port
0: OFF
Main controller setting A.
1: ON
switch settings GC-Link port A GL-R When each switch is turned
12419 3083H 3 Main controller setting ON, the corresponding bit is Bit R
switch settings, Switch 4 turned ON.
GC-Link port A GL-R
12420 3084H 4 Main controller setting Bit R
switch settings, Switch 5
GC-Link port A GL-R
12421 3085H 5 Main controller setting Bit R
switch settings, Switch 6
GC-Link port A GL-R
15520 3CA0H 0 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
optical axis, 1st optical axis
GC-Link port A GL-R
... ... ON/OFF information of ... ... Bit R
each optical axis [15:0]
15535 3CAFH 15
GC-Link port A GL-R
ON/OFF information of each
optical axis, 16th optical axis
Indicates the ON/OFF
information of each optical
axis of the GL-R connected to
the GC-Link port A.
Bit R 20
A sub unit is placed with the 0: OFF
... ... ... ... ... Bit R
offset following the optical 1: ON
axis of the last unit.
GC-Link port A GL-R The ON/OFF logic is inverted
15744 3D80H 0 ON/OFF information of each for an optical axis configured Bit R
optical axis, 225th optical axis with fixed blanking.
GC-Link port A GL-R
ON/OFF information of
... ... ... ... Bit R
each optical axis
[239:224]
GC-Link port A GL-R
15759 3D8FH 15 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
optical axis, 240th optical axis
GC Series User’s Manual 20-25
20-5 Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Bit Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type
position
Indicates the error status of
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R 0: No error
15760 3D90H 0 the GL-R connected to the Bit R
Error status Error status 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port A.
Indicates the OSSD output
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R 0: OFF
15776 3DA0H 0 status of the GL-R connected Bit R
OSSD output status OSSD output status 1: ON
to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the enablement
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R
status of the received-light-
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount 0: Disabled
15792 3DB0H 0 amount decrease alert of the Bit R
decrease alert decrease alert enablement 1: Enabled
GL-R connected to the GC-
enablement status status
Link port A.
GC-Link port A GL-R GC-Link port A GL-R Indicates the detection status of
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount the received-light-amount 0: No alert
15808 3DC0H 0 Bit R
decrease alert detection decrease alert detection decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Alert occurring
status status connected to the GC-Link port A.
16400 4010H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model information 001:GS-50
GC-Link port A GS
16401 4011H 1 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R 011:GS-70
1st GS model information
to the GC-Link port A. 100:GS-M5/9
16402 4012H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
16403 4013H GC-Link port A GS 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Model information (1st
16404 4014H unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
16405 4015H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port A GS settings of the 1st GS/GS-M operation)
16406 4016H 6 Bit R
1st GS coding level settings connected to the GC-Link port 1: High (unique
A. operation)
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
16640 4100H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model 001:GS-50
GC-Link port A GS information of the 16th GS/
16641 4101H 1 Bit R 011:GS-70
16th GS model information GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port A. 100:GS-M5/9
16642 4102H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
16643 4103H GC-Link port A GS 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
MC Protocol Communication Function
Model information (16th
16644 4104H unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
16645 4105H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port A GS
settings of the 16th GS/GS-M operation)
16646 4106H 6 16th GS coding level Bit R
connected to the GC-Link port 1: High (unique
settings
A. operation)
Indicates the OSSD status of
GC-Link port A GS 0: OFF
16656 4110H 0 the GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
OSSD status 1: ON
the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GS
OSSD/lock control status Indicates the OSSD status and
GC-Link port A GS lock control status of the GS/ 0: Unlocked
16657 4111H 1 Bit R
Lock control status GS-M connected to the GC-Link 1: Locked
port A.
20
20-26 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Bit Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type
position
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Open
16672 4120H 0 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port A GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Open/close state
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Open
16687 412FH 15 of the 16th GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the lock status of
the 1st GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Unlocked
16688 4130H 0 to the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
GC-Link port A GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Lock status
Indicates the lock status of
the 16th GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Unlocked
16703 413FH 15 to the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Open
16704 4140H 0 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the lock status of
the 1st GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: Unlocked
16705 4141H 1 to the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port A GS contact type.
1st unit status
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port A 1st GS 0: OFF
16706 4142H 2 status of the 1st GS/GS-M Bit R
Red LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port A 1st GS display status of the 1st GS/ 0: OFF
16707 4143H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port A.
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Open
16944 4230H 0 of the 16th GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port A.
MC Protocol Communication Function
Indicates the lock status of
the 16th GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: Unlocked
16945 4231H 1 to the GC-Link port A. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port A GS contact type.
16th unit status
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port A 16th GS 0: OFF
16946 4232H 2 status of the 16th GS/GS-M Bit R
Red LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port A.
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port A 16th GS display status of the 16th GS/ 0: OFF
16947 4233H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port A.
GC-Link port B GL-R
20608 5080H 0 Main controller setting Bit R
switch settings, Switch 1
GC-Link port B GL-R
20609 5081H 1 Main controller setting Bit R
switch settings, Switch 2
20610 5082H
GC-Link port B GL-R
2
GC-Link port B GL-R
Main controller setting
switch settings, Switch 3
Indicates the setting switch
status of the GL-R (receiver)
connected to the GC-Link port
Bit R
0: OFF
20
Main controller setting B.
1: ON
switch settings GC-Link port B GL-R When each switch is turned
20611 5083H 3 Main controller setting ON, the corresponding bit is Bit R
switch settings, Switch 4 turned ON.
GC-Link port B GL-R
20612 5084H 4 Main controller setting Bit R
switch settings, Switch 5
GC-Link port B GL-R
20613 5085H 5 Main controller setting Bit R
switch settings, Switch 6
GC Series User’s Manual 20-27
20-5 Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Bit Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type
position
GC-Link port B GL-R
23712 5CA0H 0 ON/OFF information of each Bit R
optical axis, 1st optical axis
GC-Link port B GL-R
... ... ... ... Bit R
ON/OFF information of
each optical axis [15:0]
GC-Link port B GL-R
ON/OFF information of each Indicates the ON/OFF
23727 5CAFH 15 Bit R
optical axis, 16th optical information of each optical
axis axis of the GL-R connected to
the GC-Link port B.
... ... ... ... ... A sub unit is placed with the Bit R 0: OFF
offset following the optical 1: ON
GC-Link port B GL-R axis of the last unit.
ON/OFF information of each The ON/OFF logic is inverted
23936 5D80H 0 for an optical axis configured Bit R
optical axis, 225th optical
axis with fixed blanking.
GC-Link port B GL-R
ON/OFF information of
... ... ... ... Bit R
each optical axis
[239:224]
GC-Link port B GL-R
ON/OFF information of each
23951 5D8FH 15 Bit R
optical axis, 240th optical
axis
Indicates the error status of
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R 0: No error
23952 5D90H 0 the GL-R connected to the Bit R
Error status Error status 1: Error occurring
GC-Link port B.
Indicates the OSSD output
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R 0: OFF
23968 5DA0H 0 status of the GL-R connected Bit R
OSSD output status OSSD output status 1: ON
to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the enablement
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R
status of the received-light-
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount 0: Disabled
23984 5DB0H 0 amount decrease alert of the Bit R
decrease alert decrease alert enablement 1: Enabled
GL-R connected to the GC-
enablement status status
Link port B.
GC-Link port B GL-R GC-Link port B GL-R Indicates the detection status of
Received-light-amount Received-light-amount the received-light-amount 0: No alert
24000 5DC0H 0 Bit R
decrease alert detection decrease alert detection decrease alert of the GL-R 1: Alert occurring
status status connected to the GC-Link port B.
24592 6010H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model 001:GS-50
GC-Link port B GS information of the 1st GS/
24593 6011H 1 Bit R 011:GS-70
1st GS model information GS-M connected to the
MC Protocol Communication Function
GC-Link port B. 100:GS-M5/9
24594 6012H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
24595 6013H GC-Link port B GS 3 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Model information (1st
24596 6014H unit) 4 System reserved System reserved Bit R
24597 6015H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
0: Low (multi
Indicates the coding level
GC-Link port B GS operation)
24598 6016H 6 settings of the 1st GS/GS-M Bit R
1st GS coding level settings 1: High (unique
connected to the GC-Link port B.
operation)
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
24832 6100H 0 Bit R 000:GS-10
Indicates the model 001:GS-50
GC-Link port B GS information of the 16th GS/
24833 6101H 1 Bit R 011:GS-70
16th GS model information GS-M connected to the
GC-Link port B. 100:GS-M5/9
24834 6102H 2 Bit R 101:GS-ML5
20 24835
24836
6103H
6104H
GC-Link port B GS
Model information (16th
unit)
3
4
System reserved
System reserved
System reserved
System reserved
Bit
Bit
R
24837 6105H 5 System reserved System reserved Bit R
Indicates the coding level 0: Low (multi
GC-Link port B GS
settings of the 16th GS/GS-M operation)
24838 6106H 6 16th GS coding level Bit R
connected to the GC-Link port 1: High (unique
settings
B. operation)
20-28 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Bit Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type
position
Indicates the OSSD status of
GC-Link port B GS 0: OFF
24848 6110H 0 the GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
OSSD status 1: ON
the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GS
OSSD/lock control status
Indicates the lock control status
GC-Link port B GS 0: Unlocked
24849 6111H 1 of the GS/GS-M connected to Bit R
Lock control status 1: Locked
the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Open
24864 6120H 0 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port B.
GC-Link port B GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Open/close state
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Open
24879 612FH 15 of the 16th GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the lock status of
the 1st GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Unlocked
24880 6130H 0 to the GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
GC-Link port B GS
... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Lock status
Indicates the lock status of
the 16th GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Unlocked
24895 613FH 15 to the GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
contact type.
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Open
24896 6140H 0 of the 1st GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the lock status of
the 1st GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: Unlocked
24897 6141H 1 to the GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port B GS contact type.
1st unit status
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port B 1st GS 0: OFF
24898 6142H 2 status of the 1st GS/GS-M Bit R
Red LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port B 1st GS display status of the 1st GS/ 0: OFF
MC Protocol Communication Function
24899 6143H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port B.
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Indicates the open/close state
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Open
25136 6230H 0 of the 16th GS/GS-M connected Bit R
Open/close state 1: Close
to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the lock status of
the 16th GS/GS-M connected
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: Unlocked
25137 6231H 1 to the GC-Link port B. Bit R
Lock status 1: Locked
This is always 0 for the non-
GC-Link port B GS contact type.
16th unit status
Indicates the red LED display
GC-Link port B 16th GS 0: OFF
25138 6232H 2 status of the 16th GS/GS-M Bit R
Red LED display status 1: ON
connected to the GC-Link port B.
Indicates the green LED
GC-Link port B 16th GS display status of the 16th GS/ 0: OFF
25139 6233H 3 Bit R
Green LED display status GS-M connected to the 1: ON
GC-Link port B.
32768 8000H
Input status (GC-Link
0
Input status (GC-Link port)
bit 0
Indicates the input status of
Bit R
0: OFF
20
... ... ... ... Bit R
port) the GC-Link port.* 1 1: ON
Input status (GC-Link port)
32783 800FH 15 Bit R
bit 15
Input status (main
32784 8010H 0 Bit R
controller) bit 0
Input status (main Displays the input status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
controller) the main controller.* 1 1: ON
Input status (main
32799 801FH 15 Bit R
controller) bit 15
GC Series User’s Manual 20-29
20-5 Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Bit Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type
position
Input status (1st expansion
32800 8020H 0 Bit R
unit) bit 0
Input status (1st Indicates the input status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) the 1st expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Input status (1st expansion
32815 802FH 15 Bit R
unit) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Input status (10th
32944 80B0H 0 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 0
Input status (10th Indicates the input status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) the 10th expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Input status (10th
32959 80BFH 15 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 15
Input status (1st remote I/O
32960 80C0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Input status (1st remote I/ Indicates the input status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
O module) the 1st remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Input status (1st remote I/O
32975 80CFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Input status (4th remote I/O
33008 80F0H 0 Bit R
module) bit 0
Input status (4th remote I/ Indicates the input status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
O module) the 4th remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Input status (4th remote I/O
33023 80FFH 15 Bit R
module) bit 15
Output status (GC-Link
33024 8100H 0 Bit R
port) bit 0
Output status (GC-Link Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
port) the GC-Link port.* 1 1: ON
Output status (GC-Link
33039 810FH 15 Bit R
port) bit 15
Output status (main
33040 8110H 0 Bit R
controller) bit 0
MC Protocol Communication Function
Output status (main Displays the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
controller) the main controller.* 1 1: ON
Output status (main
33055 811FH 15 Bit R
controller) bit 15
Output status (1st
33056 8120H 0 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 0
Output status (1st Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) the 1st expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Output status (1st
33071 812FH 15 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Output status (10th
33200 81B0H 0 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 0
Output status (10th Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
expansion unit) the 10th expansion unit.* 1 1: ON
Output status (10th
33215 81BFH 15 Bit R
expansion unit) bit 15
Output status (1st remote I/
20 33216 81C0H
Output status (1st remote
0
...
O module) bit 0
...
Indicates the output status of
Bit
Bit
R
R
0: OFF
... ... I/O module) the 1st remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Output status (1st remote I/
33231 81CFH 15 Bit R
O module) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Output status (4th remote I/
33264 81F0H 0 Bit R
O module) bit 0
Output status (4th remote Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
I/O module) the 4th remote I/O module.* 1 1: ON
Output status (4th remote I/
33279 81FFH 15 Bit R
O module) bit 15
20-30 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Address Corresponding word address
Data
Bit Item Details Attribute Value
DEC HEX type
position
Block output status (Block
36880 9010H 0 Bit R
ID 1) bit 0
Block output status Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
(Block ID 1) the Block ID 1 block.* 2 1: ON
Block output status (Block
36895 901FH 15 Bit R
ID 1) bit 15
... ... ... ... ... ... Bit R ...
Block output status (Block
44864 AF40H 0 Bit R
ID 500) bit 0
Block output status Indicates the output status of 0: OFF
... ... ... ... Bit R
(Block ID 500) the Block ID 500 block.* 2 1: ON
Block output status (Block
44879 AF4FH 15 Bit R
ID 500) bit 15
*1 For the bit assignment of each unit, refer to "Input/output status assignment by unit" (page 20-32).
*2 Check the block ID in the GC Configurator report. For the bit assignment of each block, refer to "Output status assignment by block"
(page 20-34).
MC Protocol Communication Function
20
GC Series User’s Manual 20-31
20-5 Address List
Input/output status assignment by unit
Input status (GC-Link port)
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Port B Port A Port B Port A
Reserved
Ai Ai Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-1000R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Input status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-S16
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Si15 Si14 Si13 Si12 Si11 Si10 Si9 Si8 Si7 Si6 Si5 Si4 Si3 Si2 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
MC Protocol Communication Function
Input status (nth remote I/O module)
GC-R45/R48
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
Ai Ai Ai Ai Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0 Si1 Si0
Input status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (GC-Link port)
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Port B Port A
Reserved
Ao1 Ao0 Ao1 Ao0
20 Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
20-32 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Output status (main controller)
GC-1000
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 So5 So4 So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-1000R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0 SRo So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (nth expansion unit)
GC-S84
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved So3 So2 So1 So0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-S1R
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Reserved SRo
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-A16
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Ao15 Ao14 Ao13 Ao12 Ao11 Ao10 Ao9 Ao8 Ao7 Ao6 Ao5 Ao4 Ao3 Ao2 Ao1 Ao0
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
Output status (nth remote I/O module)
GC-R45
MC Protocol Communication Function
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
Ao Ao Ao Ao
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
GC-R48
bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1
Reserved
So So So So
Output status 0: OFF, 1: ON
20
GC Series User’s Manual 20-33
20-5 Address List
Output status assignment by block
Block name Bit assignment
Emergency stop switch
Limit switch
Interlock switch
Guard locking switch
GS/GS-M Series [KEYENCE]
Light curtain
GL-R Series [KEYENCE]
GL-S Series [KEYENCE]
Safety input devices Laser scanner bit 0: Output
SZ-V Series [KEYENCE]
SZ Series [KEYENCE]
Rope pull switch
Safety mat
Input devices
Two hand control device
Enabling device
Other safety switch
Other safety input
Reset switch bit 0: Output
bit 0: Mode Output 1
Mode selecting switch bit 1: Mode Output 2
bit 2: Error
EDM input
Other input devices
Muting input
Safety plug
bit 0: Output
MC Protocol Communication Function
Hold-to-run switch
Other switch
Other input
20
20-34 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety 1 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
S-OUT bit 6: EDM2 Error
S-OUT EDM enabled bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Reset Required
Safety outputs Safety 2 output bit 3: Error Reset Required
bit 4: DIAG Error
Output devices
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output)
bit 3: Error Reset Required
S-OUT (Relay output) EDM enabled
bit 4: DIAG Error
bit 5: EDM1 Error
bit 6: EDM2 Error
bit 0: Output
Other outputs AUX-OUT bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
Enablement code disabled bit 0: Output
Reset input (COM) bit 0: Output
Communication input
Other input (COM) Enablement code enabled bit1: Ready
Communications bit 2: Error
bit 0: Output
Communication output Communication output bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
MC Protocol Communication Function
Register (Load)
Register bit 0: Output
Register (Store)
GS closed state
bit 0: Output
GS locked state
Expansion blocks None
bit 0: Red
GS indicator control output bit 1: Green
bit 2: Output Error
GL-R received-light-amount decrease alert
AUX-IN
Other input blocks bit 0: Output
OSSD 3/4
IN
20
GC Series User’s Manual 20-35
20-5 Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Reserved
Lock control 1 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
Unlock output
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
Lock control 2 output
bit 2: DIAG Error
bit 3: Wait OFF
bit 0: Red
Indicator control output bit 1: Green
bit 2: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
Independent bank
bit 2: Input Mismatch
bit 3: Output Error
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
Other output blocks bit 3: Bank Output b
Single
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
bit 6: Input Mismatch
bit 7: Output Error
Bank switching output
bit 0: Bank Output A
bit 1: Bank Output a
bit 2: Bank Output B
bit 3: Bank Output b
bit 4: Bank Output C
bit 5: Bank Output c
Binary
bit 6: Bank Output D
bit 7: Bank Output d
bit 8: Bank Output E
MC Protocol Communication Function
bit 9: Bank Output e
bit 10: Input Mismatch
bit 11: Output Error
bit 0: Output
OUT bit 1: Reserved
bit 2: Error
AND
AND (6-10 inputs)
OR
NOT
NAND
Function blocks Logic bit 0: Output
NOR
20 XOR
SR Flip-Flop (Set has priority)
RS Flip-Flop (Reset has priority)
JK Flip-Flop
20-36 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Output
Reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
Reset (with AND)
bit 1: Reset Requireds
Reset bit 0: Output
Dual reset bit 1: Reset Required1
bit 2: Reset Required2
bit 0: Output
Existence detection reset
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Sequential muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Parallel muting
bit 3: Override Active
Function blocks bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting Cross-muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Muting for exit
bit 3: Override Active
MC Protocol Communication Function
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Muting Active
bit 2: Muting Error
Position detection muting
bit 3: Override Active
bit 4: Override Required
bit 5: Timeout
20
GC Series User’s Manual 20-37
20-5 Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Master ON Ready
Master ON
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Unlock Output
Unlock control
bit 1: Unlock Required
bit 0: Output
Bypass
bit 1: Bypass Active
bit 0: Output
Application Control guard
bit 1: Reset Required
bit 0: Output
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Break Required
PSDI control bit 3: Reset Required
bit 4: Normal Operation
bit 5: PSDI Error
bit 6: PSDI Time Out
bit 0: Input Bypass
bit 1: Output Enable
Manual mode control (MMC)
bit 2: Restart Required
bit 3: Manual Mode Active
Manual mode
Function blocks MMC input bypass bit 0: Output
MMC input bypass_ bit 0: Output
MMC output enable bit 0: Output
bit 0: Output
OFF-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
bit 0: Output
ON-delay
bit 1: Delay Active
Pulse generator bit 0: Output
bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
Up-down counter
bit 1: Reached Zero
MC Protocol Communication Function
Timers / Counters bit 0: Reached Upper Limit
bit 1: Reached Zero
bit 0: Output bit 2
bit 3: Output bit 1
bit 4: Output bit 2
Up-down counter (with binary output)
bit 5: Output bit 3
bit 6: Output bit 4
bit 7: Output bit 5
bit 8: Output bit 6
bit 9: Output bit 7
20
20-38 GC Series User’s Manual
20-5 Address List
Block name Bit assignment
bit 0: Rising Edge
Edge detection
bit 1: Falling Edge
bit 0: Output1
bit 1: Output2
bit 2: Output3
bit 3: Output4
Binary decoder
bit 4: Output5
bit 5: Output6
bit 6: Output7
bit 7: Output8
bit 0: Output bit 0
bit 1: Output bit 1
Binary encoder
bit 2: Output bit 2
Function blocks Others
bit 3: Error
bit 0: Mode Output1
bit 1: Mode Output2
bit 2: Mode Output3
bit 3: Mode Output4
bit 4: Mode Output5
Mode changing control
bit 5: Mode Output6
bit 6: Mode Output7
bit 7: Mode Output8
bit 8: Mode Error
bit 9: Trigger Required
Selector (2 inputs) bit 0: Output
Selector (4 inputs) bit 1: Mode Error
Always ON
Always OFF
1 scan ON upon start-up
System Information
System blocks None bit 0: Output
MC Protocol Communication Function
Block information
Jump (Load)
Jump (Store)
Event history trigger
Other functions Recipe block AND (with connection constraint function) bit 0: Output
20
GC Series User’s Manual 20-39
MEMO
MC Protocol Communication Function
20
20-40 GC Series User’s Manual
21
Inspection
and Maintenance
This chapter describes the inspection and maintenance procedures for the GC Series.
21-1 Inspection and Maintenance .............................................................................page 21-2
Inspection and Maintenance
21
GC Series User’s Manual 21-1
21-1 Inspection and Maintenance
Replacement
Inspection and Maintenance
To replace a damaged unit, perform the following
Perform an inspection of the GC Series at an appropriate
procedure:
time based on the following items:
1 Unit replacement
Initial inspection • Turn OFF the GC Series and peripheral equipment
including the relay output.
• Make sure that the GC Series is installed in agreement • Disconnect the cable connected to the unit.
with the installation conditions, installation methods, and • Remove the damaged unit.
wiring specifications specified in this manual. • Install a new unit.
• Review the items listed in periodic inspection. • Reconnect the cable.
"Arranging Units"
Periodic inspection* "Attaching DIN rail"
• Make sure that all of the safety functions are operating 2 System memory
correctly. To replace the main controller "GC-1000" or "GC-
• Make sure that there are no changes in the installation 1000R", remove the system memory from the target
status that will affect the results of the risk assessment main controller and reinstall it on a new main controller.
carried out at the start of the installation. * This step is unnecessary when replacing an expansion unit
or remote I/O module.
• If the S-OUT self-diagnosis is disabled, use the
emergency stop switch to turn OFF the target S-OUT
and check if the device connected to the S-OUT is
3 Power-ON
Make sure that the unit is correctly connected and
stopped.
there are no problems with the wiring before turning
* Determine the inspection cycle on the basis of the laws and rules
in the region, cycle defined in individual standards, and results
the unit ON.
of a risk assessment of the target machine. When the GC Series is powered ON, the Activation
Unless specified in the above laws, rules, and individual CRC error is displayed on the main controller LED
standards, it is recommended that a periodic inspection should display.
be performed at least once a year. Clear the Activation CRC error by following the
instructions on the screen and then turn OFF and ON
Under the following conditions, check the same items as the GC Series.
those of initial inspection.
• The installation, wiring, or function was changed.
• The unit was replaced.
Cleaning
• The machine has not been used for a long time.
Inspection and Maintenance
• If the machine gets dirty, wipe off the component with a
• A malfunction occurred.
clean, dry cloth.
• If dust or dirt is present on a thin part such as a
If devices connected to the GC Series require inspection,
connector, remove the connector and clean the dust or
inspect them, as well as perform the above initial
dirt with a cotton swab.
inspection and periodic inspection. Keep the inspection
results with the machine records.
21
21-2 GC Series User’s Manual
Appendix
This chapter describes the troubleshooting and input/output device settings.
A-1 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................. page A-2
A-2 List of input devices.......................................................................................... page A-10
A-3 Output Device List............................................................................................. page A-87
A-4 Open License ..................................................................................................... page A-95
A-5 Trademarks ........................................................................................................ page A-96
A-6 Revision history................................................................................................. page A-97
A-7 Warranty ............................................................................................................. page A-98
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-1
A-1 Troubleshooting
This section describes how to check and troubleshoot an alert or error that occurred in the GC Series.
Alert and Error categories in the GC main controller
Errors that occurred in the GC main controller are categorized into the following four types according to the description.
Error level Category Details Program behavior Error history
Information This is a minor error. Continue Not saved
Low
Alert When an error that may affect the operation is detected, an Continue Saved
alert state is set.
Error When an error that may affect the operation is detected, an Continue Saved
error state is set. The related output block is turned OFF.
When an error that prevents the GC main controller from Stop Saved
High operating correctly is detected, an error state is set. All of
the output blocks are turned OFF.
A
Appendix
A-2 GC Series User's Manual
A-1 Troubleshooting
How to check an alert or error
There are two methods to check an alert or error that occurred in the GC Series: Checking it on the GC main controller LED
display or the GC Configurator monitor screen.
How to check on the GC main controller LED display
Checking an error that is currently occurring
When an error occurs, it is displayed on the main screen.
[Normal state] [Error] [Alert] [Info]
[Detail] screen
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Item Details
(1) Error level Displays the error level. (Error, Alert, Info)
(2) Page number Displays the current page number and the total number of pages when multiple alerts or errors are
occurring.
(3) Error title Displays the title of the error that is currently occurring. (two lines).
(4) Error details Displays the details of the error that is currently occurring. The displayed content varies depending on the
error type.
(5) Error code Displays the current error code. "Alert/Error list" (page A-7)
(6) Error message Displays the detailed message of the error that is currently occurring.
(7) Page switch Switches between the pages when multiple alerts or errors are occurring
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-3
A-1 Troubleshooting
Checking an error that occurred in the past
On the [Error History] screen, you can check error histories.
On the [Menu] screen, select [Error History] and press the operation key (right) [Enter] button. The [Error History] screen
appears.
[TOP] screen
[Menu]
[Menu] screen
[] [Enter]
[Back] [Back]
(2)
(1) (3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Item Details
(1) Error sequential number Displays the error number, which lists the most recent error first.
(2) Occurrence time Displays the operation time elapsed since the start of the GC main controller to when the error
occurred. (Hour:Minute:Second)
(3) Error code Displays the error code. "Alert/Error list" (page A-7)
(4) Error title Displays the error description in two lines.
(5) Error details Displays the details of the port name and terminal where the error occurred.
A (6) Key function display: [], [] Moves down or up the highlighted item when the operation key (left) or (center) is pressed.
Appendix
Reference Up to 100 error histories are displayed in order from the newest to oldest. When the number of error histories exceeds
100, the history data will be overwritten from the oldest data.
A-4 GC Series User's Manual
A-1 Troubleshooting
How to check on the GC Configurator monitor
Checking an error that is currently occurring
When an error occurs, it is displayed on the status panel.
Status panel
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Item Details
(1) Main controller Displays the operating state of the GC Series main controller. "Alert/Error list" (page A-7)
operating state RUN (green): The GC main controller is running.
STOP (red): The GC main controller is stopped.
OFFLINE (white): The PC is not connected to the main controller.
(2) Operation time Displays the operation time elapsed since the start of the GC main controller. (hh: Hour, mm: Minute, ss:
Second)
(3) Main controller error Displays the error/alert status of the main controller.
status : ERROR (red)
: ALERT (red)
: INFORMATION (white)
(4) Error list Displays any INFORMATION/ERRORS/ALERTS that are currently occurring.
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-5
A-1 Troubleshooting
Checking an error that occurred in the past
On the [Error history] dialog box, you can check error histories.
Item Details
Error code Displays the code associated with the error. "Alert/Error list" (page A-7)
Error description Displays the error description.
Operation time Displays the operation time elapsed since the start of the GC main controller to when the error
occurred.
PLC text Displays the contents of the "PLC text" written from the PLC via communications.
Read out from GC Reads out the error history from the GC main controller.
Clear Clears the error history of the GC main controller.
Copy to clipboard Saves the error history details to the clipboard.
A
Appendix
A-6 GC Series User's Manual
A-1 Troubleshooting
Alert/Error list
How to check the alert/error list
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Error Error title Error code
Error title Error message
category (Main controller LED) Main Details
Alert Muting Error Muting error Muting input sequence or period was 01 Block ID
incorrect. Check the input and settings.
(1) Error category. (Alert/Error/Info)
(2) Error title displayed on the GC main controller LED display.
(3) Error title displayed on the GC Configurator.
(4) Displays the error description and solution.
(5) Error code. It is represented by main code + detailed code.
Error code
An error code is represented by the main code + detailed code.
Main code Detailed code
Detailed code
For the items displayed in the detailed code, refer to the following.
Item Details
Block ID ID number assigned to the function block. You can check the ID number of each function block in [Settings report]
by selecting [File] > [Report] from the GC Configurator menu.
*1
Unit number Displays the number in the upper two digits, which is assigned to an expansion unit or remote I/O module in the
order that they are placed. (The lower two digits are fixed to 00.)
Main controller: 00
Expansion units: 01 to 10
Remote I/O module: 21 to 24
*1
Terminal number Indicates the terminal number.
Terminal block Remote I/O module
Si0 to Si15 : 00 to 15 CN1 Si0/To0 : 00 CN1 So/Ao/Ai : 00
So0 to So5 : 00 to 05 CN1 Si1/To1 : 01 CN2 So/Ao/Ai : 01
Ao0 to Ao15 : 00 to 15 CN2 Si0/To0 : 02 CN3 So/Ao/Ai : 02
To0 to To3 : 00 to 03 CN2 Si1/To1 : 03 CN4 So/Ao/Ai : 03
SRo0 : 00 CN3 Si0/To0 : 04
CN3 Si1/To1 : 05
CN4 Si0/To0 : 06
CN4 Si1/To1 : 07
GS number Displays the GS number in the upper two digits when the GS Series units are cascaded via GC-Link ports. (The lower
two digits are fixed to 00.)
GL-R error number Displays the GL-R Series error number. For details, refer to the "GL-R Series User's Manual".
A
Appendix
*1 In the case of a unit number + terminal number, the upper two digits of the detailed code represent the unit number while the lower
two digits represent the terminal number.
GC Series User's Manual A-7
A-1 Troubleshooting
Error Error title Error code
Error title Error message
category (Main controller LED) Main Details
Mode Changing Ctrl Inputs Mode Changing Control Inputs
Info Check the inputs. 03 Block ID
Mismatch Mismatch
Info Bank Inputs Mismatch Bank Inputs Mismatch Check the inputs connected to the bank switching output block. 04 Block ID
Waiting For Input Block Incorrect inputs were clear. Perform recovery operation. (1) Off Unit number + Si
Info Waiting For Input Block Recovery 10
Recovery the inputs (2) Switch mode terminal number
Waiting For
Info Waiting For Configuration Settings are not configured. Please program unit. 31 0000 (fixed)
Configuration
Muting inputs sequence or period was incorrect. Check the
Alert Muting Error Muting error 01 Block ID
inputs and settings.
Max. Muting/Override Max. Muting/Override Period Muting/override period has exceeded the configured time.
Alert 02 Block ID
Period Exceeded Exceeded Check the settings.
AUX Output Terminal Unit number + Ao
Alert AUX Output Terminal Overcurrent Check the AUX output terminal wiring. 11
Overcurrent terminal number
Test Output Terminal Unit number + To
Alert Test Output Terminal Overcurrent Check the test output terminal wiring. 12
Overcurrent terminal number
Safety Input Diag. Error has been detected via safety input diagnosis. Check the Unit number + Si
Alert Safety Input Diag. (Test Output) 13
(Test Output) wiring of Si and To terminal. terminal number
Check the connected device, wiring, discrepancy / mismatch Unit number + Si
Alert Inputs Incorrect Inputs 14
time or NO / NC settings. terminal number
Remote I/O Module Remote I/O Module Power Unit number +
Alert Check the Remote I/O Module connection. 15
Power Overcurrent Overcurrent connector number
GC-Link Port A
Alert GC-Link Port A GS Connection Check the GS connection or end connector. 21 GS number
GS Connection
GC-Link Port A
Alert GC-Link Port A GS Error GS has detected an error. Check the details of the error. 22 GS number
GS Error
GC-Link Port B
Alert GC-Link Port B GS Connection Check the GS connection or end connector. 23 GS number
GS Connection
GC-Link Port B
Alert GC-Link Port B GS Error GS has detected an error. Check the details of the error. 24 GS number
GS Error
GC-Link Port A
Alert GC-Link Port A GL-R Connection Check the GL-R connection. 25 0000 (fixed)
GL-R Connection
GC-Link Port A
Alert GC-Link Port A GL-R Error GL-R has detected an error. Check the details of the error. 26 GL-R error code
GL-R Error
GC-Link Port A The amount of GL-R received light is low. Check the alignment
Alert GC-Link Port A GL-R Alert 27 0000 (fixed)
GL-R Alert and remove build-up.
GC-Link Port B
Alert GC-Link Port B GL-R Connection Check the GL-R connection. 28 0000 (fixed)
GL-R Connection
GC-Link Port B
Alert GC-Link Port B GL-R Error GL-R has detected an error. Check the details of the error. 29 GL-R error code
GL-R Error
GC-Link Port B The amount of GL-R received light is low. Check the alignment
Alert GC-Link Port B GL-R Alert 30 0000 (fixed)
GL-R Alert and remove build-up.
GC-Link Port A Device configuration of the connected GS is different from the
Alert GC-Link Port A GS Config. Mismatch 36 0000 (fixed)
GS Config. Mismatch settings.
GC-Link Port B Device configuration of the connected GS is different from the
Alert GC-Link Port B GS Config. Mismatch 37 0000 (fixed)
GS Config. Mismatch settings.
GC-Link Port A GC-Link Port A GL-R Config Device configuration of the connected GL-R is different from the
Alert 38 0000 (fixed)
GL-R Config Mismatch Mismatch settings.
GC-Link Port B GC-Link Port B GL-R Config Device configuration of the connected GL-R is different from the
Alert 39 0000 (fixed)
GL-R Config Mismatch Mismatch settings.
Alert Low Power Voltage Low Power Voltage Check the power voltage. 40 Unit number
GC-Link Port A Failed to start communication. Check the number of GS and the
Alert GC-Link Port A GS Connection 43 0000 (fixed)
GS Connection connections.
A Alert
GC-Link Port B
GS Connection
GC-Link Port B GS Connection
Failed to start communication. Check the number of GS and the
connections.
44 0000 (fixed)
GC-Link Port A GC-Link Port A GS Low Power
Appendix
Alert Check the power voltage and cable length. 45
GS Low Power Voltage Voltage
GC-Link Port B GC-Link Port B GS Low Power
Alert Check the power voltage and cable length. 46
GS Low Power Voltage Voltage
A-8 GC Series User's Manual
A-1 Troubleshooting
Error Error title Error code
Error title Error message
category (Main controller LED) Main Details
History Data Frequency of triggers to save history data is too high. Check the
Alert History Data Save Failed 47 0000 (fixed)
Save Failed trigger conditions.
Alert History Data Error History Data Error Clear the history data. 48 0000 (fixed)
Check for devices with same IP address.
Alert IP Address Conflict IP Address Conflict 49 0000 (fixed)
If it exists, reconfigure the IP address.
Unit number + So or Sro
Error EDM Error EDM Error Check the EDM input and output wiring and the EDM settings. 16
terminal number
Safety Output Unit number + So
Error Safety Output Terminal Overcurrent Check the safety output terminal wiring. 17
Terminal Overcurrent terminal number
Safety Output Error has been detected via safety output terminal diagnosis. Unit number + So
Error Safety Output Terminal Error 18
Terminal Error Check the wiring. terminal number
Safety Relay Output Error has been detected via SRo terminal diagnosis. Check the Unit number + Sro
Error Safety Relay Output Terminal Error 19
Terminal Error wiring or replace the unit. terminal number
Waiting For
Error Waiting For Activation Restart and approve the configuration. 32 0000 (fixed)
Activation
Settings Unsupported This version does not support the written settings. Check the
Error Settings Unsupported By Version 33 0000 (fixed)
By Version settings.
Configuration Device configuration is different from the settings. Check the
Error Configuration Mismatch 50 Unit number
Mismatch Main Controller and settings.
Remote I/O Module Device configuration of the Remote I/O Module is different from
Error Remote I/O Module Config. Mismatch 51 Unit number
Config. Mismatch the settings. Check the settings.
System Memory
Error System Memory Data Error Reconfigure the settings or replace the System Memory. 52 0000 (fixed)
Data Error
System Memory
Error System Memory Data Error Reconfigure the settings or replace the System Memory. 53 0000 (fixed)
Data Error
Expansion Units Failed to communicate with the Expansion Unit. Check the
Error Expansion Unit Comm. Error 54 Unit number
Comm. Error connection.
Remote I/O Module Failed to communicate with the Remote I/O Module. Check the
Error Remote I/O Module Comm. Error 55 Unit number
Comm. Error connection.
Expansion Units Failed to start communication. Check the connections and the
Error Expansion Unit Comm. Error 56 Unit number
Comm. Error number of connected units.
Remote I/O Module Failed to start communication. Check the connections and the
Error Remote I/O Module Comm. Error 57 Unit number
Comm. Error number of connected units.
Error High Power Voltage High Power Voltage Check the power voltage. 58 Unit number
Expansion Units Unsupported Expansion Unit is connected. Check the Main
Error Expansion Unit Unsupported Version 59 Unit number
Unsupported Version Controller.
Remote I/O Module Remote I/O Module Unsupported Unsupported Remote I/O Module is connected. Check the Main
Error 60 Unit number
Unsupported Version Version Controller.
System Memory
Error System Memory Access Error Check the connection or replace the System Memory. 61
Access Error
System Memory
Error System Memory Data Error Reconfigure the settings or replace the System Memory. 62
Data Error
GC-Link Port A Unsupported GS Series is connected. Check the Main
Error GC-Link Port A Unsupported GS 63
Unsupported GS Controller.
GC-Link Port B Unsupported GS Series is connected. Check the Main
Error GC-Link Port B Unsupported GS 64
Unsupported GS Controller.
Error System Error System Error Reconfigure, or replace the unit. 98
Error System Error System Error Reconfigure, or replace the unit. 99
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-9
A-2 List of input devices
This section describes the input devices that can be connected to the GC Series.
KEYENCE safety sensors
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination
Terminal GC-R45 GC-R48
Input device Connection type GC-Link
block (M12 5-pin) (M12 8-pin)
GL-R Series PNP 2 inputs *1 --
GL-S Series PNP 2 inputs --
GS-10 Series PNP 2 inputs
GS-M5/9, ML5, 50 and 70 Series PNP 2 inputs --
SZ-V Series PNP 2 inputs --
SZ Series PNP 2 inputs --
*1 The following models cannot be connected. GL-R143F/GL-R159F/GL-R175F/GL-R191F/GL-R207F
Safety input devices
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination
GC-R45 GC-R48
Input device Connection type Terminal block
(M12 5-pin) (M12 8-pin)
Emergency stop switch 1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
Limit switch PNP 1 input --
PNP 2 inputs --
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
A
Appendix
A-10 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Connection destination
GC-R45 GC-R48
Input device Connection type Terminal block
(M12 5-pin) (M12 8-pin)
Interlock switch PNP 1 input --
PNP 2 inputs --
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
Guard locking switch PNP 1 input --
PNP 2 inputs --
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
Light curtain PNP 1 input --
PNP 2 inputs --
Laser scanner PNP 1 input --
PNP 2 inputs --
Rope pull switch PNP 1 input --
PNP 2 inputs --
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
Safety mat PNP 1 input --
PNP 2 inputs --
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
Two hand control device PNP 2 inputs --
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
A
Enabling device 2 inputs --
Appendix
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
GC Series User's Manual A-11
A-2 List of input devices
Connection destination
GC-R45 GC-R48
Input device Connection type Terminal block
(M12 5-pin) (M12 8-pin)
Other safety switch 2 inputs
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs
Other safety input PNP 2 inputs
2 inputs
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs
Other input devices
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination
GC-R45 GC-R48
Input device Connection type Terminal block
(M12 5-pin) (M12 8-pin)
Reset switch 1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
Mode selecting switch 2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
EDM input 1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
Muting input PNP 1 input --
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
Safety plug 1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
Hold-to-run switch 1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
Other switch 1 input
1 input 1 test output
Other inputs PNP 1 input
1 input
1 input 1 test output
A
Appendix
A-12 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
GL-R series
Connection
Compatible destinations
Input device Input logic GC-Link Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
*1
GL-R Series PNP 2 inputs --
*1 The following models cannot be connected. GL-R143F/GL-R159F/GL-R175F/GL-R191F/GL-R207F
When connecting the GL-R Series to a GC-Link port
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Operation setting(s) Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s) A
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
Appendix
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds): Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/
80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User's Manual A-13
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Advanced function Enter into an error state when the Compares the settings with the GL-R main unit configuration and puts
setting(s) configuration is different from the the machine into an error state if the settings are different, when
settings selected.
Read out the unit configuration from Reads out the unit configuration from the GL-R Series connected to the
GL-R GC Series when clicked.
Main unit/Sub unit 1/2 Set the GL-R Series type and the number of optical axes when
checking against the GL-R Series main unit configuration. When the
GL-R Series units are connected in series, set the sub unit 1 and sub
unit 2 types and the number of optical axes.
*1 Compares the configuration with the setting switch settings of the GL-R
Verification of the setting switch
main unit when selected.
*1
Center indicator Compares the configuration with the center indicator lighting method
settings set with the setting switch of the GL-R main unit.
*1
Reduced resolution Compares the configuration with the settings of the reduced solution
set with the setting switch of the GL-R main unit.
Advanced input Use received-light-amount decrease With the check box checked, the input block of "GL-R received-light-
setting(s) alert input*2 amount decrease alert" is added. The signal generated at the
occurrence of the GL-R Series received-light-amount decrease alert
can be used by the input block.
*1 For more information about the GL-R Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Light Curtain GL-R Series User's Manual".
*2 For more information about how to use a received-light-amount decrease alert input, refer to "6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety
Sensors" (page 6-47).
A
Appendix
A-14 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the GL-R Series to a terminal block
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-15
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the GL-R Series to the GC-R45
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-16 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
GL-S series
Connection
Compatible destinations
Input device Input logic GC-Link Terminal GC-R45 GC-R48
block
GL-S Series PNP 2 inputs --
When connecting the GL-S Series to a GC-Link port
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s A
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Appendix
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Advanced output Use indicator control output Adds an "indicator control output" output block when selected. You can
setting(s)* control the center indicator of the GL-S Series.
GC Series User's Manual A-17
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Indicator control Use blink control (slow) Allows you to use the blink control (slow) of the center indicator when
output* selected. A "BS (Blink Slow)" port is added to the "indicator control
output" output block.
Use blink control (fast) Allows you to use the blink control (fast) of the center indicator when
selected. A "BF (Blink Fast)" port is added to the "indicator control
output" output block.
* For more information about how to use an indicator control output, refer to "6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors" (page 6-47).
The indicator control output cannot be used in EASY mode.
A
Appendix
A-18 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the GL-S Series to a terminal block
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-19
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the GL-S Series to the GC-R45
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-20 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
GS/GS-M series
Connection
Compatible destinations
Input device Input logic GC-Link Terminal GC-R45 GC-R48
block
GS-10 Series PNP 2 inputs
GS-M5/9/ML5/50/70 Series PNP 2 inputs --
When connecting the GS/GS-M Series to a GC-Link port
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s A
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Appendix
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
GC Series User's Manual A-21
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds): Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/
80/90/100 ms)
Select model Read out unit the configuration from GS Reads out the unit configuration from the GS/GS-M Series connected
to the GC Series when clicked.
(Connected model) Register the target model by dragging and dropping it when the unit
configuration of the GS/GS-M Series to be connected is manually set.
Advanced function Indicator control mode Set the display mode of the GS/GS-M Series main unit large indicator.
setting(s) [Normal operation]: Follows the GS/GS-M Series main controller
setting.
[OFF]: Turns OFF the indicator except when an error occurs.
[OFF when GS is closed (locked)]: Turns OFF the indicator when the
door is closed for the GS-10 Series. The indicator is turned OFF when
the door is locked for the GS-M5/9, ML5, 50 and 70 Series.
Enable OSSD operation switching Enables the OSSD operation switching function when selected.
This can be used when the GS-M5/9, ML5, 50 or 70 Series is selected
for the connected model.
OSSD operation Set the OSSD operation when [Enable OSSD operation switching] is
enabled.
[Lock link mode]: Links the OSSD with the lock operation.
[Open / close link mode]: Links the OSSD with the door open/close
operation (when an actuator is detected).
(Default: Lock link mode)
Select high coded units for checking Select this item when starting the GS-Series set in [Select high coded
units for checking].
Set higher holding force when unlocked With the check box checked, the GS-M set higher holding force when
unlocked.
This can be used when selecting the GS-M5/9 Series or the GS-ML5
Series as the connection model.
Advanced input Use closed state information Adds a "GS door closed state" expansion block when selected. The
setting(s) door closed state of the GS Series can be used in a program.
Use locked state information Adds a "GS door locked state" expansion block when selected. The
lock state of the GS (lock)/GS-M can be used in a program.
This can be used when the GS-M5/9, ML5, 50 or 70 Series is selected
for the connected model.
Advanced output Use unlock output With the check box checked, the "unlock output" block is added. This
setting(s) is used for the unlock output of the GS (Lock)/GS-M.
This can be used when the GS-M5/9, ML5, 50 or 70 Series is selected
for the connected model.
A Use indicator control output * Adds a "GS indicator control output" expansion block when selected.
You can control the indicator of the GS/GS-M Series.
Appendix
For the GS/GS-M Series functions and settings, refer to the following manuals.
"GS Series (Non-contact) User's Manual”
"GS Series (Lock) User's Manual"
A-22 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
"GS-M series User's Manual"
* For more information about how to use the advanced function and advanced input/output function, refer to "6-5 Connecting
KEYENCE Safety Sensors" (page 6-47). The indicator control output cannot be used in EASY mode.
When connecting the GS-10 Series to a terminal block
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds): Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/
40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s A
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Appendix
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-10 series].
GC Series User's Manual A-23
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 Adds an "AUX-IN" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
setting(s) GS Series can be used in a program.
Use AUX-IN2 This cannot be selected in the GS-10 Series.
Advanced output Use unlock output This cannot be selected in the GS-10 Series.
setting(s)
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
When connecting the GS-M5/9/ML5/50/70 Series to a terminal block
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
A
Appendix
A-24 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-M5/9 series], [GS-ML5 series], [GS-50 series] or [GS-70
series].
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 Adds an "AUX-IN1" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
setting(s) GS Series can be used in a program.
Use AUX-IN2 Adds an "AUX-IN2" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
GS Series can be used in a program.
Advanced output Use unlock output Adds an "unlock" output block when selected.
setting(s)
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
Unlock output Enable self-diagnosis of output*1 Enables the unlock output self-diagnosis function when selected.
*1 This is available only when [Safety output x 1] or [Safety output x 2] is selected for the connection type.
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-25
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the GS-10 Series to the GC-R45/R48
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-10 series].
A Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 Adds an "AUX-IN" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
setting(s) GS Series can be used in a program.
Appendix
Use AUX-IN2 This cannot be selected in the GS-10 Series.
Advanced output Use unlock output This cannot be selected in the GS-10 Series.
setting(s)
A-26 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
When connecting the GS-M5/9/ML5/50/70 Series to the GC-R48
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms) A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-27
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [GS-M5/9 series], [GS-ML5 series], [GS-50 series] or [GS-70 series].
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 Adds an "AUX-IN1" input block when selected. The AUX output of the GS Series
setting(s) can be used in a program.
Advanced output Use unlock output Adds an "unlock" output block when selected.
setting(s)
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
Unlock output Enable self-diagnosis of Enables the unlock output self-diagnosis function when selected.
output
A
Appendix
A-28 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
SZ-V series
Connection
Compatible destinations
Input device Input logic GC-Link Terminal GC-R45 GC-R48
block
SZ-V Series PNP 2 inputs --
When connecting the SZ-V04 to a GC-Link port <<Simple connection>>
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). A
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
Appendix
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User's Manual A-29
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 Adds an "AUX-IN" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
*1 For more information about the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
* For more information about how to use the advanced input/output function, refer to "6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors"
(page 6-47).
A
Appendix
A-30 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the SZ-V04 to a GC-Link port <<Advanced connection>>
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-31
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds): Option
(10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [SZ-V04(X)].
Advanced input Use multi-OSSD Adds an "OSSD 3/4" input block when selected. This is used when the
setting(s) multi-OSSD function is enabled in the SZ-V04 (X).
Use AUX-IN1 Adds an "AUX-IN1" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Use AUX-IN2 Adds an "AUX-IN2" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Advanced output Use bank switching*1 With the check box checked, the output block of "BANK" is added. You
setting(s) can switch the bank from the GC-Series.
Independent bank switching Select [Enable] or [Disable].
OSSD 3/4 Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
Discrepancy time Same as the above [Discrepancy time]
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
*1 Select [Single] or [Binary] when [Independent bank switching] is set to
Bank switching output Input method
[Disable].
Number of banks Set the number of banks to switch when [Independent bank switching]
is set to [Disable]. (Maximum: 4)
The value is always set to "2" when [Independent bank switching] is set
to [Enable].
Use bank enablement input Allows you to use the bank enablement input when selected. An "EN
(Enable)" port is added to the "BANK" output block.
For more information about the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
*1 For more information about how to use the advanced input/output function and the bank switching function in the GC Series, refer to
"6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors" (page 6-47).
The bank switching function cannot be used in EASY mode.
A
Appendix
A-32 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the SZ-V32 to a GC-Link port <<Advanced connection>>
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds): A
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Appendix
Select model Select model Select [SZ-V32(X)/SZ-V32N(X)].
GC Series User's Manual A-33
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 Adds an "AUX-IN1" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Use AUX-IN2 Adds an "AUX-IN2" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Advanced output Use bank switching*1 With the check box checked, the output block of "BANK" is added. You
setting(s) can switch the bank from the GC-Series.
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
*1 Select [Single] or [Binary].
Bank switching output Input method
Number of banks Set the number of banks to switch. (Maximum: 4)
Use bank enablement input Allows you to use the bank enablement input when selected. An "EN
(Enable)" port is added to the "BANK" output block.
For more information about the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
* For more information about how to use the advanced input/output function and the bank switching function in the GC Series, refer to
"6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors" (page 6-47).
The bank switching function cannot be used in EASY mode.
A
Appendix
A-34 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the SZ-V04 to a terminal block
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-35
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [SZ-V04(X)].
Advanced input Use multi-OSSD Adds an "OSSD 3/4" input block when selected. This is used when the
setting(s) multi-OSSD function is enabled in the SZ-V04 (X).
Use AUX-IN1 Adds an "AUX-IN1" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Use AUX-IN2 Adds an "AUX-IN2" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Advanced output Use bank switching*1 With the check box checked, the output block of "BANK" is added. You
setting(s) can switch the bank from the GC-Series.
Independent bank switching Select [Enable] or [Disable].
OSSD 3/4 Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
Discrepancy time Same as the above [Discrepancy time]
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
*1 Select [Single] or [Binary] when [Independent bank switching] is set to
Bank switching output Input method
[Disable].
Number of banks Set the number of banks to switch when [Independent bank switching]
is set to [Disable]. (Maximum: 4*2)
The value is always set to "2" when [Independent bank switching] is set
to [Enable].
Use bank enablement input Allows you to use the bank enablement input when selected. An "EN
(Enable)" port is added to the "BANK" output block.
For more information about the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
*1 For more information about how to use the advanced input/output function and the bank switching function in the GC Series, refer to
"6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors" (page 6-47). The bank switching function cannot be used in EASY mode.
*2 To use four banks, select [Bank x 4] for the connection
type in [Bank switching output].
A
Appendix
A-36 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the SZ-V32 to a terminal block
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s A
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Appendix
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Select model Select model Select [SZ-V32(X)/SZ-V32N(X)].
GC Series User's Manual A-37
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 Adds an "AUX-IN1" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Use AUX-IN2 Adds an "AUX-IN2" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 1
Advanced output Use bank switching*1 With the check box checked, the output block of "BANK" is added. You
setting(s) can switch the bank from the GC-Series.
AUX-IN1/AUX-IN2 Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
*1 Select [Single] or [Binary].
Bank switching output Input method
Number of banks Set the number of banks to switch. (Maximum: 32)
Use bank enablement input Allows you to use the bank enablement input when selected. An "EN
(Enable)" port is added to the "BANK" output block.
For more information about the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
*1 For more information about how to use the advanced input/output function and the bank switching function in the GC Series, refer to
"6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors" (page 6-47).
The bank switching function cannot be used in EASY mode.
A
Appendix
A-38 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the SZ-V04/V32 to the GC-R45
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
*1
Advanced input Use AUX-IN1 With the check box checked, the input block of "AUX-IN1" is added.
setting(s) The AUX output of the SZ-V Series can be used in a program. Set the
function assigned to the AUX output using the SZ-V Configurator.* 2
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
*1 This is available only when the SZ-V04 (X) is connected.
*2 For more information about the SZ-V Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ-V Series User's Manual".
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-39
A-2 List of input devices
SZ series
Connection
Compatible destinations
Input device Input logic GC-Link Terminal GC-R45 GC-R48
block
SZ series PNP 2 inputs --
When connecting the SZ Series to a GC-Link port
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
A • Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Appendix
Advanced input Use AUX-IN Adds an "AUX-IN" input block when selected. The AUX output of the SZ Series can be
setting(s) used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using the SZ
Configurator.* 1
A-40 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
*1 For more information about the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual".
When connecting the SZ Series to a terminal block
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
A
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Appendix
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User's Manual A-41
A-2 List of input devices
Item Details
Advanced input Use AUX-IN Adds an "AUX-IN" input block when selected. The AUX output of the SZ Series can be
setting(s) used in a program. Set the function assigned to the AUX output using the SZ
Configurator.* 1
Advanced output Use bank With the check box checked, the output block of "BANK" is added. You can switch the
setting(s) switching*1 bank from the GC-Series.
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
*1
Bank switching Input method Select [Single] or [Binary].
output
Number of banks Set the number of banks to switch. (Maximum: 16)
Use bank Allows you to use the bank enablement input when selected. An "EN (Enable)" port is
enablement input added to the "BANK" output block.
For more information about the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual".
* For more information about how to use the advanced input/output function and the bank switching function in the GC Series, refer to
"6-5 Connecting KEYENCE Safety Sensors" (page 6-47).
The bank switching function cannot be used in EASY mode.
A
Appendix
A-42 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
When connecting the SZ Series to the GC-R45
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
Item Details
Operation setting(s) Input logic Fixed to [2NC].
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 2 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). (Default: 10 ms)
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100
ms)
Discrepancy time Enables the mismatch detection when selected. (Default: 0.5 s)
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds): Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/
80/90/100 ms)
Advanced input Use AUX-IN Adds an "AUX-IN" input block when selected. The AUX output of the
setting(s) SZ Series can be used in a program. Set the function assigned to the
AUX output using the SZ Configurator.* 1
AUX-IN Input logic Fixed to [1NO].
Filter (ON to OFF) Same as the above [Filter (ON to OFF)]
Filter (OFF to ON) Same as the above [Filter (OFF to ON)]
*1 For more information about the SZ Series functions and settings, refer to the "Safety Laser Scanner SZ Series User's Manual".
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-43
A-2 List of input devices
Emergency stop switch
Overview
This is used to connect an emergency stop switch.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 1NC
block
1 input -- -- --
1 input 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs -- --
2 inputs 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
2NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
A Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Appendix
A-44 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Setting item Setting range Default
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
NCNO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-45
A-2 List of input devices
Limit switch
Overview
This is used to connect a limit switch.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 1NC
block
PNP 1 input -- -- --
PNP 2 inputs -- --
1 input -- -- --
1 input 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs -- --
2 inputs 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
2NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
A Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
Appendix
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A-46 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Setting item Setting range Default
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
NCNO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-47
A-2 List of input devices
Interlock switch
Overview
This is used to connect an interlock switch.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 1NC
block
PNP 1 input -- -- --
PNP 2 inputs -- --
1 input -- -- --
1 input 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs -- --
2 inputs 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
A
Appendix
A-48 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
2NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
NCNO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-49
A-2 List of input devices
Guard locking switch
Overview
This is used to connect a guard locking switch. You can unlock the guard locking switch from the GC-Series.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 1NC
block
PNP 1 input -- -- --
PNP 2 inputs -- --
1 input -- -- --
1 input 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs -- --
2 inputs 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs -- --
Advanced input setting(s) (AUX-IN)
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NO
PNP 1 input --
Unlock output
Connection destination Lock type
Self-
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 Spring Solenoid diagnosis
block
Safety output x 1 --
Safety output x 2 --
AUX outputs -- --
A
Appendix
A-50 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
2NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
NCNO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-51
A-2 List of input devices
Setting item Setting range Default
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
AUX-IN
1NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Unlock output
Setting item Setting range Default
Lock type Select the lock type of the interlock switch used. Spring
Option: Spring/Solenoid
Enable self-diagnosis of Enables the output self-diagnosis function when selected. Enable
output.
A
Appendix
A-52 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Light curtain
Overview
This is used to connect a light curtain of the PNP output type.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 1NC
block
PNP 1 input -- -- --
PNP 2 inputs -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
2NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-53
A-2 List of input devices
Setting item Setting range Default
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
NCNO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-54 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Laser scanner
Overview
This is used to connect a laser scanner of the PNP output type.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 1NC
block
PNP 1 input -- -- --
PNP 2 inputs -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
2NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
A
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Appendix
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s.
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User's Manual A-55
A-2 List of input devices
NCNO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-56 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Rope pull switch
Overview
This is used to connect a rope pull switch.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 1NC
block
PNP 1 input -- -- --
PNP 2 inputs -- --
1 input -- -- --
1 input 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs -- --
2 inputs 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
2NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User's Manual A-57
A-2 List of input devices
Setting item Setting range Default
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
NCNO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-58 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Safety mat
Overview
This is used to connect a safety mat.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 1NC
block
PNP 1 input -- -- --
PNP 2 inputs -- --
1 input -- -- --
1 input 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs -- --
2 inputs 1 test output -- -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
2NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms) A
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
Appendix
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User's Manual A-59
A-2 List of input devices
Setting item Setting range Default
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
NCNO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-60 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Two hand control device
Overview
This is used to connect a two hand control device.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 2NO NONC
PNP 2 inputs --
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
2NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 0.5s
A
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 0.5 s in increments of 0.1 s
Appendix
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User's Manual A-61
A-2 List of input devices
NONC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 0.5s
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 0.5 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Point A two hand control device input block is not turned ON even if the GC Series is turned ON (powered ON)
with the two hand control device signal ON in order to prevent unexpected operation. The machine enters
into the "Clear error upon input OFF" state, and requires that the input signal be turned OFF.
A
Appendix
A-62 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Enabling device
Overview
This is used to connect an enabling device.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 2NO NONC
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
2NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
A
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
Appendix
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
GC Series User's Manual A-63
A-2 List of input devices
NONC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Point An enabling device input block is not turned ON even if the GC Series is turned ON (powered ON) with the
enabling device signal ON in order to prevent unexpected operation. The machine enters into the "Clear
error upon input OFF" state, and requires that the input signal be turned OFF.
A
Appendix
A-64 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Other safety switch
Overview
This is used to connect a safety switch of the contact type.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 2NO NONC
block
2 inputs
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs
Advanced input setting(s) (GC-R48)
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NO
1 input -- --
Advanced output setting(s) (GC-R48)
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
Safety output x 1 -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
Terminal block
GC-R45 (M12 5-pin)
[Default settings]
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-65
A-2 List of input devices
GC-R48 (M12 8-pin)
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
2NC, 2NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-66 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
NCNO, NONC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
IN
1NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
OUT
Setting item Setting range Default
Enable self-diagnosis of Enables the output self-diagnosis function when selected. Enable
output
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-67
A-2 List of input devices
Other safety input
Overview
This is used to connect a safety device designated as other type.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type Terminal
GC-R45 GC-R48 2NC NCNO 2NO NONC
block
PNP 2 inputs
2 inputs
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs
Advanced input setting(s) (GC-R45/R48)
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NO
1 input -- --
*
PNP 1 input --
* An advanced input (IN) can be used only when [PNP 2 inputs] is selected.
Advanced output setting(s) (GC-R48)
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
Safety output x 1 -- --
A
Appendix
A-68 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
GC Configurator detailed settings
Terminal block
GC-R45 (M12 5-pin)
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)] (GC-R45: When [PNP 2 inputs] is selected)
GC-R48 (M12 8-pin)
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-69
A-2 List of input devices
2NC, 2NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
NCNO, NONC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Discrepancy time Enable/Disable Enable
Enables the mismatch detection when selected. 0.5s
Set the detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
IN
1NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-70 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
OUT
Setting item Setting range Default
Enable self-diagnosis of Enables the output self-diagnosis function when selected. Enable
output
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-71
A-2 List of input devices
Reset switch
Overview
This is used to connect a contact type reset switch.
"AUX output" can be selected in the advanced output setting(s) when the GC-R45 (M12 5-pin) is connected.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NO
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
Advanced output setting(s) (GC-R45)
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
AUX outputs -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
Terminal block
[Default settings]
A
Appendix
A-72 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
GC-R45 (M12 5-pin)
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
1NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
AUX-OUT (2pin)
Setting item Setting range Default
Use AUX-OUT (2pin) Enables the AUX-OUT output (2-pin) when selected. Disable
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-73
A-2 List of input devices
Mode selecting switch
Overview
This is used to connect a mode selecting switch.
Operation
[Default settings] [Error output settings]
Mode Out1 Mode Out1
Mode Out2
Mode Out2 Error
• When In1 is set to ON and In2 is set to OFF, Mode Out1 is set to ON and Mode Out2 is set to OFF.
• When In1 is set to OFF and In2 is set to ON, Mode Out1 is set to OFF and Mode Out2 is set to ON.
<Input>
ON
In1
OFF
ON
In2
OFF
<Output>
ON
Mode Out1
OFF
ON
Mode Out2
OFF
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
2 inputs --
2 inputs 1 test output -- --
2 inputs 2 test outputs --
A
Appendix
A-74 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF)/ Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
Filter (OFF to ON) • Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Mismatch time Set the error detection time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms) when there is a mismatch 0.5s
between two inputs.
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 30.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Output setting for Set the output when an input mismatch error occurs. Output OFF
mismatch Option: Output OFF/MODE_1/MODE2
Use error output Enables the output to be turned ON when an input mismatch error occurs, when Disable
selected.* 1
*1 This cannot be used in EASY mode.
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-75
A-2 List of input devices
EDM input
Overview
This is used to connect an EDM input.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NC
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-76 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Muting input
Overview
This is used to connect a muting sensor.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NO
PNP 1 input --
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
1NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-77
A-2 List of input devices
Safety plug
Overview
This is used to connect a safety plug.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NC
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
A
Appendix
A-78 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Hold-to-run switch
Overview
This is used to connect a hold-to-run switch.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NO
1 input --
1 input 1 test output --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
1NO
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Point A hold-to-run switch input block is not turned ON even if the GC Series is turned ON (powered ON) with
the hold-to-run switch signal ON in order to prevent unexpected operation. The machine enters into the
"Clear error upon input OFF" state, and requires that the input signal be turned OFF.
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-79
A-2 List of input devices
Other switch
Overview
This is used to connect a switch designated as other contact type.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NC 1NO
1 input
1 input 1 test output
Advanced input setting(s) (GC-R48)
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NO
1 input -- -- *
* IN1 (6-pin) or IN2 (1-pin) can be used.
Advanced output setting(s) (GC-R45)
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
AUX outputs -- --
Advanced output setting(s) (GC-R48)
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
Safety output x 1 -- --
A
Appendix
A-80 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
GC Configurator detailed settings
Terminal block
[Default settings]
GC-R45 (M12 5-pin)
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-81
A-2 List of input devices
GC-R48 (M12 8-pin)
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
1NO, 1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
AUX outputs (GC-R45 2-pin)
Setting item Setting range Default
Use AUX-OUT (2pin) Enables the AUX outputs (2-pin) when selected. Disable
Safety output (GC-R48 3-pin)
Setting item Setting range Default
Enable self-diagnosis of Enables the output self-diagnosis function when selected. Enabled
output
A
Appendix
A-82 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
Other input
Overview
This is used to connect an external device designated as other type.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NC 1NO
PNP 1 input
1 input
1 input 1 test output
Advanced input setting(s)
Connection destination Input logic
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48 1NO
*1 *3
PNP 1 input --
1 input -- *2 *3
*1 IN1 (2-pin) or IN2 (5-pin) can be used when [PNP 1 input] is selected for the connection type.
*2 IN1 (2-pin) can be used when [1 input] or [1 input 1 test output] is selected for the connection type.
*3 IN1 (6-pin) or IN2 (1-pin) can be used.
Advanced output setting(s) (GC-R48)
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
Safety output x 1 -- --
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-83
A-2 List of input devices
GC Configurator detailed settings
Terminal block
[Default settings]
GC-R45 (M12 5-pin)
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
A
Appendix
A-84 GC Series User's Manual
A-2 List of input devices
GC-R48 (M12 8-pin)
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
1NO, 1NC
Setting item Setting range Default
Filter (ON to OFF) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 2ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Filter (OFF to ON) Set the filter time in seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms). 10ms
• Unit s (seconds): 0.1 to 1.0 s in increments of 0.1 s
• Unit ms (milliseconds):
Option (0.5/1/2/4/6/8/10/12/14/16/18/20/30/40/50/60/70/80/90/100 ms)
Safety output (GC-R48 3-pin)
Setting item Setting range Default
Enable self-diagnosis of Enables the output self-diagnosis function when selected. Disable
output
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-85
A-2 List of input devices
Power supply port
Overview
This is only used to supply power to an external device when the remote I/O module "GC-R45" or "GC-R48" is used.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
Unassigned* --
* There is no connection type assignment.
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
Terminal assignment
GC-R45
Pin number Function
Pin 1 24V
1 2
Pin 2 --
5
4 3 Pin 3 0V
Pin 4 --
Pin 5 --
GC-R48
Pin number Function
Pin 1 --
Pin 2 24V
1 2 Pin 3 --
7 8 3 Pin 4 --
6 4
5 Pin 5 --
A Pin 6 --
Appendix
Pin 7 0V
Pin 8 --
A-86 GC Series User's Manual
A-3 Output Device List
This section describes the output devices that can be connected to the GC Series.
Connection destination
Output device Terminal GC-R45 GC-R48
block (M12 5-pin) (M12 8-pin)
Safety outputs S-OUT Safety output x 1 *1 -- --
Safety output x 2 *1 -- --
*1
S-OUT EDM enabled Safety output x 1 -- --
*1
Safety output x 2 -- --
S-OUT (Relay output) Relay output *2 -- --
*2
S-OUT (Relay output) Relay output -- --
EDM enabled
Other outputs AUX-OUT *3 --
*1 A device can be assigned to the So terminal of the GC-1000, GC-1000R, and GC-S84.
*2 A device can be assigned to the SRo terminal of the GC-1000R and GC-S1R.
*3 A device can be assigned to the Ao terminal of the GC-1000, GC-1000R, and GC-A16.
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-87
A-3 Output Device List
S-OUT
S-OUT EDM enabled
Overview
This output block is used as the safety output to an external device.
Reference The difference between the safety outputs "S-OUT" and "S-OUT EDM enabled" is whether [Use EDM input] in the
detailed settings is disabled or enabled by default. Even when "S-OUT" is used, if the [Use EDM input] check box is
selected in the detailed settings, the EDM input function is enabled.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
Safety output x 1 -- --
Safety output x 2 -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
In
Reset
In Error Reset
EDM1
EDM2
Setting item Setting range Default
Use EDM input Enables the EDM function when selected. *1
Number Set the number of inputs connected to the EDM. Option: 1/2 1
A Detect EDM error even when output is Detects an EDM error even when the S-OUT output is turned ON, when Enable
ON selected.
Appendix
EDM error detection time Set the EDM error detection time. 0.30 s
Setting range: 0.15 to 3.00 s in increments of 0.05 s (seconds)
A-88 GC Series User's Manual
A-3 Output Device List
Setting item Setting range Default
Use reset input*2 Enables the reset input when selected. Disable
Use error reset input Enables the error reset input when selected. Disable
Enable self-diagnosis of output Enables the output self-diagnosis function when selected. Enable
*1 Default "S-OUT": Disable, Default "S-OUT EDM enabled": Enable
*2 This cannot be used in EASY mode.
Procedure for using the EDM function
To use the EDM function, configure the settings as follows:
1 Set the EDM function in [S-OUT detailed settings].
2 On the configuration screen, register [EDM input] for terminal assignment.
3 On the program screen, form a wiring connection between the "EDM input" input block and the "S-OUT" (EDM1)
output block.
A
Appendix
"EDM input" EDM1
GC Series User's Manual A-89
A-3 Output Device List
Procedure for using the reset input or error reset input
To use the reset input or error reset input, configure the settings as follows:
1 Select the [Use reset input] (Use error reset input) check box in [S-OUT detailed settings].
2 On the configuration screen, register [Reset switch]* for terminal assignment.
* Select an input device according to your environment.
3 On the program screen, form a wiring connection between the "Reset switch" input block and the "S-OUT"
(Reset) output block.
"Reset switch" Reset
A
Appendix
A-90 GC Series User's Manual
A-3 Output Device List
S-OUT (Relay output)
S-OUT (Relay output) EDM enabled
Overview
This output block is used as the safety relay output to an external device.
Reference The difference between the safety outputs "S-OUT (Relay output)" and "S-OUT (Relay output) EDM enabled" is whether
[Use EDM input] in the detailed settings is disabled or enabled by default. Even when "S-OUT (Relay output)" is used,
if the [Use EDM input] check box is selected in the detailed settings, the EDM input function is enabled.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
Relay output -- --
GC Configurator detailed settings
[Default settings]
[Default settings] [Advanced function setting(s)]
In
Reset
In Error Reset
EDM1
EDM2
Setting item Setting range Default
Use EDM input Enables the EDM function when selected. *1
Number Set the number of inputs connected to the EDM. Option: 1/2 1
Detect EDM error even when output is ON Detects an EDM error even when the S-OUT output is turned ON, Enable
when selected. A
EDM error detection time Set the EDM error detection time. 0.30 s
Appendix
Setting range: 0.15 to 3.00 s in increments of 0.05 s (seconds)
Use reset input*2 Enables the reset input when selected. Disable
GC Series User's Manual A-91
A-3 Output Device List
Setting item Setting range Default
Use error reset input Enables the error reset input when selected. Disable
*1 Default "S-OUT (Relay output)": Disable, Default "S-OUT (Relay output) EDM enabled": Enable
*2 This cannot be used in EASY mode.
Procedure for using the EDM function
To use the EDM function, configure the settings as follows:
1 Set the EDM function in [S-OUT (Relay output) detailed settings].
2 On the configuration screen, register [EDM input] for terminal assignment.
3 On the program screen, connect the ports between the "EDM input" input block and the "S-OUT" (EDM1) output
block.
A
Appendix
"EDM input" EDM1
A-92 GC Series User's Manual
A-3 Output Device List
Procedure for using the reset input or error reset input
To use the reset input or error reset input, configure the settings as follows:
1 Select the [Use reset input] (Use error reset input) check box in [S-OUT (Relay output) detailed settings].
2 On the configuration screen, register [Reset switch]* for terminal assignment.
* Select an input device according to your environment.
3 On the program screen, connect the ports between the "Reset switch" input block and the "S-OUT" (Reset)
output block.
"Reset switch" Reset
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-93
A-3 Output Device List
AUX-OUT
Overview
This output block is used as the AUX output to an external device.
Connection
Compatible destinations and selectable input logics
Connection destination
Connection type
Terminal block GC-R45 GC-R48
AUX outputs --
GC Configurator detailed settings
There are no configurable items on the [AUX-OUT detailed settings] screen.
[Default settings]
In
A
Appendix
A-94 GC Series User's Manual
A-4 Open License
SYS/BIOS License
Copyright (c) 2012-2015, Texas Instruments Incorporated
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
NDK License
Copyright (c) 2012-2015, Texas Instruments Incorporated
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-95
A-5 Trademarks
• Windows XP/7/8/8.1/10/11 are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, U.S.A.
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, and Reader are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe System Incorporated in the
United States and other countries.
• EtherNet/IP is a trademark of ODVA, Inc.
• Other company or product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies. The following marks are not used in this manual: TM, ®
A
Appendix
A-96 GC Series User's Manual
A-6 Revision history
Print of printing Version Revision contents
September 2020 1st edition
September 2021 Revised 2nd edition Misdescription revised
August 2022 Revised 3rd edition The GS-M series added, misdescription revised
January 2024 Revised 4th edition Misdescription revised
Document Control No. 1404AAE205-03
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-97
A-7 Warranty
1. Products Under Warranty
The following warranty shall be applied to the products that KEYENCE manufacture and sell (covered products).
Note that the consumables that are built-in to the target products, such as relays and batteries, are not covered by the
warranty.
2. Warranty Period
The warranty period for the covered products shall be one year after delivery.
3. Scope of the Warranty
(1) If a failure occurs in the above warranty period that we are liable for, replacements or repairs shall be free of charge.
However, the warranty is not applicable in the following cases even during the warranty period. Note that the start of
the warranty shall be the first delivery date of the product even if the product was replaced or repaired.
(1) Failures that were caused by improper conditions, environment, handling, and use that are not described in
manuals and specifications provided separately.
(2) Failures that were caused not by the products but by customer devices or software settings.
(3) Failures that were caused by remodeling or repair performed by other parties.
(4) Failures that could have been prevented if consumables described in the manuals were correctly maintained and
replaced.
(5) Failures that were impossible to foresee by our scientific and technical standards at the time of shipping.
(6) Failures that were caused by external factors for which we are not liable, such as fires, earthquakes, and floods.
(2) The warranty range shall only be applied to (1) above, and secondary damage and any other damage caused by
customers that might damage products (damage to devices, opportunity cost, and lost profits), and any other
damages are outside of the scope of the warranty.
4. Applications
Our products are designed and manufactured as general-purpose products for general industry.
Our products are not intended to be used for the following purposes.
However, if you contact us before use, review the specifications of products, understand the standards and
performances, and take the necessary safety precautions at your own risk, our products may be used for those
applications.
Note that the scope of warranty in this case shall be the same as above.
(1) Equipment that may have a great impact on people's lives or property, such as nuclear power plants, aviation,
railroads, marine vessels, vehicles, and medical devices.
(2) Public utilities, such as electricity, gas, and water.
(3) Use in conditions and environments, such as outdoors, that are not described in the manual.
(4) Uses that require a high level of care and caution for the safety of (1) and (2) above.
A
Appendix
J1040-1
A-98 GC Series User's Manual
MEMO
A
Appendix
GC Series User's Manual A-99
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
KEYENCE CORPORATION
1-3-14, Higashi-Nakajima, Higashi-Yodogawa-ku, Osaka, 533-8555, Japan PHONE: +81-6-6379-2211 www.keyence.com/glb
AUSTRIA FRANCE ITALY POLAND TAIWAN
Phone: +43 (0)2236 378266 0 Phone: +33 1 56 37 78 00 Phone: +39-02-6688220 Phone: +48 71 368 61 60 Phone: +886-2-2721-1080
BELGIUM GERMANY KOREA ROMANIA THAILAND
Phone: +32 (0)15 281 222 Phone: +49-6102-3656-0 Phone: +82-31-789-4300 Phone: +40 (0)269 232 808 Phone: +66-2-078-1090
BRAZIL HONG KONG MALAYSIA SINGAPORE UK & IRELAND
Phone: +55-11-3045-4011 Phone: +852-3104-1010 Phone: +60-3-7883-2211 Phone: +65-6392-1011 Phone: +44 (0)1908-696-900
CANADA HUNGARY MEXICO SLOVAKIA USA
Phone: +1-905-366-7655 Phone: +36 1 802 7360 Phone: +52-55-8850-0100 Phone: +421 (0)2 5939 6461 Phone: +1-201-930-0100
CHINA INDIA NETHERLANDS SLOVENIA VIETNAM
Phone: +86-21-3357-1001 Phone: +91-44-4963-0900 Phone: +31 (0)40 206 6100 Phone: +386 (0)1 4701 666 Phone: +84-24-3772-5555
CZECH REPUBLIC INDONESIA PHILIPPINES SWITZERLAND
Phone: +420 220 184 700 Phone: +62-21-2966-0120 Phone: +63-(0)2-8981-5000 Phone: +41 (0)43 455 77 30
A4WW1-MAN-2033
Copyright (c) 2020 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 269010GB 2014-4 A47GB Printed in Japan
Common questions
Powered by AIUsing the GC-Link port for connecting KEYENCE safety sensors presents significant advantages by reducing wiring complexity and ensuring a high level of integration and communication. The dedicated connection simplifies setup, lowers installation time, and offers robust data transmission between the main controller and sensors, which improves operational efficiency .
The GC Series handles various safety and input devices by supporting multiple types of connections, such as contact, PNP, and advanced configurations like 2 inputs and 2 test outputs. It accommodates various safety devices, including emergency stop switches, safety mats, light curtains, and laser scanners, adjusting the connectivity and functionality settings based on the specific device type .
The discrepancy time setting in the GC Series enhances safety functions by enabling the detection of mismatches between expected and actual device behavior over a set period. Users can configure the detection time in seconds or milliseconds, improving the system's responsiveness to inconsistencies or potential errors, thereby enhancing overall safety reliability .
The simulation function in the GC Series enhances the debugging process by allowing users to verify the created program without needing physical signals from the input devices. This means debugging can be performed in a virtual environment, enabling thorough testing and modification of the program as necessary before actual deployment .
Remote I/O modules significantly enhance the installation flexibility of the GC Series by allowing devices to connect outside of the main panel, accommodating different environmental requirements. The models, such as the GC-R45 and GC-R48, offer different connection options (M12 5-pin and 8-pin) and are rated IP65/IP67, indicating their resilience to harsh conditions, thus expanding the potential installation scenarios .
Safety sensors can be connected to the GC Series main controller through several options such as the GC-Link port, terminal blocks, and remote I/O modules (M12 5-pin or 8-pin connectors). Each of these methods provides different features and installation complexities to accommodate specific system requirements .
The GC Series ensures safety during abnormal conditions by using the GC Configurator's monitoring and history functions to diagnose and investigate the causes of any anomalies. Additionally, the LCD display of the GC Series main controller provides visual feedback for status assessments, making it easier to perform necessary troubleshooting .
The GC Series offers two primary programming modes: "EASY mode" and "Standard mode". EASY mode allows for quick and easy programming by simply selecting an application and registering the input devices. Standard mode, on the other hand, creates opportunities for unique customization using function blocks, which allows for more tailored applications .
The GC Series provides security measures for program transfer through the use of login authentication and access privileges. Passwords can be set to ensure that only authorized personnel can transfer or modify the program, thereby preventing unauthorized access and potential tampering with the GC Series main controller .
The EtherNet/IP™ Communication Function in the GC Series provides functionalities like assigning output statuses for safety outputs, handling errors, and performing resets. It also communicates states such as error and diagnostic information for different output devices, facilitating real-time system monitoring and making adjustments necessary for continuous operation .
You might also like
- Cacr SR 20BF1BFB Servopack H Yaskawa Manual100% (1)Cacr SR 20BF1BFB Servopack H Yaskawa Manual59 pages
- PYX Fuzzy Controller Installation GuideNo ratings yetPYX Fuzzy Controller Installation Guide98 pages
- DAIKIN Oil Cooling Unit ("OILCON") : Instruction ManualNo ratings yetDAIKIN Oil Cooling Unit ("OILCON") : Instruction Manual48 pages
- GE Fanuc Automation: Series 0i-Model B Series 0i-Mate Model BNo ratings yetGE Fanuc Automation: Series 0i-Model B Series 0i-Mate Model B712 pages
- A06B 0123 B575#7000 α33000 SERVO MOTOR FANUC MANUALNo ratings yetA06B 0123 B575#7000 α33000 SERVO MOTOR FANUC MANUAL209 pages
- DNC / File Transfer Settings For Fanuc 21im: Set The Following Parameters On The Machine: Parameter ValueNo ratings yetDNC / File Transfer Settings For Fanuc 21im: Set The Following Parameters On The Machine: Parameter Value3 pages
- Hitachi - Remote Controller - Rar 6n1 2No ratings yetHitachi - Remote Controller - Rar 6n1 266 pages
- User Manual: Szgh-Cnc1500Mdc Milling Control System - Operation-V3.0No ratings yetUser Manual: Szgh-Cnc1500Mdc Milling Control System - Operation-V3.096 pages
- GSK218MC CNC Milling Controller Connectiong and Installation Manual100% (1)GSK218MC CNC Milling Controller Connectiong and Installation Manual276 pages
- MTS30R4-42 Servo Dynamics DC Servo Motor - RoundNo ratings yetMTS30R4-42 Servo Dynamics DC Servo Motor - Round1 page
- Linear Scale Interface With SDU (Serial Type) 0i-FNo ratings yetLinear Scale Interface With SDU (Serial Type) 0i-F4 pages
- Axor Axor: MASTERSPEED Service Manual MASTERSPEED Service ManualNo ratings yetAxor Axor: MASTERSPEED Service Manual MASTERSPEED Service Manual18 pages
- Alpha Series Control Motor Maint Manual B-65165eNo ratings yetAlpha Series Control Motor Maint Manual B-65165e129 pages
- GE Fanuc Automation: Computer Numerical Control ProductsNo ratings yetGE Fanuc Automation: Computer Numerical Control Products170 pages
- 1000TC CNC System Editing and Operation ManualNo ratings yet1000TC CNC System Editing and Operation Manual46 pages
- DEALOUR DO-13ic and DO-83ic Absolute Value Series Servo Drive Manual V022400 EnglishNo ratings yetDEALOUR DO-13ic and DO-83ic Absolute Value Series Servo Drive Manual V022400 English108 pages
- GC Series Expansoin Unit GC-S84 Instruction ManuaNo ratings yetGC Series Expansoin Unit GC-S84 Instruction Manua6 pages
- A1SJ71QC24 (N) - R2 (R4) - User's Manual IB (NA) - 66612-K (04.11)No ratings yetA1SJ71QC24 (N) - R2 (R4) - User's Manual IB (NA) - 66612-K (04.11)814 pages
- 7 Days of Breakthrough & Restoration - Shady Grove100% (1)7 Days of Breakthrough & Restoration - Shady Grove13 pages
- Seminar Topics in Electrical EngineeringNo ratings yetSeminar Topics in Electrical Engineering25 pages
- Ref Ebn MFL71728004 02 230317 00 Om WebNo ratings yetRef Ebn MFL71728004 02 230317 00 Om Web40 pages
- FDA Warning Letters June 2024 1719480530No ratings yetFDA Warning Letters June 2024 17194805302 pages
- Local Athletes Shine in Collegiate SportsNo ratings yetLocal Athletes Shine in Collegiate Sports1 page
- A Hybrid CNN-Transformer Architecture For Precise Medical Image SegmentationNo ratings yetA Hybrid CNN-Transformer Architecture For Precise Medical Image Segmentation13 pages
- CA Inter Tax A MTP 2 May 2025 Exam Castudynotes ComNo ratings yetCA Inter Tax A MTP 2 May 2025 Exam Castudynotes Com16 pages
